JP7087297B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, various production images are displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game. Further, in order to further improve the interest of the game, there is a tendency that the effect images displayed on the display device are diversified.

Therefore, in recent years, it has been configured so that a player can be presented with a plurality of selection candidates, the player can select the selection candidate, and the game can be executed based on an effect corresponding to the selection candidate selected by the player. There is a game machine that has been used (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-070451

However, with conventional gaming machines, there is a risk that the game will be overwhelming , and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of allowing a player to enjoy the production .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a first control means for controlling the game, a second control means for controlling based on an instruction from the first control means, and the second control means. A gaming machine comprising an effect executing means for causing an effect means to execute a predetermined display based on control by the control means, wherein the first control means is performed by a first process relating to the predetermined display of the effect means. The first instruction generating means for generating the first instruction information , which is a kind of instruction information regarding the predetermined display executed by the staging means, and the second process different from the first process, the said staging means. The second control means includes a second instruction generation means for generating a second instruction information which is a kind of instruction information regarding a predetermined display, and a transmission means for transmitting the instruction information to the second control means. When the second instruction information is received in a specific period which is a part of the predetermined display, a state in which the display content displayed by the second instruction information is not reflected in the predetermined display is generated. The state generating means and the first executing means for executing display control based on the first instruction information even in the specific state when the first instruction information is received in the specific state by the state generating means. And, when the predetermined execution condition is satisfied after the start of the control based on the first instruction information by the first execution means, the second execution means capable of executing the display control corresponding to the second instruction information. When a plurality of the first instruction information is received in a predetermined period, display control based on the first instruction information of 1 is executed according to a predetermined execution rule among the plurality of the first instruction information received in the predetermined period. It is provided with a third execution means.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the first control means for controlling the game, the second control means for controlling based on the instruction from the first control means, and the control by the second control means. A gaming machine comprising an effect executing means for causing the effect means to execute a predetermined display based on the effect means, wherein the first control means is the effect means by a first process relating to the predetermined display of the effect means. An instruction regarding the predetermined display of the staging means by a first instruction generation means for generating a first instruction information which is a kind of instruction information regarding the predetermined display to be executed and a second process different from the first process. The second control means includes a second instruction generation means for generating a second instruction information which is a kind of information and a transmission means for transmitting the instruction information to the second control means, and the second control means is in the predetermined display. A state generating means for generating a specific state in which the display content displayed by the second instruction information is not reflected in the predetermined display when the second instruction information is received in a specific period which is a part of the period . A first executing means that executes display control based on the first instruction information even in the specific state when the first instruction information is received in the specific state by the state generation means, and the first. A second execution means capable of executing display control corresponding to the second instruction information and the first instruction when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied after the start of control based on the first instruction information by the execution means. When a plurality of information is received in a predetermined period, a third execution means for executing display control based on the first instruction information of 1 among the plurality of first instruction information received in the predetermined period according to a predetermined execution rule. And have. This has the effect that the gaming machine can perform an effect based on the player's intention.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (A) is a diagram illustrating the "music selection" effect in which the music selection screen in which "music AAA" is selected in the third symbol display device appears during the jackpot state, and (b) is (b). It is a figure which exemplifies the "music selection" effect which appeared the music selection screen which changed the selection target and selected "music BBB" from the state of a). It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which showed the structure of various counters, the holding ball storage area, and the holding ball execution area schematically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot random number table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table. It is a figure which showed the example of the hold number table schematically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the A table of the stop pattern table, (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the B table of the stop pattern table, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the B table of the stop pattern table. , Is a diagram schematically showing an example of the C table of the stop pattern table, and (d) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the D table of the stop pattern table. It is a figure which showed the example of the variation pattern table for big hits (for probable variable big hits) schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the variation pattern table for a big hit (normally for a big hit) schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the variation pattern table for loss schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the jackpot control table schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the big prize opening opening / closing table schematically. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the electric structure of a voice lamp control device. It is a figure which showed the example of the music table schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the promotion lottery table in a round schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the promotion effect table schematically. It is a figure which showed schematically the structure of the hold information storage area and the execution information storage area. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the electrical structure of a display control device. It is a figure which showed the example of the display data table schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the additional data table schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the opening / closing control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the display side command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the promotion effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the round promotion setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the demo command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the variation effect system command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the confirmation command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. , (C) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the button system command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot system command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the opening display process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the open display process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the big prize display process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the ending display process executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. (A) is a flowchart showing the promotion effect display process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the music selection display process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the hold image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) shows the prize ball number image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a timing display diagram schematically showing an example of command transmission / reception between a main control device, a voice lamp control device, a display control device, and a third symbol display device and processing contents in each device. It is a timing display diagram schematically showing an example of command transmission / reception between a main control device, a voice lamp control device, a display control device, and a third symbol display device and processing contents in each device. It is a timing display diagram schematically showing an example of command transmission / reception between a main control device, a voice lamp control device, a display control device, and a third symbol display device and processing contents in each device. It is a timing display diagram schematically showing an example of command transmission / reception between a main control device, a voice lamp control device, a display control device, and a third symbol display device and processing contents in each device.

<The present embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 67, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings (entrance openings) 63, 64, 65a, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) by the inclination. Further, a frame button device 22 having a decision button 22a and a change button 22b is provided on the front side of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the side surface.

The determination button 22a provided on the frame button device 22 is configured in a horizontally long elliptical shape in the central portion of the upper plate 17 in the front view of the pachinko machine 10. The decision button 22a is a notice executed in the variation display of the third symbol (hereinafter, the variation display of the third symbol is referred to as "variation effect") displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later. This button is pressed by the player when the display is determined (preliminary selection effect) or when the music or the like to be played at the time of a big hit generated based on the variation result of the variation effect is determined (selected). That is, when the determination button 22a is pressed by the player during the effect selection period or the music selection period (during the “music selection” effect) of the third symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is currently the third. 3 The symbol display device 81 recognizes that the selected object being selected and displayed has been selected by the player, and is configured to execute the effect based on the selected object in the subsequent effect by the third symbol display device 81 or the like. There is.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 10, in the first round of a predetermined jackpot (“15R probability variation jackpot” or “15R normal jackpot”), a music effect (hereinafter referred to as “1”) that is reproduced and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot. It is configured to execute a selection effect (hereinafter referred to as "music selection" effect) in which the player selects the "music reproduction" effect). The details of the "music reproduction" effect and the "music selection" effect will be described later in FIG.

When the player presses the determination button 22a other than during the above-mentioned "music selection" effect or the advance notice selection effect, the determination button 22a is configured not to perform any determination effect based on the pressing operation. .. That is, the operation of the decision button 22a in the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, is invalidated except during the "music selection" effect or the advance notice selection effect.

It should be noted that the display content of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, may be changed based on the pressing operation of the decision button 22a during the "music selection" effect or the advance notice selection effect. good. Specifically, for example, when the decision button 22a is operated other than during the advance notice selection effect during the variable effect, the third symbol display device 81 is made to display a mini character or the like, and the player presses the decision button 22a. It may be configured to perform an action-based effect.

The change button 22b provided on the frame button device 22 is arranged on the left side of the decision button 22a in the front view of the pachinko machine 10, and is true in size smaller than the size of the decision button 22a (for example, about half the size of the decision button 22a). It is configured in a circular shape. This configures the difference between the decision button 22a and the change button 22b in an easy-to-understand manner, and since the operation of the decision button 22a is more important for the player than the change button 22b, a mistake in pressing the decision button 22a occurs. This is to prevent it.

Specifically, the decision button 22a is a button used to "decide" the player's intention, while the change button 22b is a button used to "change" the player's intention. Therefore, when the change button 22b is pressed, the player's intention can be changed again during the selection effect. However, when the decision button 22a is pressed even once, the player can change the intention. It is considered that the intention of the player has been decided, and the selection effect is completed, and the player's intention cannot be changed thereafter. Therefore, by making the decision button 22a larger than the change button 22b, it is easy for the player to clearly recognize the existence of the decision button 22a, which is important for reflecting the player's intention on the pachinko machine 10, and the decision button is made. It is configured to prevent the pressing operation error of 22a from occurring.

The change button 22b includes a stage of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, and a selection target of the music displayed on the screen at the time of a big hit generated based on the variable effect. This is a button that is pressed and operated by the player when changing to the selection target of. That is, when the change button 22b is pressed and operated by the player during the effect selection period or the music selection period (during the "music selection" effect) in the third symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is currently the third. 3 Recognizing that the selection target (for example, "music AAA") being selected and displayed on the symbol display device 81 is changed to another selection mode (for example, "music BBB"), the third symbol display device 81 selects. It is configured to change the displayed selection target to another selection target.

The variable effect is an effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later, and as described later, a ball fired in the front area of the game board 13 is a specific winning opening (see FIG. 2). It is executed when the ball is entered (starting prize) into the first ball entry port 64, which will be described later, and the symbol (third symbol described later) is changed for a predetermined time, and then the symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a production that presents the result (whether or not it is a big hit) of the lottery performed for the start winning prize to the player by the combination of.

The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, are unified. In the pachinko machine 10, the “city stage” and “sky” are used. There are three stages, "Stage" and "Island Stage". The above-mentioned variable effects and various effects such as "reach display" executed during the variable effects are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage.

Further, the "reach display" refers to a display one step before the "big hit display" indicating that a big hit occurs in the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later. .. Specifically, the third symbol of the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 4), which will be described later, stops at the same symbol, and the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 4) does not stop yet and continues to fluctuate. It means the state of being.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the "reach display" is roughly divided into one unit element constituting the "normal reach" effect (hereinafter, one unit element constituting the effect is referred to as a "variable element"). It is executed by developing from the variable element of the "normal reach", and is executed by developing from the variable element of "super reach" which has a higher expectation of big hit than the variable element of the "normal reach" and the variable element of the same "normal reach". There is a variable element of "special reach" that has a higher expectation of big hit than the variable element of "super reach". Details of each "reach display" and variable elements will be described later.

The change of the stage is performed during the period when the fluctuation effect is not performed (that is, during the demo display), or during the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" in which the third symbol is changed at high speed invisible to the player in the variation effect. This is performed when the change button 22b of the frame button device 22 is pressed by the player. Then, each time the change button 22b is operated, the change is repeated in the order of "city stage"-> "empty stage"-> "island stage"-> "city stage"->. Immediately after the power is turned on, the "city stage" is set as the initial stage.

In the pachinko machine 10, the music selection screen at the time of a big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, except during the demo display or during the “high-speed fluctuation” of the fluctuation effect. When the change button 22b is pressed in the state, the stage is not changed, and the selection effect based on the content displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is executed. That is, the stage change is configured so that when the selection effect during the variable effect or the selection effect during the jackpot state is executed, the selection effect is prioritized.

Further, when the variable element of "normal reach" is started in the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later, the variable element of "normal reach" is changed to the variable element of "super reach". When the variable element of "special reach" is developed, the selection screen of the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variable element of "normal reach". It may be configured as follows.

Specifically, on the selection screen, a plurality of selection targets that can be selected as a variable element of "super reach" or a variable element of "special reach" are displayed, and while the selection screen is displayed, the change button 22b is displayed. Is configured to change the selected candidate when pressed by the player. Then, when developing into a variable element of "super reach" or a variable element of "special reach", when the decision button 22a is pressed before the development timing, or when the decision button 22a is not pressed and the development timing is reached. When is reached, the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" is determined based on the selection target selected on the screen, and the variable element of "super reach" is determined according to the determination. The variable element of "special reach" is executed by the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot occurs based on the variation result of the variation effect, the player can select the effect based on the music to be played during the jackpot. Specifically, at the start of the jackpot, the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, displays a “music selection” effect in which a plurality of reproducible songs are displayed during the jackpot. Then, based on the player's pressing operation of the decision button 22a or the change button 22b during this "music selection" production, the music production executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot and the music output device 226 described later are performed. The music output from (see FIG. 6) (hereinafter, the music production by the third symbol display device 81 and the output of the music by the audio output device 226 may be collectively referred to as a "music reproduction" production). It is configured to be determined.

In this way, by configuring the music output (playing) during the jackpot to be selectable based on the player's intention at the time of the jackpot, the player's preference for the jackpot is a blissful state in the game. It is possible to further enhance the interest of the game by executing the "music reproduction" production according to the player and giving the player an interest different from the game value.

In the present embodiment, the decision button 22a and the change button 22b of the frame button device 22 are configured as buttons to be pressed, but instead of the decision button 22a and the change button 22b, the player may use the pachinko machine 10 as a button. It may be configured by an operation lever that can be tilted in a predetermined direction (for example, forward, backward, right and left with respect to the pachinko machine 10). Then, the effect stage may be selected and changed, or the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" may be determined based on the direction in which the operation lever is tilted.

Further, the frame button device 22 having the decision button 22a and the change button 22b is configured to be arranged on the front side side view of the upper plate 17, but the arrangement position of the frame button device 22 can be pressed by the player. Any arrangement position may be used, for example, it may be arranged on the upper surface side of the upper plate 17, or may be arranged in the vicinity (upper surface or side surface) of the lower plate 50 described later.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined "reach display", and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, lighting portions 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as a light emitting diode (Light Emitting Diode; hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) are provided. ..

In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and at the time of jackpot or "reach display", the built-in LEDs are lit or blinked to cause each illumination portion 29 to 33. Lights up or flashes to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the "reach display" just before the jackpot is in progress. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 in front view, a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2). ) Is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (Acrylonitrile Butadiene Style) in which the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33 is chrome-plated in order to bring out more brilliance, hereinafter abbreviated as “ABS”. .) A resin plating member 36 is attached.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit, not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit.

A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6). The touch sensor 51a for permitting the drive of the operation handle 51, the push button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) to detect.

When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, which changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. It is configured by assembling a ball entry port 64, a variable winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and a peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by such as. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the fired ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base between the lower right tip portion of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip portion of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

A first symbol display device 37 provided with a plurality of LEDs 37a as light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37b is arranged on the upper right side of the front view (upper right side of FIG. 2) of the game area. The first symbol display device 37 is a variable display of the first symbol according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 6) described later (hereinafter, the variable display of the first symbol is referred to as “dynamic display”). The game status of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly displayed.

The plurality of LEDs 37a perform dynamic display by indicating by the lighting state whether or not the ball is changing due to the entry into the first ball entry port 64 (starting winning), or after the dynamic display ends. As a stop symbol of, a symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery performed for the start winning is shown by a lighting state, or a ball that has not been dynamically displayed among the balls entered in the first entry opening 64. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b displays the number and error display of the number of rounds during the jackpot (hereinafter, the "round" during the jackpot may be simply expressed as "R" from the initial letter of the English notation "Round" of the round). It is something to do. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In the pachinko machine 10, the hit / fail determination (big hit lottery) is performed for the ball entering the first ball entry port 64, and if it is determined to be a big hit, the jackpot type is also determined. As the jackpot type determined here, "15R probability variation jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot", "15R (substantially 13R) probability variation jackpot", and "15R normal jackpot" are prepared.

The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation executed when the ball enters the first entry port 64, but also when it is a jackpot. Is shown according to the type of jackpot.

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "2R probability variation jackpot" is a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot. Further, the "15R (substantially 13R) probability variation jackpot" has a maximum number of rounds of 15, but the 1st and 2nd rounds are 3 rounds or more after opening and closing in the same opening / closing pattern as the above "2R probability variation jackpot". The 15th round is a probability variation jackpot that opens and closes in the same opening / closing pattern as the above-mentioned "15R probability variation jackpot" and shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot. Further, the "15R normal jackpot" shifts to the "time shortened state" after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and becomes the "time shortened state" during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). It's a big hit.

Further, the same effect is executed for the 1st and 2nd rounds of the "15R (substantially 13R) probability variation jackpot" and the 1st and 2nd round effects of the "2R probability variation jackpot" in the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to. Therefore, the player cannot distinguish between "15R (substantial 13R) probability variation jackpot" and "2R probability variation jackpot" at the time of the first and second rounds of "15R (substantial 13R) probability variation jackpot". Therefore, at the early stage (1st round and 2nd round) of "15R (actual 13R) probability variation jackpot", the player should distinguish between "2R probability variation jackpot" and "15R (substantial 13R) probability variation jackpot". The 2nd round of "15R (actual 13R) probability variation jackpot" is completed and the 3rd round is started, so that the jackpot is recognized as "15R (actual 13R) probability variation jackpot". .. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a hobby based on the playability of whether or not the obtained game value is increased.

The "probability fluctuation state" is a high-probability state in which the probability of a big hit is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, a state during a so-called probability change, in other words, a state of a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. be. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change, probabilistic change state) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64.

On the other hand, the "normal game state" refers to a time of a low probability state that is not a "probability fluctuation state" or a "time reduction state", and the jackpot probability is higher than that of a normal state, that is, a "probability fluctuation state". Is low. In addition, the "time reduction state (so-called time reduction state)" is a low probability state in which the jackpot probability is the same as in the "normal game state", and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to the first ball entrance. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball easily enters 64.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the opening / closing patterns of the 1st round and the 2nd round in the "2R probability variation jackpot" and the "15R (substantially 13R) probability variation jackpot" are the 1st to 15th rounds of the "15R probability variation jackpot" and the "15R normal jackpot". It is configured to be different from the opening and closing patterns of 1 round to 15 rounds of "" and 3 to 15 rounds of "15R (substantially 13R) probability variation jackpot". Specifically, the opening and closing patterns of the 1st and 2nd rounds in "2R probability variation jackpot" and "15R (actual 13R) probability variation jackpot" are "15R probability variation jackpot", "15R normal jackpot" and "15R (substantial 13R) probability variation". It is configured to be executed with an opening pattern (short opening pattern) that closes in a shorter opening time than the opening and closing pattern (long opening pattern) of 3 to 15 rounds of "big hit", and the specific opening time etc. It will be described in detail in FIG.

Instead of changing the hit probability of the second symbol, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time for the electric accessory attached to the first ball entry port 64 to open, or the electric accessory per hit. May change the number of times it is opened. Specifically, in the "time shortened state", the opening time of the electric accessory attached to the first ball entry port 64 may be longer than in the cases other than the "time shortened state", or the electric accessory may be used once. The number of times the object is opened may be increased more than in the case other than the "time reduction state". In addition, in the "time shortened state", at least two of increasing the hit probability of the second symbol, lengthening the opening time of the electric accessory, and increasing the number of times of opening the electric accessory are performed at the same time. You may do it.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is a liquid crystal display that performs a variation effect of the third symbol while synchronizing with the dynamic display in the first symbol display device 37, triggered by the entry of a ball into the first entry port 64 (starting prize). The second symbol is variably displayed (hereinafter, variability of the second symbol) triggered by the passage of a ball of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") and a ball of a second entry port 67. A second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs for displaying (referred to as "variable display") is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 17-inch size liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 6) described later, for example, left, middle, and right. Three symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) are displayed.

Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row Z1 to Z3 to display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is designed to be displayed variably. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. It is a decorative display according to the situation. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. Further, FIG. 5A is a diagram illustrating the “music selection” effect in which the music selection screen in which “music AAA” is selected and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 appears during the jackpot state. FIG. 5B is a diagram illustrating a "musical piece selection" effect in which the selection target is changed from the state of FIG. 5A and the music selection screen in which "musical piece BBB" is selected and displayed appears. be.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which odd numbers ("1", "3", "5", "7", The main design with "9") has a large number added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main design with even numbers ("0", "2", "4", "6", "8") is a character such as a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. that almost fills the front of the wooden box. An attached symbol that imitates is added, and an even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 6) described later is a big hit, a variable effect in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the variable effect is performed. It is configured to generate a jackpot after it is over. When the game shifts to the "probability fluctuation state (probability change state)" after the jackpot ends and a jackpot of up to 15 rounds is given, a fluctuation effect in which the main symbols with odd numbers (corresponding to the "high probability symbol") are aligned is displayed. Will be done. Similarly, after the end of the jackpot, the game shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" and the jackpot is up to 2 rounds, or the maximum is 15 rounds. When a certain jackpot ("15R (substantially 13R) probability variable jackpot") is given, a variable effect in which the main symbols (corresponding to the so-called "probability symbol") of a specific combination of symbol numbers (for example, "341") are aligned is produced. Will be done. On the other hand, in the case of shifting to the "time reduction state (time reduction state)" after the end of the big hit, a variable effect is performed in which the main symbols with even numbers added (corresponding to the "low probability symbol") are aligned.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is varied and produced, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, and the like. Further, a cockpit display area Db for displaying the number of reserved balls and the like is provided in the central portion on the lower bottom side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right. The left symbol column Z1 is displayed in the display area Dm1, and the middle symbol column Z2 is displayed in the display area Dm2. The right symbol column Z3 is displayed in the display area Dm3.

In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending order (or descending order) of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variation effect is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3, the arrangement of numbers may be different from each other. For example, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols may be arranged so as to appear in descending order, while in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols may be arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol is placed on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each variation effect. Stop is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols; hereinafter referred to as "big hit display") is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. The small areas Ds1 to Ds3 are areas for displaying characters and preview effect images, respectively. The images displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 give the player a feeling of expectation that will be a big hit as a result of the variation effect performed in the main display area Dm. The cockpit display area Db includes a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) for which the variable effect has not been executed among the balls entered in the first entry port 64, and the variable effect being executed. It is an area to display the execution symbol related to.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, in the left small area Ds1, a moving image such as the appearance of a notice symbol is displayed, and the variation effect performed in the main display area Dm is in a state where it is easier to transition to a jackpot than usual. Suggested to the player.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, in the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in the present embodiment) normally performs a predetermined operation, and is based on a variation effect performed in the main display area Dm. There is a notice effect such as performing a special action different from the predetermined action, changing the color of the hair of a boy who is usually black, the color of a bee which is usually white, or the appearance of another character. Will be done.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, in the right small area Ds3, a level meter (not shown) that gradually suggests whether or not a big hit occurs in the fluctuation effect performed in the main display area Dm appears. Is displayed. This level meter increases (adds) each time the expectation of occurrence of "reach display" and the expectation of big hit in the running fluctuation effect increases based on the appearance of the notice symbol etc. in the variation effect. It is configured to suggest that the jackpot is confirmed when the display limit (MAX display) of the level meter is reached. Therefore, the sub-display area Ds has a function of suggesting the occurrence of "reach display" in the main display area Dm.

On the other hand, when a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the variation effect (dynamic display) is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball enters the ball. (Number of reserved balls) is reserved up to 4 times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and when the cockpit display area Db is displayed, the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4 provided in the cockpit display area Db are displayed. Even if it is shown. In the 1st to 4th reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, one reserved symbol (“○” symbol (white circle symbol) in the normal display mode) is displayed for each reserved ball (1 reserved ball). , The number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of reserved symbols displayed in the reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4.

That is, in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, when one reserved symbol is displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and the first -When a total of two reserved symbols are displayed, one in each of the second reserved symbol display area Db1 and Db2, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is two times, and the first to third reserved symbol display areas Db1 When a total of three reserved symbols are displayed in each of ~ Db3, it means that the number of reserved balls is three times, and one in each of the first to fourth reserved symbols display areas Db1 to Db4. When four reserved symbols are displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is four. Further, when the reserved symbols are not displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0 and there is no reserved variable effect.

Further, the cockpit display area Db is provided with an execution symbol display area Db0 in which an execution symbol indicating that the variation effect is executed in the main display area Dm is displayed. The execution symbol display area Db0 is provided on the left side of the first reserved symbol display area Db1, and is configured to be larger than the reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4. Further, in the execution symbol display area Db0, the reserved symbol displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1 is moved (shifted) and displayed as an execution symbol.

The execution symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db is deleted when the variation effect is completed, and as the execution symbol is deleted, the displayed reserved symbol is moved and displayed as a lower (left) reserved symbol. To. Specifically, when the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is deleted with the end of the variation effect, and when the reservation symbol is displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1, the execution symbol is displayed. It is moved (shifted) and displayed as an execution symbol in the area Db0. Further, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the second reserved symbol display area Db2, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the first reserved symbol display area Db1. Further, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the third reserved symbol display area Db3, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the second reserved symbol display area Db2. Further, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the 4th reserved symbol display area Db4, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the 3rd reserved symbol display area Db3.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the execution symbol is continuously displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 while the variation effect is executed in the main display area Dm (in the variation element of "super reach" or in the "special reach". Except in variable factors). On the other hand, when the variation effect is completed, or when the variation element of "super reach" or the variation element of "special reach" is being executed, the execution symbol is configured to be deleted. That is, when the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, it indicates that the variation effect is being executed (continued) in the main display area Dm, and the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0. If not, it indicates that the variation effect is not executed (is not continued) in the main display area Dm, or the variation element of "super reach" or the variation element of "special reach" is executed.

Further, in the cockpit display area Db, the "hold change notice" can be executed by using the hold symbol and the execution symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db. This "pending change notice" is to change the display color of the reserved symbol and the executed symbol in a plurality of stages from before the execution of the variable effect to during the execution of the jackpot expectation of the variable effect executed in the main display area Dm. It is a notice suggested by.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a "holding change notice", the display color of the holding symbol and the execution symbol is changed from the normal display mode "white" to the blue display mode "blue" and the red display mode. It is configured to be changeable to "red" or "rainbow color" in the display mode of rainbow color. This pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the selection ratios of the display colors of the reserved symbol and the executed symbol are different when the "big hit display" occurs in the variable effect or when the "reach display" occurs. By changing the display color of the reserved symbol and the executed symbol from the normal display mode (“white”) to another display mode (for example, “blue”), “in the variation effect indicated by the reserved symbol and the executed symbol”. It is possible to suggest to the player the possibility that "reach display" or "big hit display" may occur for each display color.

Specifically, in the "holding change notice", when the holding symbol and the execution symbol are in the "blue" display mode rather than the normal display mode ("white"), the variation indicated by the hold symbol and the execution symbol. In the production, the ratio of "reach display" and "big hit display" is set high. In addition, when the reserved symbol and the executed symbol have a display mode of "red" rather than "blue", the ratio of "reach display" or "big hit display" in the variable effect indicated by the reserved symbol and the executed symbol is higher. Set. Furthermore, when the reserved symbol and the executed symbol have a display mode of "rainbow color" rather than "red", the ratio of "reach display" or "big hit display" in the variable effect indicated by the reserved symbol and the executed symbol is higher. Set high.

In addition, when the display mode of the reserved symbol and the executed symbol is "red", the mode of the staging mainly "super reach" in the variable effect indicated by the reserved symbol or the executed symbol of the "red" (mainly). The mode of production is referred to as "directing mode"), "special reach" production mode or "special variation" production mode (hereinafter, "super reach" production mode, "special reach" production mode or "special variation" production mode. It is set so that the execution of (sometimes collectively referred to as "super reach or higher" production mode) is confirmed. Further, when the display mode of the reserved symbol and the executed symbol is "rainbow color", the appearance of the "big hit display" is set to be confirmed in the variable effect indicated by the reserved symbol or the executed symbol of the "rainbow color". Has been done. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the reserved symbol and the executed symbol is "reach display" or "big hit display" in the order of normal ("white")-> "blue"-> "red"-> "rainbow color". It is set so that the degree of expectation of appearance is high.

It should be noted that the display mode of the "rainbow color" of the "pending change notice" is set so that it does not appear in the reserved symbol but can appear only in the executed symbol. This is because if the reserved symbol is not executed due to some abnormality (for example, power off) after the display mode of "rainbow color" in which the occurrence of the jackpot is confirmed in the reserved symbol is displayed, the player can obtain it. Dissatisfaction will occur due to not being able to get the jackpot that should be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned dissatisfaction from occurring by configuring the reserved symbol so that the display mode of "rainbow color" in which the occurrence of the jackpot is confirmed does not appear in advance.

In addition, when the reserved symbol is shifted due to the execution (digestion) of the variation effect in the state where the displayed mode of the reserved symbol is changed by this "pending change notice", the displayed mode of the changed reserved symbol is shifted. It is configured to be inherited (inherited) and reflected in the previous reserved symbol or executed symbol. That is, when the display mode of the reserved symbol changes, even when the changed reserved symbol shifts to another reserved symbol display area Db1 to Db3 or the executed symbol display area Db0 due to the execution of the variation effect, the display before the shift is performed. The mode is configured to be maintained as it is as a display mode of the reserved symbol or the executed symbol after the shift.

Therefore, for example, when the display color of the reserved symbol changes to "red" in the fourth reserved symbol display area Db4, the reserved symbol changes from the third reserved symbol display area Db3 to the second reserved symbol display area Db2 to the first reserved symbol. When shifting from the display area Db1 to the execution symbol display area Db0, the "red" reserved symbol or the execution symbol is continuously displayed.

In the present embodiment, the number of reserved balls for the variable effect based on the entry into the first entry port 64 is configured to be reserved up to 4 times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to 4 times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls ( For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, it is not necessary to display the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81. If the third symbol display device 81 does not display the information regarding the number of reserved balls (reserved symbols, etc.), the "reserved change notice" by the reserved symbols cannot be executed, so other character symbols, etc. are additionally added. It may be configured to execute a look-ahead notice similar to the "pending change notice" by making it appear.

Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state. When the number of reserved balls is displayed by the hold lamp, it is natural that the same look-ahead notice as the "hold change notice" of the present embodiment is executed by providing a plurality of display colors of the hold lamp. It is possible.

Here, with reference to FIG. 5, the “music selection” effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot state will be described. FIG. 5A is a diagram illustrating the “music selection” effect in which the music selection screen in which “music AAA” is selected and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 appears during the jackpot state. FIG. 5B is a diagram illustrating a "musical piece selection" effect in which the selection target is changed from the state of FIG. 5A and the music selection screen in which "musical piece BBB" is selected and displayed appears. be.

In the pachinko machine 10, in the first round of the jackpot (limited to "15R probability variation jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot"; the same applies hereinafter), the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is erased, and the "music selection" effect is executed in the entire display area of the third symbol display device 81. In this "music selection" production, a maximum of five songs ("music AAA", "music BBB", "music CCC", "music DDD" and "music EEE") can be selected.

Then, in this "music selection" effect, a plurality of music icons 81a corresponding to the selectable music are displayed in a superimposed and identifiable manner, and the music icon 81a displayed on the foremost side is the currently selected music. For example, in the state of FIG. 5A, the music AAA icon 81a1 is displayed in the foreground side and is highlighted (for example, the character is enlarged). There is. Then, on the rear side of the music AAA icon 81a1, the music BBB icon 81a2, the music CCC icon 81a3, the music DDD icon 81a4 and the music are in a state where the music AAA icon 81a1 and a part thereof overlap and the contents can be identified. The EEE icons 81a5 are displayed in this order.

In addition to the above-mentioned music icon 81a, the music icon 81b imitating the decision button 22a, the change button icon 81c imitating the change button 22b, and the music icon 81a are changed on the music selection screen in this "music selection" effect. It is configured to display an arrow icon 81d indicating a direction.

The decision button icon 81b is a display object corresponding to the decision button 22a arranged in the frame button device 22, and is displayed in a manner imitating the shape of the decision button 22a at the lower right of the screen of the music selection screen. By displaying the decision button icon 81b on the song selection screen of the "music selection" effect, it is configured to suggest to the player that the pressing operation for the decision button 22a is effective.

The change button icon 81c is a display object corresponding to the change button 22b arranged in the frame button device 22, and is displayed in a manner imitating the shape of the change button 22b at the upper left of the screen of the music selection screen. By displaying the change button icon 81c on the music selection screen of the "music selection" effect, it is configured to suggest to the player that the pressing operation corresponding to the change button 22b is effective.

The arrow icon 81d is a display object indicating the direction in which the music icon 81a is changed when the change button 22b is operated by the player, and is displayed in the vicinity (left side) of the change button icon 81c. The arrow icon 81d is displayed so as to point from the depth direction of the screen to the front side direction, and in the pachinko machine 10, when the change button 22b is pressed by the player, the arrow icon 81d is displayed. The display position of the music icon 81a is changed so as to be performed.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 5A, in the "music selection" effect, the music AAA icon 81a1 is displayed on the frontmost side, and the music BBB icon 81a2 is displayed on the rear side in this order from the front side. The music CCC icon 81a3, the music DDD icon 81a4, and the music EEE icon 81a5 are displayed. In this state, when the change button 22b is pressed by the player, the music AAA icon 81a1 displayed on the foreground side is moved to the rearmost position and displayed second from the front. The icon 81a2 is moved to the front side, the music CCC icon 81a3 displayed third from the front is moved to the second from the front, and the music DDD icon 81a4 displayed fourth from the front is moved from the front. The music EEE icon 81a5, which has been moved and displayed third and displayed fifth from the front (that is, the rearmost side), is moved and displayed fourth from the front (see FIG. 5B).

That is, when the change button 22b is pressed by the player during the "music selection" effect, the second and subsequent music icons 81a from the front are moved and displayed one step from the depth direction. , The music icon 81a displayed on the front side is configured to be moved and displayed on the rearmost side. With this configuration, the player can change the music in the "music selection" production.

Further, in the state of FIG. 5A, when the decision button 22a is pressed by the player, the pachinko machine 10 has the "music AAA" corresponding to the music AAA icon 81a1 displayed on the foremost side. It is configured to recognize that it has been selected by the player and to perform a "musical piece reproduction" effect by the image and sound based on the "musical piece AAA" in the subsequent rounds. Further, in the state of FIG. 5B, when the decision button 22a is pressed by the player, the pachinko machine 10 has the "musical piece BBB" corresponding to the music piece BBB icon 81a2 displayed on the foremost side. It is configured to recognize that it has been selected by the player and to execute a "musical piece reproduction" effect based on the "musical piece BBB" in the subsequent rounds.

In this way, when a jackpot is won, the player can select and display the music that is played and displayed during the jackpot, so that the music that matches the player's taste can be played and displayed in the production at the time of the jackpot. can. Therefore, in a situation where the player who is a big hit feels pleasure, it is possible to give a further interest and improve the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 displays a variable display in which the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol) are alternately lit each time the ball passes through the second entry port 67. It is something to do. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “◯”), the first ball entry port 64 is activated (opened) for a predetermined time. Is configured to be).

The number of reserved balls in the second entry port 67 of the ball is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also lit and displayed by the second symbol reservation lamp 84. .. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically above the third symbol display device 81. Then, the number of holds is displayed according to the number of lights of the second symbol hold lamp 84.

The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol. It may be performed by using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, and the number of times of passing through the second ball entry port 67 is not limited to four times, but is three times or less, or five times or more (for example). , 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entry port 64, the first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entry opening switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 6), a display according to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and a variation effect is executed by the third symbol display device 81. To. The first entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

The first ball entry port 64 is provided with an electric accessory having two blades covering the opening through which the ball enters the first ball entry port 64. By opening and closing the two blades of the electric accessory, the first ball entry port 64 is set to an open state (enlarged state) or a closed state (reduced state). In the normal state, the first ball entry port 64 is in a closed state in which the blades of the electric accessory are closed (the blades stand upright), and the ball cannot enter the first ball entry port 64, or It is difficult to enter the ball.

On the other hand, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at the symbol of "◯", the electric accessory of the first ball entry port 64 is operated for a predetermined time. From the state where the blades of the electric accessory stand up while the electric accessory is operating. It is in a state of being movable in a substantially V shape (inverted C shape), and the first ball entry port 64 is in an open state. When the first ball entry port 64 is in the open state, the ball can enter the first ball entry port 64, or the ball is easier to enter than in the closed state. That is, as a result of the variable display on the second symbol display device 83, the ball stops at the symbol "○" and hits, and when the first entry port 64 is in the open state, the ball moves to the first entry port 64. It is possible to enter a ball and make it possible to perform many big hit lottery.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball entry port 64, and a horizontally long rectangular large winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main control device 110 (see FIG. 6) becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is set so as to be a stop symbol of the big hit after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. At the same time as turning on the lights, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the large winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

The large winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the large winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the large winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state (big hit state) that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) in a larger amount than usual. The prize ball will be paid out.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the large winning opening 65a, and a large winning opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The large winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the big winning opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state where the ball can easily win the big winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the large winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the large winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the large winning opening is opened. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening opened separately from the large winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the large winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

A second ball entry port 67 is provided on the left side and the right side of the variable display device unit 80, respectively. The second entry port 67 is provided with a through hole (not shown) for the ball to pass through in the vertical direction. When the ball launched into the game area passes through the second entry port 67, the second entry port switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the on. Then, a winning lottery for the second symbol (also called a normal symbol) is held.

As a result of the lottery of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) performed on the ball passing through the second entrance 67, if it is determined to be a hit, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is performed and "○" is displayed. After the symbol "" is stopped and displayed, the electric accessory of the first ball entry port 64 is activated. As a result, the blades of the electric accessory, which makes it difficult for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64, can move from a state in which the blades of the electric accessory stand up substantially vertically to a substantially V-shape (inverted C-shape) for a predetermined time. The ball can enter the first ball entry port 64, or the ball is easier to enter than in the closed state.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings (entrance openings) 63, 64, 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board has a micro-processing unit (hereinafter abbreviated as "MPU") as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, and various lottery. A random number generator used for the above, a clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. are installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is equipped with a case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispenses balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a read-only memory (Read Only Memory; hereinafter abbreviated as “ROM”) 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and controls stored in the ROM 202. Random Access Memory (hereinafter abbreviated as "RAM") 203, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing a program, and other interrupt circuits and timer circuits. Various circuits such as a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of dynamic display and variable effect in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results of variable display in the second symbol display device 83. Performs the main processing of. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer 203b for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Further, the ROM 202 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a hold number table 202c, a stop pattern table 202d, a variation pattern table 202e, a jackpot control table 202f, and a jackpot opening / closing table 202g. The main control device 110 executes the above-mentioned main control by the various counters stored in the RAM 203 and the various tables stored in the ROM 202.

Here, with reference to FIG. 7, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are a big hit lottery, a setting of dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37, a setting of a variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results of variable display in the second symbol display device 83. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as. Further, in the description of the various counters, the various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will also be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 15.

For the jackpot lottery, the setting of the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37, and the setting of the variable effect of the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the jackpot symbol The first hit type counter C2 used for selecting the stop type, the stop pattern selection counter C3 used for selecting the effect mode of the variation effect, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The counter CINI1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used.

Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to "0".

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 4 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 34). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203b set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 is provided with a hold ball storage area 203c composed of four hold areas (hold 1st to 4th areas), and each of these areas has a first ball entry port 64. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is stored according to the timing of entering the ball.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 899"), and is "899" in the case of a counter that can take a maximum value (for example, "0 to 899"). ) Is reached and then returns to "0". In particular, when the first per random number counter C1 is updated once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first per random number counter C1, and the first hit from the initial value. The random number counter C1 is updated.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of "0 to 899", the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of "0 to 899". be. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 34).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the RAM 203 is at the timing when the ball wins the first entry slot 64 (starting prize). It is stored in any of the reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the reserved ball storage area 203c. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the hold area is set by the jackpot random number table 202a. If it matches the value of the random number that is the set jackpot, it is determined to be a jackpot.

Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 8A. FIG. 8A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number table 202a is for a low probability state used when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a "normal gaming state" and a "time shortening state" (a period other than the "probability fluctuation state"). , The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can be divided into two types, one for the high probability state used in the case of the "probability fluctuation state (during probability change)", which is the high probability state in which the probability of becoming a big hit is higher than the low probability state. .. Then, the number of big hit random numbers included in each of the low-probability state and the high-probability state is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that become big hits different, the probability of becoming a big hit is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of "0 to 899". In this first hit random number counter C1, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the low probability state is three, and the values "7,307,582" are stored in the big hit random number table 202a. Has been done.

On the other hand, the number of random numbers (big hit random numbers) that become big hits in the high probability state is 30, and the values "28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298," 322,354,390,420,448,486,506,534,567,569,618,656,681,716,750,772,809,833,866,892 "is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. There is.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot random number value for the low probability state and the jackpot random number value for the high probability state stored in the jackpot random number table 202a are set to the jackpot random number values so as not to be duplicated. It is set. Here, if there is a value that becomes a jackpot random number regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the value is likely to be predicted from the outside, so that there is a high possibility that the jackpot will be illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by changing the value of the random number that becomes the big hit according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state), it becomes a big hit. Since the value of the random number can be difficult to predict, it is possible to suppress fraud.

Returning to FIG. 7, the explanation will be continued. The first hit type counter C2 determines the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 99"), and the maximum value (for example, "0") is added. In the case of a counter that can take a value of "99", it is configured to return to "0" after reaching "99"). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entry slot 64 (starting prize), for example. Of the first to fourth reserved areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203, the first random number counter C1 is stored in the same reserved area as the reserved area.

Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the holding area 1 in the holding ball storage area 203c is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is a loss, the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect. Also, the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") is the one at the time of loss. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the holding area 1 in the holding ball storage area 203c is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type in the fluctuation effect will be those at the time of the big hit. .. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

The value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of "0 to 99". The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM 202. Here, the jackpot type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 8B. FIG. 8B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot type table 202b. As shown in FIG. 8B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 are associated with each other.

As the jackpot type, as described above, "15R probability variation jackpot" that shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" in which the jackpot probability becomes a high probability state after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds. Later, the jackpot probability becomes a low probability state, and during 100 fluctuations, it shifts to the "time shortened state", "15R normal jackpot", and after the maximum number of rounds is 2 rounds, it shifts to the "probability fluctuation state". "2R probability variation jackpot" and the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, but the opening pattern of the 1st and 2nd rounds is the same as the opening pattern of "2R probability variation jackpot", and the opening of the 3rd to 15th rounds There is a "15R (substantially 13R) probability variation jackpot" whose pattern is the same as the opening pattern of the "15R probability variation (normal) jackpot". In the following description, the 15-round jackpot of "15R probability variation jackpot" and "15R normal jackpot" may be described as "15R jackpot (common)".

In the jackpot type table 202b, possible values of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type are associated with each jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 8B, the value “0 to 39” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the “15R probability variation jackpot”, and the first hit with respect to the “15R (substantially 13R) probability variation jackpot”. The value "40 to 49" of the type counter C2 is associated, the value "50 to 59" of the first type counter C2 is associated with the "2R probability variation jackpot", and the first is associated with the "15R normal jackpot". The value "60 to 99" of the type counter C2 per unit is associated with it.

When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a jackpot value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the jackpot type table 202b. .. For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20", "15R probability variation jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "45", the jackpot type is " If "15R (actual 13R) probability variation jackpot" is determined and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "55", "2R probability variation jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is " If it is "60", "15R normal jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of a big hit, "15R probability variation jackpot" is selected with a probability of 40%, "15R (substantially 13R) probability variation jackpot" is selected with a probability of 10%, and a probability of 10%. "2R probability variation jackpot" is selected, and "15R normal jackpot" is selected with a 40% probability. The probability that each jackpot type will be selected in the event of a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table 202b according to the set probability.

The probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the jackpot type table 202b corresponding to each game state may be prepared, and the number of values of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type may be changed in each jackpot type table 202b.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description of various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to, for example, add "1" in order within the range of "0 to 99", reach the maximum value (that is, "99"), and then return to "0".

In the present embodiment, the rough effect mode of the variation effect at the time of big hit and loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the number of pending variation effects and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Will be done. Specifically, only the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode or the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode in which the "reach display" does not occur, and the "normal reach" variable element as the "reach display" are executed. The "normal reach" effect mode and the "super reach" effect mode in which the variable element of the "super reach" is executed by developing from the variable element of the "normal reach", and the "special reach" developed from the variable element of the "normal reach" as well. "Special reach" effect mode in which the variable element of "" is executed, and "special variation" effect mode that occurs when "15R (actual 13R) probability variation jackpot" or "2R probability variation jackpot" is selected. Aspects are selected.

Here, each effect mode will be described in detail. Among the effect modes, the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode and the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode are defined as "non-reach (normal)" effect modes in the display areas Dm1 to Dm3 (see FIG. 4A) of the main display area Dm. This is an effect mode in which the same third symbol does not stop in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3 and the “reach display” does not occur after the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation” is performed.

Here, the fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation" is the fluctuation effect performed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 4) of the third symbol display device 81, and the fluctuation elements Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A). The third symbol displayed in is a variable element that is scrolled vertically downward on the display screen at high speed. In this "high-speed fluctuation", the third symbol is changed so that the player cannot clearly recognize the display content of the third symbol, and the stop result of the fluctuation effect displayed last time is irregularly mixed (shuffled). Is executed as.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is performed, the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" is performed except for a specific effect mode ("non-reach (shortened)" effect mode). It is configured as follows. The fluctuation element of the "low speed fluctuation" is visually recognized by the player after the fluctuation element of the "high speed fluctuation" in the fluctuation effect performed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 4A) of the third symbol display device 81. A variable element that scrolls the third symbol at a low speed at a possible speed. In the fluctuation element of this "low speed fluctuation", the third symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 4A) while making the player recognize the display content of the third symbol. Stop and display the design. When the same third symbol stops in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3, it develops into a variable element of "normal reach" as "reach display" occurs, while in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3. When a different third symbol is stopped, the middle symbol column Z2 is stopped and displayed, and the variation effect is terminated (except when it develops into a "pseudo-ream" described later).

Therefore, in the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode, the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is performed, and then the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" is performed, and each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A). ) Stop in turn, and the variation effect of 1 ends. On the other hand, in the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode, the variable element of the "low speed fluctuation" is not performed after the "high speed fluctuation" is performed, and after the end of the variable element of the "high speed fluctuation", each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 stops at the same time, and the variation effect of 1 ends.

Among the effect modes, the "normal reach" effect mode is the same as the left symbol column Z1 and the right symbol column Z3 in the variable effect of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A) in the main display area Dm. Immediately after the third symbol stops, the variable element of "normal reach" is executed, and the variable element of "reach display", that is, the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" does not develop. This is one of the production modes. In this "normal reach" variable element, as described above, the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left symbol column Z1 (left display area Dm1) and the right symbol column Z3 (right display area Dm3) of the main display area Dm is It is displayed in a larger size than usual. Further, the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 (middle display area Dm2) scrolls downward in the vertical direction of the display screen at a low speed, and the third symbol of the middle display area Dm2 is displayed in a visible state by the player. .. Further, in the variable element of this "normal reach", the sub display area Ds is erased with the enlarged display of the main display area Dm (not shown).

Among the production modes, the "super reach" production mode is one of the "reach display" production modes in which the variable element of "super reach" is executed by developing from the variable element of "normal reach". In this "super reach" effect mode, the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 4A) is deleted from the display state of the variable element of "normal reach" while the variable element of "super reach" is being executed. The reach formation symbol of the third symbol, which was the cause of the "reach display", is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display of the main display area Dm changes from the variable element of "normal reach", and a plurality of character symbols are displayed to perform "battle effect (for example, kickboxing)" (not shown).

In this embodiment, it is configured to suggest the success or failure of the variable effect based on the result (win or lose) of the "battle effect". Specifically, for example, in the above "battle effect", when the character symbol on the player side wins over the character symbol on the enemy side, it is suggested that the variable effect becomes "big hit display", and the player. When the character symbol on the side loses to the character symbol on the enemy side, it is configured to suggest that the variation effect is "missing display".

Among the production modes, the "special reach" production mode is one of the "reach display" production modes in which the variable element of "special reach" is executed by developing from the variable element of "normal reach". In this "special reach" effect mode, while the variable element of "special reach" is being executed, the cockpit display area Db (FIG. 4) is displayed from the display state of the variable element of "normal reach" as in the case of the variable element of "super reach". (See (a)) is deleted, and the reach forming symbol of the third symbol, which was the cause of this "reach display", is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display of the main display area Dm (see FIG. 4A) changes from the variable element of "normal reach", and a plurality of characters different from the variable element of "super reach" are made to appear to "competitive effect". (For example, car racing) ”(not shown).

In the present embodiment, it is configured to suggest the propriety of the variable staging based on the result (win / loss) of the “competitive staging”. Specifically, for example, in the above-mentioned "competition effect", when the character symbol on the player side wins over the character symbol on the enemy side, it is suggested that the variable effect becomes "big hit display", and the player. When the character symbol on the side loses to the character symbol on the enemy side, it is configured to suggest that the variation effect is "missing display".

Among the production modes, the "special variation" production mode is an production mode that is executed without exception when the "15R (substantially 13R) probability variation jackpot" or "2R probability variation jackpot" is won. In this "special variation" effect mode, the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are erased, and the entire main display area Dm changes from the normal background display, resulting in "15R (substantially 13R) probability variation jackpot" or "2R probability variation". A "movie" effect is displayed that suggests that a "big hit" will occur.

As described above, this "special variation" is configured to be selected without exception when a "15R (substantially 13R) probability variation jackpot" or a "2R probability variation jackpot" occurs, and when the "special variation" is executed, the "special variation" is executed. The player cannot determine whether the jackpot to be given in the future is "15R (actually 13R) probability variation jackpot" or "2R probability variation jackpot". With this configuration, the jackpot starts after the "special fluctuation", and until the opening pattern of the second round ends, is it the "2R probability variation jackpot" that ends as it is at the end of the second round of this jackpot? By giving the player a playability to guess whether it is a "15R (substantially 13R) probability change jackpot" in which the jackpot state continues and the opening pattern changes to a long opening, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), for example, and at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64 (start winning), the RAM 203 Of the first to fourth reserved areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203c, the first random number counter C1 is stored in the same reserved area as the reserved area.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 refers to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 according to whether or not the variation effect is correct, the current gaming state, and the number of currently pending variation effects (number of reserved balls). The pattern table 202d is configured to be different. That is, a plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202d are provided, and are configured to be selected according to the number of fluctuation effects during standby (number of reserved balls) and the like.

In the present embodiment, when determining a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect, first, based on the hold number table 202c provided in the ROM 202, whether or not the variation effect is appropriate, the current gaming state, and the current variation effect are determined. Any stop pattern table 202d corresponding to the number (number of reserved balls) is selected. Then, a rough effect mode of the variation effect is selected based on the selected stop pattern table 202d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. After that, a detailed variation pattern (variation time) of the variation effect is determined based on the selected effect mode and the value of the variation type counter CS1 described later.

The stop pattern table 202d provided with a plurality of types is set so that the range of random values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 in which the effect mode is selected for each stop pattern table 202d is different. The reason why a plurality of the stop pattern tables 202d are prepared is to change the selection ratio of the effect mode of the variation effect according to the propriety of the variation effect, the game state, and the number of reserved balls. That is, (1) a big hit occurs in the fluctuation effect of the acquired third symbol, or (2) the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state", or "normal gaming state". This is because the selection ratio of the effect mode is changed according to whether or not there is (3) how many balls are reserved for the variable effect.

This is because, as the first reason, the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit is changed for each production mode. That is, the ratio of selecting the "non-reach" production mode, the "normal reach" production mode, the "super reach" production mode, and the "special reach" production mode depending on whether the jackpot lottery is won or the jackpot lottery is lost. By configuring so as to be different, the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit is changed for each production mode. Specifically, for example, if the jackpot lottery is won, the "super reach" effect mode or the "special reach" effect mode can be easily selected, and if the jackpot lottery is not won, the "non-reach" effect is produced. It is easy to select the mode and the "normal reach" production mode. With this configuration, the "super reach" production mode and the "special reach" production mode can be easily hit, and the "normal reach" production mode and the "non-reach" production mode are difficult to hit. It can be a production or a production that does not make a big hit, and the degree of expectation of a big hit can be differentiated for each production mode. Therefore, when a production that is easy to hit the jackpot appears in the variable production, it is suggested to the player that the jackpot is likely to occur while the production that is easy to hit the jackpot is performed, and the interest of the game is enhanced. There is.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the acquired lottery result is a big hit, it is easy to select an effect that is easy to make a big hit, and it is difficult to select an effect that is hard to make a big hit. It is configured to select the effect mode of the variation effect based on the table 202d3 (see FIG. 10 (c)). On the other hand, when the acquired lottery result is a loss, it is difficult to select an effect that is easy to win a big hit, and it is easy to select an effect that is hard to hit a big hit. (A) or FIG. 10 (b)))). As a result, when the player is notified of the lottery result of the third symbol in the variable effect, if an effect that is easy to hit is executed, a big hit is likely to occur in the variable effect, and an effect that is difficult to hit is executed. If this is the case, it is difficult for a jackpot to occur in the variable effect, and by providing a difference in the expected value of the jackpot for each effect mode, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the execution of the variable effect.

The second reason is to reduce as much as possible waste balls (so-called no lottery due to overflow winning) based on entering the first ball opening 64 when the number of waiting times for the variable effect has reached the upper limit. be. Specifically, the number of times of waiting for the variable effect is set to a maximum of 4 times, and the variable effect is executed for at least a certain period of time. 1 In a gaming state in which a ball easily enters the ball entry port 64, it is easy to reach the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol. In these gaming states, if a fluctuation effect with a long fluctuation time is selected, the ball enters the first ball opening 64 frequently when the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol is reached, and the ball enters the first ball. Despite entering the mouth 64, the lottery opportunity for the third symbol cannot be obtained. In addition, even in the "normal game state", if a variation effect with a long fluctuation time is selected while the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol has been reached, the number of reserved balls of the third symbol is being executed during the execution of the variation effect. Is not digested, so even if a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 during that time, the lottery opportunity for the third symbol cannot be obtained. In such a state, the player determines that the game value cannot be obtained even if the ball is put into the first ball entry port 64, and the variable effect is digested so that the number of reserved balls can be obtained again. The ball will stop firing until it becomes possible, and the game will be interrupted. If the game is interrupted, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 will decrease, which will affect the management of the game hall.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a relatively short fluctuation time is selected in a gaming state in which the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol is easily reached or in a reserved ball number close to (or matching with) the maximum reserved ball number. It is configured to select the effect mode of the variation effect based on the stop pattern table 202d (for example, B table 202d2 (see FIG. 10B)) which is easily generated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the first ball entry port 64 when the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol has been reached.

Further, the third reason is to maintain the state in which the variable effect is being executed for a long time by setting the execution time to be long and delaying the end of the variable effect. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls in the variable effect is small (not present), if a new ball is not inserted into the first entry port 64 within the variable time of the variable effect being executed, the next variable effect is produced. Cannot be started, and the demo screen or the like must be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the player does not perform the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 even though the ball is fired and the game is played, the player can obtain the interest related to the jackpot lottery that the player wants. Instead, I am awakened to the game. Further, the player recognizes that the pachinko machine 10 is difficult for the ball to enter the first entry port 64 because the variation effect is not performed on the third symbol display device 81, and it is difficult to obtain the game value. Therefore, there is a risk that the game on the pachinko machine 10 will be stopped.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d (for example, A table 202d1 (see FIG. 10A)) makes it easy to select a relatively long fluctuation time when the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect is small. It is configured to select the effect mode of the variable effect based on. As a result, the situation in which the variation effect is not performed in the third symbol display device 81 is unlikely to occur, and the execution state of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained for a long time.

Here, the details of the hold number table 202c and the stop pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically showing the hold number table 202c. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the variable effect is performed based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64, the variable effect is performed with reference to the hold number table 202c. It is configured to select any of the stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d4 based on the success or failure, the gaming state at that time, and the number of pending fluctuation effects at that time. Then, a rough effect mode of the variable effect is determined based on any one of the selected stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d4 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3.

Specifically, as shown in the reserved number table 202c of FIG. 9, when the number of reserved balls is "1" or "2 or 3" at the time of extracting the loss in the "normal game state", or " When the number of reserved balls is "1" at the time of loss extraction in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", the A table 202d1 (see FIG. 10A) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected. .. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is "4" at the time of extracting the loss in the "normal game state", or when the number of reserved balls is "4" at the time of extracting the loss in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", the number of reserved balls is " In the case of "2 or 3" or "4", the B table 202d2 (see FIG. 10B) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected. Further, at the time of extraction of "15R probability variation jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot" (hereinafter, "15R probability variation jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot" may be collectively referred to as "15R common jackpot"), any game. The C table 202d3 (see FIG. 10C) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the state or the number of reserved balls. Further, at the time of extracting "15R (substantially 13R) probability variation jackpot" or "2R probability variation jackpot", regardless of the game state or the number of reserved balls, D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 10D). ) Is selected.

That is, if any of the jackpots is won, the stop pattern table 202d (C table 202d3 or D table 202d4) is selected based only on the type of jackpot, regardless of the number of reserved balls and the gaming state at that time. Only when the jackpot is not won (that is, when the game is lost), the stop pattern table 202d (A table 202d1 or B table 202d2) is selected based on the number of reserved balls and the game state at that time.

Even when a big hit is won, the stop pattern table 202d may be configured to be different depending on the number of reserved balls. For example, when the number of reserved balls is large when a big hit is won, a relatively short fluctuation pattern is easily selected. Stop pattern table 202d (For example, a "super reach" effect mode in which the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" is 3 seconds It may be configured so that the "special reach" effect mode, etc.) can be selected. In this case, in each effect mode in which the "reach display" is executed, it is configured to select an effect mode in which only the time of the variable element portion of the "high-speed fluctuation" is changed from 7 seconds to 3 seconds.

With this configuration, for example, when the variable effect is started in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls is 4 and the unexecuted variable effect is accumulated 4 times, the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is 3. Even if it is performed in seconds, at the time when the fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation" for 3 seconds ends (when it is recognized as "high-speed fluctuation" for 3 seconds), "reach display" occurs in the fluctuation production. Even when the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" for 3 seconds is performed, the effect mode in which "reach display" other than "non-reach (shortening)" is executed can be executed. .. Therefore, at the time of executing the fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation" for 3 seconds, it is possible to make it impossible to know whether the fluctuation effect is a big hit or a loss.

Further, in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", when the jackpot is not won and the number of reserved balls is small, the stop pattern table 202d (for example, the A table) in which a relatively long fluctuation pattern is easily selected is easy to be selected. It may be configured to select 202d1). With this configuration, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the fluctuation effect is executed by the third symbol display device 81 even in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. It is possible to configure the situation in which the variation effect is not performed to be unlikely to occur, and to maintain the execution state of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 for a long time.

Next, each stop pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 10 (a) and 10 (b) are views showing the stop pattern table 202d that can be selected at the time of loss, and FIG. 10 (a) is a schematic example of the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d. 10 (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d. 10 (c) and 10 (d) are diagrams schematically showing the stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of a big hit, and FIG. 10 (c) is an example of the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d. 10 (d) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d.

As shown in FIG. 10A, in the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “non-reach (normal)” effect mode is set to “0” to “74”. , The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is "95" to "95". It is set to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98" and "99". In the A table 202d1, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode, and the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode is set not to be selected. ing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10B, in the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “non-reach (shortened)” effect mode is “0” to “74”. The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is "95". The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98,99". In the C table 202d3, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode, and the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode is set not to be selected. ing.

That is, in the A table 202d1, the "non-reach (normal)" production mode is 75%, the "normal reach" production mode is 20%, the "super reach" production mode is 3%, and the "special reach" production mode is 2%. It is set to be a selection ratio. Further, in the B table 202d2, the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode is 75%, the "normal reach" production mode is 20%, the "super reach" production mode is 3%, and the "special reach" production mode is 2%. It is set to be a selection ratio. The selection ratios of the "normal reach" effect mode, the "super reach" effect mode, and the "special reach" effect mode between the A table 202d1 and the B table 202d2 are set to be the same.

Therefore, in the A table 202d1, the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode is selected, and in the B table 202d2, the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode is selected instead of the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode. It is configured as follows. Therefore, it can be said that the A table 202d1 tends to have a relatively long variation time of the selected variation effect as compared with the B table 202d2. In other words, it can be said that the B table 202d2 tends to have a shorter variation time of the selected variation effect than the A table 202d1.

In this way, when the lottery result of the loss is extracted, it is configured to select the effect mode of the variable effect based on the number of reserved balls of the pending variable effect. For example, when the number of reserved balls for the variable effect is large, it is easy to select the “non-reach (shortened)” effect mode in which the variable effect time is short. As a result, when the number of reserved balls for the variable effect is large, the execution time of the variable effect to be executed is shortened and the number of times the variable effect is executed is increased, so that the execution efficiency of the variable effect can be improved.

Further, for example, when the number of reserved balls in the variable effect is small, the variable effect time is longer than in the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode in order to secure the ball entry time into the first entry port 64. Make it easier to select a "non-reach (normal)" effect mode. As a result, it is possible to perform "non-reach (normal)", which has a longer variable effect time than when the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode is selected. By increasing the possibility that a new start prize will be generated during the execution time of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to maintain the situation in which the variation effect is being executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10C, in the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “normal reach” effect mode is set to “0” to “4”. The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "5" to "39", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is "40" to "40". It is set to "99". In the C table 202d3, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "special variation" effect mode, and the "special variation" effect mode is set not to be selected. Further, since the C table 202d3 is the stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of a big hit, the "non-reach" effect mode is not selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10D, in the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned only to the “special variation” effect mode (“0” to “99”). , The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the other "reach display". Therefore, the stop type selected when the "15R (substantially 13R) probability variation jackpot" or "2R probability variation jackpot" is won is always set to be the "special variation" effect mode. Since the D table 202d4 is the stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of a big hit, the "non-reach" effect mode is not selected.

That is, in the C table 202d3, the selection ratio is set so that the "normal reach" effect mode is 5%, the "super reach" effect mode is 35%, and the "special reach" effect mode is 60%. Further, in the D table 202d4, the "special variation" effect mode is set so that the selection ratio is 100%.

Therefore, in the variable production at the time of winning the jackpot, the selection ratio is high in the order of "special reach" production mode> "super reach" production mode> "normal reach" production mode, and in the variable production at the time of loss, the "normal reach" production mode> The selection ratio is set to be higher in the order of "super reach" effect mode> "special reach" effect mode. Therefore, as for the jackpot expectation at the time of appearance of each "reach display", there is a high possibility that the jackpot display result will appear in the order of "special reach" production mode> "super reach" production mode> "normal reach" production mode. It is configured to be. As a result, it is possible to show the player the degree of expectation for the jackpot by the effect mode of the variable effect, and the player can enjoy the uplifting feeling to the jackpot according to the effect mode of the variable effect executed by the player.

In the present embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d selected based on the number of reserved balls in the variable effect is configured to be different in the effect mode in the variable effect of the loss, but the first ball entry port 64 It is configured so that substantially the same effect mode is selected by the determination of the variation effect based on the entry of the ball into the ball and the determination of the variation effect based on the start of the variation effect based on the entry. Specifically, in the case of the variable effect of loss, either the A table 202d1 or the B table 202d2 is selected based on the number of reserved balls in the variable effect. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 assigned to the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode or the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode is the same as that of the B table 202d2, and is allocated to another effect mode. The values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 are also set to be the same.

That is, the only difference is whether the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode is selected or the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode is selected based on the number of reserved balls in the variable effect. The same production mode is selected. Therefore, the effect mode selected at the start winning and the effect mode selected at the start of the change are substantially different even when the game state changes (for example, from the "normal game state" to the "probability change state"). The same production mode is selected. As a result, even if a pre-reading notice such as "pending change notice" is given based on the staging mode selected at the time of the start winning, the content of the pre-reading notice is included in the variable staging that is the target of the pre-reading notice. On the other hand, it is possible to perform an effect that does not cause a discrepancy.

From the above, the situation in which the game is performed by determining the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed based on the success or failure of the variable effect, the game state at that time, and the number of reserved balls of the variable effect at that time. By shortening the execution time of the variation effect and increasing the number of executions of the variation effect based on the above, it is possible to select an effect mode that enhances the execution efficiency of the variation effect.

Returning to FIG. 7, the explanation will be continued. The variation type counter CS1 is configured to, for example, add "1" in order within the range of "0 to 199", reach the maximum value (that is, "199"), and then return to "0". The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 26) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main processing (see FIG. 34).

The variation type counter CS1 is used to determine a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect. That is, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is detailed by the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM 202 in the effect mode selected by the stop pattern table 202d and the stop pattern selection counter C3. Determine the variation pattern. The determination of the variation pattern is specifically the determination of the variation time of the variation effect. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 have a reach type and detailed symbols of the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the fluctuation pattern (variation time) determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. The variation mode is determined, and the presence / absence of the advance notice effect execution and the execution mode of the advance notice effect are determined.

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a rough fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect and determines only the fluctuation time. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to control the detailed advance notice lottery or the like necessary for executing the variation effect in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, so that the processing of the MPU 201 related to the variation effect can be reduced. can. Further, it is not necessary to prepare a command for all fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation effect in the main control device 110, and the ROM capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Further, in the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the variation effect is performed by determining the detailed variation pattern in the variation effect based on the variation time (rough variation pattern) determined by the main control device 110. You can increase the degree of freedom in choosing. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the gaming state changes from moment to moment, it is possible to select or change the effect content of the variable effect at any time in response to the change, and it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the game state. can.

Here, the details of the variation pattern table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 13. As the fluctuation pattern table 202e, the pachinko machine 10 includes a probability variation jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e1 used at the time of probability variation jackpot, a normal jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2 used at the time of normal jackpot, and a loss fluctuation pattern table 202e3 used at the time of loss. And are prepared.

FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the variation pattern table 202e1 for the probability variation jackpot stored in the ROM 202.

The variation pattern table 202e1 for probability variation jackpot shown in FIG. 11 is divided into groups (groups) based on the selected staging mode. Specifically, as the effect mode, "E5: normal reach" referred to when the "normal reach" effect mode is determined, and "E6: super" referred to when the "super reach" effect mode is determined. "E7: Special Reach", which is referred to when the "reach" and "special reach" production modes are determined, and "E8: special variation", which is referred to when the "special variation" production mode is determined. It is divided into those for use and those for use. Then, the possible values of the variable type counter CS1 are associated with each of the divided groups.

When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a value that becomes a jackpot (big hit random number value), the stop pattern table is based on the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area. 202d is selected, and the effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, when the jackpot type is any "probability variation jackpot", the group (group) to be referred to in the probability variation jackpot variation pattern table 202e1 is determined based on the effect mode. In the group (group) of the variation pattern table 202e1 for the probability variation jackpot, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the hold area is used as the variation pattern in the variation effect reserved in the hold area. It is determined.

In the variation pattern table 202e1 for probability variation jackpot, "E5: normal reach" includes "normal reach only" with an overall variation time of 15 seconds and "normal reach + re-variation" with an overall variation time of 25 seconds. Four fluctuation patterns of "normal reach + re-variation + promotion during fluctuation" with a time of 30 seconds are prepared so as to be selectable, and possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are associated with each fluctuation pattern.

Here, each fluctuation element constituting the fluctuation pattern will be described. The variable element constitutes a part of the variable effect of 1, and each variable element is combined to form the variable effect of 1. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as the fluctuation elements, the fluctuation elements of "high-speed fluctuation", the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation", the fluctuation element of "pseudo-ream", the fluctuation element of "normal reach", and the fluctuation of "super reach" Elements, "special reach" variable elements, "re-variable" variable elements, "during promotion" variable elements, and "movie" variable elements are provided.

The variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is a variable element that scrolls and fluctuates at high speed so that the content of the third symbol cannot be clearly recognized by the player. When the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode is selected, the variable element of this "high-speed fluctuation" is performed for 3 seconds at the beginning of the variable effect, and the variable element other than the "non-reach (shortened)" (for example,). When the “non-reach (normal)”) effect mode is selected, the variable effect is performed for 7 seconds at the beginning of the effect. When the variable element of the "high-speed fluctuation" ends, the variable element of the "low-speed fluctuation" described later is started (executed), or the variation effect is configured to end as it is.

The "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is a fluctuation that starts after the execution of the "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element for 7 seconds, and scrolls the third symbol visually to show whether or not "reach display" is generated. It is an element. This "low-speed fluctuation" variation element is not executed when the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode is selected, and the effect mode other than the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode (for example, "non-reach (normally)" effect mode is not executed. ) "Production mode) is selected, it is performed for 3 seconds after the variable element of" high-speed fluctuation ". That is, in the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode, after the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is performed, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the main display area Dm do not go through the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation". It is configured to stop rapidly (so-called bita stop). When the variable element of this "slow fluctuation" ends, whether the variable element of "pseudo-ream" described later is started (executed) or the variable element of "normal reach" described later is started (executed). Or, it is configured so that the variable effect ends as it is.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the “non-reach (normal)” effect mode varies in a variation pattern including a variation element of “high speed variation” for 7 seconds and a variation element of “low speed variation” for 3 seconds. The production is composed. Further, in the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode, the variation effect is configured by the variation pattern of only the variation elements of the "high-speed variation" for 3 seconds.

The "pseudo-ream" variable element is a variable element in which the start of the variable effect occurs a plurality of times (pseudo-stop occurs once) in one variable effect. Specifically, the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is started in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the third symbol display device 81 and switched to the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation", and then in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. It is a variable element in which the unit effect is performed such that the variable effect is completed and a predetermined stop result (for example, the pseudo-continuous chance eye “677”) is displayed. The variable element of this "pseudo-ream" is that the variable element of the "high-speed fluctuation" starts again from the stop result when the predetermined stop result is stopped after the variable element of the "low-speed fluctuation", as if once again. The effect as if the variable effect was started is executed.

As for the variable element of this "pseudo-ream", a predetermined stop result (so-called pseudo-ream chance) appears after the execution of the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation", and the variable element of the second "high-speed fluctuation" is executed again. After that, it is a variable element that develops into a variable element of "normal reach". That is, as for the variable element of the "pseudo-ream", a pseudo-variable stop (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo-stop") in which the pseudo-ream chance is displayed is performed once, and then a predetermined stop result is obtained in the pseudo-stop. It is a variable element that appears and starts the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" again. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to always develop into at least a "normal reach" variable element after the end of the "pseudo-ream" variable element. This "pseudo-ream" variation element is performed for 10 seconds after the "slow variation" variation element.

In the present embodiment, in the variable element of the "pseudo-ream", the number of pseudo-stops is set to one, but the variable element of the "pseudo-ream" in which the number of pseudo-stops is performed twice or more is configured to be executed. You may. Further, before the occurrence of the variable element of the "pseudo-ream", a variable element (so-called "pseudo-gase" variable element) may be configured to produce an effect of whether or not the pseudo-ream chance eye is stopped. .. In the variable element of this "pseudo-gase", an effect of whether or not a predetermined stop result appears after the execution of the variable element of "slow speed fluctuation" (for example, the symbol forming the predetermined stop result is the effective line L1 (for example). (Refer to FIG. 4A)) The effect of whether or not to stop by reciprocating on the top is performed. Hereinafter, it is referred to as "pseudo-variation"), and the above-mentioned predetermined stop result does not appear in the "pseudo-variation". It may be configured so as not to develop into a variable element of "pseudo-ream". By providing the variable element of this "pseudo-gase", after the end of the variable element of the "pseudo-gase", it develops into the variable element of "normal reach", or "missing display" appears (for example, "687"). ”), And it is possible to give a playability as to whether the variable staging ends as it is.

The variable element of "normal reach" is a general term for the variable element of "low speed fluctuation" or the variable element of "pseudo-ream" (hereinafter, "variable element of" low speed fluctuation "or the variable element of" pseudo-ream "", and is "low speed". When the reach formation symbol is stopped and displayed in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 in (sometimes referred to as a fluctuation factor of "variation, etc."), the fluctuation showing whether or not a big hit occurs depending on the fluctuation result of the middle symbol row Z2. It is an element. This "normal reach" variation element is performed for 10 seconds after the "low speed variation, etc." variation element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the variable element of "normal reach" is executed, a pattern that directly displays "missing display", a pattern that directly displays "big hit display", and a variation of "super reach". A pattern that develops into an element, a pattern that develops into a variable element of "special reach", a pattern that once makes a temporary "loss display" appear, and then a pattern that executes a variable element of "re-variation", and once provisional There is a pattern to execute "promotion during fluctuation" after the "15R normal jackpot" is displayed.

The variable element of "super reach" is developed and executed when the variable element of "normal reach" does not stop the "loss display" and the fluctuation of the middle symbol column Z2 is continued, and the "battle" is executed in the main display area Dm. It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit will occur by performing "directing". This "super reach" variable element is performed for 10 seconds after the execution of the "normal reach" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the variable element of "super reach" is executed, a pattern that directly displays "missing display", a pattern that directly displays "big hit display", and a temporary "hit display" are temporarily displayed. There are two patterns, one is to execute the variable element of "re-variation" after the "missing display" is displayed, and the other is to execute the "promotion during fluctuation" after the temporary "15R normal jackpot" is displayed. Has been done.

The variable element of "special reach" is developed and executed when the variable element of "normal reach" does not stop the "loss display" and the fluctuation of the middle symbol column Z2 is continued, and "competition" is performed in the main display area Dm. It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit will occur by performing "directing". This "special reach" variable element is performed for 20 seconds after the execution of the "normal reach" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the variable element of the "special reach" is executed, a pattern that directly displays the "loss display", a pattern that directly displays the "big hit display", and a temporary "hit display" are temporarily displayed. There are two patterns, one is to "re-change" after the "missing display" is displayed, and the other is to execute "promotion during fluctuation" after the temporary "15R normal jackpot" is displayed.

It should be noted that, after the execution of the variable element of "normal reach", it is configured to develop into the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach". When the symbol stops, it may be configured to suddenly develop into a "super reach" variable element or a "special reach" variable element without going through the "normal reach" variable element. Further, the variable element of "special reach" may be configured to be performed after the variable element of "super reach" is executed.

The variable element of "re-variation" is a variable element that develops and is executed after the "missing display" appears once in any of the "reach display", and the "big hit display" appears. The variable element of this "re-variation" is performed for 10 seconds after any "reach display".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the variable element of "re-variation" is executed, the pattern in which the "big hit display" appears and the temporary "15R normal jackpot" are once displayed and then "changing". There is a pattern to execute "promotion" and.

Further, the variable element of this "re-variation" is configured to occur only when the "15R probability variation jackpot" or the "15R normal jackpot" is won. That is, in the case of "loss display", the variable element of "re-variation" is configured not to be executed. This is because the variable element of "re-variation" is a variable element that changes the temporarily stopped "missing display" to one of the "big hit display", so in the case of "missing display" that has not won the big hit. If you go to, there will be a discrepancy in the production. Therefore, the variation element of this "re-variation" is configured so as to be selected only in the probability variation jackpot variation pattern table 202e1 or the normal jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 described later, and not selected in the loss variation pattern table 202e3 described later. There is.

The variable element of "promotion during fluctuation" is developed and executed after the "15R normal jackpot" appears once in any of the "reach display" or "re-variable" variable elements, and the "15R normal jackpot" is changed to "15R normal jackpot". It is a variable element to change to "15R probability change jackpot". This "promotion during fluctuation" variable element is performed for 5 seconds after any "reach display" or "re-variable" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, only the pattern in which the "big hit display" appears after the execution of the variable element of "promotion during fluctuation" is prepared. That is, it is configured so that the "big hit display" is always started after the execution of the variable element of "promotion during fluctuation".

Further, the variable element of this "probability during fluctuation" is configured to occur only when the "15R probability variation jackpot" is won. That is, in the case of winning the "15R normal jackpot" or in the case of "missing display", the variable element of "promotion during fluctuation" is not executed. This is because the variable element of "promotion during fluctuation" is a variable element that changes the temporarily displayed "15R normal jackpot" to "15R probability variable jackpot", so when the "15R normal jackpot" is won. If you go, there will be a discrepancy in the production. Therefore, the variable element of this "promotion during fluctuation" is selected only in the probability variable jackpot variation pattern table 202e1, and is not selected in the normal jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 or the loss variation pattern table 202e3, which will be described later. ..

In this embodiment, in addition to the variable element of "promotion during fluctuation", a "promotion during round" production, which is a promotion production during a big hit, is prepared. In this "round promotion" effect, when the "15R probability change jackpot" is won, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the "15R normal jackpot" is displayed in the variable effect, and the "round promotion" effect is displayed during the jackpot. It is configured to suggest that the jackpot corresponding to the "15R normal jackpot" is changed to the jackpot corresponding to the "15R probability variation jackpot". The execution of this "promotion during round" effect is configured to be performed based on a lottery when the "15R probability variation jackpot" is won in the voice lamp control device 113 described later. The details of this "promotion during the round" production will be described later.

The variable element of the "movie" is performed after the execution of the "slow fluctuation" when the "15R (actual 13R) probability variation jackpot" or the "2R probability variation jackpot" is won, and the "15R (actual 13R) probability variation jackpot" or It is a variable element that makes the "big hit display" corresponding to the "2R probability variable big hit" appear. The fluctuation element of this "movie" is performed for 40 seconds after the "slow fluctuation", and an effect is executed in which a specific character symbol (for example, a premier character) speaks a predetermined message in the entire main display area Dm (shown). figure).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of the "movie", only the pattern in which the "big hit display" corresponding to the "15R (substantially 13R) probability variable jackpot" or the "2R probability variable jackpot" appears is prepared. Has been done. That is, when the "movie" is executed, the "big hit display" of "15R (substantially 13R) probability variation jackpot" or "2R probability variation jackpot" always appears after that.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 11, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 19" for "normal reach only" and "normal reach + re-variation". It is "20-79", "80-89" for "normal reach + promotion during fluctuation", and "90-99" for "normal reach + re-variation + promotion during fluctuation".

That is, in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of probabilistic jackpot, the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach only" is 5%, the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach + re-variation" is 60%, and the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach + promotion during fluctuation" is 10%. , The fluctuation pattern of "normal reach + re-variation + promotion during fluctuation" is set to be selected at a ratio of 10%.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" staging mode selected at the time of the probability variation jackpot, the variation pattern including the variation element of "re-variation" is easily selected (70% of the total), and in particular, the variation of "normal reach + re-variation". The pattern is easy to select (60% of the total). However, by configuring so that "normal reach only" and "normal reach + promotion during fluctuation" that do not include the fluctuation element of "re-variation" are also selected, "15R normal jackpot" or "15R probability variation jackpot" can be selected from any fluctuation pattern. Can provide playability that can be expected.

In the fluctuation pattern table 202e1 for probabilistic jackpot, "E6: Super Reach" includes "Super Reach only" with a total fluctuation time of 25 seconds and "Pseudo-ream + Super Reach" with a total fluctuation time of 35 seconds. "Super reach + re-variation" with a total fluctuation time of 35 seconds, "pseudo-ream + super reach + re-variation" with an overall fluctuation time of 45 seconds, and "super reach + fluctuation" with an overall fluctuation time of 30 seconds. "Medium promotion", "Pseudo-ream + Super reach + Floating promotion" with a total fluctuation time of 40 seconds, and "Super reach + Re-variation + Floating promotion" with a total fluctuation time of 40 seconds. Eight fluctuation patterns of "pseudo-ream + super reach + re-variation + promotion during fluctuation" with a time of 50 seconds are prepared in a selectable manner, and the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are associated with each fluctuation pattern. ing.

In the example shown in FIG. 11, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E6: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "Super Reach only" and "Pseudo-ream + Super Reach". "10-29", "30-49" for "super reach + re-variation", "50-79" for "pseudo-ream + super reach + re-variation", "super reach + changing" "80-84" for "promotion", "85-89" for "pseudo-ream + super reach + variable promotion", "90-94" for "super reach + re-variation + variable promotion" , "Pseudo-ren + Super reach + Re-variation + Promotion during fluctuation" is "95-99".

That is, in the "super reach" staging mode at the time of "15R probability variation jackpot", the fluctuation pattern of "super reach only" is 10%, the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-ren + super reach" is 20%, and "super reach + re-variation". 20% of the fluctuation pattern, 30% of the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-ren + super reach + re-variation", 5% of the fluctuation pattern of "super reach + promotion during fluctuation", "pseudo-ren + super reach + promotion during fluctuation" The fluctuation pattern of is 5%, the fluctuation pattern of "super reach + re-variation + promotion during fluctuation" is 5%, and the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-ream + super reach + re-variation + promotion during fluctuation" is 5%. Is set to be done.

Therefore, in the "super reach" staging mode selected at the time of "15R probability variation jackpot", the variation pattern including the variation element of "re-variation" is easily selected (60% of the total), and in particular, "pseudo-ream +". The fluctuation pattern of "super reach + re-variation" is easy to select (30% of the total). However, by configuring so that "super reach only" or "super reach + promotion during fluctuation" that does not include the variable element of "re-variation" is selected, "15R normal jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot" can be selected from any fluctuation pattern. It is possible to provide playability that can be expected to be "15R probability change jackpot".

In the variation pattern table 202e1 for probabilistic jackpot, "E7: Special reach" includes "special reach only" with an overall variation time of 35 seconds and "pseudo-ream + special reach" with an overall variation time of 45 seconds. "Special reach + re-variation" with a total variation time of 45 seconds, "pseudo-ream + special reach + re-variation" with an overall variation time of 55 seconds, and "special reach + variation" with an overall variation time of 40 seconds. "Medium promotion", "Pseudo-ream + Special reach + Floating promotion" with a total fluctuation time of 50 seconds, and "Special reach + Re-variation + Floating promotion" with a total fluctuation time of 50 seconds. Eight fluctuation patterns of "pseudo-ream + special reach + re-variation + promotion during fluctuation" with a time of 60 seconds are prepared in a selectable manner, and the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are associated with each fluctuation pattern. ing.

In the example shown in FIG. 11, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E7: special reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 19" for "special reach only" and "pseudo-ream + special reach". "20-49", "50-59" for "special reach + re-variation", "60-79" for "pseudo-ream + special reach + re-variation", "special reach + changing" "80-84" for "promotion", "85-89" for "pseudo-ream + special reach + variable promotion", "90-94" for "special reach + re-variation + variable promotion" , "95-99" for "pseudo-ream + special reach + re-variation + promotion during fluctuation".

That is, in the "special reach" production mode at the time of "15R probability variation jackpot", the fluctuation pattern of "special reach only" is 20%, the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-ren + special reach" is 30%, and "special reach + re-variation". The fluctuation pattern of is 10%, the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-ren + special reach + re-variation" is 20%, the fluctuation pattern of "special reach + promotion during fluctuation" is 5%, and the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-ren + special reach + promotion during fluctuation" The fluctuation pattern of is 5%, the fluctuation pattern of "special reach + re-variation + promotion during fluctuation" is 5%, and the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-ream + special reach + re-variation + promotion during fluctuation" is 5%. Is set to be done.

Therefore, in the "special reach" staging mode selected at the time of "15R probability variation jackpot", it is easy to select a variation pattern that does not include the variation element of "re-variation" (60% of the total), and in particular, "pseudo-ream". The fluctuation pattern of "+ special reach" is easy to select (30% of the total). However, by configuring so that "special reach + re-variation" and "special reach + promotion during fluctuation" including the fluctuation element of "re-variation" are also selected, "15R normal jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot" can be selected from any fluctuation pattern. It is possible to provide playability that can be expected to be a "15R probability change jackpot".

In the variation pattern table 202e1 for the probability variation jackpot, only one variation pattern of the "movie" whose total variation time is 50 seconds is prepared for "E8: special variation". In the example shown in FIG. 11, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E8: special fluctuation" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 99" with respect to "movie", and only "movie" is used. It is set to be selectable. That is, when the stop type of the jackpot is "15R (substantially 13R) probability variation jackpot" or "2R probability variation jackpot", "movie" is always selected as the fluctuation pattern.

When the "movie" is selected in the main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine a detailed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the "movie". In the pachinko machine 10, as a detailed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the "movie", for example, while displaying characters such as "chicken" or "girl" in the small areas Ds1 and Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81, the final pattern is displayed. A variation pattern in which the third symbol stops at a specific symbol (for example, "341"), a variation pattern in which the third symbol finally stops at a specific symbol due to lighting or blinking of a specific lamp, etc. Is included.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the fluctuation pattern table 202e2 for normal jackpot will be described. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the fluctuation pattern table 202e2 for normal jackpot stored in the ROM 202.

Similar to the probability variation jackpot variation pattern table 202e1, the normal jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 shown in FIG. 12 is divided into groups (groups) based on the selected staging mode. Specifically, as the effect mode, "E5: normal reach" referred to when the "normal reach" effect mode is determined, and "E6: super" referred to when the "super reach" effect mode is determined. It is divided into "reach" and "E7: special reach", which is referred to when the "special reach" production mode is determined. Then, the possible values of the variable type counter CS1 are associated with each of the divided groups.

In this normal jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, a group for "E8: special variation" is not provided. In this embodiment, since "E8: special fluctuation" is a fluctuation pattern dedicated to "15R (substantially 13R) probability variation jackpot" or "2R probability variation jackpot", a "probability fluctuation state" is given after the jackpot ends. If a group for "E8: special fluctuation" is provided in the fluctuation pattern table 202e2 for the normal jackpot, which is referred to when the "15R normal jackpot" is given without the "time reduction state", there is a discrepancy in the production. This is because

As described above, when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a value that becomes a jackpot (big hit random number value), the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is selected. The stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the stop pattern table 202d, and the effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, when the jackpot type is "15R normal jackpot", the group (group) to be referred to in the normal jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 is determined based on the effect mode. In the group (group) of the fluctuation pattern table 202e2 for normal jackpot, the fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the holding area is used as the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect held in the holding area. It is determined.

In the fluctuation pattern table 202e2 for normal jackpot, "E5: normal reach" has two fluctuations, "normal reach only" with a total fluctuation time of 15 seconds and "normal reach + re-variation" with a total fluctuation time of 25 seconds. Patterns are prepared so as to be selectable, and possible values of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 12, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "normal reach only" and "normal reach + re-variation". It is "10 to 99".

That is, in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of a normal jackpot, the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach only" is set to be selected at a ratio of 10%, and the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach + re-variation" is set to be selected at a ratio of 90%.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" effect mode that is normally selected at the time of a big hit, the variation pattern of "normal reach + re-variation" is easily selected (90% of the total). However, by configuring so that "normal reach only" is also selected, it is possible to provide playability that can be expected to be a big hit from any fluctuation pattern.

In the fluctuation pattern table 202e2 for normal jackpot, "E6: Super Reach" includes "Super Reach only" with a total fluctuation time of 25 seconds and "Pseudo-ream + Super Reach" with a total fluctuation time of 35 seconds. Four fluctuation patterns are available for selection: "super reach + re-variation" with a total fluctuation time of 35 seconds and "pseudo-ream + super reach + re-variation" with a total fluctuation time of 45 seconds. Possible values of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with the pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 12, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E6: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "Super Reach only" and "Pseudo-ream + Super Reach". On the other hand, it is "10 to 29", "30 to 59" for "super reach + revariation", and "60 to 99" for "pseudo-ream + super reach + revariation".

That is, in the "super reach" production mode at the time of "15R normal jackpot", the fluctuation pattern of "super reach only" is 10%, the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-ren + super reach" is 20%, and "super reach + re-variation". The fluctuation pattern of is set to be selected at a ratio of 30%, and the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-ream + super reach + re-variation" is set to be selected at a ratio of 40%.

Therefore, in the "super reach" staging mode selected at the time of "15R normal jackpot", the fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation element of "re-variation" is easily selected (70% of the total), and in particular, "pseudo-ream +". The fluctuation pattern of "super reach + re-variation" is easy to select (40% of the total). However, by configuring so that "super reach only" and "pseudo-ream + super reach" that do not include the variable element of "re-variation" are selected, it provides playability that can be expected to be a big hit from any variation pattern. can.

In the fluctuation pattern table 202e2 for normal jackpot, "E7: Special Reach" includes "Special Reach only" with a total fluctuation time of 35 seconds and "Pseudo-ren + Special Reach" with a total fluctuation time of 45 seconds. Four fluctuation patterns are available for selection: "special reach + re-variation" with a total fluctuation time of 45 seconds and "pseudo-ream + special reach + re-variation" with a total fluctuation time of 55 seconds. Possible values of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with the pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 12, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E7: special reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 29" for "special reach only" and "pseudo-ream + special reach". It is "30 to 69", "70 to 79" for "special reach + revariation", and "80 to 99" for "pseudo-ream + special reach + revariation".

That is, in the "special reach" production mode at the time of "15R normal jackpot", the fluctuation pattern of "special reach only" is 30%, the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-ren + special reach" is 40%, and "special reach + re-variation". The fluctuation pattern of is set to 10%, and the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-ream + special reach + re-variation" is set to be selected at a ratio of 20%.

Therefore, in the "special reach" staging mode selected at the time of "15R normal jackpot", it is easy to select a fluctuation pattern that does not include the fluctuation element of "re-variation" (70% of the total), and in particular, "pseudo-ream". The fluctuation pattern of "+ special reach" is easy to select (40% of the total). However, by configuring so that "special reach + re-variation" and "pseudo-ream + special reach + re-variation" including the fluctuation element of "re-variation" are also selected, a game that can be expected to be a big hit from any fluctuation pattern. Can provide sex.

The fluctuation pattern at the time of the probabilistic jackpot and the normal jackpot is determined by using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, but it may be configured to be determined by using a plurality of other fluctuation type counters. For example, whether or not to add a notice effect for notifying the start of a jackpot or "reach display" before or during the fluctuation effect may be determined by another fluctuation type counter, or when the reach is established. , The number of symbols to be shifted and stopped (for example, front-rear loss by one symbol) may be determined by another variable type counter.

Further, in the variation pattern table 202e1 for probability variation jackpot, a group dedicated to "15R (substantial 13R) probability variation jackpot" or "2R probability variation jackpot" was provided, but in this pachinko machine 10, "15R (substantial 13R) probability variation jackpot" or In the case of "2R probability variation jackpot", only the fluctuation pattern of "movie" is selected, so there is no dedicated group for "15R (actual 13R) probability variation jackpot" or "2R probability variation jackpot", and the variation for probability variation jackpot. In the pattern table 202e1, only the correspondence between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation pattern in the case of “15R probability variation jackpot” may be specified. In this case, when the jackpot type is "15R (actual 13R) probability variation jackpot" or "2R probability variation jackpot", the variation pattern table 202e1 for probability variation jackpot is not referred to, and "movie" is determined as the variation pattern. You may.

Further, in this pachinko machine 10, only "movie" is selected when "15R (substantial 13R) probability variation jackpot" or "2R probability variation jackpot" is obtained, but "15R (substantial 13R) probability variation jackpot" or "2R". In the case of "probability change jackpot", one fluctuation pattern may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns. In this case, even in a group dedicated to "15R (real 13R) probability variation jackpot" or "2R probability variation jackpot" like the group of "15R (common) jackpot", "15R (substantial 13R) probability variation jackpot" or "2R" The variation type counter CS1 is associated with the variation pattern selected in the case of "probability change jackpot", and the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in a certain hold area is assigned to the hold area. It may be determined as a variation pattern in the reserved variation effect.

Next, the variation pattern table 202e3 for loss will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the variation pattern table 202e3 for loss stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 13, the loss variation pattern table 202e3 is grouped based on the selected staging mode.

Specifically, as the effect mode, the "E0: non-reach (shortened)" effect mode referred to when the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode is determined and the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode are determined. The "E1: non-reach (normal)" effect mode to be referred to when the "E1: normal reach" effect mode is determined, the "E2: normal reach" effect mode to be referred to when the "normal reach" effect mode is determined, and the "super reach" effect mode are determined. It is divided into "E3: Super Reach", which is referred to in the case of "E3: Super Reach", and "E4: Special Reach", which is referred to when the "Special Reach" production mode is determined. Then, the possible values of the variable type counter CS1 are associated with each of the divided groups.

When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in a certain hold area is not a value that becomes a big hit (big hit random number value), that is, a value that becomes a loss, the game state at that time and the time point. The stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the number of reserved balls in, and the effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, the group (group) to be referred to in the variation pattern table 202e3 for loss is determined based on the effect mode. In the group (group) of the fluctuation pattern table 202e3 for loss, the fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the holding area is determined as the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect held in the holding area. Will be done.

In the loss variation pattern table 202e3, only one variation pattern of "non-reach (shortening) only" with an overall variation time of 3 seconds is prepared for "E0: non-reach (shortening)". In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in “E0: non-reach (shortening)” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “0 to 99” with respect to “non-reach (shortening) only”. It is set so that only "non-reach (shortened) only" can be selected. That is, when the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode is selected in the loss pattern table 202e3, "non-reach (shortened)" is used for all the values ("0 to 99") that the variable type counter CS1 can take. Only "is associated.

In the loss variation pattern table 202e3, only one variation pattern of "non-reach (normal) only" with an overall variation time of 10 seconds is prepared for "E1: non-reach (normal)". In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in “E1: non-reach (normal)” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “0 to 99” with respect to “non-reach (normal) only”. It is set so that only "non-reach (normal) only" can be selected. That is, when the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode is selected in the loss pattern table 202e3, "non-reach (normal)" is used for all the values ("0 to 99") that the variation type counter CS1 can take. Only "is associated.

In the loss variation pattern table 202e3, only one variation pattern of "normal reach only" with an overall variation time of 15 seconds is prepared for "E2: normal reach". In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E0: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 99" with respect to "normal reach only", and only "normal reach only". Is set to be selectable. That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the loss pattern table 202e3, "normal reach only" is associated with all possible values ("0 to 99") of the variation type counter CS1. ..

In the fluctuation pattern table 202e3 for loss, "E3: Super Reach" includes "Super Reach only" with a total fluctuation time of 25 seconds and "Pseudo-ream + Super Reach" with a total fluctuation time of 35 seconds. Two fluctuation patterns are prepared so as to be selectable, and possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 79" for "Super Reach only" and "Pseudo-ream + Super Reach". On the other hand, it is "80 to 99".

That is, in the "super reach" staging mode at the time of loss, the fluctuation pattern of "super reach only" is set to be selected at a ratio of 80%, and the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-ream + super reach" is set to be selected at a ratio of 20%. There is. Therefore, in the "super reach" staging mode selected at the time of loss, the variation pattern of "super reach only" is easily selected (80%).

In the variation pattern table 202e3 for loss, "E4: special reach" includes "special reach only" with an overall variation time of 35 seconds and "pseudo-ream + special reach" with an overall variation time of 45 seconds. Two fluctuation patterns are prepared so as to be selectable, and possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: special reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 89" for "special reach only" and "pseudo-ream + special reach". On the other hand, it is "90 to 99".

That is, in the "special reach" production mode at the time of loss, the fluctuation pattern of "special reach only" is set to be selected at a ratio of 90%, and the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-ream + special reach" is set to be selected at a ratio of 10%. There is. Therefore, in the "special reach" staging mode selected at the time of loss, the variation pattern of "special reach only" is easily selected (90%).

In this way, when a big hit is won, by configuring it so that a relatively long fluctuation pattern can be easily selected, the entertainment of the game is improved by enhancing the production content of the fluctuation production in which the big hit occurs. be able to. In addition, if the jackpot is not won, that is, if there is a loss, by configuring the configuration so that a relatively short fluctuation pattern can be easily selected, the effect content of the variation effect at the time of loss can be shortened and the variation effect can be achieved. It can be digested efficiently.

The fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is selected by using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, but it may be selected by using a plurality of fluctuation type counters in combination (selecting whether or not to display a notice, etc.).

Returning to FIG. 7, the second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0 to 250", reaches the maximum value (that is, "250"), and then returns to "0". Has been done. Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4.

In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entry port (through gate) 67. Obtained when it is done. The number of random numbers to be won is 149, and the range is "5 to 153". That is, when the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 153", it is determined to be a hit, and the second symbol display device 83 has a symbol "○" as a stop symbol (second symbol). Along with the lighting display, the electric accessory of the first ball entry port 64 is activated, and the first ball entry port 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = "0 to 250"), and is used for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 26). It is updated once and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 34).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery or dynamic in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is performed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting the display and variation effect, and drawing the display result in the second symbol display device 83.

Next, the jackpot control table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot control table 202f stored in the ROM 202.

The jackpot control table 202f shown in FIG. 14 is referred to at the time of jackpot winning, and the jackpot opening / closing table 202g that defines the opening / closing pattern of the jackpot 65a is selected based on the jackpot type selected at the time of jackpot winning. The opening time and ending time of the jackpot are selected based on the number of consecutive jackpots during a specific period.

That is, when a jackpot is won, a jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type (“15R probability variation jackpot”, “15R normal jackpot”, “15R (actual 13R) probability variation jackpot”, or “2R probability variation jackpot”) The mouth opening / closing table 202g is selected. In addition, based on whether the jackpot is a jackpot at the time of "renso" or a jackpot at the "first time", the opening time from the start of the jackpot state to the opening of the first jackpot 65a and the jackpot. The ending time from the closing of the last big winning opening 65a to the end of the big hit state is selected.

In addition, "ream villa" means the case where one of the big hits is won again in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state". Therefore, if the jackpot is won in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state", it corresponds to the "renso" and the "normal game state" after the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" is completed. If you win any of the jackpots in "", it does not correspond to "Renso" but corresponds to the "first time" jackpot.

The jackpot control table 202f is classified based on the selected jackpot type. Specifically, it is referred to when "15R (common) jackpot" is selected and "15R (common) jackpot" is selected and "15R (substantially 13R) probability variable jackpot" is selected. It is divided into "15R (substantially 13R)" and "2R probability variation" which is referred to when "2R probability variation jackpot" is selected. Then, the opening time and the ending time are associated with each of the divisions based on whether the jackpot is the "first time" jackpot or the jackpot in the "renso".

In the jackpot control table 202f shown in FIG. 14, the "15R (common)" is associated with the "15R table" of the jackpot opening / closing table 202g. Further, as the opening time, "10 seconds" is associated with the "first time" jackpot, and "5 seconds" is associated with the jackpot in the "renso". Further, as the ending time, "10 seconds" is associated with the "first time" jackpot, and "5 seconds" is associated with the jackpot in the "renso".

That is, when the "15R (common) jackpot" is won, if it is the "first" jackpot, both the opening time and the ending time are set to "10 seconds", and the opening effect and the opening effect are performed for a relatively long time. While it is configured to execute the ending effect, if it is a big hit in "Renso", both the opening time and the ending time are set to "5 seconds", and the opening effect and the ending effect are set for a relatively short time. Is configured to run.

In addition, during the opening time of the "15R (common) jackpot" of the "first time", as an opening effect, a notification image suggesting the content of the "music selection" effect and a decision button 22a or a change button in the "music selection" effect are displayed. An image showing the operation method of 22b (hereinafter, a notification image suggesting the content of the "music selection" effect and an image showing the operation method of the decision button 22a or the change button 22b in the "music selection" effect are collectively referred to as ". It is configured to display "tutorial image").

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after displaying the "tutorial image" of the "music selection" production and the "music playback" production using the opening time of the "15R (common) jackpot", in the first round of the jackpot. It is configured to execute the "music selection" effect and make the player understand the effect content of the "music selection" effect.

For example, if a player who has played the model for the first time wins the jackpot for the first time and does not understand the meaning of the "music selection" effect and the "music playback" effect, the "music selection" effect is suddenly displayed. Even so, the player may not be able to understand the content of the production and may not be able to enjoy the interests of the "music selection" production and the "music playback" production. Also, in the jackpot production, we want to enhance the interest of the game by executing the "music playback" production selected by the player for as long as possible, but due to the composition of the production, "music" in any part of the jackpot. If the "selection" effect is not performed, the "music reproduction" effect cannot be executed in the first place. Therefore, in the "first time" jackpot, in the opening effect before the "music selection" effect is executed, the tutorial image is suggested to the player, and the player is made to recognize the meaning of the effect to be executed from now on. It is configured to make the player recognize the actual operation method in the "music selection" production. By configuring in this way, the operation time by the player in the "music selection" production is sufficiently secured, and the player can fully enjoy each production while effectively utilizing the time of each production. It is possible to surely give the player the interest of the game that is configured and assumed at the time of development.

In addition, the opening time of the "15R (common) jackpot" in the "renso" is configured to display a tutorial image as a short opening effect, similar to the "first time" "15R (common) jackpot". However, the opening time of the "15R (common) jackpot" in the "renso" is shorter than the opening time of the "first time" "15R (common) jackpot". Therefore, the tutorial image in "15R (common) jackpot" in "Renso" is more concise than the tutorial image in "15R (common) jackpot" in "first time", and it seems to be completed within the opening time. The content is configured to display a simple tutorial image. By configuring in this way, a simple tutorial image is displayed even in the "15R (common) jackpot" in the "renso", and in the production related to the jackpot, the production is performed without any discomfort such as interruption in the middle. At the same time, it is possible to configure the player so that he / she can fully enjoy each effect, and to surely give the player the interest of the game assumed at the time of development.

In addition, in the opening production of the jackpot in "Renso", the (simple) tutorial image may be configured not to be displayed. The player may have already seen the tutorial image at the time of the "first time" jackpot and may be aware of the operation method in the "music selection" production, and the (simple) tutorial image at the time of the jackpot during the "renso". If is displayed, there is a risk that the player will be awakened due to the superimposition of the effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from awakening by configuring the tutorial image not to be displayed at the time of the big hit in the "renso".

In addition, during the ending time of the "15R (common) jackpot" of the "first time", an image prompting the return operation of the card or the like (for example, a screen displaying a message "Please remove the card" is displayed as an ending effect. Hereinafter, it is configured to display a “card return operation image”). This is a state in which a player is given a certain game value in the "15R (common) jackpot", so that continuous game with a holding ball is possible in the subsequent game. For this reason, the player stops the game by lending the ball after the end of the "15R (common) jackpot" of the "first time" and shifts to the holding ball game, but depending on the timing of the jackpot, it is thrown into the card unit. There may be a balance on the cards you have. Therefore, in the ending effect of the "15R (common) jackpot" of the "first time", the card return operation image is displayed to prevent the player from forgetting to return the card or the like.

In addition, the card return operation image is not displayed in the ending effect of the jackpot in "Renso". It is assumed that the player has already returned the card or the like by seeing the image prompting the return operation of the card or the like at the time of the "first time" big hit. Therefore, if the card return operation image is displayed many times in the ending effect of the jackpot in the "renso", the superimposed effect may be executed and the player may be awakened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being awakened by configuring the card return operation image not to be displayed at the time of the big hit in the "renso".

In the jackpot control table 202f, the "2R probability variation" is associated with the "2R table" of the jackpot opening / closing table 202g. Further, as the opening time, "4 seconds" is associated with the "first time" jackpot, and "2 seconds" is associated with the jackpot in the "renso". Further, as the ending time, "4 seconds" is associated with the "first time" jackpot, and "2 seconds" is associated with the jackpot in the "renso".

That is, when the "2R probability variation jackpot" is won, if it is the "first time" jackpot, both the opening time and the ending time are set to "4 seconds", and the opening effect and the ending effect are set for a relatively long time. On the other hand, if it is a big hit in "Renso", both the opening time and the ending time are set to "2 seconds", and the opening effect and the ending effect are executed for a relatively short time. It is configured to be.

In the present embodiment, the "2R probability variation jackpot" is configured to have a smaller number of times (the number of rounds) that the jackpot 65a is opened than the "15R (common) jackpot", so that the game value obtained by the player can be obtained. Is also set low. Therefore, if the long opening time and ending time are set when the "2R probability variation jackpot" with a small obtained game value is executed, a long effect is executed even though the obtained game value is small. As a result, there is a risk that the game will be delayed and the player will be awakened. Therefore, by setting the opening time and ending time of the "2R probability variation jackpot" to be shorter than the "15R (common) jackpot", the "2R probability variation jackpot" can be quickly digested and the player can be prevented from awakening. It is configured to do. In addition, by setting the opening time and ending time of the "2R probability change jackpot" in "Renso" to be even shorter than that of the "first time" "2R probability variation jackpot", the game can be returned to the game state where the next jackpot can be expected immediately. By doing so, it is configured to prevent the player from being awakened without delaying the game.

In the jackpot control table 202f, the "15R (substantially 13R)" is associated with the "2R + 13R table" of the jackpot opening / closing table 202g. Further, as the opening time, "4 seconds" is associated with the "first time" jackpot, and "2 seconds" is associated with the jackpot in the "renso". Further, as the ending time, "10 seconds" is associated with the "first time" jackpot, and "5 seconds" is associated with the jackpot in the "renso".

That is, in the case of winning the "15R (actual 13R) jackpot", if it is the "first time" jackpot, "4 seconds" is set as the opening time and "10 seconds" is set as the ending time, and the opening time is set. At the time, the same opening effect as the "2R probability variation jackpot" of the "first time" is executed, while at the ending time, the same ending effect as the "15R (common) jackpot" of the "first time" is executed. Also, if it is a big hit in "Renso", "2 seconds" is set as the opening time and "5 seconds" is set as the ending time, and "2R probability change" in "Renso" is set as the opening time. While the same opening effect as "Big hit" is executed, the same ending effect as "15R common big hit" in "Renso" is executed at the ending time.

Therefore, by configuring the opening effect of "15R (actual 13R) probability variation jackpot" and the opening effect of "2R probability variation jackpot" with the same contents, the player can see "15R (actual 13R)" at the stage of the opening effect. It is configured so that it is not possible to distinguish between "probability change jackpot" and "2R probability variation jackpot". In addition, by configuring the ending effect of "15R (actual 13R) probability variation jackpot" and the ending effect of "15R (common) jackpot" with the same content, a certain game value is given and a ball game can be held. In the "15R (substantially 13R) probability variation jackpot" and "15R (common) jackpot", the card return operation image can be displayed in the ending effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening time and the ending time of each jackpot are different depending on whether the jackpot is the "first time" jackpot or the jackpot in the "renso". This is the "first" jackpot, as described above, the jackpot in the "normal gaming state", which is the timing at which the player obtains the jackpot for the first time from a non-advantageous state and changes to an advantageous state. Therefore, in order to allow the player to enjoy the pleasure based on the "first time" jackpot, the opening time is set long so that the player is immersed in the joy of the opening effect. Also, in the "first time" jackpot, the player often plays the game with cash owned by the player instead of holding the ball, and depending on the timing of the jackpot, the balance is left on the card etc. inserted in the card unit. Sometimes it exists. Therefore, in the ending effect of the jackpot, the card return operation image is displayed to prevent the player from forgetting to return the card or the like.

On the other hand, the "15R (actual 13R) probability variation jackpot" in the "renso" is at least the second jackpot in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", and is advantageous again from the advantageous state for the player. It is an event in which the state continues. Therefore, the opening time and the ending time are set shorter than those of the "first time" jackpot for the purpose of quickly digesting the jackpot and quickly achieving a further "renso". In addition, the jackpot in "Renso" is played by the player with a ball, and it is probable that there are cards etc. in the card unit by the card return operation image by the ending effect at the time of the "first time" jackpot. Is low. Therefore, as with the "15R (common) jackpot", there is little need to display the card return operation image again for the "15R (substantially 13R) probability variation jackpot", so the display of the image is omitted and the ending time is shortened. It is configured as follows.

It should be noted that the "music selection" effect may be configured to be performed during another jackpot period or during a variable effect instead of the first round of the jackpot. Specifically, for example, the tutorial image may be displayed at the opening time and the "music selection" effect may be executed to play the music selected by the player from the first round of the jackpot. Further, the player may select a mode (background) in the variable effect, and the music corresponding to the mode may be played at the time of a big hit.

In addition, the opening time of the jackpot in "Renso" was set short, but when performing "music selection" production at the opening time, the opening time is configured to be the same length as the "first time" opening time. You may. Further, the opening time may be set longer only when the number of songs in the "music selection" effect increases.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the large winning opening opening / closing table 202g will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a large winning opening opening / closing table 202g stored in the ROM 202.

The large winning opening opening / closing table 202g shown in FIG. 15 is a table referred to by the MPU 201 for setting the opening / closing pattern of the large winning opening 65a at the time of a big hit. At the time of winning the jackpot, the MPU 201 selects one of the opening / closing patterns specified in the jackpot opening / closing table 202g based on the jackpot type of the jackpot, and based on the selected opening / closing pattern, the jackpot during the jackpot wins. Controls the opening or closing of the mouth 65a.

That is, when a jackpot is won, one of the opening / closing patterns specified in the jackpot opening / closing table 202g is selected based on the jackpot type of the jackpot, and the jackpot is based on the selected opening / closing pattern. The maximum opening time of 65a and the closing time (so-called interval time) of the big winning opening 65a from the closing of the big winning opening 65a to the opening again are set, and a big hit is made based on the set contents. The opening or closing of the large winning opening 65a is driven and controlled by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

The big winning opening opening / closing table 202g is classified for each table corresponding to the big hit type. Specifically, it is selected for the "15R table" selected at the time of "15R (common) jackpot", for the "2R table" selected at the time of "2R probability variation jackpot", and at the time of "15R (actual 13R) probability variation jackpot". It is divided into those for "2R + 13R table" to be used. Then, for each of the divisions, the "number of rounds" indicating the number of openings (number of rounds) of the large winning opening 65a, the "opening time" indicating the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 65a, and the closing of the large winning opening 65a. It is associated with the time from one to the next opening, that is, the "closing time" indicating the closing time of the large winning opening 65a.

In the large winning opening opening / closing table 202g shown in FIG. 15, the "15R table" has "1 to 15" as the "number of rounds", "29.5 seconds (long opening pattern)" as the "opening time", and "closing time". (Long closure pattern) "is associated with" 2 seconds ".

That is, when the "15R table" is selected, in all the rounds (1 round to 15 rounds) in the jackpot (that is, "15R probability variation jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot"), the big winning opening 65a The maximum opening time is set to "29.5 seconds", and the closing time between the opening of 1 of the large winning opening 65a and the next opening (hereinafter, the opening of 1 of the large winning opening 65a and the next opening) The closing time between them may be referred to as "interval time") is set to "2 seconds".

Therefore, when the "15R probability variation jackpot" or the "15R normal jackpot" is won, the opening effect is "10 seconds" by the above-mentioned jackpot control table 202f and the jackpot opening / closing table 202g of this "15R table". Alternatively, it is executed for "5 seconds", the large winning opening 65a is opened for a maximum of "29.5 seconds", and the large winning opening 65a is closed for "2 seconds" between the opening of one of the large winning openings 65a and the next opening. , The ending effect is executed for "10 seconds" or "5 seconds".

In the present embodiment, if 10 balls are won (detected) in the large winning opening 65a while the large winning opening 65a is open, the large winning opening 65a is set even before the maximum opening time is reached. Is configured to close. Therefore, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 65a is configured to reach only when the number of winning balls is less than 10 after the large winning opening 65a is opened.

In the large winning opening opening / closing table 202g shown in FIG. 15, the "2R table" has "1.2" as the "number of rounds", "2 seconds (short opening pattern)" as the "opening time", and "closing time". "1 second (short closure pattern)" is associated.

That is, when the "2R table" is selected, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 65a is "2" in all the rounds (1st round and 2nd round) in the big hit (that is, "2R probability variation big hit"). In addition to being set to "seconds", the interval time between the first and second rounds of the big winning opening 65a is set to "1 second".

Therefore, when the "2R probability variation jackpot" is won, the opening effect is executed for "4 seconds" or "2 seconds" by the above-mentioned jackpot control table 202f and the jackpot opening / closing table 202g of this "2R table". The big winning opening 65a is opened for a maximum of "2 seconds", the big winning opening 65a is closed for "1 second" between the opening of the first round and the opening of the second round, and the ending effect is "4 seconds" or It is executed for "2 seconds".

In the large winning opening opening / closing table 202g shown in FIG. 15, the "2R + 13R table" is divided into a group of "1.2" and a group of "3 to 15" as the "number of rounds".

In the group of "1.2" in the "2R + 13R table", "2 seconds (short opening pattern)" is associated with "opening time" and "1 second (short closing pattern)" is associated with "closing time". Further, in the group of "3 to 15" in the "2R + 13R table", "29.5 seconds (long opening pattern)" is associated with "opening time" and "2 seconds (long closing pattern)" is associated with "closing time". Has been done.

That is, when "2R + 13R table" is selected, the maximum opening time of the first and second round big winning openings 65a in the big hit (that is, "15R (actual 13R) probability variation big hit") is "2". In addition to being set to "seconds", the interval time between the first and second rounds is set to "1 second". In addition, in the jackpot, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 65a of the third and subsequent rounds (3rd to 15th rounds) is set to "29.5 seconds", and the large winning opening 65a of the second and subsequent rounds is set. The interval time between the opening of 1 and the next opening is set to "2 seconds".

Therefore, when the "15R (substantially 13R) probability variation jackpot" is won, the opening effect is "4 seconds" or "4 seconds" by the above-mentioned jackpot control table 202f and the jackpot opening / closing table 202g of this "2R + 13R table". "2 seconds" is executed, the large winning opening 65a between the first and second rounds is opened for a maximum of "2 seconds", and the large winning opening 65a is opened between the opening of the first round and the opening of the second round. The big winning opening 65a after the third round is closed for a maximum of "29.5 seconds", and the big winning opening 65a is opened between the opening of 1 of the big winning opening 65a after the second round and the next opening. Is closed for "2 seconds".

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the "15R (substantially 13R) probability variation jackpot", the first round and the second round are controlled in the same manner as the opening / closing pattern of the jackpot 65a in the "2R probability variation jackpot", and the third round. After the first round, by performing the same control as the opening / closing pattern of the big winning opening 65a in "15R (common) big hit", it is "15R (actual 13R) probability change big hit" at the time of execution of the first round and the second round. It is configured so that it cannot be recognized by the player, and at the time of execution after the third round, it is configured so that the player can recognize that it is a "15R (actual 13R) probability variation jackpot", as if the game value suddenly increased. It is designed to enhance the fun of the game by performing various productions.

The opening pattern of the large winning opening 65a may be configured to adopt an opening pattern other than the above-mentioned contents. Specifically, for example, a long opening pattern may be executed at the beginning of a round in a jackpot (for example, 1 to 10 rounds), and then a short opening pattern may be executed in subsequent rounds (for example, after 11 rounds). However, in a big hit with a small number of rounds (for example, 5 rounds), all may be executed so as to open in a long opening pattern. Further, an opening pattern may be provided in which the short opening pattern and the long opening pattern of the large winning opening 65a are mixed in one round.

Further, the closing pattern of the large winning opening 65a may be configured to adopt a closing pattern other than the above-mentioned contents. Specifically, for example, the closing pattern may be configured to be executed at a random time (for example, 2 seconds and 1 second are randomly selected) instead of a fixed closing time, or a predetermined closing time may be used. May be configured to be executed alternately (for example, 2 seconds and 1 second alternately).

Returning to FIG. 6, the explanation will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer 203b shown in FIG. 7, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and inputs / outputs. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as outputs (Input / Output; hereinafter abbreviated as "I / O") are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 34) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 33) at the time of turning on the power. It should be noted that the non-maskable interrupt (hereinafter abbreviated as "NMI") terminal of the MPU201 is input with the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The RAM 203 further has at least a hold ball number counter 203a, a hold ball storage area 203c, and a hold ball execution area 203d.

The reserved ball number counter 203a enters the first ball entry port 64 (hereinafter referred to as the first ball entry) detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) that is periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. The dynamic display performed by the first symbol display device 37 (variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) is suspended based on the entry of the game ball into the mouth 64 as a "starting prize"). It is a counter that counts the number of balls (waiting number) up to 4 times. The reserved ball number counter 203a is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process (S813 in FIG. 33) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display (variation effect) increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (see S203 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, the reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (variation effect) is executed (see S305 in FIG. 28).

The value of the hold ball number counter 203a (that is, the hold ball number) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command (see S205 in FIG. 27). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the start winning is detected and the hold ball number counter 203a is incremented by 1.

The voice lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of reserved balls itself of the dynamic display (variation effect) held by the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command. Thereby, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of hold times of the dynamic display (variation effect) can be managed without accessing the main control device 110. Further, every time a start winning is detected, the main control device 110 sends a hold ball number command to the voice lamp control device 113 to hold the dynamic display (variation effect) managed by the voice lamp control device 113. Even if the number of balls deviates from the number of reserved balls in the actual dynamic display (variation effect) held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the next received hold ball number command is used. , The deviation can be corrected.

The voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 each time the hold ball number managed internally changes. The display control device 114 displays the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control device 110 transmits a hold ball number command to the voice lamp control device 113, not only the value of the hold ball number counter 203a added by 1 in the hold ball number command but also the value of the hold ball number counter 203a added by 1. , The first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection acquired from the counter buffer 203b (see FIG. 7) in accordance with the start winning that triggered the addition of the reserved ball number counter 203a. Each value of the counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is also included.

That is, when there is a start prize, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203b by the main control device 110. Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command.

In the voice lamp control device 113, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 transmitted by the hold ball number command is changed based on the respective values. It pre-reads before the effect is executed, and determines what happens to the variable effect (whether it is a big hit, what happens to the variable time, etc.) before executing the variable effect. Then, based on the determination result by the look-ahead, it is possible to determine the execution of various effects, and to determine the effect contents and the execution time (timing) of the "pending change notice".

It should be noted that the reserved ball number command indicating the number of reserved balls in the variable effect and the command indicating the value of the random number counter C1 or the like per first may be separately transmitted. As a command indicating the value of the random number counter C1 or the like for the first hit, which is different from the hold ball number command, the hold ball number command is generated at the timing of the ball entering the first entry port 64, and the entry is made. A command similar to the variation pattern command and the stop type command based on the command (pre-variation pattern command and pre-stop type command) may be generated and transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In this case, with respect to the program for generating the pre-variation pattern command and the pre-stop type command, the program can be easily created by diverting the program of the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The reserved ball storage area 203c contains the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203b in connection with the detection of the start winning prize. It is a memory for storing. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are detected from the counter buffer 203b. Is acquired and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c. The hold ball storage area 203c has four hold areas (holds 1st to 1st) so that data corresponding to one start winning prize (counters C1 to C3 and CS1 values) can be stored (held) up to 4 times. It has 4 areas) (see FIG. 7).

The reserved ball execution area 203d is data (counters C1 to C3, CS1) to be referred to in processing such as a jackpot lottery, dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and setting of variation effect. It is a memory for storing the value).

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect, the MPU 201 executes processing such as a jackpot lottery, dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and setting of the variation effect. Of the data corresponding to each start winning prize (counters C1 to C3, CS1 values) stored in the above-mentioned reserved ball storage area 203c, the data corresponding to one start winning prize is used in the reserved ball execution area 203d. Shift to. The shift in the present embodiment means that the data stored in one area is moved to another area.

Here, the details of the reserved ball storage area 203c and the reserved ball execution area 203d will be described with reference to FIG. 7 again. The reserved ball storage area 203c and the reserved ball execution area 203d are the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform a jackpot lottery, dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, setting of variation effect, and the like. Used by.

For the big hit lottery and the setting of the dynamic display and the variable effect of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the big hit lottery and the first used for determining the big hit type. A hit type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining the effect mode of the variation effect, and a variation type counter CS1 used for determining the variation pattern are used. The reserved ball storage area 203c stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203b by the MPU 201 when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning).

The holding ball storage area 203c is composed of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of the four hold areas (hold 1st to 4th areas), the first random number counter storage area 203c1 for storing the value of the first random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 for storing the value are stored. A per-type counter storage area 203c2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203c4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

In this embodiment, the first random number counter storage area 203c1, the first hit type counter storage area 203c2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and the variable type counter storage area 203c4 are combined into one reserved ball storage area. Although it is provided in 203c, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided, and each of the four areas 203c1, 203c2, 203c3, 203c4 may be provided in any of the reserved ball storage areas.

As described above, in the reserved ball storage area 203c, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize) can be stored up to four times. However, in that case, the data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 holding areas (holding 1st to 4th areas). .. That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the old start prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest start prize in time is stored in the reserved first area.

On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203d is composed of only one area. Similar to the reserved ball storage area 203c, the reserved ball execution area 203d stores the value of the first random number counter storage area 203d1 for storing the value of the first random number counter C1 and the value of the first type counter C2. The first hit type counter storage area 203d2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter storage area 203d4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variation effect has come, the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) stored in the hold first area of the hold ball storage area 203c is used as the hold ball. It shifts to each area 203d1 to 203d4 of the execution area 203d. Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203d is referred to in the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 29), the jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the fluctuation pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. decide. In the first symbol display device 37, dynamic display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The details of the data shift will be described. When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variation effect has been reached, the random number value of the first random number counter storage area 203c1 of the reserved first area is transferred to the first random number counter storage area 203d1 of the reserved ball execution area 203d. shift. Similarly, the random value of the first hit type counter storage area 203c2 is shifted to the first hit type counter storage area 203d2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3 is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3. , The random value of the variable type counter storage area 203c4 is shifted to the variable type counter storage area 203d4.

Then, when the data shift to the reserved ball execution area 203d is completed, the reserved ball first area becomes empty, so that the data is stored (held) in each area (second to fourth) of the reserved ball storage area 203c. A shift process is performed in which the data is packed in an area (first to third) that is one smaller than the area number. In the present embodiment, in the reserved ball storage area 203c, the data is shifted only in the reserved areas (first to fourth) in which the data is stored (held).

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the holding ball storage area 203c will be described. For example, it is assumed that the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the variable effect is made is "4", and the data is stored in all the areas (first to fourth) of the reserved ball storage area 203c. do. In this state, when the data in the hold 1st area is shifted to the hold ball execution area 203d and the hold 1st area becomes empty, the MPU 201 sets the data in the other areas (2nd to 4th) to each area. Shift to the area with the smaller number (1st to 3rd). That is, the data in the reserved second area is shifted to the reserved first area, the data in the reserved third area is shifted to the reserved second area, and the data in the reserved fourth area is shifted to the reserved third area.

Further, for example, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the variation effect is made is "2", the MPU 201 shifts only the data in the reserved second area to the reserved first area. , End the data shift. As described above, in the present embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed in the hold areas (third to fourth) where the data is not stored (held), so that the number of data shifts can be reduced. It can reduce the control burden.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the hold area (second to fourth) may be configured to shift to an area having an area number smaller by one. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in the holding area (second to fourth), so that the program can be easily created.

Returning to FIG. 6, the explanation will be continued. The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the opening / closing plate of the large winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large winning opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 32) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, a prize ball detection switch 217 for detecting the paid out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. The prize ball detection switch 217 is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, a variable staging or continuous operation. It controls the setting of the display mode of the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 such as the advance notice effect.

The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button device 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. In the present embodiment, the command is configured to be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 in only one direction, and the command cannot be transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the main control device 110. There is. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured to be capable of transmitting and receiving commands to each other.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the decision button 22a and the change button 22b of the frame button device 22, and when the decision button 22a is operated by the player, the pressed game status (screen display content) is displayed. Accordingly, it is decided to adopt the selection target (for example, "music AAA") being selected and displayed in the third symbol display device 81 in the subsequent production, and the production according to the determined selection target is executed. In addition to controlling the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227, a determination command is transmitted to the display control device 114 to instruct the third symbol display device 81 to display a display based on the determination of the selection target. ..

Further, when the change button 22b is operated by the player, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be changed or "super reach" may be changed according to the pressed game status (screen display content). The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled and changed to the display control device 114 so as to change the rear image such as the effect mode or change the selected "musical piece" to another "musical piece". A command is sent to instruct the third symbol display device 81 to display the display based on the change of the selection target.

Here, a detailed electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113. In addition to various control programs executed by MPU221, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, a variation pattern table 222d, and a music table 222e as fixed value data. , The promotion lottery table 222f during the round and the promotion effect table 222g are stored at least. Of these tables 222a to 222g, the tables 222a to 222d are all the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, the jackpot type table 202b, the stop pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern table 202e provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. be.

The voice lamp control device 113 is a random number counter C1 per first, a type counter C2 per first, and a stop pattern selection counter, which are acquired from the counter buffer 203b in the main control device 110 and transmitted by the hold ball number command. The look-ahead process is executed based on each value of C3 and the variation type counter CS1 and the jackpot random number table 222a, the jackpot type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c, and the variation pattern table 222d.

Then, by this look-ahead processing, the hold change table (not shown) for determining the hold change content, the scenario table (not shown) for determining the hold change timing, and the like are referred to, and the look-ahead processing is performed. Before executing the variable effect, determine what kind of effect the pending variable effect will be (whether it will be a big hit, what will happen to the variable time, etc.), and execute various effects. It executes control to determine, or to determine the effect content and execution time (timing) of the "pending change notice".

The music table 222e is a table for setting the number of selectable music displayed in the "music selection" effect executed by the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in this "music selection" effect, the number of selectable songs changes according to the number of "renso" hits.

Specifically, in the "music selection" production, if the number of jackpot "renso" is 1 (first time) or more and less than 5 times, "music AAA", "music BBB" and "music CCC", a total of 3 songs If the number of "renso" hits is 5 or more and less than 10 times, the songs can be selected, and in addition to the above 3 songs, a total of 4 songs of "music DDD" can be selected and the big hit. When the number of "renso" is 10 or more, a total of 5 songs of "music EEE" can be selected in addition to the above 4 songs. Therefore, the possible value (updatable range) of the music selection counter 223g described later is set from this music table 222e based on the value of the music table counter 223o described later that counts the number of “renso” hits. , The number of selectable songs in the "music selection" production is determined. The details of this music table 222e will be described later.

The promotion lottery table 222f during the round displays a temporary "15R normal jackpot" in the variable effect when the "15R probability variation jackpot" is won, and notifies that the "15R probability variation jackpot" was won in the jackpot production. It is a table referred to in the lottery as to whether or not to execute the "promotion during the round" effect.

That is, the promotion lottery table 222f during this round corresponds to the "15R probability change jackpot" in the fluctuation effect, provided that the "probability change jackpot" is not executed when the "15R probability variation jackpot" is won in the variation effect. While the third symbol is stopped and displayed, or the third symbol corresponding to "15R normal jackpot" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the variable effect, the jackpot is "15R normal jackpot" during the jackpot effect based on the jackpot. It is referred to when performing a "promotion during round" effect indicating that it is a "15R probability variation jackpot" or by drawing a lottery. Details of the promotion lottery table 222f during this round will be described later.

The reason why the lottery itself for the "promotion during the round" effect is not performed when the "promotion during the change" is executed in the variable effect is that when the "promotion during the change" is executed in the variable effect, the variable effect This is because it has already been notified that it is a "15R probability variation jackpot", and there is no room for performing a "promotion during round" effect based on the jackpot. With this configuration, when the "promotion during fluctuation" effect is executed, it is possible to omit the execution of the lottery process related to the "promotion during round" effect, and the processing load at the start of the change can be reduced. Can be done.

The promotion effect table 222g is a table referred to for a lottery of character images notifying the "promotion during round" effect when executing the "promotion during round" effect. The details of this promotion effect table 222g will be described later.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the "promotion during the round" effect is executed, a plurality of images are prepared for the content of the "promotion during the round" effect, and these images are selected by lottery. There are variations in the production. This is because the "promotion during the round" production, which increases the game value for the player, is highly regarded as a hobby in the game of the pachinko machine 10, and is one of the important productions. Therefore, regarding the notification of this "promotion during the round" production, a plurality of variations are provided, and the content is selected by lottery to prevent the production from becoming monotonous and enhance the interest of the game.

Further, in the "promotion during round" production of the present embodiment, it is possible to notify that the game value has increased by using the character image appearing in the "music reproduction" production that is reproduced and displayed during the jackpot. .. In this way, by relating the character image that appears in the "music playback" production to the character image that appears in the "promotion during the round" production, the unity of the production balance in the entire jackpot is maintained. , The player can enjoy the jackpot production without any discomfort.

Further, the pattern of the "promotion during the round" effect of the present embodiment is set to be less than the number of songs (5 songs in the present embodiment) (3 patterns in the present embodiment). If the "promotion during the round" effect is prepared according to the number of songs, the data of the "promotion during the round" effect for the number of songs is required, and the storage capacity of the image increases. Therefore, the number of images for the "promotion during the round" effect is limited to prevent the storage capacity of the images from becoming tight.

The RAM 223 includes a fluctuation start flag 223a, a sub-holding ball number counter 223b, a button operation effect flag 223c, a button valid timer 223d, a decision button detection counter 223e, a change button detection counter 223f, a music selection counter 223g, a music memory 223h, and an intention. At least the selection flag 223i, the jackpot effect flag 223j, the round promotion lottery counter 223k, the round promotion flag 223m, the promotion effect lottery counter 223n, the consecutive villa counter 223o, the hold information storage area 223p, and the execution information storage area 223q are provided. ..

The variation start flag 223a is a flag indicating that the variation effect should be started in the ON state. This fluctuation start flag 223a is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a stop type command output from the main controller 110 is received (see S1206 in FIG. 37). Then, it is turned off when the variation effect is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S1802 in FIG. 43). The MPU 221 performs a variation effect process (see FIG. 43) for executing the standby variation effect when the standby variation effect exists when the variation start flag 223a is turned on.

The sub-holding ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (dynamic display) performed by the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), similarly to the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the variable effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of reserved balls based on the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the sub-held ball number counter 223b manages the number of reserved balls. There is.

Specifically, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the number of reserved balls for variable effect is added by entering the first ball entry port 64 and the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is added in the main control device 110. When the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the value after addition of the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the hold ball number command (that is, hold in the main control device 110). The number of reserved balls in the variable effect) is stored in the sub-held ball number counter 223b (see S1213 in FIG. 37).

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is subtracted in the main control device 110, and the third symbol is accompanied by the reception. When the mode of the variation effect in the display device 81 is set, the value of the sub-held ball number counter 223b is subtracted by 1 (see S1810 in FIG. 43). In this way, according to the command transmitted from the main control device 110 in accordance with the update of the hold ball number counter 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub hold ball number counter 223b, so that the hold of the main control device 110 is held. The value of the sub-held ball number counter 223b can be updated while synchronizing with the ball number counter 203a.

The value of the sub-held ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b, or the sub-reserved ball number in response to the reception of the variation pattern command. At the timing of updating the value of the counter 223b, a display holding ball number command is issued to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b after storage or updating. Transmit (see S1214 in FIG. 37 or S1811 in FIG. 43).

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the hold ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball number symbol corresponding to the value of the sub-hold ball number counter 223b in the voice lamp control device 113. Is controlled to be displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, the value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variation effect is reserved.

The button operation effect flag 223c is effective for pressing the enter button 22a and the change button 22b in the "music selection" effect executed at the start (first round) of the "15R probability variation jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot". It is a flag indicating whether or not a certain "music selection" is being produced.

This button operation effect flag 223c is initialized (that is, turned off) by the initialization process (see S1001 in FIG. 35) of the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 after the power is turned on. Then, the MPU 221 sets the button operation effect flag 223c to ON at the start of the "music selection" effect executed in the first round of the "15R probability variation jackpot" or the "15R normal jackpot" (see S1503 in FIG. 40). ). On the other hand, the MPU 221 sets the button operation effect flag 223c to off at the timing when the "music selection" effect ends, that is, when the value of the button valid timer 223d described later becomes "0" (FIG. 42). See S1720).

The MPU 221 is configured to detect a player's pressing operation on the enter button 22a or the change button 22b only when the button operation effect flag 223c is on. Therefore, by determining whether the button operation effect flag 223c is on or off before the detection of the enter button 22a or the change button 22b, the button operation effect flag 223c is off, that is, except during the "music selection" effect. In this case, it is not necessary to control the detection of the enter button 22a and the change button 22b, so that the control burden on the MPU 221 can be reduced.

The button effective timer 223d is a timer for counting the effective operation time of the decision button 22a and the change button 22b during the "music selection" effect. Further, the button activation timer 223d is configured to be configurable within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 29500"). The button activation timer 223d is configured to be linked with the contents of the button operation effect flag 223c described above, and when the button operation effect flag 223c is set to ON, a value (for example, for example) is set to the button operation effect timer 223d. While "29500") is set, the button operation effect flag 223c is set to off when the value of the button activation timer 223d becomes "0".

The value of the button enable timer 223d is initialized (that is, "0" is cleared) by the initialization process (see S1001 in FIG. 35) of the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 after the power is turned on. Then, in the MPU221, the button operation effect flag 223c is turned on at the start of the first round in the "15R probability variation jackpot" or the "15R normal jackpot", and the value of the button valid timer 223d is set to 1 of the big winning opening 65a. The maximum opening time of the round, "29500", is set (see S1504 in FIG. 40).

The MPU221 is set to the value of the button activation timer 223d each time the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see FIG. 42) described later is executed during the “music selection” effect, that is, while the button operation effect flag 223c is on. Is subtracted by 1 (see S1718 in FIG. 42). Further, when the decision button 22a is pressed by the player during the "music selection" effect, the value of the button valid timer 223d is cleared to "0" in order to end the "music selection" effect.

Then, the MPU 221 determines that it is time to end the "music selection" effect when the button enable timer 223d becomes "0" while the button operation effect flag 223c is set to ON. , The button operation effect flag 223c is set to off (see S1720 in FIG. 42), and the "music selection" effect is terminated.

In this way, by using the button operation effect flag 223c and the button activation timer 223d to execute the detection control of the pressing operation for the decision button 22a and the change button 22b only during the "music selection" effect, the "music selection" effect is being produced. It is not necessary to execute the control related to the decision button 22a and the change button 22b other than the above, and the control load of the MPU 221 can be reduced.

In this embodiment, only the control for the decision button 22a and the change button 22b in the "music selection" effect at the start of the jackpot will be described, and the decision button 22a and the change button 22b in the stage change during the variable effect, the advance notice selection effect, and the like will be described. Although the description of the control is omitted, it is naturally possible to control the decision button 22a and the change button 22b in the stage change or the like by using the button operation effect flag 223c, the button activation timer 223d, and the like.

The decision button detection counter 223e is a counter for determining whether or not the decision button 22a has been pressed by the player. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to prevent a malfunction due to noise or the like, when the determination button 22a is detected to be pressed (on) a plurality of times (twice in the present embodiment) in succession, the player may use the pachinko machine 10. It is configured to recognize that the enter button 22a has been pressed correctly. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the determination button 22a due to the influence of noise or the like.

The determination button detection counter 223e is initialized (that is, "0" is cleared) by the initialization process (see S1001 in FIG. 35) of the startup process executed by the MPU 221 after the power is turned on. Further, the MPU 221 determines whether or not the decision button 22a has been pressed by the player during the "music selection" effect, that is, when the button operation effect flag 223c described above is on, and the decision button 22a is turned on. When it is detected, the value of the determination button detection counter 223e is added by "1" (see S1703 in FIG. 42).

Then, the MPU 221 recognizes that the decision button 22a has been pressed by the player when the value of the decision button detection counter 223e becomes "2", and issues a decision command indicating that the decision button 22a has been pressed. It is configured to generate (see S1705 in FIG. 42) and transmit it to the display control device 114. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is recognized that the decision button 22a is pressed only when the decision button 22a is continuously pressed (on determination) for 2 milliseconds or more. The decision button detection counter 223e is configured to be cleared to "0" when the decision command is transmitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player keeps pressing the decision button 22a, the decision command of 1 is generated based on the press operation, and the decision command is transmitted to the display control device 114. However, when the player continues to press the decision button 22a even after the decision command of 1 is transmitted (that is, the state of being held down), the decision button 22a is pressed. It is configured not to generate and send decision commands based on press operations. That is, when the player keeps pressing the decision button 22a continuously, only one decision command is transmitted, and a plurality of decision commands are not transmitted.

This is because if the player continuously presses the decision button 22a and generates and sends a decision command every 2 milliseconds, the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. This is because a large number of determination commands are transmitted, which increases the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Therefore, by configuring so that only one decision command is generated and transmitted based on the continuous pressing operation of the decision button 22a, it is possible to prevent a situation where a large number of decision commands are generated and transmitted, and the voice lamp control is performed. It is possible to prevent an increase in the processing load from the device 113 to the display control device 114.

The change button detection counter 223f is a counter for determining whether or not the change button 22b has been pressed by the player. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, similarly to the decision button 22a, the change button 22b is detected to be pressed (on) a plurality of times (twice in the present embodiment) in order to prevent a malfunction due to noise or the like. In this case, it is configured to recognize that the change button 22b has been correctly pressed by the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the change button 22b due to the influence of noise or the like.

The change button detection counter 223f is initialized (that is, "0" is cleared) by the initialization process (see S1001 in FIG. 35) of the startup process executed by the MPU 221 after the power is turned on. Further, the MPU 221 determines whether or not the change button 22b has been pressed by the player during the "music selection" effect, that is, when the button operation effect flag 223c described above is on, and the change button 22b is turned on. When it is detected, the value of the change button detection counter 223f is added by "1" (see S1711 in FIG. 42).

Then, the MPU 221 recognizes that the change button 22b has been pressed by the player when the value of the change button detection counter 223f becomes "2", and issues a change command indicating that the change button 22b has been pressed. It is configured to generate (see S1713 in FIG. 42) and transmit it to the display control device 114. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is recognized that the change button 22b is pressed only when the change button 22b is continuously pressed (on determination) for 2 milliseconds or more. The change button detection counter 223f is configured to be cleared to "0" when the change command is transmitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player keeps pressing the change button 22b, the change command of 1 is generated based on the press operation, and the change command is transmitted to the display control device 114. However, as in the case of the decision button 22a, when the player continues to press the change button 22b even after the change command of 1 is transmitted (that is, the state of being pressed and released). , It is configured not to generate and send a change command based on the pressing operation on the change button 22b. That is, when the player keeps pressing the change button 22b continuously, only one change command is transmitted, and a plurality of change commands are not transmitted.

This is because if the player continuously presses the change button 22b and generates and transmits a change command every 2 milliseconds, the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. This is because a large number of change commands are transmitted, which increases the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Therefore, by configuring so that only one change command is generated and transmitted based on the continuous pressing operation of the change button 22b, it is possible to prevent a situation where a large number of change commands are generated and transmitted, and the voice lamp control is performed. It is possible to prevent an increase in the processing load from the device 113 to the display control device 114.

The music selection counter 223g sets the number of music that can be selected by the player in the "music selection" production, and also selects and displays (displays on the front side) the music AAA icon 81a1 and the music BBB icon in the "music selection" production. It is a counter for setting 81a2, music CCC icon 81a3, music DDD icon 81a4, and music EEE icon 81a5 (hereinafter, may be abbreviated as "music icons 81a1 to 81a5"). In the present embodiment, the number of selectable songs in the "music selection" production is configured to be different according to the number of "renso" of the jackpot, and this music selection counter 223 g is configured according to the number of "renso" of the jackpot. The changeable range of is set, and the number of songs that can be selected in the "music selection" effect is set based on the value of the music selection counter 223g in which the changeable range is set. Further, the value of the music selection counter 223g is updated in response to the pressing operation of the change button 22b during the "music selection" production, and the music icon 81a (see FIG. 5) selected and displayed in the "music selection" production is displayed. It is configured to be modified.

The music selection counter 223g is initialized (that is, "0" is cleared) by the initialization process (see S1001 in FIG. 35) of the startup process executed by the MPU 221 after the power is turned on. Then, the MPU 221 refers to the music table 222e based on the value of the consecutive villa counter 223o, which will be described later, at the start of the "music selection" effect executed in the first round of the "15R probability variation jackpot" or the "15R normal jackpot". , The maximum update value (updatable range, that is, any of "0 to 2", "0 to 3", or "0 to 4") of the music selection counter 223 g is set (the updateable range). See S1505 in FIG. 40).

The value of the music selection counter 223g is configured to add 1 (selection value) when a sub-display change command described later is received from the display control device 114 (see S1403 in FIG. 39). .. When updating the value of the music selection counter 223g, the value of the music selection counter 223g has reached the maximum update value (upper limit of the updateable range) (for example, the updateable range is set to "0 to 3"). When the value of the music selection counter 223g is added by 1 to (when the value of the music selection counter 223g is "3"), the value of the music selection counter 223g returns to "0". It is configured in.

At the end of the "renso" state, that is, when the "time reduction state" ends, the updatable range of the music selection counter 223g is set to initialization (that is, "0 to 2"). (See S1211 in FIG. 37). With this configuration, the number of songs that can be selected during the jackpot increases only during the "renso" state, and when the "renso" state ends, the number of songs that can be selected during the jackpot is initially set. By changing to a "renso" state, it is possible to create playability and enhance the interest of the game.

Further, when the updatable range of the music selection counter 223g is initialized, and a value outside the set updatable range (that is, "0 to 2") is selected, the music selection counter 223g is selected. It is configured so that the value is initialized (that is, "0" is cleared). With this configuration, when the updatable range of the music selection counter 223g is initialized, even if the selected value is outside the updatable range, it must be returned to the value within the updatable range. It is possible to prevent a deviation between the updatable range and the selected value.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 221 is configured to generate a selectable music command indicating a music that can be selected in the "music selection" effect based on the updatable range of the music selection counter 223g, and transmit it to the display control device 114. (S1506 in FIG. 40). Then, when the display control device 114 receives the selectable music command, the display control device 114 sets the updatable range of the selected music memory 233j, which will be described later, according to the content indicated by the selectable music command, and is selecting. It is configured to display the music icon 81a that can be selected by the player in the "music selection" effect in the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the music memory 233j (see FIG. 56 (b)).

Further, the MPU 221 displays the display control device 114 when the decision button 22a is pressed by the player in the "music selection" effect, or when the release command corresponding to the next round (that is, the second round) is received. It is configured to send a decision command to. Then, the display control device 114 sets the value of the selected music memory 233j based on the reception of the determination command, sets the value of the display determination music memory 233k, and includes the value of the display determination music memory 233k. A sub display determination command indicating that the value of 233k has been updated is generated and transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the sub display determination command, the value of the music selection counter 223g at that time is set in the determination music memory 223h described later, and is determined in the "music selection" effect. It is configured to store and retain music (see S1405 in FIG. 39). The details of the determined music memory 223h will be described later.

Here, with reference to FIG. 17, the details of the music selection counter 223g and the music table 222e will be described. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the music table 222e. The music table 222e is divided into groups based on the music. Specifically, it corresponds to "AAA" corresponding to "music AAA", "BBB" corresponding to "music BBB", "CCC" corresponding to "music CCC", and "music DDD". It is divided into "DDD" and "EEE" corresponding to "Music EEE". Then, the value of the music selection counter 223g, the number of selectable jackpots, and the main character corresponding to the music are associated with each of the divided groups.

The main character is a character (for example, a girl character) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during each "music reproduction" production, and is set to correspond to each "music reproduction" production. ing.

In the present embodiment, the player is configured to be able to select a favorite song in the jackpot, but by displaying the character corresponding to each song, the effect executed during the jackpot production is performed. It can be said that the player is configured to be able to select a favorite character. That is, when the player wins the jackpot, when he / she wants to listen to his / her favorite song or when he / she wants to see his / her favorite character, he / she selects a desired song in the “music selection” production and likes it during the jackpot. You can enjoy the music or your favorite character.

In the music table 222e shown in FIG. 17, "AAA" is associated with "0" as the value of the music selection counter 223g. In addition, "1 time or more" is associated with the number of selectable jackpots. Further, "character 1 (for example, girl character A)" is associated with the main character.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the "music AAA" is configured so that the number of jackpot "renso" can be selected from one (first time). Further, when the "music AAA" is selected as the selection target during the "music selection" production, that is, when the value of the music selection counter 223g is "0", the determination button 22a is pressed by the player. , "Music AAA" is determined as a "music reproduction" production. When "music AAA" is selected, the "music reproduction" effect is configured so that the "music reproduction" effect is mainly performed with "character 1" as the main character in the "music reproduction" effect.

In the music table 222e shown in FIG. 17, "1" is associated with "BBB" as the value of the music selection counter 223g. In addition, "1 time or more" is associated with the number of selectable jackpots. Further, "character 2 (for example, girl character B)" is associated with the main character.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the "musical piece BBB" is configured so that the number of jackpot "renso" can be selected from one (first time). Further, when the "music BBB" is selected as the selection target during the "music selection" production, that is, when the value of the music selection counter 223g is "1", the determination button 22a is pressed by the player. , "Music BBB" is determined as a "music reproduction" production. When "musical piece BBB" is selected, the "musical piece reproduction" effect is configured so that the "musical piece reproduction" effect is mainly performed with "character 2" as the main character in the "musical piece reproduction" effect.

In the music table 222e shown in FIG. 17, "2" is associated with "CCC" as the value of the music selection counter 223g. In addition, "1 time or more" is associated with the number of selectable jackpots. Further, "character 3 (for example, girl character C)" is associated with the main character.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the "musical piece CCC" is configured so that the number of jackpot "renso" can be selected from one (first time). Further, when the "musical piece CCC" is selected during the "musical piece selection" effect, that is, when the value of the music selection counter 223g is "2", the player presses the determination button 22a. , The "musical piece CCC" is determined as the "musical piece reproduction" effect. When the "musical piece CCC" is selected, the "musical piece reproduction" effect is configured so that the "musical piece reproduction" effect is mainly performed with the "character 3" as the main character in the "musical piece reproduction" effect.

In the music table 222e shown in FIG. 17, "3" is associated with "DDD" as the value of the music selection counter 223g. In addition, "5 times or more" is associated with the number of selectable jackpots. Further, "character 4 (for example, girl character D)" is associated with the main character.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the "musical piece DDD" is configured to be selectable only when the number of jackpot "renso" is 5 or more. Further, when the "musical piece DDD" is selected during the "musical piece selection" effect, that is, when the value of the music selection counter 223g is "3", the player presses the determination button 22a. , The "musical piece DDD" is determined as the "musical piece reproduction" effect. When "musical piece DDD" is selected, the "musical piece reproduction" effect is configured so that the "musical piece reproduction" effect is mainly performed with the "character 4" as the main character in the "musical piece reproduction" effect.

In the music table 222e shown in FIG. 17, "4" is associated with "EEE" as the value of the music selection counter 223g. In addition, "10 times or more" is associated with the number of selectable jackpots. Further, "character 5 (for example, girl character E)" is associated with the main character.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the "music EEE" is configured to be selectable only when the number of jackpot "renso" is 10 or more. Further, when the "music EEE" is selected during the "music selection" production, that is, when the value of the music selection counter 223g is "4", the determination button 22a is pressed by the player. , "Music EEE" is determined as a "music reproduction" production. When "musical piece EEE" is selected, the "musical piece reproduction" effect is configured so that the "musical piece reproduction" effect is mainly performed with the "character 5" as the main character in the "musical piece reproduction" effect.

Therefore, for example, when the jackpot is won and the number of "renso" of the jackpot is 1 (first time) to 4 times, the maximum update value of the music selection counter 223g is set to "2", and "2" is set. Three songs, "Music AAA", "Music BBB" and "Music CCC", can be selected. Further, for example, when a jackpot is won and the number of "renso" of the jackpot is 5 to 9 times, the maximum update value of the music selection counter 223g is set to "3", and "music AAA". , "Music BBB", "Music CCC" and "Music DDD" can be selected. Further, for example, when a jackpot is won and the number of "renso" of the jackpot is 10 or more, the maximum update value of the music selection counter 223g is set to "4", and "music AAA", "music AAA", " Five songs, "Music BBB", "Music CCC", "Music DDD" and "Music EEE", can be selected.

In this way, when the jackpot is won, the music table 222e is taken into consideration based on the number of "renso" of the jackpot, and the number of songs that can be selected in the "music selection" production is set, so that the production at the time of the jackpot can be performed. It is possible to display a character image that matches the player's taste while composing a music that matches the player's taste so that it can be played back. Can be given to improve the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. The determined music memory 223h is a memory (storage area) for storing the music to be reproduced and displayed in the "music reproduction" effect during the jackpot. When the music to be reproduced during the jackpot is determined through the "music selection" effect at the start of the jackpot, the data related to the determined "music reproduction" effect is stored and held in the determined music memory 223h.

The determined music memory 223h is initialized (that is, "0" is cleared) by the initialization process (see S1001 in FIG. 35) of the startup process executed by the MPU 221 after the power is turned on. Then, the MPU 221 determines the music to be reproduced in the "music reproduction" production through the "music selection" effect at the start of the jackpot, that is, when the sub display determination command is received from the display control device 114. Playback music data of the "music playback" production corresponding to the value of the music selection counter 223g at the time (for example, when the "music playback" production is "music AAA", it is "0", "music BBB". If so, “1” etc.) is set in the determined music memory 223h (see S1405 in FIG. 39).

In the present embodiment, the image selected in the lottery for the "promotion during the round" effect and the music stored in the determined music memory 223h are determined, and the "music reproduction" effect being executed and the selected "music reproduction" effect are determined. It is configured to change the selected character image of the "promotion during the round" effect when the content does not match the character image of the "promotion during the round" effect. That is, the MPU 221 extracts a value (reproduced music data) corresponding to the "music reproduction" effect stored in the determined music memory 223h when executing the "promotion during round" effect in the jackpot, and the value (reproduced music data). It is configured to determine whether or not the reproduced music data) and the character image used in the “promotion during round” effect match (see S1604 in FIG. 41).

Then, in the present embodiment, if the content of the "music reproduction" effect and the character image used in the "promotion during the round" effect match as a result of the above determination, the character image is displayed as it is, while " If the content of the "Music playback" effect and the character image used in the "Promotion during the round" effect do not match, the character image used in the "Promotion during the round" effect is changed to an all-cast image. Has been done. The specific contents will be described later.

The intention selection flag 223i is a flag indicating whether or not a music is selected based on the player's intention in the "music selection" production. As described above, in the present embodiment, when performing the "promotion during the round" effect, the content of the intention selection flag 223i is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the music is selected based on the intention of the player. .. Then, the content of the "promotion during the round" effect is changed only when it is determined that the "music reproduction" effect is selected based on the player's intention.

The intention selection flag 223i is initialized (that is, turned off) by the initialization process (see S1001 in FIG. 35) of the startup process executed by the MPU 221 after the power is turned on. Then, the MPU 221 is in the process of producing "music selection", that is, when the button operation effect flag 223c is turned on, when the player's pressing operation of the change button 22b is detected, or when the jackpot "renso" When the player's pressing operation of the decision button 22a is detected, the intention selection flag 223i is set to ON (see S1715 in FIG. 42).

On the other hand, the MPU 221 has the playback music data being executed in the "music playback" effect and the "during the round" only when the intention selection flag 223i is set to be on when the "promotion during the round" effect is executed. It is determined whether or not the character image selected in the image lottery in the "promotion" effect matches, and after each process (see S1606 or S1607 in FIG. 41) based on the determination, the intention selection flag 223i is set to off. (See S1608 in FIG. 41). Further, the MPU 221 sets the intention selection flag 223i to off when the round promotion effect is not executed at the time of a big hit (see S1512 in FIG. 40).

In the present embodiment, when the change button 22b is pressed by the player during the "music selection" effect, the player recognizes that the selection target of the music displayed in the "music selection" effect has been changed, and the player. Considers that he has selected a song in the "music selection" effect based on his own intention, and sets the intention selection flag 223i on so that the "promotion during round" effect can be replaced (see S1715 in FIG. 42).

In addition, when the decision button 22a is pressed by the player during the "music selection" production at the time of a big hit in the "renso", the player himself / herself regardless of whether or not the change button 22b is pressed. It is considered that the music in the "music selection" production is selected based on the intention of, and the intention selection flag 223i is set to on so that the "promotion during round" production can be replaced (see S1715 in FIG. 42).

In the present embodiment, the "music reproduction" effect that was reproduced and produced at the previous jackpot is stored in memory, and in the initial state of the "music selection" effect at this jackpot, the "music reproduction" effect that was reproduced and produced at the previous jackpot is shown. It is configured so that the music is displayed in the selected display state. With this configuration, when the player wants to reselect the "music playback" effect selected in the previous jackpot in this jackpot, the player operates the enter button 22a once without operating the change button 22b. It is possible to select only by. Therefore, in the "music selection" production, the player can select a music according to his / her taste without performing complicated operations.

However, when one player stops the game after winning the jackpot and then another player starts the game on the pachinko machine 10, the player differs between the previous jackpot and the current jackpot. There is. In such a case, even if the change button 22b is not operated and the enter button 22a is pressed in the "music selection" effect in this jackpot, the player is different, so the player's button operation. The possibility of mistakes cannot be ruled out, and it cannot be said that the player has selected the music on his / her own will. On the other hand, during the jackpot "Renso", it is unlikely that the player will stop the game because the player can continue to be given the game value, and the previous jackpot during the "Renso". It is highly possible that the player and the player of this jackpot are the same.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is considered that the intention selection by the same player is clearly shown only when the decision button 22a is pressed at the time of the big hit in the "renso" (see S1708 in FIG. 42), and the change is made. The intention selection flag 223i is set to ON regardless of whether or not the button 22b is pressed (see S1715 in FIG. 42).

In this way, in the "music selection" effect, when the player's intention with respect to the frame button device 22 is performed and the player's intention is clarified, the intention selection flag 223i is set to ON. Then, it is configured to confirm whether the intention selection flag 223i is on or off in the "promotion during round" effect during the jackpot, and to select a character image to appear in the "promotion during round" effect. That is, when the player voluntarily selects the "music playback" effect, and the character image of the "music reproduction" effect and the "promotion during the round" effect match, the character image is used as it is. If the character image of the "music playback" effect and the "promotion during round" effect does not match, the character image is changed to an all-cast image.

By configuring in this way, the character image that appears in the "music playback" production and the character image that appears in the "promotion during the round" production are related, and the production balance is unified throughout the jackpot. It can be maintained and the player can enjoy the jackpot production without any discomfort. On the other hand, if the player does not voluntarily select the "music playback" effect, it is not necessary to determine the match between the character image of the "music reproduction" effect and the character image in the "promotion during the round" effect. In addition to reducing the control burden, the lottery results in the original "promotion during the round" production are executed as they are, and the randomness of the "promotion during the round" production is maintained, and there are abundant variations in the production ("music playback". The number of productions x the number of productions for "promotion during the round") can be used to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the pattern of the "promotion during the round" effect of the present embodiment is set to be less than the number of songs (5 songs in the present embodiment) (3 patterns in the present embodiment). By performing the above control after this configuration, the player does not feel uncomfortable even when the "promotion during the round" effect is executed with a number of character images smaller than the number of the "music reproduction" effect. You can play a game. In addition, the number of images for the "promotion during the round" effect can be restricted, and the development man-hours and the ROM capacity can be reduced.

The jackpot effect flag 223j is a flag indicating that the jackpot is being executed in the on state and that the effect related to the jackpot should be executed. This jackpot effect flag 223j is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when an opening command output from the main control device 110 is received (see S1303 in FIG. 38). Then, it is turned off when the ending command output from the main control device 110 is received (see S1312 in FIG. 38). The MPU 221 performs a jackpot effect processing (see FIG. 40) for executing an effect related to the jackpot when the jackpot effect flag 223j is turned on.

The round promotion lottery counter 223k is a counter for drawing whether or not to execute the "round promotion" effect when the "15R probability variation jackpot" is won. In this embodiment, when the "15R probability variation jackpot" is won, it is notified that it is a "15R probability variation jackpot" in the variable effect, or it is "15R probability variation jackpot" in the "promotion during round" production at the time of the jackpot. Is configured to be notified by using the round promotion lottery counter 223k and the round promotion lottery table 222f.

The promotion lottery counter 223k during this round is sequentially added by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, “0 to 99”) in the counter update process (see S1111 in FIG. 36) of the main process of the voice lamp control device 113. It is configured to return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (for example, "99" in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0 to 99"). The value of the promotion lottery counter 223k during the round is updated once (for example, 1 addition) for each loop of the main process.

Here, with reference to FIG. 18, the correspondence between the promotion lottery counter 223k during the round and the promotion lottery table 222f during the round will be described. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the promotion lottery table 222f during the round. The promotion lottery table 222f during this round is divided into groups based on the content of the production. Specifically, the production contents are for "maintaining the result of the variable effect" that displays "15R probability variation jackpot" in the variable effect, and for "promotion during the round" effect that executes the "promotion during the round" effect during the jackpot. And, it is divided into. Then, the value of the promotion lottery counter 223k during the round is associated with each of the divided groups.

In the round promotion lottery table 222f shown in FIG. 18, the correspondence between the effect content and the value of the round promotion lottery counter 223k is "0 to 69" and "promotion during the round" with respect to "maintenance of variable effect result". It is "70-99" for "Direction".

That is, in the promotion lottery table 222f during the round, it is set that "maintenance of variable effect result" is selected at a ratio of 70% and "promotion during the round" effect is selected at a ratio of 30%.

Therefore, if the "15R probability variation jackpot" is won and the "promotion during fluctuation" is not executed in the fluctuation effect, the third symbol corresponding to the "15R probability variation jackpot" remains as it is during the variation effect at a rate of 70%. On the other hand, while the third symbol corresponding to "15R normal jackpot" is tentatively displayed during the variable production at a rate of 30%, the jackpot is being produced at the jackpot (in this embodiment, the 7th round jackpot is won). At the time of opening the mouth 65a), the "promotion during the round" effect is executed, and the player is notified that the jackpot is not the "15R normal jackpot" but the "15R probability variation jackpot".

With this configuration, the player can at least execute the "promotion during the round" effect even when the third symbol corresponding to the "15R normal jackpot" is displayed and the jackpot occurs in the variable effect. Until (in this embodiment, the 7th round), it is expected that the "promotion during the round" effect will be executed during the jackpot, and whether the "15R normal jackpot" will be changed to the "15R probability variable jackpot". You can play the game while paying attention to whether or not it is. Therefore, even if a jackpot is generated by the "15R normal jackpot", which has a low game value in the variable staging, the game property of whether or not the game value increases during the jackpot is given to enhance the interest of the game. Can be done.

Returning to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. The promotion flag 223m during the round is a flag indicating that the "promotion during the round" effect should be executed at the time of a big hit in the on state. This round promotion flag 223m is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to on when it is determined to execute the "round promotion" effect as a result of the above-mentioned execution lottery for the "round promotion" effect. (See S1903 in FIG. 44).

In this embodiment, the promotion flag 223m during the round is confirmed at the start of the seventh round at the time of a big hit, and if the promotion flag 223m during the round is on, the promotion effect setting is made to determine the content of the "promotion during the round" effect. While the process (see FIG. 41) is executed, if the promotion flag 223m during the round is off, the "promotion during the round" effect is not executed.

It should be noted that the execution timing of the "promotion during the round" effect may be configured to be executed at a timing other than the seventh round of the jackpot. Specifically, for example, it may be configured to execute the "promotion during the round" effect at the ending time. Further, the execution timing of the "promotion during the round" effect may be determined by lottery so that the execution timing of the "promotion during the round" effect is randomly executed.

The promotion effect lottery counter 223n is a counter for drawing a character image to be displayed in the “promotion during round” effect. In the present embodiment, when the "promotion during the round" effect is executed at the time of a big hit, the character image to be displayed in the "promotion during the round" effect is drawn by using the promotion effect lottery counter 223n and the promotion effect table 222g. It is configured. As described above, in the present embodiment, with respect to the "promotion during the round" effect, which is executed less frequently than the "music reproduction" effect, the number of character images used in the "promotion during the round" effect is less than the type of the "music reproduction" effect. It is composed of types to reduce development man-hours and prevent an increase in ROM capacity.

The promotion effect lottery counter 223n is sequentially added by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, “0 to 9”) in the counter update process (see S1112 in FIG. 36) of the main process of the voice lamp control device 113, and the maximum is It is configured to return to "0" after reaching a value (for example, "9" in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0 to 9"). The value of the promotion effect lottery counter 223n is updated once (for example, 1 addition) every time the main process loops once.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the above-mentioned promotion flag 223m during the round is turned on at the start of the seventh round in the jackpot, the value of the promotion effect lottery counter 223n and the promotion effect table 222g are referred to. , The character image to appear in the "promotion during round" effect is once set (see 1602 in FIG. 41). In the present embodiment, the character image of the "promotion during the round" effect is temporarily set based on the promotion effect lottery counter 223n and the promotion effect table 222g, but the "music reproduction" effect is selected based on the player's intention. The content of the character image once set as the "promotion during the round" effect is set according to whether or not the character image of the "music playback" effect and the character image of the "promotion during the round" effect match. It is configured to change.

Here, the details of the promotion effect table 222g will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the promotion effect table 222g. The promotion effect table 222g is divided into groups based on the effect content (images used). Specifically, as the production content (used image), one for the "character 1 used image" displaying the character 1 (for example, the girl character A) appearing in the "music AAA" and the character 2 appearing in the "music BBB". For "character 2 use image" displaying (for example, girl character B), character 1 and character 2, character 3 appearing in "music CCC" (for example, girl character C), and character appearing in "music DDD". 4 (for example, girl character D) and character 5 (for example, girl character E) appearing in "music EEE" are all divided into "all cast images" for displaying at the same time. Then, the value of the promotion effect lottery counter 223n is associated with each of the divided groups.

In the promotion effect table 222g shown in FIG. 19, the correspondence between the effect content (used image) and the promotion effect lottery counter 223n is changed to "0 to 3" and "character 2 used image" with respect to the "character 1 used image". On the other hand, it is "4 to 7" and "8, 9" for "all cast image".

That is, in the promotion effect table 222g, "character 1 image" is selected at a ratio of 40%, "character 2 image" is selected at 40%, and "all cast image" is selected at a ratio of 20% as the effect content (image used). Is set to.

Therefore, when the "promotion during round" effect is executed, the effect using character 1 is selected at a rate of 40%, the effect using character 2 is selected at a rate of 40%, and the effect using character 2 is selected at a rate of 20%. It is configured so that an effect using all the characters 1 to 5 is selected.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the "promotion during the round" production, the character image appearing in any of the "music reproduction" productions is used to notify that the game value increases, and a lottery is performed. By selecting the character image based on the above, the effect is varied and the game is configured so as not to be monotonous.

However, in order to give variation to the production in the "promotion during the round" production, if a character image for the "promotion during the round" production is prepared so as to correspond to each of the multiple "music playback" productions, the "promotion during the round" production is performed. The number of character images related to staging increases, the development manpower related to image creation increases, and the development cost increases. At the same time, character images for the types of "music playback" staging must be stored, and the ROM capacity is tight. There is a risk that it will end up. Therefore, regarding the "promotion during round" production, which has a lower execution frequency (execution time) than the "music playback" production, the character images used in the "promotion during round" production are composed of fewer types than the "music playback" production. , The reduction of development man-hours and the increase of ROM capacity are prevented.

On the other hand, since the lottery of the character image displayed in the "promotion during round" production is performed without considering the "music playback" production selected by the player, the character image appearing in the "music playback" production is used. , There may be a discrepancy with the character image that appears in the "promotion during round" production. In a situation where the player selects his / her favorite music and character image by his / her own will, the “promotion during round” effect is executed with a character image different from the favorite character image, and the effect content is You may feel a sense of discomfort. Then, there is a possibility that the player may feel a sense of loss that he / she wants the “promotion during the round” effect to be executed (blessed) by the favorite character image selected by himself / herself or the image related to the character image.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the character image selected in the "promotion during round" effect matches the character image appearing in the song currently being played and displayed in the "music playback" effect, and if they match, it is determined. Performs the "promotion during the round" effect by the selected character image as it is, while if they do not match, changes the selected character image to an all-cast image and executes the "promotion during the round" effect. It is configured as follows. The all-cast image is an image in which all the character images appearing in each "music reproduction" production appear, and at least the character images appearing in the "music reproduction" production currently being reproduced are partially displayed. Therefore, in the "promotion during round" production in the situation where the player selects his / her favorite music and character image by his / her own will, the favorite character image or the all-cast image including the favorite character as a part is displayed. By appearing, you will not feel any discomfort regarding the content of the production. As a result, the "promotion during the round" effect is executed by an image containing at least a part of the favorite character image selected by oneself, so that a further interest different from the interest in which the game value increases can be obtained.

In addition, the all-cast image is a limited production with a low selection rate (20%, see Fig. 19) in the "promotion during round" production, and is a rare production, so it is rare for a player. It's not a production that you see. Therefore, it is positioned as a production in which the player can feel a certain premier feeling (profitable feeling) only by the appearance of the all-cast image.

Then, in the present embodiment, the player has selected a favorite music and character image by his / her own will, and the character image selected in the "promotion during round" production is currently "music". When it does not match the character image appearing in the music being played and displayed in the "playback" effect, the selected character image is changed to an all-cast image and the "promotion during round" effect is executed. That is, when the player selects the music and the character image by his / her own intention in the "music selection" production, the player selects the character image in the lottery of the character image in the "promotion during round" production. When a character image different from the character image is extracted, the extracted character image is changed to an all-cast image.

Therefore, when the player selects the music and the character image by his / her own will, and the character image that does not match the character image is selected in the "promotion during round" effect, the all-cast image is displayed. Can be done. Therefore, in a situation where the player selects his / her favorite music and character image by his / her own will, the appearance ratio of the rare all-cast image is increased (that is, the selection ratio of other character images (40%)). + All-cast image selection ratio (20%) = All-cast image appearance ratio (60%), so it is more likely that the player selects the music and character images on his own initiative. Can be set high. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a premier feeling (profitable feeling) that the all-cast image is easier to appear if the player selects the music and the character image by his / her own will, and the player has the game value. You can get a further interest that is different from the rising interest. In addition, it is easier for the player to select the music and the character image by his / her own will to make it easier to display the rare all-cast image, thereby encouraging the player to select the music and the character image by his / her own will. This makes it possible to increase the execution rate (participation rate) of the player's pressing operation in the "music selection" effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, only when the player selects the music and the character image by his / her own will, the character image selected in the “promotion during round” production and the character image currently played in the “music playback” production are reproduced. It is configured to determine whether or not the character image appearing in the displayed music matches. In the present embodiment, even when the player does not perform the selection operation, when the selection valid time of the "music selection" effect has elapsed, the music and the character displayed as the selection target in the "music selection" effect. The image is configured to be selected as a "musical piece playback" effect. Since the music and character images selected in this way are selected without the player performing the selection operation, it is highly probable that the "music playback" effect is decided without reflecting the player's intention ( Except during "Renso").

Therefore, if the music and the character image are determined without reflecting the intention of the player, it is assumed that the character image appearing in the "music playback" production and the "promotion during the round" production are different. However, the player does not feel uncomfortable, and does not feel the loss that he wanted the "promotion during the round" production to be performed (blessed) by the favorite character image selected by himself. Therefore, if the player does not voluntarily select the "music playback" effect, it is not necessary to determine the match between the character image of the "music reproduction" effect and the character image in the "promotion during the round" effect. In addition to reducing the control burden, the lottery results in the original "promotion during the round" production are executed as they are, and the randomness of the "promotion during the round" production is maintained, and there are abundant variations in the production ("music playback". The number of productions x the number of productions for "promotion during the round") can be used to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, regarding the character image appearing in the "music reproduction" production, the character 1 appearing in "music AAA" and the character 2 appearing in "music BBB" are the characters appearing in other music. (That is, it is preferable to set the character to be more popular among players than (that is, characters 3 to 5).

As described above, in the present embodiment, a smaller number (type) of "promotion during round" effects is prepared compared to the number of "music playback" effects, and the "promotion during round" effect is executed. ing. In addition, in the "promotion during the round" production, the character 1 image corresponding to the character 1 of the "music AAA", the character 2 image corresponding to the character 2 of the "music BBB", and the all cast in which all the characters 1 to 5 appear. Images are available. Therefore, when the "promotion during the round" effect is executed and the player has selected "music AAA" or "music BBB" by his / her own will, the lottery result for the "promotion during the round" effect. When the same character image as the running "music playback" effect is selected, if the character image of the selected "music playback" effect and the "promotion during round" effect match, it will be the player's preference. It is possible to perform a suitable production. Therefore, it is easy for the player to select "music AAA", which is a music corresponding to the character 1 image, or "music BBB", which is a music corresponding to the character 2 image, which is likely to appear in the "promotion during the round" production. In addition, by composing with characters that are popular with players, it is easy to match the contents of the "music playback" production and the "promotion during the round" production, and the production that suits the player's taste is executed to play the game. Can enhance the interest of.

Returning to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. The consecutive villa counter 223o is a counter for counting the number of "continuous villas" of the jackpot. That is, when one of the jackpots is won and the jackpot is won again before the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" based on the jackpot ends (that is, before returning to the "normal game state"). In addition, the value of the consecutive villa counter 223o is updated to count the number of "continuous villas" of the jackpot.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the number of songs that can be selected in the "music selection" production at the time of the big hit changes (increases) according to the number of "renso" of the big hit. With this configuration, it is possible to provide playability by accumulating jackpot "renso", increase the player's willingness to continue playing, and enhance the interest of the game.

The consecutive villa counter 223o is configured to be updatable within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 99"), and is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on. Then, every time a jackpot is won in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state", that is, the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" generated based on one jackpot ends, and the "normal game state" Before returning to, each time an opening command output from the main controller 110 is received, the counter is incremented by 1 (see S1305 in FIG. 38), and the maximum value (for example, a value of "0 to 99" can be taken. In that case, when "99") is reached, no further update (addition) is executed. Then, the value of the continuous villa counter 223o is initialized (that is, "0" is cleared) at the end of the "continuous villa" state, that is, at the end of the "time reduction state" (S1813 in FIG. 43). reference).

In the present embodiment, at the time of a specific jackpot (“15R probability variation jackpot” or “15R normal jackpot”), the value of the consecutive villa counter 223o is referred to, and the selectable range (updatable) of the music selection counter 223g is based on the value. Range) is configured to be set. Then, based on the selectable range (updatable range) of the set music selection counter 223 g, the music that can be selected in the "music selection" effect is displayed.

Specifically, when the value of the consecutive villa counter 223o is referred to at the start of the "music selection" production and the value of the consecutive villa counter 223o is "1" to "4" (that is, the number of "continuous villas" of the jackpot is In the case of 1 time or more and less than 5 times), the selectable range (updatable range) of the music selection counter 223g is set to "0" to "2", and "music AAA", "music BBB" and "music CCC" are set. It is configured so that it can be selected within the range of a total of 3 songs. Further, when the value of the consecutive villa counter 223o is "5" to "9" (that is, when the number of "continuous villas" of the jackpot is 5 times or more and less than 10 times), the selectable range of the music selection counter 223g (updated). Possible range) is set to "0" to "3", and "Music DDD" is added to "Music AAA", "Music BBB" and "Music CCC" so that it can be selected within a total of 4 songs. It is composed. Further, when the value of the consecutive villa counter 223o is "10" or more (that is, when the number of "continuous villas" of the jackpot is 10 times or more), the selectable range (updatable range) of the music selection counter 223g is set to "0". "To" 4 ", add" Music EEE "to" Music AAA "," Music BBB "," Music CCC "and" Music DDD ", and within the range of a total of 5 songs (maximum selection in this embodiment). It is configured to be selectable in the range).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the player presses the decision button 22a in the "music selection" effect at the time of a big hit, whether or not the big hit is a big hit in the "renso" is determined by this consecutive villa counter. It is configured to be determined by referring to the value of 223o. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is considered that the decision selection by the same player is clearly shown only when the decision button 22a is pressed at the time of the big hit in the "renso", so that the decision button 22a is used. When the pressing operation is performed, it is determined whether or not the value of the consecutive villa counter 223o is larger than "0", and it is determined whether or not the determination button 22a at the time of a big hit in the "continuous villa" is pressed. As a result of the determination, if the value of the consecutive villa counter 223o is larger than "0" (S1708: Yes in FIG. 42), it is determined that the decision button 22a is pressed at the time of a big hit in the "renso", and the change is made. Regardless of whether the button 22b is pressed or not, the intention selection flag 223i is set to on (see S1715 in FIG. 42), and it is configured to grasp whether or not the character image of the "promotion during round" effect should be changed. ing.

The hold information storage area 223p is information for performing look-ahead processing, that is, the first random number counters C1 and C1 which are acquired from the counter buffer 203b in the main control device 110 and transmitted by the hold ball number command. It is an area for storing each value of the type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 per unit.

The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to execute the look-ahead process by using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold information storage area 223p and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222. Has been done.

The execution information storage area 223q is information for performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, that is, a th-order acquired from the counter buffer 203b in the main control device 110 with a start winning and transmitted by a hold ball number command. This is an area for storing the values of the random number counter C1 per unit, the type counter C2 per unit, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1.

When the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect, it is stored in the first hold information storage area of the above-mentioned hold information storage area 223p in order to execute the setting of the variation effect and the like. The information (each value of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 and the like) for performing the fluctuation effect is shifted to the execution information storage area 223q.

Here, with reference to FIG. 20, the details of the hold information storage area 223p and the execution information storage area 223q will be described. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configurations of the hold information storage area 223p and the execution information storage area 223q. The hold information storage area 223p has four areas, the hold information storage first to fourth areas. In each of the reserved information storage first to fourth areas, the first random number counter storage area 223p1 in which the value of the first random number counter C1 is stored and the value of the first hit type counter C2 are stored, respectively. At least one type counter storage area 223p2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223p3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area 223p4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 are stored are provided. ing.

Further, the execution information storage area 223q is an area for storing the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the fluctuation effect currently being executed.

Specifically, the execution information storage area 223q is an area corresponding to the fluctuation effect currently being executed, and the reserved information storage first area is the first reserved variation effect in terms of time. The area corresponding to the effect, the reserved information storage second area is the area corresponding to the second oldest reserved variable effect in terms of time among the reserved variable effects, and the reserved information storage third area is This is the area corresponding to the 3rd oldest reserved variation effect among the reserved variation effects, and the 4th area for storing the reserved information is the 4th oldest reserved variation effect in terms of time. It is an area that corresponds to the variable production.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 holds each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1. Extract from the ball count command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the values of the extracted counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in the areas corresponding to the number of reserved balls included in the reserved ball number command in the reserved information storage first to fourth areas, respectively. It is stored in the random number counter storage area 223p1, the first hit type counter storage area 223p2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223p3, and the variation type counter storage area 223p4.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the reserved ball number command is X (1 ≦ X ≦ 4), the number of variable effects held at that time is X, and the reserved ball number command is used. Since the values of the included counters C1 to C3 and CS1 correspond to the Xth reserved variation effect in time among the reserved variation effects, each counter storage area in the hold information storage X area Stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to 223p1 to 223p4. At this time, the main control device 110 stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the hold ball number command in the hold X area of the hold ball storage area 203c. That is, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold X area of the main control device 110 are stored in the hold information storage X area.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to execute a look-ahead process (not shown) based on each value stored in each counter storage area 223p1 to 223p4 in the hold information storage X area.

On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command indicating the start of the fluctuation effect from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the shift process in the hold information storage area 223p and the execution information storage area 223q. That is, the reserved variable effect is reduced by one, and the execution of the first reserved variable effect in time is started. Therefore, the reserved information storage first area corresponding to the first reserved variable effect is started. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 are moved to the storage areas 223q1 to 223q4 of the execution information storage area 223q corresponding to the variation effect currently being executed.

Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the hold information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the hold information storage first area, and the hold information is stored. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the third area are moved to the storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the hold information storage second area, and each of the hold information storage fourth areas. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 are moved to the storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 in the hold information storage third area.

As a result, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d of the main control device 110 are stored in the execution information storage area 223q. Further, in the hold information storage 1st to 4th areas, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the hold ball storage area 203c of the main control device 110 are stored, respectively. Will be done. That is, in the voice lamp control device 113, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the fluctuation effects being executed and held by the main control device 110 are stored in the execution information storage area 223q and the hold information storage area 223p. To.

The voice lamp control device 113 grasps the number of fluctuation effects (number of reserved balls) reserved from the sub-held ball number counter 223b when the look-ahead process (not shown) is performed. Then, based on the number of reserved balls, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the areas where the variable effect is reserved among the reserved information storage 1st to 4th areas are pre-read, and in the variable effect. Whether or not it is a big hit, the fluctuation time, etc. are determined. For example, if the value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b is "1", the number of holding balls for the fluctuation effect is one, so that the holding information storage first area has each of the stored counters C1 to C3 and CS1. Look ahead to the value and make a decision. Further, if the value of the sub-held ball number counter 223b is "4", the number of reserved balls in the variable effect is four times, so that the reserved information storage fourth area has each of the stored counters C1 to C3 and CS1. Look ahead to the value and make a decision.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 in only one direction, and the voice lamp control device 113 accesses RAM 203 or the like of the main control device 110. Can't. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a hold information storage area 223p, and stores the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the fluctuation effect held by the main control device 110 in the voice lamp control device 113 as well. Therefore, by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold information storage area 223p, the look-ahead process can be executed by the voice lamp control device 113. That is, when the reserved variable effect is executed, what the result of the variable effect will be (whether or not it will be a big hit, what will happen to the variable time, etc.) is determined before the variable effect is executed. The voice lamp control device 113 can determine the execution of various effects and control the execution mode and execution timing of the "pending change notice".

The above-mentioned shift processing in the hold information storage area 223p and the execution information storage area 223q is updated based on the number of held balls when the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received (the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received. Data is moved (shifted) only in the areas corresponding to the reserved variable effect among the reserved information storage 1st to 4th areas (value of the sub-held ball count counter 223b) before the data is stored.

For example, the value of the sub-holding ball count counter 223b before the update when the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received is "4", and the entire area of the hold information storage area 223p (hold information storage first to fourth areas). ) Suppose that the data is stored. In this case, the data in the hold information storage first area is shifted to the execution information storage area 223q, the data in the hold information storage second area is shifted to the hold information storage first area, and the data in the hold information storage third area is held. It shifts to the information storage second area, and shifts the data in the hold information storage fourth area to the hold information storage third area.

On the other hand, if the value of the sub-holding ball count counter 223b before the update when the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received is "2", the data in the hold information storage first area is shifted to the execution information storage area 223q. , The data in the hold information storage second area is shifted to the hold information storage first area, and the data shift is completed. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the data shift processing is not performed for the hold information storage third and fourth areas where the fluctuation effect is not held, the number of data shifts can be reduced. The control burden can be reduced.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the reserved information storage 1st to 4th areas is shifted to an area having an area number smaller by 1 (execution information storage area 223q or reserved information storage 1st to 3rd areas). It may be configured as follows. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in each of the reserved information storage first to fourth areas, so that the program can be easily created.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed.

The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 37) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 changes and continuously produces the third symbol. It controls the advance notice effect. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG. 21.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminals of the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32). The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a period sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process.

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input / output port 238, an output port 239, and a bus. It has lines 240 and 241.

The input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input / output port 238. That is, the display control device 114 in the present embodiment is configured to be able to receive from the voice lamp control device 113 a command instructing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 determined by the voice lamp control device 113. A command indicating the control content determined by the display control device 114 (for example, a sub display determination command) can be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and both the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured. It is configured to enable forward communication. The MPU 231, the program ROM 232, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the MPU 231 side of the input / output port 238 via the bus line 240. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is another model in which the lottery probability of the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot are different, the pachinko machine 10 has the same specifications as the symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce the cost.

Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the program ROM 232 and the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the command input from the voice lamp control device 113.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores image data of each sprite such as a symbol (rear symbol or decorative symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is a large storage in a small area for storing a large amount of image data. It is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a large capacity and being inexpensive. In this embodiment, a 2 gigabyte NAND flash memory 234a is used. As a result, a large number of images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be stored, so that the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified, and the game is configured to enhance the interest of the game. ing.

Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, defective block data on which data cannot be written is generated. Therefore, in the character ROM 234, a known arbiter circuit 234b (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-223598) that performs data address conversion so that data can be read / written to / from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block is used. See). Since the arbitration circuit 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a inside the character ROM 234 and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 has a different defect in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the data block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 25) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. By expanding the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame with the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (about 33.3 in the present embodiment). Milliseconds. Hereinafter, it is expressed in parallel in "33.3 milliseconds").

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 33.3 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 46 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes an image drawing process for the next frame, and also executes a display process for displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays an image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (33.3 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and image data required for drawing an image by the image controller 237 is read from the character ROM 234 by the MPU 231 in advance before drawing and is resident. It is transferred to the video RAM 235 for normal use or the video RAM for normal use 236. At this time, whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 (further, to which address to store) depends on the content of the image based on the program or table stored in the program ROM 232 by the MPU 231. To decide.

When the image controller 237 draws an image, the image data of the character ROM 234 is not used, and the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is used to execute the image drawing process. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image controller 237 uses the image data previously stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234 to image. Since the image is drawn, the image can be drawn immediately without being affected by the slow reading speed of the character ROM 234. Therefore, the desired image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at a desired time.

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the initial setting process (main process (see FIG. 45)) at the time of turning on the power is completed, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. be able to. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 contains image data of images that are frequently displayed, and images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, or the display control device 114. Since the image data is resident, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident (unexpanded) image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 transfers the image from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. On the other hand, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data necessary for drawing. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of drawing an image is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

Whether the image data required for the image controller 237 to draw an image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 (and at which address) is stored in the program ROM 232 of the MPU 231. A storage destination for image data (resident video RAM 235 or normal video) required when making a judgment according to the content of an image based on a program or table stored in the image controller 237 and instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image. Which of the RAM 236 it is stored in and which address it is stored in) is also indicated. The image controller 237 reads necessary image data from a predetermined address of the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231. This allows the image controller 237 to concentrate on drawing the image.

When the image controller 237 receives an image drawing instruction from the MPU 231, the storage destination of the image data required for drawing (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) is selected according to the type of the image required for drawing. It may be configured to determine which of the above and which address it is stored in). In this case, when image data is stored from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the MPU 231, the image controller 237 displays the type of image (or the corresponding image) by the stored image data. The address of the character ROM 234 in which the data is stored) and the storage destination of the image data are determined based on the control signal from the MPU 231, and the image is stored in a RAM (not shown) provided in the image controller 237. The type (or the address of the character ROM 234 in which the corresponding image data is stored) and the storage destination of the image data may be stored in association with each other. Then, the image controller 237 may determine the storage destination of the image data required for the image based on the information stored in the RAM. By determining the storage destination of the image data by the image controller 237, the processing load of the MPU 231 can be reduced.

The image controller 237 is provided with a buffer RAM 237a. The buffer RAM 237a functions as a buffer memory for data transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, and has a storage capacity (for example, 132) for one block of the NAND flash memory 234a provided in the character ROM 234. It is configured by a static RAM (Static RAM, hereinafter referred to as “SRAM”) having (kilobytes), and is configured to be directly accessible from the MPU 231.

When transferring an image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 reads one block of data from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and temporarily stores the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the unused time.

If the image data is directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 without providing the buffer RAM 237a, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a and its read speed is slow. , While transferring image data of a desired size, the input / output port is composed of a dynamic RAM (Dynamic RAM; hereinafter referred to as “DRAM”) having one port (hereinafter, may be referred to as “1 port type”). One port of the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is occupied by the image data transfer from the character ROM 234, and other data access cannot be performed for a long time. As a result, during that time, the image controller 237 cannot read image data from the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 to draw an image, or transfer the drawn image data to the third symbol display device 81. The image display of the third symbol display device 81 may be delayed. Further, even when a multi-port type (a type in which a plurality of input / output ports are provided) DRAM is used for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is used in the image controller 237. The control using is limited and the control may be complicated.

On the other hand, since the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the buffer RAM 237a configured by the SRAM capable of high-speed operation in the image controller 237, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After storing, the image data can be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to.

Further, the transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. And the final address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the start address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and a third symbol display device. It is possible to easily determine the unused time for the display process on the 81, and to simplify the process.

As described above, the resident video RAM 235 is composed of a 1-port type DRAM, and is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is resident in the resident video RAM 235. In the resident video RAM 235, among the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the data corresponding to the image displayed when the power is turned on, the data corresponding to the frequently displayed image, and the main control Among the images determined to be displayed by the device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 (display control device 114), the data corresponding to the image to be displayed immediately is transferred from the character ROM 234 and resident.

The resident video RAM 235 is provided with at least a main image area 235a when the power is turned on, a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on, a rear image area 235c, a third symbol area 235d, a character symbol area 235e, and an error message image area 235f. ..

The power-on main image area 235a is data corresponding to the power-on main image (not shown) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is performing the initialization process at power-on. This is the area to store. Further, in the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variable image (not shown) that displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by a variable effect.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251, the MPU 231 first transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image (not shown) from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. , A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image (not shown) to the power-on variation image area 235b (see S2002 and S2003 in FIG. 45).

The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, three types of rear images (rear surface A corresponding to the "city stage", rear surface B corresponding to the "empty stage", and rear surface C corresponding to the "island stage") are provided.

Of the back surfaces A to C, as for the back surface and the rear image corresponding to each, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. ing. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that does not occur.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demo effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these are resident in the character symbol area 235e. As a result, when the display control device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but the character of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in the symbol area 235e in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 issues an error command that a vibration error occurs. Notifies the display control device 114 by. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the error occurs from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 has an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is composed of a 1-port type DRAM. When the image controller 237 draws an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is read from the character ROM 234 in advance. It is for temporarily storing image data. The normal video RAM 236 is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

In the present embodiment, the image data required for displaying the "music selection" effect and the image data required for displaying the "music playback" effect are not resident in the resident video RAM 235, and are not resident at the start of the jackpot or. When selecting a music, the image data is configured to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Then, in the "music selection" effect or the "music reproduction" effect, the display is configured based on the image data written in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, a process of displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the image for one frame. Every 33.3 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately designates one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 33.3 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the frame is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 33.3 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Is specified. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 33.3 milliseconds, respectively. By alternately specifying the above, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 33.3 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The program ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data, and has at least a data table storage area 232a.

The data table storage area 232a describes the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on the command from the main control device 110 (voice lamp control device 113). Display to be displayed over time for the display data table 232a1 and the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to one effect based on the command from the main control device 110 (voice lamp control device 113). Of the additional data table 232a2 describing the contents and the image data used in one effect displayed by the display data table 232a1, the transfer data information and the transfer timing of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are specified. This is an area in which the transfer data table 232a3 and the like are stored.

The display data table 232a1 is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110 (voice lamp control device 113), for example. , A display data table 232a1 corresponding to a variable effect, a demo effect, a final display effect, a restart effect, a "music selection" effect, and a "music reproduction" effect is prepared.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

Further, the definite display effect is a third symbol display device when the stop symbol is definitely displayed by receiving a definite command (display definite command) from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 after the variable effect. It is an effect displayed on 81. For example, when the stop symbol is a lost symbol, an effect of emphasizing the "missing display" is performed, and the stop symbol is "15R probability variation jackpot", "15R normal jackpot", "15R (actual 13R) probability variation jackpot", " In the case of either "2R probability variation jackpot", each "big hit display" is emphasized. By visually recognizing this definite display effect, the player can easily determine the game value given by the content of the stop symbol.

In addition, the restart effect is the main control device 110 even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the change of the third symbol or the like is stopped and displayed with the end of the variation effect, the "music reproduction" effect, the opening effect, or the ending effect. A confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from (voice lamp control device 113), an open command (display release command) indicating that a jackpot round is started, or a variation pattern command indicating the start of variation effect. This is an effect of displaying an image related to the effect being executed (for example, an image obtained by vibrating the third symbol) on the third symbol display device 81 when (display variation pattern command) or the like is not received. On the third symbol display device 81, the player visually recognizes an image related to the effect being executed (for example, the third symbol is vibrated and displayed after the fluctuation of the third symbol is stopped and displayed). Then, at that time, it can be recognized that the effect being executed continues (the stop symbol has not been determined).

Further, as described above, the "music selection" effect is an open command indicating the start of the first round transmitted from the main control device 110 (voice lamp control device 113) when a predetermined jackpot occurs in the variable effect. When the (display release command) is received, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image that allows the player to select the music to be played and displayed during the jackpot. The player recognizes that the music to be reproduced and displayed during the jackpot can be selected by executing the "music selection" effect on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by displaying the decision button icon 81b and the change button icon 81c in the "music selection" effect, it is possible to recognize that the pressing operation for the decision button 22a and the change button 22b is effective. Then, the player can press the decision button 22a or the change button 22b during the "music selection" effect to select a music that suits his or her taste while changing the music that is selected and displayed.

Further, as described above, the "music reproduction" effect is an open command indicating the start of the second round transmitted from the main control device 110 (voice lamp control device 113) when a predetermined jackpot occurs in the variable effect. This is an effect of displaying an image based on the music selected in the above-mentioned "music selection" effect on the third symbol display device 81 when the (display release command) is received. By executing the "music selection" effect on the third symbol display device 81, the player can enjoy the effect of the music and the character image selected by the player's intention, and add value different from the game value. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In the data table storage area 232a, one display data table 232a1 corresponding to the demo effect, the final display effect, and the restart effect is stored. Further, in the variation display data table 232a1 which is the display data table 232a1 for the variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of the variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, 32 tables in total. Further, in the music selection display data table 232a1 which is the display data table 232a1 corresponding to the "music selection" effect, if there are three "music selection" effect patterns to be set, one table is added to one music selection effect pattern. 3 tables will be prepared. Further, in the music display data table 232a1, which is the display data table 232a1 corresponding to the "music reproduction" effect, if there are five "music reproduction" effect patterns to be set, one table for one music reproduction effect pattern, in total. 5 tables will be prepared.

In the variation display data table 232a1, for example, when the variation effect pattern instructed by the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 and the stop symbol to be displayed at the time of stop display of the variation effect do not match, for example. , It is clearly different from the normal variation effect used when the stop symbol of loss is instructed by the main control device 110 (voice lamp control device 113) when the variation effect pattern is a hit variation effect pattern. A display data table 232a1 for default variation, which is a variation effect, is also prepared. This default variation causes the third symbol to be variablely displayed at high speed until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 is received, and the confirmation command is received. A special stop symbol (for example, a symbol displayed as "9", "8", or "7" in order from the left column) is determined as a stop symbol.

When the variation effect pattern instructed by the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 and the stop symbol to be displayed at the time of stop display of the variation effect do not match, the display control device 114 sets the line in the main control device 110. There is a possibility that it may not be possible to correctly reflect the result of the lottery and perform a variable effect or a definite display effect.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, a default variation effect is performed in such a case, and a special stop symbol indicating a special loss is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the variation effect. Even if the result of the lottery in 110 is lost, it is possible to prevent the third symbol display device 81 from erroneously performing a big hit confirmation display effect.

Further, even if the special stop symbol is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, if the lottery result in the main control device 110 is a big hit, the actual gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the big hit state, so that the player Can continue the game with peace of mind.

Furthermore, by setting the confirmed display to a special stop symbol, it is possible to suggest to the player that the pachinko machine 10 may be in a big hit state even if the confirmed display is lost. Even though the confirmation display is lost, the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit state, so that the player does not feel uneasy.

Here, the details of the display data table 232a1 will be described with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table 232a1 among the display data tables 232a1. The display data table 232a1 should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (that is, 33.3 milliseconds) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α-blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table 232a1, one back image, one cockpit image, and nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...) As the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as), an effect that expresses the insertion of light in the image, and characters (character 1, character 2, ...) used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is available for each address. It is stipulated. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are obtained with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, the variable display data table 232a1 defines only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image. For this back type, display one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or backside A to. Information that specifies whether to display a back image different from C is described. Further, as the back surface type, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table 232a1 will be described. Instead, the back type and which of the back images corresponding to the back type are specified. Position information indicating whether the range should be displayed may be specified. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table 232a1. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display data table 232a1. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table 232a1 (or the third symbol display device) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display of 81), or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. Information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the above is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table 232a1 (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating whether or not this is the case) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

The display position of the cockpit image is fixed at the center of the lower side of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α-blending information, color information, and filter designation information are constant with the passage of time. Therefore, in the variable display data table 232a1, only the cockpit type, which is information for specifying the type of the cockpit image, is specified as in the rear image. This cockpit type specifies whether the cockpit display area Db is continuously displayed in the variation effect, or the cockpit display area Db is deleted while the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" is being executed. Information is provided.

When the cockpit display area Db is specified to be displayed by the cockpit type, the MPU 231 specifies the cockpit image corresponding to the cockpit display area Db as a drawing target. On the other hand, when it is specified that the cockpit display area Db is not displayed (erased) depending on the cockpit type, it is specified that the cockpit image corresponding to the cockpit display area Db is not drawn.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the third symbol can be the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110. By managing by the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

In "0000H" which is the start address of the variable display data table 232a1, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described, and the final address of the variable display data table 232a1 ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 22). ) Describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the effect to be specified in the variable display data table 232a1 is made to correspond. The drawing contents are described.

The MPU 231 selects the display data table 232a1 to be used in response to a command from the voice lamp control device 113 (for example, a display variation pattern command), reads the data table 232a1 from the data table storage area 232a, and reads the data table storage area 232a1 from the work RAM 233 described later. It is stored in the display data table buffer 233b, and the pointer 233e described later is initialized to "0". Then, the pointer 233e is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, the following is based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233e. A drawing list (see FIG. 25), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn in the image controller 237, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 to give an instruction to draw the image. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified by the display data table 232a1 according to the update of the pointer 233e, so that the image as specified by the display data table 232a1 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 does not change the program to be executed by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display fluctuation pattern command) from the voice lamp control device 113. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table 232a1 with the display data table buffer 233b.

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable staging images may be limited. there were.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table 232a1 with the display data table buffer 233b. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of staging images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in this way, the display data table 232a1 is prepared corresponding to each effect, the display data table 232a1 corresponding to the effect to be displayed is set in the display data table buffer 233b, and the set display data table 232a1 is followed. The reason why the drawing list can be created frame by frame is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. Is.

On the other hand, in a game machine other than a game machine such as a pachinko machine 10, the display content changes from time to time based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table 232a1 corresponding to. In this way, the display data table 232a1 is prepared corresponding to each effect, the display data table buffer 233b corresponding to the effect to be displayed is set, and the drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set display data table 232a1. The configuration for creating the above can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. Is.

Next, the details of the additional data table 232a2 will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the additional data table 232a2. The additional data table 232a2 is a display to be displayed over time with respect to the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect based on the command from the main control device 110 (voice lamp control device 113). The contents are described. Here, "adding to one effect" means changing the display content of one effect based on a command from the main control device 110 (voice lamp control device 113), for example, usually in one effect. Displays an image that is not displayed, and displays another effect on top of that one effect, changes the color tone of part or all of the one effect, or changes the image displayed in one effect. It includes the concept of doing things.

That is, the additional data table 232a2 adds an image that is not normally displayed to one effect displayed by the display data table 232a1 selected based on the command from the main control device 110 (voice lamp control device 113). To change and display the drawing content required to display the image, the drawing content required to change the color tone of a part or all of the effect, and the image displayed in the effect. The required drawing content is defaulted.

In this embodiment, the “reach” of the variation effect displayed by the variation display data table 232a1 selected based on the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) from the main control device 110 (voice lamp control device 113). A case where the display content for displaying the change pattern additionally displayed with respect to "display" is defined by the additional data table 232a2 will be described.

That is, the additional data table 232a2 is prepared, for example, in response to the continuous advance notice effect that is additionally set for the variable effect, and specifically, the "bubble" and "chicken" that are the display modes of the continuous advance notice effect. , "Chicken", "Chicken", and "Chicken group", respectively, the additional data table 232a2 is stored in the data table storage area 232a.

In this additional data table 232a2, the content (drawing content) of one frame to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address is specified in detail in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table 232a1. .. In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that should be additionally displayed in the image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a semi-transparent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

For example, in the example of the additional data table 232a2 shown in FIG. 23, two effects (effect 1, effect 2) and two characters (character 1, character) are associated with the address "01F4H" defined in the display data table 232a1. For 2), each sprite type (effect type, character type), display position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter specification information are specified. On the other hand, if there is no display object to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table 232a1, the additional display object corresponding to the address does not exist in the additional data table 232a2. The meaning Null data is specified (corresponding to the address "0001H" in FIG. 23).

In the "0000H" which is the start address of the additional data table 232a2, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described as in the display data table 232a1, and the final address of the additional data table 232a2 (FIG. 23). In the example, "02EFH") contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address "02EFH" in which the "End" information is described, the effect to be specified in the additional data table 232a2 is made to correspond. The drawn contents are described.

When the MPU 231 receives the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 is an additional data table according to the variation pattern of the variation effect indicated by the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command. The 232a2 is read from the data table storage area 232a and stored in the additional data table buffer 233c of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233e is updated, the pointer 233e indicates from the display data table 232a1 of 1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and one or more additional data tables 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. The drawing content specified in the address is specified, the image content to be drawn next is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 25) described later is created. When the additional data table 232a2 is not stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, the drawing list is created only from the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b.

For example, in the example of FIG. 23, when the pointer 233e is "0001H", it is determined that there is no display object to be added because the Null data is specified in the address "0001H" of the additional data table 232a2. , A drawing list is generated based on various sprites defined in the address "0001H" of the display data table 232a1. On the other hand, when the pointer 233e becomes "01F4H", the MPU 231 adds the effect 1 specified in the address "01F4H" of the additional data table 232a2 to the various sprites specified in the address "01F4H" of the display data table 232a1. Each sprite of effect 2, character 1, and character 2 is added to create a drawing list, and the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image.

Then, by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, according to the update of the pointer 233e, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified by the display data table 232a1, and the drawing contents specified by the additional data table 232a2 are added. Therefore, the display data table 232a1 and the additional data are added. The image as defined by the table 232a2 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 has an effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command from the voice lamp control device 113 (for example, a display variation pattern command). When displaying another effect image (for example, "pending change notice") in addition to (for example, a variable effect image), additional data is added to the additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the other effect image to be additionally displayed. By setting the table buffer 233c, the effect image can be easily added to the base effect image and displayed.

As a result, for example, when there are 32 types of original effect images and there are 5 types of other effect images to be additionally displayed, a display in which an image in which other effect images are superimposed for each original effect image is defined. If a data table is prepared separately, 32 x 5 = 160 types of display data tables must be prepared, but a data table corresponding to other production images, such as this pachinko machine 10, is separately added as an additional data table 232a2. By specifying, 32 + 5 = 37 types of display data table 232a1 and additional data table 232a2 may be prepared, and the capacity increase of the data table storage area 232a can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to store the data tables 232a1,232a2 corresponding to various kinds of effects in the capacity prepared in the data table storage area 232a, and it is possible to easily further diversify the effects images.

Further, by defining another effect image to be additionally displayed as the additional data table 232a2 as in the pachinko machine 10, the display data table 232a1 corresponding to the original effect image is set in the display data table buffer 233b. Even if it is decided to display another effect image to be additionally displayed later, the additional data corresponding to the other effect image is not changed without changing the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b. By simply setting the table 232a2 in the additional data table buffer 233c, other effect images to be added and displayed can be added to the original effect image and easily displayed.

Further, since the additional data table 232a2 has the same data structure as the display data table 232a1, it is set in the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b and the additional data table buffer 233c. From the additional data table 232a2, it is possible to easily identify the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233e while updating the pointer 233e every hour, and from these, one corresponding to one frame 1 You can easily generate one drawing list. Therefore, even if the display of other effects is determined by the voice lamp control device 113 or the like in addition to the effects performed based on the command from the main control device 110, the effects to be additionally displayed are to be displayed. By defining the display contents in the additional data table 232a2, it is possible to easily perform a wide variety of effect display from the small number of data tables 232a1,232a2.

Next, the details of the transfer data table 232a3 will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table 232a3. The transfer data table 232a3 is prepared corresponding to the display data table 232a1 or the additional data table 232a2 prepared for each effect. That is, in the transfer data table 232a3, among the image data of the sprites used in the effect defined by the display data table 232a1 or the additional data table 232a2, the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234. The transfer data information for transfer to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are specified.

If all the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table 232a1 or the additional data table 232a2 is stored in the resident video RAM 235, it corresponds to the display data table 232a1 or the additional data table 232a2. The transfer data table 232a3 to be used is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 232a.

The transfer data table 232a3 corresponds to the address specified in the display data table 232a1 or the additional data table 232a2, and the image data of the sprite whose transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address (hereinafter, “transfer target image data””. The transfer data information (referred to as) is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "01F4H" in FIG. 24). Here, the image to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table 232a1 or the additional data table 232a2. The data transfer start timing is set, and in the transfer data table 232a3, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table 232a1 or the additional data table 232a2, the transfer data table 232a3 transfers the data corresponding to the address. Null data is defined, which means that there is no transfer target image data to be started (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 24).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table 232a1, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table 232a3, and the final address of the transfer data table 232a3 (FIG. 24). In the example, "02EFH") contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address "02EFH" in which the "End" information is described, the transfer target image data to be specified in the transfer data table 232a3. The transfer data information of is described.

When the display data table 232a1 or the additional data table 232a2 to be used is selected from the voice lamp control device 113 in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like, the MPU 231 becomes the display data table 232a1 or the additional data table 232a2. If the corresponding transfer data table 232a3 exists, the transfer data table 232a3 is read from the data table storage area 232a and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233d of the work RAM 233 described later.

Then, each time the pointer 233e is updated, the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and the additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c are drawn from the drawing defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233e. The contents are specified, a drawing list (see FIG. 25) to be described later is created, and from the transfer data table 232a3 stored in the transfer data table buffer 233d, the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is recorded. Acquires the transfer data information and adds the transfer data information to the created drawing list.

For example, in the example of FIG. 24, when the pointer 233e becomes "0001H" or "01F4H", the MPU 231 displays the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table 232a3, the display data table 232a1 and additional data. It is added to the drawing list created based on the table 232a2, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233e is "0002H", since the Bull data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table 232a3, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawn drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area provided in the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information. The process of transferring to a predetermined sub-area of 236a is executed.

Here, as described above, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table 232a1. In the transfer data table 232a3, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table 232a3, a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table 232a1. In addition, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table 232a1.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Therefore, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the display data table 232a1. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table 232a3, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display data table 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the voice lamp control device 113. At the same time, since the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to the display data table 232a1 is set in the transfer data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table 232a1 can be reliably obtained from the character ROM 234 at a desired timing. It can be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, the transfer data table 232a3 defines the transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, the transfer of the image data can be finely controlled while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table 232a3 has the same data structure as the display data table 232a1 and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table 232a1 so that the transfer target image should be started at the time indicated by the address. Data transfer Data information is specified. Therefore, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b, the image data is surely stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Can be instructed to start the transfer. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various programs by the MPU 231. The work RAM 233 includes a simple image display flag 233a, a display data table buffer 233b, an additional data table buffer 233c, a transfer data table buffer 233d, a pointer 233e, a drawing list area 233f, a time counting counter 233g, a stored image discrimination flag 233h, and a drawing target. It has at least a buffer flag 233i, a selected music memory 233j, and a display determined music memory 233k.

The simple image display flag 233a is a flag indicating whether or not to display a power-on image (a main image when the power is turned on and a variation image when the power is turned on. Not shown) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233a is an image for displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 in the initialization process of the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 231 after the power is turned on. It is set to ON in accordance with instructing the controller 237 to draw the main image when the power is turned on (see S2004 in FIG. 45). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 61 (b)) of the transfer setting process (see FIG. 61 (a)), the third symbol The display device 81 is set to off in order to display an image other than the image when the power is turned on (see S2415 in FIG. 61 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233a is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2021 in FIG. 46 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233a is on, the simple command determination process (see S2028 in FIG. 46 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 46B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 46 (b) see S2029) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233a is off, the command determination process (see FIGS. 47 to 56) and display so that various images are displayed according to the command received from the voice lamp control device 113. The setting process (see FIGS. 57 to 60) is executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233a is referred to in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 61 (a)) executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46 (b)). If it is determined in this transfer setting process that the simple image display flag 233a is on, there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, so the resident target image data is resident from the character ROM 234. When the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 61 (b)) for transferring to the video RAM 235 is executed, while the simple image display flag 233a is off, the image data required for the drawing process is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 62) for transferring to is executed.

The display data table buffer 233b is a buffer for storing the display data table 232a1 of 1 corresponding to the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like from the voice lamp control device 113. The MPU 231 determines an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like from the voice lamp control device 113, selects a display data table 232a1 corresponding to the effect from the data table storage area 232a, and selects the effect. The selected display data table 232a1 is stored in the display data table buffer 233b.

Then, the MPU 231 adds 1 to each pointer 233e, which will be described later, and in the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233e, every frame. Generates a drawing list (see FIG. 25) described later, which describes the contents of instructions for drawing an image to the image controller 237. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b.

The additional data table buffer 233c is added to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b in response to a command or the like from the voice lamp control device 113. It is a buffer for storing one or more additional data tables 232a2 corresponding to the effect to be displayed. The MPU 231 stores the display data table 232a1 in the display data table buffer 233b, and temporarily writes the Null data which means that there is no display object to be added to the additional data table buffer 233c to be displayed. Clear the contents.

After that, the MPU 231 is added to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b based on a command or the like from the voice lamp control device 113. Judge whether or not there is a production. Then, each time an effect to be additionally displayed occurs, an additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the effect is selected from the data table storage area 232a, and the selected additional data table 232a2 is stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. do.

Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233e, which will be described later, by one, and in the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233e and the additional data table buffer. In the additional data table 232a2 stored in the 233c, a drawing list (FIG. 25) is generated.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the additional data table 232a2 is additionally displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table 232a1. Further, when the additional data table 232a2 is not stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, the Null data is stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Therefore, the effect corresponding to the display data table 232a1 is displayed as it is on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the additional data table buffer 233c is configured to be capable of storing a plurality of (for example, 32) additional data tables 232a2. Therefore, each time an effect to be added is added, an additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the effect is determined, and the additional data table 232a2 is added to and stored in the additional data table buffer 233c to correspond to the display data table 232a1. A plurality of effects corresponding to the plurality of additional data tables 232a2 can be added and displayed to the effects.

The transfer data table buffer 233d is a buffer for storing the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b in response to a command or the like from the voice lamp control device 113. The MPU 231 selects the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to the display data table 232a1 from the data table storage area 232a in accordance with the storage of the display data table 232a1 in the display data table buffer 233b, and the selected transfer data. The table 232a3 is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233d.

If all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to the display data table 232a1 is prepared. It has not been. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Null data which means that the image data to be transferred does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233d.

Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233e, which will be described later, by one, and in the transfer data table 232a3 stored in the transfer data table buffer 233d, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233e. If is specified (that is, if Null data is not described), the drawing list (see FIG. 25) described later that describes the instruction content for image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame can be found. Add transfer data information.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information. Executes the process of transferring to a predetermined sub-area. Here, as described above, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table 232a1. In the transfer data table 232a3, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when the predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table 232a1 by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table 232a3. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 without delay. can. Therefore, while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the display data table 232a1, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table 232a3, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233e may be drawn from the display data table 232a1, the additional data table 232a2, and the transfer data table 232a3 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, the additional data table buffer 233c, and the transfer data table buffer 233d, respectively. This is for designating the address from which the transfer data information of the transfer target image data should be acquired.

The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233e to "0" in accordance with the storage of the display data table 232a1 in the display data table buffer 233b. Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 33.3 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (see FIG. 46 (b)). ), The pointer update process (see FIG. 60) is executed in the display setting process (see FIG. 57), and the value of the pointer 233e is added one by one.

The MPU 231 has a pointer 233e from the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and the additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c each time the pointer 233e is updated. The drawing contents specified at the indicated address should be specified, a drawing list (see FIG. 25) described later should be created, and transfer should be started at that time from the transfer data table 232a3 stored in the transfer data table buffer 233d. Acquires the transfer data information related to the image data of a predetermined sprite, and adds the transfer data information to the created drawing list.

As a result, when the effect corresponding to the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the additional data table 232a2 is stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, , The effect corresponding to the stored additional data table 232a2 can be added to the effect corresponding to the display data table 232a1 and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and the additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed. Can be done. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

Further, when the transfer data table 232a3 stored in the transfer data table buffer 233d is stored, the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table 232a1 based on the transfer data table 232a3. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Can be done. Therefore, while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the display data table 232a1, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table 232a3, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233f is provided in the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, the additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, and the transfer data table 232a3 stored in the transfer data table buffer 233d. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, which is generated based on the above.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 25, a back image used in a one-frame image, a third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), an effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), and a character (character 1, character 1, ...). Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as characters 2, ...), Cockpit image, and error symbol. Further, the drawing list also describes transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the ROM type in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored (or information indicating whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is used. ) And its address are described. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the ROM type (or RAM type) and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter designation information.

The image controller 237 performs enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio on a standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read from the character ROM 234 (or various video RAMs 235 and 236), and according to the rotation angle. Rotation processing is performed, semi-transparency processing is performed according to the semi-transparency value, composition processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filter specification information is applied. After performing filtering processing by the method specified by the information, the image obtained by performing various processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233i described later.

The MPU 231 draws the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233e and other drawings in the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and the additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Detailed drawing information for all sprites used to draw one frame of image based on the content of the image to be (for example, a hold image displaying an execution symbol or a hold symbol, a warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.). A drawing list is created by generating (detailed information) and rearranging the detailed information for each sprite.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage ROM type (or storage RAM type) and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table 232a1 and the additional data table 232a2, and the sprite type. Generated according to the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. That is, since the area of the character ROM 234 (or the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the sprite is stored is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage ROM type (or storage RAM type) and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately identified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list. can.

Further, the MPU 231 adds the display data table 232a1 and other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. The information specified in the data table 232a2 is copied as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...). , Character (character 1, character 2, ...), Cockpit image, error symbol, and detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in this order.

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffers 236b and 236c by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table 232a3 stored in the transfer data table buffer 233d at the address indicated by the pointer 233e, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data information (transfer target image data). The ROM address (storage source start address and storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 and the RAM address for storing the transfer target image data (storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a) are drawn. Add to the end of the list.

Then, if the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 has a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (an area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) based on the transfer data information. The image data is read from the image data, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 21. The timekeeping counter 233g is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time (variable effect time) of the effect displayed based on the display data table 232a1 in accordance with storing one display data table 232a1 in the display data table buffer 233b. .. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (33.3 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 33.3 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 46). Each time the display setting process (see FIG. 57) of (b) is executed, the time counting counter 233 g is decremented by 1 (see S2309 in FIG. 57). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233g becomes "0" or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b has ended, and the effect ends. Perform various processes that should be performed together.

The stored image discrimination flag 233h indicates whether the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not.

The stored image discrimination flag 233h is generated by the initial setting process (see S2001 in FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image discrimination flag 233h generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image discrimination flag 233h is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 62) executed by the MPU 231. .. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "Off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image discrimination flag 233h when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the image of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S2432 in FIG. 62).

If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S2433 in FIG. 62). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233i is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). It is a flag for specifying (referred to). The MPU 231 designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233i is "0", and designates the second frame buffer 236c when the drawing target buffer flag 233i is "1". Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S2502 in FIG. 63).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233i is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233i, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when the value is "1", it is set to "0". It is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 33.3 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the interrupt process (see FIG. 46 (b)) is executed (see S2502 in FIG. 63).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 33.3 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the frame is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 33.3 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Is specified. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 33.3 milliseconds, respectively. By alternately specifying the above, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 33.3 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The selected music memory 233j is the "music selection" performed in the third symbol display device 81 at the start (first round) of a predetermined jackpot (in this embodiment, "15R probability variation jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot"). This is a memory for setting the number of selectable songs and storing the songs to be selected and displayed (displayed on the front side) in the production. The MPU 231 sets the music icons 81a1 to 81a5 displayed in the "music selection" effect based on the stored contents of the selected music memory 233j, and also sets the selection display (displayed on the front side) in the "music selection" effect. ) Is configured to set the music icons 81a1 to 81a5.

The selected music memory 233j is first initialized by the initial setting process (see S2001 in FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on (that is, the updatable range is set to "0 to 2"). At the same time, the selected value is set to "0"). Then, when the MPU 231 receives the selectable music command from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 is configured to set the updatable range of the selected music memory 233j based on the selectable music command (FIG. 56). See S2291).

Specifically, for example, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a selectable music command (that is, three songs of "music AAA", "music BBB", and "music CCC") in which the number of selectable songs is three. If so, the updatable range of the selected music memory 233j is set to be updatable within the range of "0" to "2". In addition, a selectable music command (that is, four music "AAA", "music BBB", "music CCC", and "music DDD") in which the number of music that can be selected from the voice lamp control device 113 is four is received. If so, the updatable range of the selected music memory 233j is set to be updatable within the range of "0" to "3". Further, of the selectable music command (that is, "music AAA", "music BBB", "music CCC", "music DDD" and "music EEE", the number of songs that can be selected from the voice lamp control device 113 is five. When 5 songs) are received, the updatable range of the selected music memory 233j is set to be updatable within the range of "0" to "4".

That is, since the selectable music command is generated based on the updatable range of the music selection counter 223g of the voice lamp control device 113, the selected music memory 233j provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 can be updated. The range is configured to synchronize with the maximum update value (updatable range) of the music selection counter 223 g provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. With this configuration, the updatable range of the music recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 and the updatable range of the music recognized by the display control device 114 match, and the voice lamp control device 113 and It is possible to prevent a discrepancy in the production contents from occurring between the display control device 114 and the display control device 114.

Then, when the MPU 231 receives the change command from the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the selected music memory 233j is set to the current value (after the power is turned on) within the updatable range set by the selectable music command. Is configured to be updated (for example, 1 addition) from (set to "0" as an initial value) (see S2209 in FIG. 51). It should be noted that the value of the selected music memory 233j has reached the maximum update value (upper limit of the updatable range) (for example, when the updatable range is set to "0 to 3", the selected music. When the value of the selected music memory 233j is updated (for example, 1 addition) when the value of the memory 233j is "3"), the value of the selected music memory 233j is the initial value (that is, "0"). It is configured to return to.

In the selected music memory 233j, the updatable range (maximum update value) of the selected music memory 233j is set according to the number of "renso" of the jackpot every time a jackpot occurs, and the selected music memory 233j is selected in the previous jackpot. The update is started from the value of the selected music memory 233j (set). That is, as the value of the selected music memory 233j, the value selected (set) in the previous jackpot is held at the start of the next jackpot in the "renso". Since the MPU 231 is configured to display the music icons 81a1 to 81a5 that can be selected by referring to the value of the selected music memory 233j, the music icons 81a1 to 81a1 to be selected last time are displayed in the "music selection" effect. 81a5 is displayed in the selected display state.

Further, regarding the updatable range of the selected music memory 233j, the value selected (set) at the time of the previous jackpot is maintained even when the updatable range is changed. Specifically, for example, when the updatable range of the selected music memory 233j is changed in the direction of increasing (for example, from "0 to 2" to "0 to 3"), the previous updatable range is the current updatable range. It is configured to always exist in the updatable range. That is, even when the value selected in the selected music memory 233j is changed from the previous updatable range to the current updatable range, it is configured to exist together.

With this configuration, if the player wants to continuously hear (see) the "music playback" effect selected at the time of the previous jackpot even at this jackpot, the enter button 22b is not operated. The "music reproduction" effect can be selected only by pressing 22a. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that suits the player's taste by a simple operation (one pressing operation of the decision button 22a) without causing the player to perform a complicated operation.

The updatable range of the selected music memory 233j is configured so that the updatable range is set to initialization (that is, "0 to 2") when the "time reduction state" ends. .. With this configuration, the number of songs that can be selected during the jackpot increases only during the "renso" state, and when the "renso" state ends, the number of songs that can be selected during the jackpot is initially set. By changing to a "renso" state, it is possible to create playability and enhance the interest of the game.

When the updatable range of the selected music memory 233j is initialized, the value selected in the selected music memory 233j is initialized (that is, "0" is cleared). With this configuration, when the updatable range of the selected music memory 233j is initialized, even if the selected value is outside the updatable range, the value is always returned to the updatable range. This makes it possible to prevent a discrepancy between the updatable range and the selected value.

As described above, the MPU 231 updates the selected music memory 233j within the updatable range each time it receives a change command from the voice lamp control device 113, and the value (contents) of the selected music memory 233j after the update. ), The additional data table 232a2 for music selection indicating the display state (selection state) of the music icons 81a1 to 81a5 in the "music selection" effect is selected. Therefore, every time the value of the selected music memory 233j is updated, the selected additional data table 232a2 for music selection is set (stored) in the additional data table buffer 233c (see S2210 in FIG. 51).

Further, the MPU 231 indicates that when the value of the selected music memory 233j is updated, the value of the selected music memory 233j is updated including the value (content) of the selected music memory 233j after the update. It is configured to generate a sub display change command and send it to the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2210 in FIG. 51). The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to update (for example, add 1) the value of the music selection counter 223 g when the sub display change command is received from the display control device 114 (S1403 in FIG. 39). reference).

That is, the display control device 114 updates the value of the selected music memory 233j based on the change command from the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the selected music memory 233j after the update. The value of the music selection counter 223g is updated based on the reception of the sub display change command from the display control device 114 based on the above. With this configuration, when the change button 22b is pressed by the player, the selected music recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can be synchronized. Since the "music selection" effect can be executed based on the recognition, it is possible to prevent the recognition of the song being selected by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 from being misaligned, and provide an appropriate effect. be able to.

The display-determined music memory 233k is a memory for storing data related to the music to be reproduced in the "music reproduction" effect. The MPU 231 is configured to set a musical piece to be played by the "musical piece reproduction" effect based on the stored content of the display determined music memory 233k.

The display determination music memory 233k is first initialized (that is, cleared to "0") by an initialization process (see S2001 in FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. Then, the MPU 231 is configured to write the value (data) of the above-mentioned selected music memory 233j to the display determination music memory 233k when the determination command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. (See S2203 in FIG. 51).

Then, the MPU 231 selects (stores) the additional data table 232a2 for music determination corresponding to the value (data) written in the display determination music memory 233k in the "music selection" effect, and sets (stores) it in the additional data table buffer 233c. (See S2204 in FIG. 51). By drawing the image according to the additional data table 232a2 for determining the music, the music is determined in the "music selection" production based on the content (value) set in the display determination music memory 233k. An effect indicating that (hereinafter, referred to as “musical composition determination display”) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, the MPU 231 selects (stores) the music display data table 232a1 corresponding to the value (data) stored in the display determined music memory 233k in the display data table buffer 233b in the "music reproduction" effect. (See S2254 in FIG. 54). With this configuration, the "music reproduction" effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the content (value) set (written) in the display determination music memory 233k.

Further, the MPU 231 is configured to generate a sub display determination command including the value (data) of the display determination music memory 233k and transmit it to the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2205 in FIG. 51). .. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the sub display determination command from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the determination music memory 223h of the voice lamp control device 113 based on the value of the music selection counter 223 g of the voice lamp control device 113. It is configured to be set (see S1405 in FIG. 39).

As described above, the display control device 114 sets the value of the display determination music memory 233k based on the determination command from the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 sets the display determination music memory 233k. Based on the reception of the sub display determination command from the display control device 114 based on the above, the value of the music selection counter 223g is configured to be set in the determination music memory 223h. With this configuration, the value of the display-determined music memory 233k is set based on the value of the selected music memory 233j at the timing when the decision button 22a is pressed by the player, and the display-determined music at the set timing. A music determination effect in the "music selection" effect can be executed based on the value of the memory 233k, and a "music reproduction" effect can be executed based on the display determined music memory 233k value.

The command is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the voice lamp control device 113 after waiting for a predetermined period (for example, one frame) when the display control device 114 generates a new command. -Receiver / Transmitter (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter; hereinafter abbreviated as "UART") Makes a transfer request, decomposes the generated 1-byte 8-bit command into time series, and sends it to the voice lamp control device 113 bit by bit. It is configured to send. Further, when the UART transfer of 1 is completed, an interrupt process occurs, and if there is a further untransmitted command at that timing, the UART transfer request is made again and the untransmitted command is transmitted. ing.

When the determined flag 233m is on, a determination command is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the player pressing the determination button 22a in a predetermined selection effect (for example, a “music selection” effect). It is a flag indicating. The determined flag 233m is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to on when the first determination command is received during a predetermined selection effect (see S2206 in FIG. 51). Further, when the determined flag 233m receives the display release command for the second round from the voice lamp control device 113 and the execution of the "music reproduction" effect is started, that is, the "music selection" effect is completed. If so, it is set to off (see S2260 in FIG. 54).

In the present embodiment, when the determined flag 233m is off, the MPU 231 executes a process of determining or changing the content of the selection effect being displayed in response to the reception of the determination command (see S2202 to S2210 in FIG. 51). On the other hand, when the determined flag 233m is turned on, it is determined that the determination command has already been received in the selected effect being displayed, and the content of the selected effect being displayed is determined (see S2202 to S2210 in FIG. 51). It is configured not to skip and execute. That is, if the decision command (the first decision command) has been received even once in the predetermined selection effect, the decision command (later decision command) or the change command is received again until the selection effect ends. Even if it is done, it is configured not to execute the process based on the re-decision command (later decision command) or the change command.

With this configuration, the display control device 114 has already been determined when the previous determination command is received, even if the determination command is duplicated from the voice lamp control device 113 during the predetermined selection effect period. By setting the flag 233m and preventing the processing based on the later decision command from being executed, it is possible to prevent duplicate processing from being executed on the display control device 114 side and reduce the processing load of the display control device 114. be able to.

Further, even when the display control device 114, which is the control device on the downstream side, receives the decision command more than once, the control based on one decision command is executed and the other decision command is discarded. By configuring so that control based on the other decision command is not executed and enabling appropriate processing to be executed, whether or not the decision command has been output in the voice lamp control device 113, which is the upstream control device, etc. Since it is not necessary to execute complicated processing of the above, it is possible to facilitate the creation of a program at the time of development of each of the control devices 113 and 114.

Further, the display control device 114 is configured not to execute the process based on the subsequent change command when the determination command is received during the predetermined selection effect period. The command received by the display control device 114 from the voice lamp control device 113 is performed by the third symbol display device 81, such as a display variation pattern command indicating the execution of the variation effect and a determination command indicating the player's decision. Auxiliary to the production performed by the third symbol display device 81, such as the main (highly important) command for the production, the confirmation command for display, and the change command indicating that the player's intention is temporarily changed. It can be divided into various (less important) commands. Therefore, when the process corresponding to the decision command which is the main command is executed, the process corresponding to the change command which is an auxiliary command of the main command is not performed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the content of the effect determined by the decision command, which is the main command, from being changed by the change command, which is an auxiliary command, and the content of the effect is inconsistent. It can be prevented from occurring.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the decision button 22a is pressed and the decision button 22a is pressed in the "music selection" effect in the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the subsequent decision buttons 22a are determined. Since it is not necessary to execute the detection process of the change button 22b and the analysis process of the decision command and the change command, the processing load on the control devices 113 and 114 can be effectively reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display control device 114 issues a decision command and a change command from the voice lamp control device 113 while displaying (drawing) one frame (that is, 33.3 milliseconds). When receiving, the display control by the decision command is prioritized (see S2202 in FIG. 51), the received change command is cleared (discarded) (see S2207 in FIG. 51), and the display control based on the change command is performed. It is configured not to run.

Conventionally, in the development of a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a display device mounted on the display device (in the present embodiment, a third symbol display device whose display is controlled by the display control device 114) in consideration of the development budget and application (drawing accuracy). The number of frames processed per unit time (for example, 1 second) of the moving image displayed in 81) (also referred to as the number of still images or the number of frames. Hereinafter, the number of frames processed per unit time is referred to as "frame rate". In some cases, the unit of "frame rate" may be abbreviated as "frames per second" and may be referred to as "fps").

Specifically, in the case of a gaming machine with a small development budget, or a gaming machine that uses a video with little movement or a video that does not require smoothness of display, a display device that is displayed and controlled (drawn) at a low frame rate. Is used. On the other hand, in the case of a gaming machine that uses a moving image with a large development budget and a moving image or a moving image that requires smoothness of display, a display device that is displayed and controlled (drawn) at a high frame rate is used. Therefore, the frame rate related to the display control of the display device is different for each model, and the time (unit processing time) required for the control of the display device is also different.

On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 for determining the display content of the third symbol display device 81 whose display is controlled by the display control device 114 is common among different models in consideration of cost and development efficiency. Therefore, although the frame rate (unit processing time) of the display control device 114 differs depending on the model, the unit processing time of the voice lamp control device 113 is common, so that the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is used. When the display control device 114 processes the above, a problem may occur.

Specifically, for example, in the case of the display control device 114 in which the display is controlled (drawn) at a low frame rate (20 fps), one frame is drawn in units of 50 milliseconds, so that the sound is produced within the 50 milliseconds. It is configured to collectively process commands received from the lamp control device 113 and control display such as drawing in units of 50 milliseconds based on the commands. Therefore, the display control device 114 having a low frame rate receives (receivable) from the audio lamp control device 113 while drawing one frame as compared with the display control device 114 having a high frame rate (for example, 50 fps). The number of commands may increase. Therefore, the lower the frame rate of the display control device 114, the greater the processing load may be when commands are concentrated between one frame.

As described above, the unit processing time (1 millisecond), which is the execution interval of the command output processing (see S1102 in FIG. 36) and the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see S1106 in FIG. 36) in the voice lamp control device 113, is Since it is shorter than the frame rate of the display control device 114 (for example, 33.3 milliseconds), it is possible to send a plurality of commands within the time required for the display control device 114 to draw one frame. ing. As a result, the number of commands transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 may be enormous.

In particular, the detection of the decision button 22a or the change button 22b can be determined by the unit processing time (that is, 2 milliseconds) of 2 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the decision command and the change command can be determined in one frame, respectively. May be received. In such a situation, for example, if the process based on the change command received in the same frame is executed after the process based on the decision command is executed, the determined content will be changed again, and the effect will be produced. There is a risk of discrepancies in the content. In addition, the processing content indicated by the decision command, which is the main command, may be rewritten by the change command, which is an auxiliary command.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the decision command and the change command are received between one frame, the process corresponding to the decision command, which is the main command, is preferentially executed. Further, the auxiliary command is for assisting the main command in the effect, and the effect is established without executing the process based on the auxiliary command, and the problem is unlikely to occur. Therefore, when the process corresponding to the decision command, which is the main command, is executed, the process corresponding to the change command, which is an auxiliary command of the main command, is not performed, and the change command is discarded. do.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the content of the effect determined by the decision command, which is the main command, from being changed by the change command, which is an auxiliary command, and the content of the effect is inconsistent. It can be prevented from occurring. Further, when the main command is processed in one frame, the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced by not executing the processing of the auxiliary command in the frame.

Further, the change of the music recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be performed when the sub display change command is received from the display control device 114. Then, when the change command is discarded by the display control device 114, the sub display change command is not transmitted from the display control device 114 based on the discard of the change command. Therefore, when the change command is discarded by the display control device 114, the music recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 is not changed. Therefore, even if the change command is ignored by the display control device 114. , The selected music recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 and the selected music recognized by the display control device 114 can be synchronized so that there is no discrepancy in the production contents. can.

Further, even if the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the decision command and the change command to the display control device 114 in duplicate, the voice lamp control device 113 processes the commands on the display control device 114 side. Since the consistency between the 113 and the display control device 114 can be maintained, the voice lamp control device 113 can transmit the decision command and the change command without considering the frame rate of the display control device 114. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the creation of a program at the time of development of the voice lamp control device 113.

By receiving the sub display determination command or the sub display change command from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the selection status of the music recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device. It is possible to synchronize with the selection status of the music recognized by 114, but tentatively, due to the influence of noise or the like, the selection status of the music recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 recognize it. When the selection status of the music is different from the selection status of the music, the selection status of the music recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 is preferentially adopted. With this configuration, the processing content of the voice lamp control device 113, which is the upper control device, is prioritized, and the display control device 114, which is the lower control device, is the voice lamp control device 113 on the upper side. It is possible to clarify the position of the device as being controlled based on instructions and facilitate the creation of programs at the time of development.

As a control for giving priority to the voice lamp control device 113 over the display control device 114, for example, a situation in which the selection display of the music recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 is “music AAA” (that is, the value of the music selection counter 223g). In "0"), when the change command is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 by pressing the change button 22b by the player, the voice lamp control device 113 has the current selection status. A change command including (for example, the value of the music selection counter 223g is "0") is transmitted to the display control device 114. Further, when the display control device 114 transmits the sub display change command to the voice lamp control device 113 based on the reception of the change command, the display control device 114 includes the selection display of the music recognized by the display control device 114. The display change command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the sub display change command, the content is updated (added) by one from the selection status of the music recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 itself (that is, ". It is determined whether or not the content corresponds to "music BBB". As a result of the determination, if the sub display change command is updated (added) by one from the selection status of the music recognized by the voice lamp control device 113, it is determined that the normal command transmission / reception has been performed. , The voice lamp control device 113 updates (adds) one selection status of the music. On the other hand, if the sub display change command is not updated (added) by one from the selection status of the music recognized by the voice lamp control device 113, the sub display change command is discarded and the voice lamp control is performed. While maintaining the selection status of the music grasped by the device 113, an error command indicating that there is a discrepancy in the recognition of the selection status of the music is transmitted to the display control device 114. Similar processing can be performed in the determination command and the sub display determination command transmitted and received by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. With this configuration, even if there is a discrepancy in the recognition of the music selection status between the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, there is a discrepancy between the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. It is possible to perform an appropriate process of notifying that there is a deviation and notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 while eliminating the above.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 26 to 34. The processes of the MPU 201 are roughly classified into a start-up process (see FIG. 33) that is started when the power is turned on, a main process (see FIG. 34) that is executed after the start-up process, and periodically (see the present embodiment). Then, there is a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) that is activated (at a cycle of 4 milliseconds) and an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32) that is activated by inputting the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Here, for convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the start-up process and the main process will be described.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process that is repeatedly executed every 4 milliseconds. By executing this timer interrupt process by the MPU 201, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process and the main process, commands to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, etc. are generated based on various processes, and are temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. .. In the external output process of S101, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side.

For example, the hold ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 27) described later is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, etc. set in the variation processing (see FIG. 28) and the variation start processing (FIG. 29), which is one process of the variation processing, are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the ball launch signal set when firing the ball in the process of S111 described later is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then the jackpot process for executing the process at the time of the jackpot is executed (S103). This jackpot process will be described later.

Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol of “◯” or “×”) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S105). Briefly, on condition that the ball has passed through the second entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 is used. Variable display is carried out at. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is carried out by the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is in the winning state, the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

Next, the reading process of various winning switches is executed (S106). That is, the state of various switches 208 connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch 208 is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. Further, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 based on the prize detection information is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process executed next.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S107). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“899” in this embodiment), it is cleared to “0”. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203b area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“250” in this embodiment), it is cleared to “0” and the second initial value random number counter is used. The update value of CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203b area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the second per random number counter C4 are updated (S108). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the second random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values. (In this embodiment, when it reaches "899", "99", "99", "198", "250", respectively), it is cleared to "0", respectively. Further, when the first random number counter C1 or the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is used as the first random number counter C1 or the first random number counter CINI2. It is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4, and the initial value is set in the first random number counter C1 or the second random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203b area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for performing dynamic display by the first symbol display device 37 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S109), and then the first input is performed. The start winning process accompanying the winning of the ball mouth 64 is executed (S110). The details of the variation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 28, and the details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

After the start winning process (S110) is executed, the launch control process is executed (S111), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S112) to end the timer interrupt process. The launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and launches the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. Then, when the ball launch is on, the information of the ball launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 in order to transmit the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. As a result, the ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process executed next.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27, a start winning process (S110), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S110). The start winning process determines whether or not a ball has entered the first entry port 64 (starting winning), and if there is a starting winning, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c. Execute (hold) processing. Further, a process for transmitting the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be held together with the number of held balls to the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

In this start winning process (S110), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64 (S201). Here, based on the output signal of the first ball opening switch (not shown) that detects the ball entering (winning) into the first ball opening 64, which was read in the switch reading process (S106 of FIG. 26). The ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes.

When it is determined that the ball has won a prize in the first ball opening 64 (there was a start winning prize) (S201: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (holding of the variable effect held in the main control device 110). It is determined whether or not the number of balls N) is less than the upper limit value (“4” in this embodiment) (S202). Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S201: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the number of balls on hold for operation is not N <4 (S202: No). , Return to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entry slot 64 (S201: Yes) and the number of reserved balls N <4 (S202: Yes), the value of the reserved ball counter 203a (number of reserved balls N) is set. Add 1 (S203). Then, each value of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is read from the counter buffer 203b (see FIG. 7) and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. Among the provided reserved first to fourth areas, the first hit random number counter storage area 203c1, the first hit type counter storage area 203c2, and the stop pattern selection counter storage in the area corresponding to the value indicated by the hold ball number counter 203a. It is held (stored) in the area 203c3 and the variable type counter storage area 203c4, respectively (S204).

Specifically, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition by the process of S203 is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the reserved first area. Further, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after addition is "2", it is in each storage area of the reserved second area, and if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after addition is "3", it is in the reserved third area. If the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after addition is "4" in each storage area of the above, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the reserved fourth area.

Next, the value of the reserved ball counter 203a (held ball number N) after the addition by the processing of S203, and the first random number counter C1 stored (held) in the reserved ball storage area 203c by the processing of S204, the first hit. In order to transmit the hold ball number command including the values of the type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 to the voice lamp control device 113, the hold ball number command is sent to the command transmission ring provided in the RAM 203. Set in the buffer (S205). As a result, the hold ball number command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S101 of the timer interrupt process executed next. When the processing of S205 is completed, the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 26).

As the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the reserved ball number command in the processing of S205, the values themselves read from the counter buffer 203b in the processing of S204 may be used, or the reserved balls are stored in the processing of S204. The value stored (held) in the area 203c may be read out and used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, a variation process (S109), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this variation processing (S109). This variation processing (S109) controls the dynamic display in the first symbol display device 37 and the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In this fluctuation processing (S109), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S301). The jackpot includes the middle of the jackpot game displayed by the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot, and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is in progress (S301: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is dynamically displaying (S302), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is dynamically displayed. If it is not in the middle (S302: No), then it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S303). As a result, if a predetermined time has not elapsed after the dynamic display is stopped (S303: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33). As a result, the stop symbol in the dynamic display (variation effect) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol. can.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S303, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display is stopped (S303: Yes), the value of the reserved ball count counter 203a (dynamic display (variation) held in the main control device 110). It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls N) in the production) is larger than "0" (S304). As a result, if the value of the hold ball number counter 203a (hold ball number N) is not "0" (S304: Yes), it is determined that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect, and first, the value of the hold ball number counter 203a is determined. (Number of reserved balls N) is subtracted by 1 (S305). This is because the variation start process (S307) starts the execution of the variation effect of one of the reserved variation effects, so that the number of reserved balls is reduced by one.

Next, the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S306). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the hold ball storage area 203c toward the hold ball execution area 203d, and is a process of sequentially shifting the hold ball execution area 203d from the hold first area to the hold ball execution. The data in each area is shifted such as area 203d, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on.

After the data shift processing of S306, the fluctuation start processing for the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d by the data shift processing. (S307), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26). The fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 29.

In the process of S304, when it is determined that the value (number of reserved balls N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a is "0" (S304: No), a demonstration effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, it is determined whether or not the demo is in progress (S308). In this determination process, after the demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113, it is determined that the value of the hold ball number counter 203a (hold ball number N) is larger than "0". It is determined that the period up to is being demoed.

If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S308: No), a demo command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S309), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26). On the other hand, if it is determined that the demo is in progress (S309: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process as it is. The demo command set in the process of S309 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed next in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 26). It is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, the display control device 113 transmits the display demo command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 demos to the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the display demo command. Control to display the effect.

Here, the demo command is set when, as described above, there is no reserved ball when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped. Therefore, if the fluctuation effect is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the variation is stopped, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

If it is determined in the process of S308 that the demonstration is not in progress (S308: No), a process of determining whether or not a second predetermined time longer than the predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped is further performed. The demo command may be set by executing the process of S309 when the second predetermined time has elapsed after the execution and the fluctuation stop. As a result, if there is no reserved ball after the fluctuation is stopped, the player can see the stopped symbol of the stopped fluctuation effect for a relatively long time without starting the demonstration effect immediately.

In the process of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is being dynamically displayed (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed (S310). The display time during dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time is determined. If it has not elapsed (S310: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S311), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the dynamic display until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turn off and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Is turned off and the display mode in which the red LED is turned on is set.

The variation processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the variation processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the fluctuation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches "100". , Change the lighting color of the LED. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to "0" when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S310: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol is set for the first symbol display device 37 (S312). The stop symbol is preset by the fluctuation start process (S307) described later with reference to FIG. 29. In the fluctuation start processing, whether or not it is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d by the processing of S306, and if it is a big hit, the first hit type counter C2. Depending on the value of, whether it is a symbol that becomes "15R probability variation jackpot", a symbol that becomes "15R (actual 13R) probability variation jackpot", a symbol that becomes "2R probability variation jackpot", or a symbol that becomes "15R normal jackpot" after the jackpot. It is determined.

In this embodiment, the blue LED is turned on when the "15R probability variation jackpot" is reached after the jackpot, and the green LED is turned on when the "15R (substantially 13R) probability variation jackpot" is reached, and the "2R probability variation jackpot" is set. When it becomes, the red LED is turned on, and when it becomes "15R normal jackpot", the red LED and the blue LED are turned on. If there is a loss, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. It should be noted that each LED is turned off when the next dynamic display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S312, the stop symbol of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. In order to display the confirmation, a confirmation command is set (S313), and the process is transferred to S314. The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect being executed by the third symbol display device 81. Upon receiving this confirmation command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display confirmation command to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 is configured to stop the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 and display the stopped symbol in a definite manner by receiving the display confirmation command.

In the process of S314, it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed dynamic display is a big hit (S314). As a result of the confirmation, if the confirmed dynamic display is not a big hit (S314: No), this fluctuation processing is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 26). On the other hand, when the confirmed dynamic display is a big hit (S314: Yes), the big hit control table 202f (see FIG. 6) is referred to based on this big hit, and the opening time corresponding to the big hit is read out (see FIG. 6). S315). Then, in order to transmit the opening command based on the read opening time to the voice lamp control device 113, the opening command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S316). As a result, the opening command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S101 of the timer interrupt process executed next. When the processing of S316 is completed, the process returns to the timer interrupt processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, a variation start process (S307), which is one process of the variation process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing (S307). This fluctuation start processing (S307) performs a big hit or loss lottery (big hit lottery) based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d, and also performs the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. The dynamic pattern (variation pattern and stop type) of the dynamic display and the variation effect performed in 81 is determined.

In the fluctuation start processing (S307), first, whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is determined based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d and the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 8A). A jackpot lottery (win / fail determination) process for determining is performed (S401).

Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, in the jackpot random number table 202a, when the possible gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal low probability state (“normal gaming state” or “time shortening state”), “7,307”. , 582 ”is defined as a jackpot random number value. Further, when the possible gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (“probability fluctuation state”), “28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298, 322,354,390,420,448,486,506,534,567,569,618,656,681,716,750,772,809,863,866,892 "is defined as a jackpot random number value.

In the process of S401, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d is compared with the jackpot random number value defined in these jackpot random number tables 202a, and when they match. , Determined to be a big hit. When it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot as a result of the processing of S401 (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d and the jackpot type table 202b (FIG. 8 (b)). (See) and, the display mode at the time of a big hit is set (S402).

In this process, according to the jackpot type table 202b, the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d, that is, the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds after the jackpot "probability fluctuation". "15R probability variation jackpot" that shifts to "state", or the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, but the opening mode of the first and second rounds is the same as "2R probability variation jackpot", and after the jackpot, it goes to "probability fluctuation state". "15R (actual 13R) probability variation jackpot" to shift, "15R normal jackpot" to shift to "time shortened state" after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, or "probability fluctuation" after the maximum number of rounds is 2 rounds It is determined whether it is a "2R probability variation jackpot" that shifts to the "state". Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) at the time of the jackpot in the first symbol display device 37 is set.

Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in order to stop and display various jackpot symbols corresponding to the jackpot types, the jackpot types (“15R probability variation jackpot”, “15R (substantially 13R) probability variation jackpot”, “2R probability variation jackpot”, “2R probability variation jackpot”, “ By setting "15R normal jackpot") as the stop type as it is, the display mode at the time of jackpot in the third symbol display device 81 is set.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S403), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the effect mode is selected based on the display mode (stop type) at the time of a big hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time. Then, the variation time of the variation effect is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the selected effect modes. In determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot, first, the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 10 (c) or FIG. 10 (d)) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the jackpot.

When "15R probability variation jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot" is set as the jackpot type in the processing of S402, it is stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d in the selected stop pattern table 202d (C table 202d3). The effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is selected. That is, in this case, one of the "normal reach" effect mode, the "super reach" effect mode, and the "special reach" effect mode is selected (see FIG. 10 (c)).

When the effect mode is "15R probability variation jackpot" and the effect mode is set to "normal reach", the reserved ball execution area is set in the "E5: normal reach" group of the variation pattern table 202e1 (see FIG. 11) for probability variation jackpot. The variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in 203d is selected. That is, in this case, one of the fluctuation patterns of "normal reach only", "normal reach + re-variation", "normal reach + promotion during fluctuation" or "normal reach + re-variation + promotion during fluctuation" is selected (see FIG. 11). .. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance (see FIG. 11).

When the effect mode is "15R probability variation jackpot" and the effect mode is set to "super reach", the reserved ball is in the "E6: super reach" group of the variation pattern table 202e1 (see FIG. 11) for probability variation jackpot. The variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area 203d is selected. That is, in this case, "super reach only", "pseudo-ren + super reach", "super reach + re-variation", "pseudo-ren + super reach + re-variation", "super reach + promotion during fluctuation", "pseudo-ren" One of the fluctuation patterns of "+ super reach + promotion during fluctuation", "super reach + re-variation + promotion during fluctuation" or "pseudo-ream + super reach + re-variation + promotion during fluctuation" is selected (see FIG. 11). .. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance (see FIG. 11).

When the "15R probability variation jackpot" is set and the "special reach" effect mode is set as the effect mode, the reserved ball is set in the "E7: special reach" group of the variation pattern table 202e1 (see FIG. 11) for the probability variation jackpot. The variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area 203d is selected. That is, in this case, "special reach only", "pseudo-ren + special reach", "special reach + re-variation", "pseudo-ren + special reach + re-variation", "special reach + promotion during fluctuation", "pseudo-ren" One of the fluctuation patterns of "+ special reach + promotion during fluctuation", "special reach + re-variation + promotion during fluctuation" or "pseudo-ream + special reach + re-variation + promotion during fluctuation" is selected (see Fig. 11). .. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance (see FIG. 11).

When the effect mode is "15R normal jackpot" and the effect mode is set to "normal reach", the reserved ball execution area is set in the "E5: normal reach" group of the normal jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 (see FIG. 12). The variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in 203d is selected. That is, in this case, either "normal reach only" or "normal reach + re-variation" variation pattern is selected (see FIG. 12). Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance (see FIG. 12).

When the "15R normal jackpot" is set and the "super reach" effect mode is set as the effect mode, the reserved ball is in the "E6: super reach" group of the normal jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 (see FIG. 12). The variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area 203d is selected. That is, in this case, one of the fluctuation patterns of "super reach only", "pseudo-ream + super reach", "super reach + re-variation" or "pseudo-ream + super reach + re-variation" is selected (FIG. 12). reference). Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance (see FIG. 12).

When the "15R normal jackpot" is set and the "special reach" effect mode is set as the effect mode, the reserved ball is set in the "E7: special reach" group of the fluctuation pattern table 202e2 (see FIG. 12) for the normal jackpot. The variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area 203d is selected. That is, in this case, one of the fluctuation patterns of "special reach only", "pseudo-ream + special reach", "special reach + re-variation" or "pseudo-ream + special reach + re-variation" is selected (FIG. 12). reference). Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance (see FIG. 12).

Further, when "15R (substantially 13R) probability variation jackpot" or "2R probability variation jackpot" is set as the jackpot type in the processing of S402, the reserved ball execution area 203d is set in the selected stop pattern table 202d (D table 202d4). The effect mode associated with the value of the stored stop pattern selection counter C3 is selected. That is, when "15R (substantially 13R) probability variation jackpot" or "2R probability variation jackpot" is won, "special variation" is selected without exception. Then, with reference to the selected effect mode and the variation pattern table 202e1 for the probability variation jackpot, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d is selected. In this embodiment, only "movie" is selected in this case (see FIG. 11). Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance (see FIG. 11).

On the other hand, if it is determined by the process of S401 that it is not a big hit (S401: No), the display mode at the time of loss is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the hold ball number counter 203a stored in the hold ball execution area 203d. As the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of and the current gaming state, a "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode, a "non-reach (normal)" effect mode, and a "normal reach" effect mode. , "Super reach" effect mode or "special reach" effect mode is set. In the present embodiment, as described above, each effect mode depends on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a “probability fluctuation state”, a “time shortening state”, or a “normal gaming state”. The stop pattern table 202d (A table 202d1 or B table 202d2) is set so that the range of values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the above is different.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation time until the stop display is performed with the lost symbol is determined. At this time, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the "normal gaming state", the A table 202d1 or the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203a ( Either FIG. 10 (a) or FIG. 10 (b)) is selected. When the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the "time reduction state" or the "probability fluctuation state", the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203a at that time. Alternatively, either B table 202d2 (see FIG. 10 (a) or FIG. 10 (b)) is selected.

When the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode is set in the processing of S404, it is stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d in the "E0: non-reach (shortened)" group of the variation pattern table 202e3 for loss. The variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, "only non-reach (shortening)" is selected, and no other variation pattern is selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance (see FIG. 13).

Further, when the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode is set in the processing of S404, it is stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d in the "E1: non-reach (normal)" group of the loss variation pattern table 202e3. The fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, "non-reach (normal) only" is selected, and no other variation pattern is selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance (see FIG. 13).

Further, when the "normal reach" effect mode is set in the processing of S402, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d in the "E2: normal reach" group of the variation pattern table 202e3 for loss. Select the variation pattern associated with. That is, in this case, "normal reach only" is selected, and other fluctuation patterns are not selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance (see FIG. 13).

Further, when the "super reach" effect mode is set in the processing of S402, the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d in the "E3: super reach" group of the variation pattern table 202e3 for loss. Select the variation pattern associated with the value of. That is, in this case, "super reach only" or "pseudo-ream + super reach" is selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance (see FIG. 13).

Further, when the "special reach" effect mode is set in the processing of S402, the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d in the "E4: special reach" group of the variation pattern table 202e3 for loss. Select the variation pattern associated with the value of. That is, in this case, "special reach only" or "pseudo-ream + special reach" is selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance (see FIG. 13).

In this way, the same random number value C3 is used for the effect mode and variation pattern setting process at the time of probability variation jackpot, the effect mode and variation pattern setting process at the normal jackpot, and the effect mode and variation pattern setting process at the time of loss. , CS1 can be used to make a judgment using the same judgment program, so that the programs can be standardized and the development man-hours at the time of development can be reduced.

In the processing of S406, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is notified to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined by the processing of S403 and S405. Set the pattern command (S406). Specifically, for example, if the jackpot lottery is won, the jackpot is "15R probability variation jackpot", and the 25-second fluctuation pattern of "super reach only" is selected, the jackpot / "15R" is selected. A fluctuation pattern command indicating "probability change jackpot" and "super reach only" is set. Further, if the jackpot lottery is lost and a 25-second fluctuation pattern of "super reach only" is selected, a fluctuation pattern command indicating loss or "super reach only" is set. In this way, even if the variation effect has the same variation time, by setting the variation pattern command together with the propriety of the variation effect and the content of the rough variation pattern, the voice lamp control device 113 can perform the effect mode including the result. It is possible to grasp the content and the fluctuation time of the above, and to determine the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation production in detail based on the information.

Further, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S402 or S404 to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S407), and the variation processing (see FIG. 28) is performed. return. Specifically, for example, if a jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is "15R probability variation jackpot", the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "7" symbol, etc.) is not specified. Set a stop type command indicating that it is a "15R probability change jackpot". If the jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is "15R normal jackpot", the "15R normal jackpot" is not specified and the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "4" symbol etc.) is not specified. Set the stop type command indicating that.

On the other hand, if the jackpot is not won and the "super reach" effect mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "787") is not specified, and the "super reach" effect mode is not specified. A stop type command is set to indicate that the "super reach" effect mode (so-called front-back loss). Further, if the jackpot is not won and the "normal reach" effect mode is selected, the "normal reach" at the time of loss is not specified without specifying the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "737"). A stop type command indicating that the mode is an effect mode (so-called loss other than front and back) is set. Further, if the jackpot is not won and the "non-reach" effect mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "258") is not specified, and the "non-reach" effect mode is "" at the time of loss. A stop type command indicating that the mode is "non-reach" effect mode (so-called complete loss) is set.

In this way, by setting a rough stop type based on the success or failure of the variation effect in the stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) grasps the stop type based on the success or failure and makes them. It is possible to determine the stop result of the fluctuation effect in detail based on the information of.

These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are executed in the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 26) to be executed next. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command or the stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display fluctuation pattern command or a display type command based on the fluctuation pattern command, and transmits the display type command to the display control device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, a jackpot process (S103), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the jackpot process (S103). As described above, in this jackpot process (S103), when a jackpot occurs, the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the jackpot 65a is set according to the type of the jackpot, and the opening time of the jackpot 65a is set. To set. Further, in the case of a big hit state, an opening / closing control process for opening or closing the big winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed. That is, the big winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of balls have won the big winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the large winning opening 65a is closed. The control regarding the opening and the control regarding the closing of the large winning opening 65a are repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

In the jackpot process (S103), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (S501). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is not hit (S501: No), the jackpot process (S103) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26), while it is determined that the jackpot is being hit. (S501: Yes), then determines whether or not the opening time has elapsed (S502). This determination determines whether or not the opening time set in S315 of the variation processing (FIG. 28) has elapsed.

As a result of the determination of S502, if the opening time has elapsed (S502), the number of rounds in the big hit (the number of times the big winning opening 65a is opened and closed), the number of seconds for opening the big winning opening 65a, etc. are set. The processing of S503 to S510 is performed.

In the process of S503, it is determined whether or not this jackpot is a "2R probability variation jackpot" (S503). As a result of the determination, if the main jackpot is "2R probability variation jackpot" (S503: Yes), "2" is set in the round counter to control the opening of the jackpot 65a twice in the main jackpot (S504). ), The process is transferred to S506. On the other hand, if the main jackpot is not a "2R probability variation jackpot" (S503: No), that is, if it is a "15R probability variation jackpot", a "15R (substantially 13R) probability variation jackpot", or a "15R normal jackpot", the jackpot is a jackpot. In order to control the opening of the winning opening 65a 15 times, "15" is set in the round counter (S505), and the process shifts to S506. In the present embodiment, the MPU 201 confirms the value of the round counter, and when the value is set in the round counter (that is, "1" or more), the round is controlled while opening the large winning opening 65a. The value of the counter is subtracted by 1. Then, when the value of the round counter becomes "0", the jackpot being executed is terminated.

Next, in the processing of S506, "10" is set to the value of the winning counter for counting the number of winnings in the large winning opening 65a (S506), and the processing is shifted to S507. In the present embodiment, the value of the winning counter is configured to be decremented by 1 each time a ball enters the large winning opening 65a, and the MPU 201 has a predetermined opening time after opening the large winning opening 65a. It is configured to close the large winning opening 65a when (see S507 described later) has elapsed or when the value of the winning counter becomes "0".

In the process of S507, the opening time of the big winning opening 65a is set (S507) with reference to the big winning opening opening / closing table 202g according to the type of the big hit, and the opening setting of the big winning opening 65a is set (S508). Then, the opening flag indicating that the large winning opening 65a is open is set to ON (S509), and an opening command indicating that the large winning opening 65a is open is issued to the voice lamp control device 113. The setting (S510) is performed, and the process proceeds to the open / close control process (S511) for executing the open / close control of the large winning opening 65a. The release command set in the process of S510 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 26) to be executed next. Then, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

If it is determined in the processing of S502 that the timing is not the elapsed timing of the opening time (S502: No), the opening time has not elapsed, or the opening time has already elapsed and the number of times the large winning opening 65a has already been opened. Since the setting such as is completed, the processing of S503 to S510 is skipped, and the processing is shifted to the opening / closing control processing of S511.

Here, with reference to FIG. 31, the open / close control process (S511), which is one of the jackpot processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the open / close control process (S511). As described above, in this open / close control process (S511), the open / close control of the big winning opening 65a is executed based on the number of times the big winning opening 65a is opened, the opening time, and the number of winnings set in the big hit process (S103). ..

In this open / close control process (S511), first, it is determined whether or not the opening flag is on (S601). If the opening flag is not on (S601: No), the large winning opening 65a is not open and is in the interval time, so the process shifts to S615, while the opening flag is on (S601: 1). Yes), since the big winning opening 65a is being opened, it is then determined whether or not it is the timing when one opening time of the big winning opening 65a set in the big hit process has elapsed (S602).

In the processing of S602, if the opening time of the large winning opening 65a has elapsed (S602: Yes), the closing condition of the large winning opening 65a is satisfied, and the closing timing of the large winning opening 65a in that round is reached. The value of the winning counter is cleared to "0" (S603), and the process shifts to S608 in order to close the large winning opening 65a. The closing process of the large winning opening 65a from S608 will be described later. On the other hand, in the process of S602, if the opening time of the large winning opening 65a has not elapsed (S602: No), then it is determined whether or not the ball has won the large winning opening 65a (S604).

In the process of S604, if the ball has won a prize in the large winning opening 65a (S604: Yes), the value of the winning counter is subtracted by 1 (S605), and then the large winning opening 65a with respect to the voice lamp control device 113. A big prize command indicating that the ball has won is set in (S606). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter subtracted by 1 is larger than "0" (S607). If the value of the winning counter is not greater than "0" (S607: No), that is, if the value of the winning counter is "0" or less, 10 balls are won in the large winning opening 65a and the large winning opening. Since the closing condition of 65a is satisfied, the process is shifted to S608 in order to close the large winning opening 65a. The big prize command set in the process of S606 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 26). , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113.

In the processing of S604, when it is determined that the ball has not won a prize in the large winning opening 65a (S604: No), or in the processing of S607, the value of the winning counter is larger than "0". If it is determined (S607: Yes), the closing condition of the large winning opening 65a is not satisfied, and in order to continue opening the large winning opening 65a, the processing of S608 to S622 is skipped and this opening / closing control is performed. The process (S511) is terminated. After the opening / closing control processing is completed, the process returns to the jackpot processing (see FIG. 30).

In the closing process of the large winning opening 65a from S608, first, the closing setting of the large winning opening 65a is set (S608), and then the opening flag is set to off (S609). Then, a closing command indicating that the large winning opening 65a has been closed is set for the voice lamp control device 113 (S610), and the process shifts to S611. The closing command set in the process of S610 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 26) to be executed next. Then, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, in the processing of S611, since one round of the large winning opening 65a was digested, the value of the round counter was decremented by 1 (S611), and whether or not the value of the deducted round counter is larger than "0". (S612). When the value of the round counter is larger than "0" (S612: Yes), the number of rounds in the jackpot (the number of times the big winning opening 65a is opened) remains, so that the next big winning opening 65a In order to count the winning balls at the time of opening, "10" is set in the winning counter (S613), and then the interval time of the big winning opening 65a is set with reference to the large winning opening opening / closing table 202g (S614). , The process is transferred to S615. As the interval time set in S614, specifically, for example, if it is the third round or later of "15R probability variation jackpot", "15R normal jackpot" or "15R (substantially 13R) probability variation jackpot", the interval time is 2 Seconds are set. Further, in the case of the first and second rounds of "15R (substantially 13R) probability variation jackpot" or "2R probability variation jackpot", 1 second is set as the interval time.

On the other hand, in the processing of S612, when the value of the round counter is not larger than "0" (S612: No), that is, when the value of the round counter is "0" or less, the big winning opening 65a in this jackpot Since all the opening operations have been completed, the ending time of the jackpot is set with reference to the jackpot control table 202f in order to terminate the jackpot state (S620). Then, an ending command indicating the start of the jackpot ending effect is set for the voice lamp control device 113 (S621), other jackpot end setting processes are performed (S622), and the open / close control process (S611) is terminated. After the opening / closing control processing is completed, the process returns to the jackpot processing (see FIG. 30). The ending command set in the process of S621 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 26) to be executed next. Then, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

In the process of S615, it is determined whether or not the timing has elapsed the interval time set in S614 (S615). As a result of the determination, if the timing is not the timing at which the interval time has elapsed (S615: No), since the interval time has not elapsed, the processing of S616 to S619 is skipped and the opening / closing control processing (S511) is terminated. On the other hand, if the interval time has elapsed (S615: Yes), the big winning opening 65a is opened by referring to the big winning opening opening / closing table 202g according to the value of the jackpot type (type) and the round counter. Set the time (S616). Specifically, for example, in the case of the third and subsequent rounds of "15R probability variation jackpot", "15R normal jackpot" or "15R (actual 13R) probability variation jackpot", the opening time of the big winning opening 65a is 29.5 seconds. Set. Further, in the case of the first and second rounds of the "15R (substantially 13R) probability variation jackpot" or the "2R probability variation jackpot", 2 seconds is set as the opening time of the big winning opening 65a.

After the processing of S616, the opening setting of the large winning opening 65a is set (S617), the opening flag indicating that the large winning opening 65a is open is set to on (S618), and the voice lamp control device 113 is set. An opening command indicating that the large winning opening 65a is being opened is set (S619), and the opening / closing control process (s511) is terminated. After the opening / closing control processing is completed, the process returns to the jackpot processing (see FIG. 30). The release command set in the process of S619 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 26) to be executed next. Then, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

In this way, by executing the jackpot process (see FIG. 30) and the open / close control process (see FIG. 31) that controls the opening / closing of the big winning opening 65a in the jackpot process, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 A process of opening and closing the big winning opening 65a at the time of a big hit and a process of transmitting various states at the time of a big hit to the voice lamp control device 113 are performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the NMI interrupt process executed in the main control device 110 when a power failure or the like occurs will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S701) as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S801). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S802). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S804), and if it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process shifts to S811. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if it is not stored (S805: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is also shifted to S811 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data is destroyed, and the process is shifted to S811 even in such a case.

As will be described in S906 of FIG. 34, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S811, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S811). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S812, S813) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the initialization process (S812, S813) of the RAM 203 is executed. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S812, S813) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S812, S813), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to “0” (S812), and then the initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S813). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S810.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), the power off occurrence information is stored (S805: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S807: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S808). Then, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S810, interrupts are permitted (S810). Then, the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 34) described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the counter update process and the power cutoff process are roughly executed.

In the main process, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S901). If the information on the occurrence of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S901: No), the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S902 and S903).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S902). Specifically, when the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and the counter value reaches the maximum value (“899”, “250” in this embodiment), Clear to "0". Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203b area of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S108 (see FIG. 26) (S903), and the process shifts to the process of S901.

Here, while this main process is being executed, the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 26 is started and executed at predetermined time intervals (4 milliseconds in this embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed depending on the state of the game. For example, during the big hit, the execution of controlling the opening and closing of the big winning opening 65a is performed, and if the ball passes through the second entry opening 67, the display control of the second symbol by the second symbol display device 83 is performed. Will be done. Further, in the jackpot lottery executed when the dynamic display on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the jackpot random number value to be compared with the acquired first hit random number counter C1 is determined depending on whether it is in the high probability state or the low probability state. The numbers will be different. Therefore, the time required to execute one timer interrupt process changes according to the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant and changes according to the state of the game at that time.

The above-mentioned processes S902 and S903, which are one of the main processes, are executed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. That is, since the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is repeatedly executed using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number are used. The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated at random. .. In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, the first random number counter C1 and the second random number counter C2 that use these as initial values for updating are updated. Can be given randomness.

Further, in the processing of S901, if the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S901: Yes), the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 37 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S904 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S904), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S905). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S906), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S907), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S901 is executed at the timing when one cycle of the processes of S902 and S903 performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) ends. As a result, in the main processing of the main control device 110, various settings by the timer interrupt processing are completed, and the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when the update of each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is completed. .. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process can be started from the process of S901 after the start-up process (see FIG. 33) is completed. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process.

Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S801). By setting a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S901. As a result, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

In the present embodiment, the process to be executed periodically is executed by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26), and the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are updated in the remaining time of the timer interrupt process in the main process. However, a part or all of the processing executed in the timer interrupt processing may be configured to be executed every predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds) in the main processing. For example, the prize ball counting signal, the payout abnormality signal reading process (S102), the large winning opening opening / closing process (S103), the second symbol control process (S105), and the switch reading, which were executed in the timer interrupt process in the present embodiment. A part or all of the process (S106) may be configured to be executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process instead of the timer interrupt process.

In this case, a step for determining whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has elapsed is provided in the main process, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process to be executed every predetermined time is executed, and each of them is executed. The counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be updated regardless of whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is updated during the remaining time of the process to be executed at predetermined time intervals, but the process to be executed at predetermined time intervals is executed according to the state of the game. Since the time required for the operation changes, the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 can be updated at random even in such a configuration.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 to 44, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process (see FIG. 35) that is started when the power is turned on and a main process (see FIG. 36) that is executed after the start-up process.

First, with reference to FIG. 35, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S1115 (see FIG. 36) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") in this start-up process. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 36, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1112 in FIG. 36), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1115. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S1115 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S1115 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S1115 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No), and the data is transferred to the S808.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1002: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the voice lamp control device 113 is being executed during the power-off processing of S1115. MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to "0".

If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1115 is executed (see S1114 in FIG. 36). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1115 is executed, the process of S1008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1115 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010), and then an interrupt is performed. Set the permission (S1011) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S1008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the processing of S1004 to S1006 is performed and the processing of S1008 is started. This is the case when the process is reached or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power cutoff command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009, which is the clearing process of the work area of RAM223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1010, the initial value of RAM223 is set (S1010), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1011), the process proceeds to the main process.

It should be noted that the reason for skipping the clearing process of S1009 is that when the processing of S1008 is reached via the processing of S1004 to S1006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the previous process of S1101 was executed (S1101), and if 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S1101: No). , The process shifts to the process of S1110 without performing the process of S1102 to S1109. In the processing of S1101, it is not necessary to process S1102 to S1109 in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond) to determine whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas the variation effect processing of S1110 This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1111 or S1111 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S1110 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing. Based on the above, the settings related to the variable effect can be made without delay.

In the process of S1101, if it is determined that 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the process of S1101 was executed last time (S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1102. When the process of S1101 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 35, the process directly proceeds to the process of S1102.

In the process of S1102, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1103 to S1112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S1107 described later (S1103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process shifts to the process of S1105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

Next, in the process of S1105, the jackpot effect process for executing the effect related to the jackpot set by the command determination process of S1111 described later is performed (S1105), and the process proceeds to the process of S1106. This jackpot effect processing will be described later in FIG. 40.

Next, in the process of S1106, the frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1106). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the determination button 22a or the change button 22b is pressed during the valid period of the determination button 22a or the change button 22b of the frame button device 22 operated by the player to enhance the effect. It is a process of monitoring the input of whether or not the button is used, and setting the effect corresponding to the case where the input of the decision button 22a or the change button 22b is confirmed during the valid period. The frame button input / effect process (S1106) will be described later in FIG. 42.

After the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1106) is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1107), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1108). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S1108, the liquid crystal display execution management processing is executed (S1109), and the process proceeds to the processing of S1110. In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1107 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, and the sound editing / output process of S1108 is also synchronized with the time required for the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81. Runs in time.

In the process of S1110, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect process is a process for starting the variation effect based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110. To execute. The details of this variation effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 43. Then, after the variation effect process, a command determination process (S1111) is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to the process of S1112. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

In S1112, a counter update process for updating various counters of the promotion lottery counter 223k and the promotion effect lottery counter 223n provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (S1112). Specifically, the promotion lottery counter 223k during the round and the promotion effect lottery counter 223n are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, the promotion lottery counter 223k during the round is "99", the promotion effect. When the lottery counter 223n reaches "9"), each clears "0".

As described above, the promotion lottery counter 223k and the promotion production lottery counter 223n updated in this way are such that the promotion lottery counter 223k during the round changes from the jackpot corresponding to the "15R normal jackpot" to the "15R probability change" during the jackpot. It is used to select the "promotion during the round" effect that changes to the jackpot corresponding to the "big hit", and the promotion effect lottery counter 223n is used in the "promotion during the round" effect when the "round promotion" effect is executed at the time of the jackpot. It is used to select the character image to be displayed.

When the processing of S1112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S1115), and the power-off process is executed (S1116). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S1117), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1114: No), the process returns to the process of S1101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1114: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1111). This command determination process (S1111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is received from the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 as described above. Judge the command that was executed.

In the command determination process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not a command from the main control device 110 is received in the command storage area provided in the RAM 223 (S1201). As a result of the determination, if a command is received from the main control device 110 (S1201: Yes), the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and the command varies from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not a pattern command has been received (S1202). Then, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S1202: Yes), the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1203). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation display process (see FIG. 43) described later, the display variation pattern for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type. Used when setting commands. After that, this command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 36).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1202: No), it is then determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1204). Then, when it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S1204: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the stop type command (S1205). The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation display process (see FIG. 43) described later, when a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect is set. Used for. After that, the variation start flag 223a indicating that the variation effect is started is set to ON (S1206), the command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 36).

The stop type command indicates the stop type of the variation effect in which the variation pattern is indicated by the variation pattern command after the main control device 110 transmits the variation pattern command when the variation effect is started. This command is always sent from 110. By setting the fluctuation start flag 223a to ON by the processing of S1206, in the fluctuation effect processing (see FIG. 36) executed later, the extraction is performed based on the value of each counter C1 or the like previously included in the reserved ball number command. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern type of the variation effect and the variation pattern type of the variation effect extracted from the received variation pattern command match. Also, whether or not the stop type of the variation effect extracted based on the value of each counter C1 or the like previously included in the reserved ball count command matches the stop type of the variation effect extracted from the received stop type command. Judgment is made. As a result of those judgments, in the variation effect of 1, when the variation pattern based on the hold ball number command and the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command do not match, or the stop type and stop type command based on the hold ball number command. If the stop type does not match, it is determined that some abnormality (for example, command reception abnormality due to noise) has occurred, and error processing is performed to indicate the abnormality.

When it is determined that the stop type command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1204 (S1204: No), then it is determined whether or not the confirmation command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1207). The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect being executed by the third symbol display device 81. When it is determined that this confirmation command has been received (S1207: Yes), a display confirmation command for notifying the display control device 114 of the reception of the confirmation command is set (S1208), and the process is sent to S1209. Transition.

In the process of S1209, it is determined whether or not the "time reduction state" ends, that is, whether or not the "continuous villa" state ends, by executing this variation effect (S1209). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the "time reduction state" ends (S1209: Yes), it means that the "renso" state has ended, so the value of the consecutive villa counter 223o is cleared to "0" (S1210). Next, in order to initialize the display state in the "music selection" effect, the setting range of the music selection counter 223g is initialized (that is, "0 to 2") (S1211), and this command determination process (S1111). To finish. On the other hand, in the process of S1209, when it is determined that the "time reduction state" does not end (S1209: No), the process of S1210 and S1211 is skipped because it is in the "continuous villa" state or the "normal game state". Then, this command determination process (S1111) is terminated. After the command determination process (S1111) is completed, the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 36).

As described above, in the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, the gaming state other than the "normal gaming state", that is, the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time shortening state" are set to "consecutive villas", and the "time shortening" is performed. Only when the decision button 22a is pressed during the big hit during the "ream" until the end of the "state", it is considered that the same player's intention selection is clearly shown, and the presence or absence of the change button 22b is pressed. Regardless, the intention selection flag 223i is configured to be set to on. Then, it is configured to confirm whether the intention selection flag 223i is on or off in the "promotion during round" effect during the jackpot, and to select a character image to appear in the "promotion during round" effect. By configuring in this way, the character image that appears in the "music playback" production and the character image that appears in the "promotion during the round" production are related, and the production balance is unified throughout the jackpot. It can be maintained and the player can enjoy the jackpot production without any discomfort.

The display confirmation command set in S1208 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 36). Will be done. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the display confirmation command executes the process so that the variation effect is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that the confirmation command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1207 (S1207: No), then it is determined whether or not the reserved ball count command has been received (S1212). Then, when it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S1212: Yes), the value of the hold ball number counter 203a (see FIG. 6) of the main control device 110 included in the hold ball number command (that is, the main control device). The number of reserved balls of the variable effect reserved in 110) is extracted and stored in the sub-held ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1213).

Here, since the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64, every time there is a starting winning, it is processed by S1213. , The value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of detecting the start winning prize The value of the sub-held ball number counter 223b can be modified to match the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110.

Further, after the processing of S1213, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b updated by the processing of S1213 is set (S1214), and this command determination processing is performed. (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 36). The display reserved ball count command set in S1214 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 36). Will be sent. As a result, the display control device 114 executes the process so that the reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls are displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that the reserved ball count command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1212 (S1212: No), then the command related to the jackpot, that is, the opening command, the opening command, the winning command, the ending command or the closing command is executed. It is determined whether or not the command has been received (S1215). If it is determined that the above command regarding the jackpot has not been received (S1215: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S1217), this command determination processing (S1111) is terminated, and the main The process returns to the process (see FIG. 36). On the other hand, when it is determined that the commands related to the jackpot have been received (S1215: Yes), the process proceeds to the jackpot command processing (S1216) in order to execute the processing corresponding to the commands related to the jackpot. After the jackpot command processing is completed, the command determination processing (S1111) is terminated and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 36).

Here, the jackpot command process (S1216) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the jackpot command processing (S1216). In this jackpot command processing (S1216), as described above, processing based on the jackpot-related commands (opening command, opening command, winning prize command, ending command, or closing command) received from the main control device 110 is executed.

In this jackpot command processing (S1216), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1301). As a result of the determination, if the opening command is received from the main control device 110 (S1301: Yes), the display opening command is set (S1302), and then the jackpot effect flag 223j is set in order to execute the effect related to the jackpot. Set to on (S1303) to shift processing to S1304.

The display opening command set in S1302 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 36). Will be done. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the display opening command recognizes the start of the jackpot and executes a process so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect of starting the jackpot (for example, the opening effect). do.

Next, in S1304, it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the time when the jackpot is generated is the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time shortening state" (S1304). As a result of the determination, if the gaming state at the time when the jackpot is generated is the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state" (S1304: Yes), the "probability fluctuation state" or the "probability fluctuation state" given after the previous jackpot Since the opening command is received again during the "time reduction state", it is a so-called "renso" jackpot, so the value of the consecutive villa counter 223o is added by 1 (S1305), and this jackpot command processing (S1216) is terminated. do. After the jackpot command processing is completed, the process returns to the command determination processing (see FIG. 37). In the process of S1304, if it is determined that the state is not the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time shortened state" (S1304: No), that is, if the opening command is received in the "normal game state", the so-called "renso". , Therefore, the process of S1305 is skipped and the jackpot command process (S1216) is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, when the opening command is not received from the main control device 110 (S1301: No), then it is determined whether or not the release command is received from the main control device 110 (S1306). As a result of the determination, if the release command is received from the main control device 110 (S1306: Yes), the display release command is set (S1307), and the jackpot command process (S1216) is terminated.

The display release command set in S1307 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 36). Will be done. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the display opening command recognizes that the big winning opening 65a at the time of a big hit has been opened, and corresponds to the number of times the big winning opening 65a is opened (that is, the number of rounds). The third symbol display device 81 executes a process so as to display an effect (for example, a "music selection" effect, a "music reproduction" effect, etc.) according to the number of times of opening (the number of rounds).

In the process of S1306, when the release command is not received from the main control device 110 (S1306: No), then it is determined whether or not the grand prize command is received from the main control device 110 (S1308). As a result of the determination, if a large prize command is received from the main control device 110 (S1308: Yes), a ball wins in the large prize opening 65a and a predetermined prize ball (15 in this embodiment) is paid out. A big prize command for display indicating that is set (S1309), and this big hit command processing (S1216) is terminated.

The display grand prize command set in S1309 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process (see S1102 in FIG. 36) of the main process. Will be sent. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the display large prize command recognizes that the ball has won a prize for the large prize opening 65a that is open at the time of the big hit, and the third symbol display device 81 responds to the prize. In, the process is executed so as to display the effect according to the winning (for example, the display of the number of balls won during the big hit).

In the process of S1308, when the big prize command is not received from the main control device 110 (S1308: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command is received from the main control device 110 (S1310). As a result of the determination, if the ending command is received from the main control device 110 (S1310: Yes), the display ending command is set (S1311), and then the jackpot effect flag 223j is turned off in order to end the effect related to the jackpot. Is set to (S1312), and this jackpot command processing (S1216) is terminated.

The display ending command set in S1311 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 36). Will be done. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the display ending command recognizes the end of the jackpot and executes a process to display the effect of ending the jackpot (for example, the ending effect) on the third symbol display device 81. do.

In the process of S1310, when the ending command is not received from the main control device 110 (S1310: No), the command determined as the command related to the jackpot in S1215 of the command determination process (see FIG. 37) is other than the above-mentioned command. Since it is a closing command of, a closing command for display is set (S1313), and this jackpot command processing is terminated.

The display closing command set in S1313 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 36). Will be done. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the display closing command recognizes that the big winning opening 65a at the time of the big hit is closed, and the third symbol display device 81 closes the big winning opening 65a. The process is executed so as to display the indicated effect (for example, interval effect).

Returning to FIG. 37, the description will be continued. In the process of S1201, when it is determined that the command from the main control device 110 has not been received in the command storage area provided in the RAM 223 (S1201: No), the command stored in the command storage area is determined. In order to determine whether or not a command has been received from other than the main control device 110, the process proceeds to display-side command processing (S1218). After the display side command processing (S1218) is completed, the command determination processing (S1111) is terminated and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 36).

Here, the display side command process (S1218) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the display side command processing (S1218). In this display-side command process (S1218), it is determined whether or not a command has been received from the display control device 114, and if a command has been received, a process based on the command is executed.

In this display-side command process (S1218), first, it is determined whether or not a command from the display control device 114 is received in the command storage area provided in the RAM 223 (S1401). As a result of the determination, if a command has not been received from the display control device 114 (S1401: No), this display side command process (S1218) is terminated and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 37), while the display control device. If the command is received from 114 (S1401: Yes), the process shifts to S1402.

In the process of S1402, it is determined whether or not the received command is a sub display change command (S1402). As a result of the determination, if the sub display change command is received (S1402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the music selection counter 223g (S1403), and the display side command processing (S1218) is terminated.

Here, the sub display change command corresponds to the value of the selected music memory 233j updated based on the reception of the change command when the display control device 114 receives the change command from the voice lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 transmits to the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, each time the voice lamp control device 113 receives the sub display change command, the processing of S1403 is performed, and the value of the selected music memory 233j of the display control device 114 and the music selection counter 223g of the voice lamp control device 113g. Can be matched (synchronized) with the value of. With this configuration, when the change button 22b is pressed by the player, the selected music recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can be synchronized. Since the "music selection" effect can be executed based on the recognition, it is possible to prevent the recognition of the song being selected by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 from being misaligned, and provide an appropriate effect. be able to.

In the process of S1402, when it is determined that the received command is not the sub display change command (S1402: No), the command received from the display control device 114 is a command other than the above-mentioned sub display change command, that is, a sub. Since this is a display determination command, the reproduction music data is set in the determination music memory 223h based on the value of the music selection counter 223g (S1404). After the processing of S1404, the display-side command processing (S1218) is terminated.

The value (data corresponding to the music to be played) set in the determined music memory 223h in the process of S1404 is, for example, when the sub display determination command is received when the value of the music selection counter 223g is "0". , A value indicating "music AAA" corresponding to the value ("0") of the music selection counter 223g is written in the determined music memory 223h. Further, when the value of the music selection counter 223g is "1", when the sub display determination command is received, the value indicating "music BBB" corresponding to the value of the music selection counter 223g ("1") is the determined music. It is written to the memory 223h. Further, when the value of the music selection counter 223g is "2", when the sub display determination command is received, the value indicating "music CCC" corresponding to the value of the music selection counter 223g ("2") is the determined music. It is written to the memory 223h. Further, when the value of the music selection counter 223g is "3", when the sub display determination command is received, the value indicating "music DDD" corresponding to the value of the music selection counter 223g ("3") is the determined music. It is written to the memory 223h. Further, when the value of the music selection counter 223g is "4", when the sub display determination command is received, the value indicating "music EEE" corresponding to the value of the music selection counter 223g ("4") is the determined music. It is written to the memory 223h.

Here, the sub display determination command corresponds to the value of the display determination music memory 233k set based on the reception of the determination command when the display control device 114 receives the determination command from the voice lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 transmits to the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the sub display determination command, the processing of S1404 is performed, and the value of the display determination music memory 233k of the display control device 114 and the determination music memory 223h of the voice lamp control device 113 Can be matched (synchronized) with the value of. With this configuration, when the decision button 22a is pressed by the player, the determined music recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can be synchronized, and the recognition thereof. Since it is possible to execute the "music reproduction" effect based on the above, it is possible to prevent the recognition difference of the music executed by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, and to provide an appropriate effect. Can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the jackpot effect processing (S1105) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a jackpot effect process (S1105) executed in the main process (see FIG. 36) of the voice lamp control device 113. This jackpot effect processing (S1105) is executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 36) of the voice lamp control device 113, and the jackpot effect is performed according to the command related to the jackpot determined by the command determination process (S1111). When the flag 223j is set to ON, each process related to the jackpot effect is performed.

In this jackpot effect processing (S1105), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot effect flag 223j is set to ON (S1501). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot effect flag 223j is not set to ON (S1501: No), the jackpot effect process (S1105) is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 36). On the other hand, when the jackpot effect flag 223j is set to ON (S1501: Yes), since the jackpot is in progress, the processes of S1502 to S1513 are executed in order to execute the effect related to the jackpot.

In the processing of S1502, one round of "15R probability variation jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot" (hereinafter, "15R probability variation jackpot" and "15R normal jackpot" may be collectively referred to as "15R jackpot"). It is determined whether or not it is the start of the eye (S1502). As a result of the determination, if it is the start of the first round of "15R jackpot" (S1502: Yes), the button operation effect flag 223c is set to ON in order to execute the "music selection" effect (S1503), and then , "315000" is set in the button valid timer 223d (S1504), and the process shifts to S1505. In the present embodiment, the "music selection" effect is performed before the start of the second round of the jackpot, that is, during the execution of the first round and during the interval time between the first round and the second round. Therefore, a value corresponding to the maximum time of 31.5 seconds is set in the button valid timer 223d.

Next, in the processing of S1505, the range (update range) of the music selection counter 223g is set (S1505) with reference to the value of the consecutive villa counter 223o and the music table 222e, and the processing is shifted to S1506. By the process of S1505, the number of songs that can be selected in the "music selection" effect is set based on the number of "renso" hits.

Then, in the processing of S1506, a selectable music command is set based on the range (update range) of the music selection counter 223g (S1506), and the jackpot effect processing (S1105) is terminated. The selectable music command set in S1506 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 36). .. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the selectable music command recognizes the number of music that can be selected by the player in the "music selection" effect, and displays the music icons 81a1 to 81a5 corresponding to the number of music. Execute the process.

In the process of S1502, if it is determined that it is not the start of the first round of the "15R jackpot" (S1502: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the start of the second round of the "15R jackpot" (S1507). ). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that it is the start of the second round of the "15R jackpot" (S1507: Yes), the determination command is set (S1508), and the jackpot effect processing (S1105) is terminated. The decision command set in S1508 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 36). As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the decision command is currently performing selection display in the "music selection" effect only when the decision command has not already been received (not received) at the stage when the decision command is received. It is determined that the music of the above is determined, and the process is executed so that the "music reproduction" effect corresponding to the music being selected and displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the decision button 22a is pressed by the player during the button operation valid period during the "music selection" effect, the decision command is sent from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Is configured to be transmitted, and a decision command is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 at the end of the "music selection" effect, that is, at the start of the second round of the "15R jackpot". It is configured as follows.

Conventionally, in the "music selection" effect in which the player can select a favorite music by his / her own will, when the player operates the change button 22b within the button operation valid period, the third symbol display device 81 The music selected in the executed "music selection" effect can be changed, and when the player operates the decision button 22a within the valid period of the button operation, the third symbol display device 81 executes the operation. It is configured so that the subsequent "music reproduction" effect is executed by the music selected and displayed in the "music selection" effect.

Specifically, the voice lamp control device 113 detects the pressing of the decision button 22a or the change button 22b, and when the pressing operation of the decision button 22a or the change button 22b is detected, the voice lamp control device 113 controls the display. It is configured to send a decision command or a change command to the device 114. Then, when the display control device 114 receives the decision command or the change command from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 determines that the decision button 22a or the change button 22b has been pressed, and executes the display control device 114 on the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to determine or change the production content of the "music selection" effect inside.

That is, the display control device 114 is configured to perform display control based on an instruction (command) from the voice lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114 is a change command from the voice lamp control device 113. Based on the reception, it is configured to recognize the change of the music being selected and displayed in the "music selection" effect. Further, the display control device 114 recognizes the determination of the music being selected and displayed in the "music selection" effect based on the reception of the determination command from the voice lamp control device 113, and "selects the music" based on the determination. In the production, the music determination display is performed, and then the execution start of the "music reproduction" production based on the music determination display is recognized.

In the pachinko machine configured in this way, if the display control device 114 cannot receive the determination command due to some abnormality (for example, a command missing abnormality), the display control device 114 determines the music in the "music selection" effect. Even in a situation where the end of the "music selection" production cannot be recognized and the "music selection" production must be ended (for example, at the end of the button operation valid period during the "music selection" production). The "music selection" effect may be continuously displayed, and the execution of the "music reproduction" effect that should be originally executed may not be started. In particular, when the button operation valid period ends, the pressing operation of the decision button 22a or the change button 22b is not determined to be valid at a timing after that, and it is not possible to change or decide from the display screen during the selection display. May occur.

Therefore, at the end of the "music selection" effect, it is conceivable to forcibly determine the execution of the "music reproduction" effect by the music being selected and displayed in the "music selection" effect. That is, even if the player does not press the decision button 22a in the "music selection" effect, the music selected and displayed in the "music selection" effect at the timing when the "music selection" effect ends. Is configured to be determined as a song to be executed in the subsequent "music playback" production without exception. Specifically, in the "music selection" effect, when the player does not press the determination button 22a and the determination command is not transmitted to the display control device 114, the music is played at the end of the "music selection" effect. It is configured to transmit a command indicating that the decision has been made (for example, a decision command output when the decision button 22a is pressed). With this configuration, when the "music selection" effect is executed, the music decision instruction (decision command) can be transmitted to the display control device 114, so that the decision instruction is given in the "music selection" effect. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the "music selection" effect is continuously executed without being output.

However, at the end of the "music selection" effect, whether or not the player presses the decision button 22a during the "music selection" effect, that is, is displayed from the voice lamp control device 113 during the "music selection" effect. It is determined whether or not the decision command has been sent to the control device 114, and as a result of the determination, if the decision command has already been sent, the decision command is not sent again, and only if the decision command has not been sent, the decision command is issued. If the voice lamp control device 113 mistakenly recognizes that the decision command has been transmitted due to some abnormality (for example, noise) when the control such as transmission is performed, the voice lamp control device 113 uses the display control device 114. Since the decision command cannot be transmitted to the display control device 114, the display control device 114 cannot recognize the end trigger of the "music selection" effect and cannot determine the execution trigger of the "music playback" effect because the decision command cannot be received. , There is a risk that the "tune selection" effect will be displayed continuously. Further, when the process of determining whether or not the decision command has been transmitted is executed at the end of the "music selection" effect, another control process is being executed at the end of the "music selection" effect. Therefore, the processing may be complicated.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the decision command is transmitted during the "music selection" production at the end of the "music selection" production, that is, at the start of the second round, the music Configure to send a decision command to indicate the decision. With this configuration, at the end of the "music selection" effect, it is possible to reliably instruct the display control device 114 to determine the music, and by not receiving the determination command, the "music selection" is performed. It is possible to reliably prevent the continuous display of the "music selection" effect from occurring despite the end of the effect.

In addition, since it is not necessary to process whether or not the decision command has been transmitted at the end of the "music selection" effect, the process at the end of the "music selection" effect is simplified to reduce the control load. be able to.

In this case, when the decision button 22a is pressed by the player during the "music selection" effect, the decision command based on the pressed operation and the decision command based on the end of the "music selection" effect are displayed in duplicate. It is transmitted to the control device 114. In such a configuration, when the display control device 114 performs the process based on the earlier decision command, the process based on the later decision command is not executed. Details will be described in the button operation system command processing (S2111) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 of FIG. 51.

With this configuration, even if the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the decision command to the display control device 114 in duplicate, it is possible to prevent the display control device 114 from executing the duplicate processing. However, the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced. Further, the display control device 114, which is the control device on the downstream side, is configured to be able to execute appropriate processing even when the determination command is received in duplicate, so that the voice lamp control, which is the control device on the upstream side, can be controlled. Since it is not necessary to execute complicated processing (for example, determination processing of whether or not a determination command has been transmitted) in the device 113, it is possible to facilitate the creation of a program at the time of development of each of the control devices 113 and 114. ..

When the decision command is set in S1508, the value of the decision button detection counter 223e may be cleared to "0" after the process of S1508. With this configuration, the next determination button 22a can be detected from the initial state, and erroneous detection of the determination button 22a due to the influence of noise or the like can be prevented.

In the process of S1507, if it is determined that it is not the start of the second round of the "15R jackpot" (S1507: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the start of the seventh round of the "15R jackpot" (S1507: No). S1509). As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute the "promotion during the round" effect in the seventh round of the "15R jackpot". Therefore, if it is determined that it is the start of the seventh round of the "15R jackpot" (S1507: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the promotion flag 223m during the round is turned on (S1510), and the "round" is determined. Check if the "Medium Promotion" effect should be performed. If it is determined as a result of the determination that the promotion flag 223m during the round is turned on (S1510: Yes), the promotion effect setting process (S1511) is executed in order to select the content of the "promotion during the round" effect. After that, the jackpot effect processing (S1105) is completed. The details of the promotion effect setting process (S1511) will be described later.

On the other hand, in the process of S1510, if it is determined that the promotion flag 223m during the round is not turned on (S1510: No), the "promotion during the round" effect is not executed, so that the intention selection flag 223i is set to off. Then (S1512), this jackpot effect processing (S1105) is completed. By setting the intention selection flag 223i to off in the process of S1512, it is set again whether or not the change button 22b is pressed by the player when the "music selection" effect is executed at the next big hit. can do.

If it is determined in the processing of S1509 that it is not the start of the seventh round of the "15R jackpot" (S1509: No), another jackpot effect processing is executed (S1513), and then this jackpot effect is performed. The process (S1105) is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 41, the promotion effect setting process (S1511) executed in the above-mentioned jackpot effect process (S1105) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the promotion effect setting process (S1511) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. In this promotion effect setting process (S1511), it is determined whether or not the "music reproduction" effect being executed is selected based on the player's intention, and it is used in the "promotion during round" effect according to the determination result. It is configured to select a character image.

In this promotion effect setting process (S1511), first, the reproduced music data related to the currently executing "music reproduction" effect is extracted from the determined music memory 223h (S1601), and then the promotion effect table 222 g and the promotion effect lottery counter 223n are used. Based on the indicated value, the character image used in the "promotion during round" effect is extracted (selected) (S1602), and the process is transferred to S1603.

In the process of S1603, it is determined whether or not the intention selection flag 223i is turned on (S1603). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the intention selection flag 223i is not turned on (S1603: No), the "music reproduction" effect is not selected based on the player's intention in the "music selection" effect. Character 1 that uses the character image selected by the lottery of S1602 without performing a match determination between the running "music playback" effect and the character image of the "promotion during round" effect extracted (selected) in S1602. Image command used, image command used for character 2, or all-cast image command (hereinafter, the image command used for character 1, the image command used for character 2, and the all-cast image command may be collectively referred to as "promotion effect command"). Is set (S1604), and this promotion effect setting process (S1511) is terminated.

In the present embodiment, in the "music selection" effect, when the player does not perform a predetermined operation (pressing operation for the change button 22b or pressing operation for the decision button 22a in the "renso"), "music selection". It is determined that the music is not selected by the player's intention in the production, and as a result, the running "music reproduction" production is not determined based on the player's intention. In such a case, even if the character image that appears in the ongoing "music playback" effect does not match the character image in the "promotion during round" effect selected by lottery, the player is particularly concerned. I don't feel any discomfort. Therefore, when the intention selection flag 223i indicating that the player's intention is reflected in the "music selection" effect is set to off, the lottery result in the original "promotion during round" effect is executed as it is. By maintaining the randomness of the "promotion during the round" production and increasing the variation of the production (the number of "music playback" productions x the number of "promotion during the round" productions), it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1603 that the intention selection flag 223i is turned on (S1603: Yes), some intention by the player in selecting the "music reproduction" effect in the "music selection" effect in this jackpot. Since there was a display (pressing operation of the change button 22b or pressing operation of the enter button 22a), first, the intention selection flag 223i was set to off (S1605), and then the reproduced music data extracted by the process of S1601. And whether or not the content of the "promotion during the round" effect extracted in the process of S1602 matches, that is, the character image used in the "music reproduction" effect and the lottery for the "promotion during the round" effect are selected. It is determined whether or not the character image matches the character image (S1606).

As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the content of the reproduced music data extracted by the process of S1601 and the content of the "promotion during round" effect extracted by the process of S1602 match (S1606: Yes), "music reproduction". Since the character image appearing in the production and the character image appearing in the "promotion during round" production match, the process is shifted to S1604 and the character image selected by the lottery of S1602 is used. The used image command, the character 2 used image command, or the all-cast image command is set (S1604).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the contents of the reproduced music data extracted by the process of S1601 and the "promotion during the round" effect extracted by the process of S1602 do not match (S1606: No), this "during the round" The character image used in the "promotion" effect is changed to an all-cast image and set (S1607), and the promotion effect setting process (S1511) is terminated. In the determination of S1606, when the all-cast image is selected in the process of S1602, it is configured to determine that the content matches any of the reproduced music data.

In this way, when the player voluntarily selects the "music playback" production in the "music selection" production, the character images of the "music playback" production and the "promotion during the round" production match. If so, the character image is displayed as it is, and if the character image of the "music reproduction" effect and the "promotion during round" effect does not match, the character image is changed to an all-cast image. By configuring in this way, the character image that appears in the "music playback" production and the character image that appears in the "promotion during the round" production are related, and the production balance is unified throughout the jackpot. It can be maintained and the player can enjoy the jackpot production without any discomfort. On the other hand, if the player does not voluntarily select the "music playback" effect, it is not necessary to determine the match between the character image of the "music reproduction" effect and the character image in the "promotion during the round" effect. In addition to reducing the control burden, the lottery results in the original "promotion during the round" production are executed as they are, and the randomness of the "promotion during the round" production is maintained, and there are abundant variations in the production ("music playback". The number of productions x the number of productions for "promotion during the round") can be used to enhance the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1106) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1106). This frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1106) is executed every 1 millisecond in the main processing (see FIG. 36) of the voice lamp control device 113, and counts the effective operation periods of the decision button 22a and the change button 22b. , The detection process is performed when the enter button 22a or the change button 22b is pressed. Further, when the player's pressing operation of the decision button 22a or the change button 22b is detected, the decision command or the change command is set to the display control device 114 based on the detection.

In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1106), first, it is determined whether or not the button operation effect flag 223c is turned on (S1701). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the button operation effect flag 223c is not turned on (S1701: No), the button operations of the enter button 22a and the change button 22b are outside the valid period, so that the buttons 22a and 22b are detected. This frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1106) is terminated without performing the processing. With this configuration, the detection processing of each button 22a, 22b is performed only within the button operation valid period of each button 22a, 22b, and the detection processing of each button 22a, 22b does not need to be performed in other periods. , The processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1701 that the button operation effect flag 223c is turned on (S1701: Yes), it is within the valid period of the button operation of the enter button 22a and the change button 22b, so that the determination is made next. It is determined whether or not the button 22a is turned on (S1702). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the decision button 22a is turned on (S1702: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the decision button detection counter 223e (S1703), and then the 1-added decision button detection counter 223e is used. It is determined whether or not the value is "2" (S1704). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the value of the determination button detection counter 223e is "2" (1704: Yes), it is recognized by the player that the determination button 22a has been pressed and transmitted to the display control device 114. The power determination command is set (S1705), and the process is transferred to S1706.

The decision command set in the process of S1705 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 36). .. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the decision command recognizes that the decision button 22a has been pressed by the player, and the effect corresponding to the press operation of the decision button 22a in the third symbol display device 81. Is executed so that is displayed.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined at the start of 2R of "15R jackpot" in the above-mentioned jackpot effect processing (S1105 in FIG. 36) (see S1507: Yes in FIG. 40), a determination command is set. Even when the value of the determination button detection counter 223e is determined to be "2" in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1106 in FIG. 36) executed thereafter (see S1704: Yes in FIG. 42), the determination is also made. The command is configured to be set. That is, in the execution of the main process (see FIG. 36) of 1 of the voice lamp control device 113, two decision commands may be generated. In such a case, in the present embodiment, even if a plurality of decision commands are received on the display control device 114 side, the process can be dealt with. Therefore, each generated decision command is transmitted to the display control device 114. However, if a decision command has already been generated during the execution of the main process of 1, it may be configured to exclude (prevent) the generation of an additional decision command. .. With this configuration, it is not necessary for the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 to execute duplicate control corresponding to the same type of command, so that the control load on each of the control devices 113 and 114 can be reduced. Can be done.

In the process of S1706, since the decision command was transmitted in the process of S1705 to determine the validity of the decision button 22a, the decision button detection counter 223e is used to initialize the validity determination (detection) of the decision button 22a. Since the value of "0" is cleared (S1706) and then the determination command is transmitted in the process of S1705, some selection effect (for example, "music selection" effect) is determined. In order to end the button operation valid period in, the value of the button valid timer 223d is cleared to "0" (S1707), and the process shifts to S1708.

By the process of S1707, when the decision button 22a is pressed by the player during the "music selection" effect, the value of the button valid timer 223d is cleared to "0", and the button operation effect flag is cleared in the process of S1720 described later. By turning off 223c, it is possible to skip the detection process of the decision button 22a and the change button 22b in the subsequent "music selection" effect. Therefore, when the music is selected and determined by the player in the "music selection" effect, it is not necessary to execute the subsequent processing of the decision button 22a and the change button 22b in the voice lamp control device 113, so that the voice lamp control device 113 It is possible to reduce the processing load of.

In the process of S1708, it is determined whether or not the value of the consecutive villa counter 223o is larger than "0", that is, whether or not it is in the "continuous villa" (S1708). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the value of the consecutive villa counter 223o is larger than "0" (that is, "1" or more) (S1708: Yes), the decision button 22a is pressed during the "renso". Since it is an operation, the process is transferred to S1715, the intention selection flag 223i indicating that the player's intention is reflected is set to ON (S1715), and the process is transferred to S1717. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the consecutive villa counter 223o is not a value larger than "0" (S1708: No), it is not an operation of pressing the decision button 22a during "continuous villa", so the intention of the player is reflected. Since it is not always done, the process of S1715 is skipped and the process is transferred to S1717.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is considered that the intention selection by the same player is clearly shown only when the decision button 22a is pressed at the time of the big hit in the "renso", and the change button is displayed. The intention selection flag 223i is set to be on regardless of whether or not the 22b is pressed. Then, it is configured to confirm whether the intention selection flag 223i is on or off in the "promotion during round" effect during the jackpot, and to select a character image to appear in the "promotion during round" effect. Therefore, the character image that appears in the "music playback" production and the character image that appears in the "promotion during the round" production are related to maintain the uniformity of the production balance in the entire jackpot, and the player can use it. You can enjoy the jackpot production without any discomfort.

If it is determined in the process of S1702 that the decision button 22a is not turned on (S1702: No), at least the decision button 22a is not continuously detected, so that the decision button detection counter is once used. The value of 223e is cleared to "0" (S1709), the determination button 22a is set to be detected from the initial state again, and then the process is shifted to S1710.

In the process of S1710, it is determined whether or not the change button 22b is turned on (S1710). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the change button 22b is turned on (S1710: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the change button detection counter 223f (S1711), and then the 1-added change button detection counter 223f is added. It is determined whether or not the value is "2" (S1712). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the value of the change button detection counter 223f is "2" (S1712: Yes), it is recognized that the change button 22b has been pressed by the player, and the change button 22b is transmitted to the display control device 114. The power change command is set (S1713), and the process is transferred to S1714.

The change command set in the process of S1713 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 36). .. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the change command recognizes that the change button 22b has been pressed by the player, and the effect corresponding to the pressing operation of the change button 22b in the third symbol display device 81. Is executed so that is displayed.

In the process of S1714, since the change command was transmitted in the process of S1713 to determine the validity of the change button 22b, the change button detection counter 223f is used to initialize the validity determination (detection) of the change button 22b. The value of is cleared to "0" (S1714), and the process is transferred to S1715. In the process of S1715, as described above, since the change button 22b is pressed in the "music selection" effect, the music being selected and displayed is changed, which indicates that the player's intention is reflected. The intention selection flag 223i is set to ON (S1715), and the process shifts to S1717.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the change button 22b is pressed by the player during the "music selection" effect, the selection target of the music displayed in the "music selection" effect is changed. Recognizing that, it is considered that the player has selected the music in the "music selection" production based on his / her own intention, and the intention selection flag 223i is set to be turned on so that the "promotion during round" production can be replaced. It is configured as follows. Then, it is configured to confirm whether the intention selection flag 223i is on or off in the "promotion during round" effect during the jackpot, and to select a character image to appear in the "promotion during round" effect. By configuring in this way, the character image that appears in the "music playback" production and the character image that appears in the "promotion during the round" production are related, and the production balance is unified throughout the jackpot. It can be maintained and the player can enjoy the jackpot production without any discomfort.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the detection process of the decision button 22a is prioritized over the detection process of the change button 22b, and when the detection of the decision button 22a is determined, the detection process of the change button 22b is performed. It is configured not to do so (see S1702). With this configuration, for example, in a situation where the decision button 22a and the change button 22b are pressed at the same time, the detection process of the press operation of the decision button 22a for determining the content of the effect is produced. By giving priority to the detection process of the pressing operation of the change button 22b for changing the content of the effect, the main decision for the effect of determining the content of the effect is the main decision for the effect, and the auxiliary intention for the effect of changing the content of the effect. It can be determined with priority over the decision.

If it is determined in the process of S1710 that the change button 22b is not turned on (S1710: No), at least the change button 22b is not continuously detected to be turned on, so that the change button detection counter is once used. The value of 223f is cleared to "0" (S1716), the change button 22b is set to be detected from the initial state again, and then the process is shifted to S1717.

In the process of S1717, it is determined whether or not the value of the button valid timer 223d is larger than "0" (S1717). That is, it is determined whether or not the operation determination of each of the buttons 22a and 22b is a valid button operation valid period. As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the value of the button valid timer 223d is larger than "0" (S1717: Yes), the value of the button valid timer 223d is subtracted by 1 (S1718), and the process shifts to S1719. .. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the button valid timer 223d is not a value larger than "0" (S1717: No), the processing of S1718 is skipped and the processing is transferred to S1719.

In the process of S1719, it is determined whether or not the value of the button valid timer 223d is "0" or less (S1719). That is, it is determined whether or not the button operation valid period in which the operation determination of each button 22a and 22b is valid has expired. As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the value of the button valid timer 223d is "0" or less (S1719: Yes), it means that the button operation valid period has expired, so the button operation effect flag 223c is set to off ( S1720), this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1106) is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the button valid timer 223d is not "0" or less (S1719: No), since the button operation valid period is in progress, the processing of S1720 is skipped, and this frame button input monitoring / effect is performed. The process (S1106) is terminated. After the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1106) is completed, the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 36).

In this way, by executing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1106), the detection processing of each button 22a, 22b is executed only during the button operation valid period of each button 22a, 22b, and the processing of the MPU221 is executed. The burden can be reduced, and a decision command or a change command is set according to the detection of the buttons 22a and 22b, and the player presses the buttons 22a and 22b on the display control device 114. You can notify that. Further, by setting the decision selection flag 223i for the operation of the decision button 22a or the pressing operation of the change button 22b in any state during the "renso", the decision selection flag 223i can be set. The setting status can be referred to when selecting the "promotion during round" production during the jackpot.

In the process of S1719, the determination command may be set when it is determined that the value of the button valid timer 223d is "0" or less, that is, when the button operation valid period has expired. .. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to send a decision command when it is determined that the second round of the jackpot in the "15R jackpot" has started (see S1508 in FIG. 40). It may be configured to send a decision command when it is determined that the operation valid period has expired, that is, when it is determined that the interval time of the first round of the "15R jackpot" has expired. With this configuration, at the end of the "music selection" effect, it is possible to reliably instruct the display control device 114 to determine the music, and by not receiving the determination command, the "music selection" is performed. It is possible to reliably prevent the continuous display of the "music selection" effect from occurring despite the end of the effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the variation effect processing (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this variation effect processing (S1110). This variation effect processing (S1110) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 36), and various processes for executing the variation effect are executed in the third symbol display device 81.

In the variation effect processing (S1110), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1801). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is not on (that is, it is off) (S1801: No), at least the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so that the fluctuation effect is produced. The process (S1110) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 36).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is on (S1801: Yes), since both the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received, the fluctuation start flag 223a is turned off in order to start the fluctuation effect. (S1802) Then, the data included in the hold information storage first area provided in the hold information storage area 223p is shifted to the execution information storage area 223q (S1803), and further, the hold provided in the hold information storage area 223p. The data included in the information storage second to fourth areas is shifted to the reserved information storage first to third areas (S1804), and the processing is shifted to S1805.

That is, in this case, the reserved variable effect is reduced by one, and the execution of the first reserved variable effect in time is started. Therefore, the reserved information corresponding to the first reserved variable effect is the first. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of one area are moved to the storage areas 223q1 to 223q4 of the execution information storage area 223q corresponding to the variation effect during execution. Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the hold information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the hold information storage first area, and the hold information is stored. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the third area are moved to the storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the hold information storage second area, and each of the hold information storage fourth areas. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 are moved to the storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 in the hold information storage third area.

As a result, in the execution information storage area 223q, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold ball execution area 203d of the main control device 110 are stored, and the hold information storage first to first. In each of the four areas, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area 203c of the main control device 110 are stored.

Next, in the process of S1805, the variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed from now on is acquired based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223q (S1405). After that, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is set based on the acquired variation pattern (S1806), and the process shifts to S1807.

The display variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 36). To. The display control device 114 starts display control of the variation effect so that the variation display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command.

Next, in the process of S1807, the stop type of the variation effect to be executed from now on is acquired based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223q (S1807). After that, the display stop type command is set based on the acquired stop type of the variation effect (S1808), and the process shifts to S1809.

The display stop type command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 36). To. In the display control device 114, when the variation effect executed by the display variation pattern command set by the process of S1806 is confirmed and displayed, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is set. do.

If the fluctuation pattern based on the value stored in the execution information storage area 223q does not match the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command, or the stop type and stop based on the value stored in the execution information storage area 223q. It may be configured to send a display error command when the stop type indicated by the type command does not match. With such a configuration, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can be reduced.

The display error command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (see S1102 in FIG. 36) of the main process. .. By receiving this display error command, the display control device 114 recognizes that some abnormality has occurred in the variation effect, switches the third symbol display device 81 to an error display (for example, default variation), and causes the error. Start display control of the display.

In the process of S1809, it is determined whether or not the stop type acquired in the process of S1807 is "15R probability variation jackpot" (S1809). As a result of the determination, if the acquired stop type is "15R probability variation jackpot" (S1809: Yes), the process is shifted to S1810. On the other hand, if the acquired stop type is not "15R probability variation jackpot" (S1809: No), the processing of S1810 and S1811 is skipped, and the processing is transferred to S1812.

In the present embodiment, the "promotion during the round" effect can be executed. However, in the "promotion during round" production, when the "15R probability variable jackpot" is won, the "15R normal jackpot" is temporarily displayed in the variable production, and then the "15R normal jackpot" is changed to "15R" during the jackpot. It is a production that changes (promotes) to "probability change jackpot". As a result, other than the variable effect of "15R probability variation jackpot", when the "promotion during round" effect is executed, there is a discrepancy in the effect, so that it cannot be executed. Therefore, in the process of S1809, it is determined whether or not the variable effect of the "15R probability variation jackpot" is performed, and if it is not the "15R probability variation jackpot", S1811, which is the process related to the "promotion during round" effect, is not executed. As a result, the control load on the MPU 221 can be reduced, and inconsistencies in the staging can be prevented from occurring.

In the process of S1810, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern acquired in the process of S1805 includes the “promotion during variation” effect (S1810). As a result of the determination, if the acquired fluctuation pattern includes the "promotion during fluctuation" effect (S1810: Yes), the process is shifted to S1811 and the lottery process and the setting process of the "promotion during round" effect are executed. The round promotion setting process is executed (S1811). On the other hand, if the acquired fluctuation pattern does not include the "promotion during fluctuation" effect (S1810: No), the processing of S1811 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S1812.

In this embodiment, when executing the "promotion during round" effect, "15R normal jackpot" is temporarily displayed in the variable effect, and then "15R normal jackpot" is changed to "15R probability variable jackpot" during the jackpot (promotion). ) Perform the production. However, if the "probable during fluctuation" effect is executed in the variable effect and the "15R probability variation jackpot" has already appeared (notified), and the "promotion during round" effect is executed during the jackpot, the effect has already been executed. There is a risk that the player will be confused by the effect that the displayed "15R probability variation jackpot" is further promoted, and the contents of the effect are duplicated. That is, when the "promotion during fluctuation" effect is executed in the variable effect, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is notified in the variable effect, so that it is not necessary to perform the "promotion during round" effect. Therefore, in the process of S1810, it is determined whether or not the "promotion during fluctuation" effect is executed in the variable effect, and if the "promotion during variable" effect is executed, the execution lottery for "promotion during round" is performed. By not executing S1811, the control load on the MPU 221 can be reduced, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is confused by executing the duplicated effects. ..

In the process of S1811, as described above, a lottery process for whether or not to execute the "promotion during the round" effect and a "round promotion" effect when the lottery process results in the execution of the "promotion during the round" effect. Executes the effect setting process to set the effect content to be displayed in the "medium promotion" effect.

Here, with reference to FIG. 44, the round promotion setting process (S1811) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this round promotion setting process (S1811). As described above, this round promotion setting process (S1811) is executed in the variable staging process (S1110). Therefore, at the start of the variable staging, the stop symbol related to the provisional "15R normal jackpot" in the variable staging Is set together with whether or not to display and whether or not to execute the "promotion during round" effect during the jackpot.

In this round promotion setting process (S1811), first, it is determined whether or not the "promotion during the round" effect (execution) is won (S1901). As described above, this determination is made based on the values of the promotion lottery table 222f during the round and the promotion lottery counter 223k during the round. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the "promotion during the round" effect (execution) has not been won (S1901: No), the subsequent processing is skipped and the round promotion setting processing (S1811) is terminated. Then, the process returns to the variable staging process (FIG. 43). On the other hand, if it is determined that the "promotion during the round" effect (execution) has been won (S1901: Yes), the process is shifted to S1902.

In the process of S1902, a pseudo time-saving jackpot command for display is set in order to display a temporary "15R normal jackpot" stop symbol in the variation effect (S1902), and then in the jackpot effect performed after the execution of this variation effect. In order to execute the "promotion during the round" effect, the promotion flag 223m during the round is set to ON (S1903), and this round promotion setting process (S1811) is terminated. After the round promotion setting process (S1811) is completed, the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 43).

The display pseudo time-saving jackpot command set in the process of S1902 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 36). Will be sent. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the pseudo time-saving jackpot command for display changes the stop symbol based on the previously received stop type command for display to the stop symbol corresponding to "15R normal jackpot". Run. Therefore, in the variation effect, the (provisional) stop symbol corresponding to the "15R normal jackpot" is confirmed and displayed.

Returning to FIG. 43, the description will be continued. In the process of S1812, the value of the sub-held ball number counter 223b is set to 1 in accordance with the consumption of the reserved ball (that is, the setting of the variable effect corresponding to the reserved ball is made) with the start of the variable effect. Decrease (S1812), set the display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the hold ball number indicated by the value of the sub-hold ball number counter 223b after the update (S1813), and set this variation effect. The process (S1110) is terminated. After the variation effect processing (S1110) is completed, the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 36).

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment detects the pressing operation of the decision button 22a or the change button 22b by the player, and based on the detection, the decision button 22a or the change button is used for the display control device 114. It is configured to send a decision command or change command based on the operation of 22b to instruct display control, and a sub display decision command or sub display change sent from the display control device 114 based on the above instruction. Based on the command, the value of the selected music memory 233j of the display control device 114 and the value of the music selection counter 223g of the voice lamp control device 113 are matched (synchronized), or the display determination music of the display control device 114 is determined. It is configured to match (synchronize) the value of the memory 233k with the value of the determined music memory 223h of the voice lamp control device 113. With this configuration, when the decision button 22a or the change button 22b is pressed by the player, the display content (determined music or selection) recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Since the music in the music) can be synchronized and the "music selection" effect or the "music playback" effect can be executed based on the recognition, there is a recognition discrepancy between the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Can be prevented and an appropriate effect can be provided.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment does not care whether or not the determination command is transmitted during the "music selection" effect at the end of the "music selection" effect, that is, at the start of the second round. It is configured to send a decision command indicating the decision of the song. With this configuration, at the end of the "music selection" effect, it is possible to reliably instruct the display control device 114 to determine the music, and by not receiving the determination command, the "music selection" is performed. It is possible to reliably prevent the continuous display of the "music selection" effect from occurring despite the end of the effect. In addition, since it is not necessary to process whether or not the decision command has been transmitted at the end of the "music selection" effect, the process at the end of the "music selection" effect is simplified to reduce the control load. be able to.

Further, in the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, in the “music selection” effect, the player performs a predetermined operation (pressing operation on the change button 22b or pressing operation on the decision button 22a in the “renso”). If it is not performed, it is determined that the player's intention is not reflected in the "music selection" effect, and as a result, the running "music reproduction" effect is not determined based on the player's intention. In such a case, even if the character image that appears in the running "music playback" effect does not match the character image in the "promotion during round" effect selected by lottery, the player can make a special case. , I don't feel any discomfort. Therefore, when the intention selection flag 223i indicating that the player's intention is reflected in the "music selection" effect is set to off, the lottery result in the original "promotion during round" effect is executed as it is. By maintaining the randomness of the "promotion during the round" production and increasing the variation of the production (the number of "music playback" productions x the number of "promotion during the round" productions), it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

On the other hand, in the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, when the player voluntarily selects the "music reproduction" effect in the "music selection" effect, the "music reproduction" effect and the "promotion during the round" are performed. When the character image of the effect matches, the character image is displayed as it is. By configuring in this way, the character image that appears in the "music playback" production and the character image that appears in the "promotion during the round" production are related, and the production balance is unified throughout the jackpot. It can be maintained and the player can enjoy the jackpot production without any discomfort.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 45 to 63, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing (see FIG. 45) that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on and a command interrupt processing (FIG. 46 (a)) that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp controller 113. ) And the V interrupt process executed when the MPU231 detects the V interrupt signal transmitted every 33.3 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (Fig.). 46 (b)). Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 45, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

When this main process is started by the MPU 231 when the power is turned on, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power on is executed (S2001). Specifically, the process of initializing the MPU 231 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup has started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on (not shown) is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2002). .. This transfer instruction includes a start address and a final address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, transfer destination information (here, resident video RAM 235), and a transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of a part of this register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image (not shown) to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2002, then, A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image (not shown) to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003).

In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image (not shown) at power-on is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, resident). Video RAM 235) and the start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, are included. Is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image (not shown) to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2003, then, The simple image display flag 233a is turned on (S2004). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233a is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 61 (a)) described later is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. A resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 61 (b)) for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer to the image controller 237 is executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233a is set from the character ROM 234 of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 61 (b)). It remains on until the transfer to the resident video RAM 235 is complete. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46 (b)), the image at the time of turning on the image (the main image at the time of turning on the power and the variable image at the time of turning on the power (both not shown)) are drawn. The simple command determination process (see S2028 in FIG. 46 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2029 in FIG. 46 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on (both not shown) are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and then the power is turned on. By displaying the time main image on the third symbol display device 81, while the remaining resident image data is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the person concerned with the hall are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the displayed main image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image (not shown) at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining resident use is used. Until the image data to be resident in the video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. ..

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image (not shown) at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 has a problem due to the power-on. You can immediately confirm that the operation has started without any problems. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the main image can be confirmed when the power is turned on, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on fluctuation image (not shown) is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image (not shown). It is configured in. Therefore, when the player starts the game while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting prize), and the variable effect is produced. When the start instruction is given from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are received, the variation image at power-on is displayed during the variation effect period. It can be displayed immediately and a simple fluctuation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player confirms that the lottery is surely performed by the simple fluctuation effect by the fluctuation image at the time of power-on even while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can do.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 displays the main image (not shown) when the power is turned on. However, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, it takes time to transfer the character ROM 234, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power is also long after the power is turned on. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using a power-on fluctuation image (not shown) transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on. For example, immediately after a power failure is restored, the player can play the game with peace of mind even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on.

After the process of S2004, the interrupt permission is set (S2005), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2005, the command interrupt process (see FIG. 46 (a)) and the V interrupt process (FIG. 46 (b) are performed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. ) Refer to).

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 46 (a). FIG. 46A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2011), and the command interrupt process is terminated. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are the command determination process (see FIG. 47) or the simple command determination process (FIG. 46 (b)) of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46 (b)) described later. ) Is read by S2028), and processing is performed according to the command.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 46 (b). FIG. 46B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 25) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 33.3 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 33.3 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Will be interrupted. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive the next image drawing instruction at the stage where the image drawing process and the display process are not completed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the drawing of a new image from being started in the middle of drawing the image, or the image from being expanded in accordance with the new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored. Can be done.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 46B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233a is on (S2021), and it is determined that the simple image display flag 233a is on. Then (S2021: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, it is simple to display the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81. The command determination process (S2028) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2029) is executed to shift to the process of S2024.

On the other hand, in the process of S2021, if the simple image display flag 233a is not on, that is, if it is off (S2021: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed. Therefore, in order to display a normal effect image on the third symbol display device 81 instead of the power-on image, the command determination process (S2022) is executed, and then the display setting process (S2023) is executed and processed. To S2024.

In the command determination process (S2022), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process (see FIG. 46 (a)), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. do. In addition, there are cases where a demo command for display, a variation pattern command for display for executing variation effect, a stop type command for display, a confirmation command for display, or a pseudo time-saving jackpot command for display (hereinafter referred to as "variation effect command"). If) is stored, the demo display data table 232a1 or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type or stop type is displayed in order to display the demo display and the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b. Further, the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to the set display data table 232a1 is set in the transfer data table buffer 233d. When commands related to jackpot effects such as "music selection" effect and "music playback" effect are stored, display data table 232a1 or additional data table 232a2 corresponding to each effect is displayed. Data table buffer 233b or additional data. Set to table buffer 233c. Further, when a command (decision command or change command; hereinafter, may be referred to as "button operation system command") transmitted when the enter button 22a or the change button 22b is pressed by the player is stored. Sets the additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the pressing operation of each of the buttons 22a and 22b in the additional data table buffer 233c.

In this command determination process (S2022), all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at 33.3 milliseconds intervals at which the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 33.3 milliseconds. Is high.

In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a possibility that the variation effect command of the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are simultaneously stored in the command buffer. , When the "tune selection" effect executed at the start of the jackpot is being executed, there is a possibility that the button operation commands of the enter command and change command, the commands related to the jackpot of the open command, etc. are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. be. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the display mode of the variation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the display mode can be obtained. 3 The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process (S2022) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 47 to 56.

In the display setting process (S2023), the third symbol display device is based on the contents of the display data table 232a1 and the additional data table 232a2 set in the display data table buffer 233b and the additional data table buffer 233c by the command determination process (S2022) or the like. In 81, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specifically specified. Further, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table 232a1 corresponding to the determined effect is set in the display data table buffer 233b. The details of this display setting process (S2023) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60.

After the display setting process (S2023) is executed, the task process is then executed (S2024). In this task process (S2024), the image content for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S2023) or the simple display setting process (S2029), is based on the content of the image. In addition to specifying the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the image, various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2025). In this transfer setting process (S2025), while the simple image display flag 233a is on, the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 to the image controller 237. Set the transfer instruction to be transferred. Further, while the simple image display flag 233a is off, predetermined image data is normally transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table 232a3 set in the transfer data table buffer 233d. A transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for use is set. Further, even when a button operation command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image data or the image of the rear image used in the display mode of the "music selection" effect or the "music reproduction" effect is displayed on the image controller 237. A transfer instruction for transferring data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is set. The details of this transfer setting process (S2025) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2026). In this drawing process (S2026), the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2024), the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer set by the transfer setting process (S2025). From the instruction, the drawing list shown in FIG. 25 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of this drawing process (S2026) will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2027). Then, this V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S2027, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process (S2022), the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (“15R probability variation jackpot”, “15R (substantially 13R) probability variation jackpot”, Corresponds to "2R probability variation jackpot", "15R normal jackpot", "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss, "super reach" production mode at the time of loss, "special reach" production mode at the time of loss, "non-reach" production mode) The stop type table (not shown) and the stop symbol counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

Here, in a game machine such as a conventional pachinko machine, the frame rate of the moving image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is different (for example, 20 fps, 30 fps or 50 fps) in consideration of the development budget and the application (drawing accuracy). ). Specifically, for example, in the case of a gaming machine with a small development budget, or a gaming machine using a video with little movement or a video for which display smoothness is not required, display control is performed at a low frame rate (for example, 20 fps). The third symbol display device 81 (drawn) is used. On the other hand, in the case of a gaming machine that uses a moving image with a large development budget and a moving image or a moving image that requires smoothness of display, the third symbol is displayed and controlled (drawn) at a high frame rate (for example, 50 fps). The display device 81 is used. Therefore, the frame rate related to the display control of the third symbol display device 81 is different for each model, and the time (unit processing time) required for the control of the third symbol display device 81 is also different.

On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 for determining the display content of the third symbol display device 81 whose display is controlled by the display control device 114 is common among different models in consideration of cost and development efficiency. Therefore, although the frame rate (unit processing time) of the display control device 114 differs depending on the model, the unit processing time of the voice lamp control device 113 is common, so that the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is used. When the display control device 114 processes the above, a problem may occur.

Specifically, for example, in the case of the display control device 114 in which the display is controlled (drawn) at a low frame rate (20 fps), one frame is drawn in units of 50 milliseconds, so that the sound is produced within the 50 milliseconds. While the command received from the lamp control device 113 is processed by the command determination process (S2022), the display is controlled by the display setting process (S2023) in units of 50 milliseconds based on the command received by the command determination process (S2022). It is configured as follows. Therefore, the display control device 114 having a low frame rate receives more commands from the voice lamp control device 113 while drawing one frame than the display control device 114 having a high frame rate (for example, 50 fps). In some cases. Therefore, the lower the frame rate of the display control device 114, the greater the processing load may be when commands are concentrated between one frame.

Further, the command received by the display control device 114 from the voice lamp control device 113 is the third symbol display device 81, such as a display variation pattern command indicating the execution of the variation effect and a determination command indicating the player's decision. For the production performed by the third symbol display device 81, such as the main (highly important) command for the production to be performed, the confirmation command for display, and the change command indicating to temporarily change the intention of the player. It can be divided into auxiliary (less important) commands.

As described above, the unit processing time (1 millisecond), which is the execution interval of the command output processing (see S1102 in FIG. 36) and the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see S1106 in FIG. 36) in the voice lamp control device 113, is Since it is shorter than the frame rate of the display control device 114 (for example, 33.3 milliseconds), it is possible to send a plurality of commands within the time required for the display control device 114 to draw one frame. ing. As a result, the number of commands transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 may be enormous. In particular, the detection of the decision button 22a or the change button 22b can be determined by the unit processing time (that is, 2 milliseconds) of 2 of the voice lamp control device 113 as described above, and the decision command and the decision command can be obtained during one frame. May receive change commands and so on. In such a situation, for example, if the process based on the change command received in the same frame is executed after the process based on the decision command is executed, the determined content will be changed again, and the effect will be produced. There is a risk of discrepancies in the content. In addition, the processing content indicated by the decision command, which is the main command, may be rewritten by the change command, which is an auxiliary command.

Therefore, in the display control device 114 of the present embodiment, when the determination command and the change command are received between one frame, the process corresponding to the determination command, which is the main command, is preferentially executed. In addition, the auxiliary command is for assisting the main command in the production, and it is established as the production without executing the process based on the auxiliary command, and the problem is unlikely to occur. Therefore, the main command is used. When the process corresponding to the decision command which is a command is executed, the process corresponding to the change command which is an auxiliary command is not performed, and the change command is discarded. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the content of the effect determined by the decision command, which is the main command, from being changed by the change command, which is an auxiliary command, and the content of the effect is inconsistent. It can be prevented from occurring. Further, when the main command is processed in one frame, the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced by not executing the processing of the auxiliary command in the frame.

Further, the change of the music recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be performed when the sub display change command is received from the display control device 114. Then, when the change command is discarded by the display control device 114, the sub display change command is not transmitted from the display control device 114 based on the discard of the change command. Therefore, when the change command is discarded by the display control device 114, the music recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 is not changed. Therefore, even if the change command is ignored by the display control device 114. , The selected music recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 and the selected music recognized by the display control device 114 can be synchronized so that there is no discrepancy in the production contents. can.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the decision command and the change command related to the "music selection" effect to the display control device 114 in duplicate (transmission within one frame, or transmission, respectively, or). Even when the change command is sent after the decision command is sent, the display control device 114 executes the display control process based on the decision command, which is the main command, and the process result (sub-display) based on the decision command. While sending the decision command) to the voice lamp control device 113, the change command which is an auxiliary command is discarded, the display control process based on the change command is not performed, and the result is the process result (for sub) based on the change command. The display change command) is configured not to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 has executed the display control process for the "music selection" effect based on the reception of the processing result (sub display determination command or sub display change command) from the display control device 114. Is recognized, and the content related to the "music selection" effect managed by the voice lamp control device 113 itself is updated. Therefore, by configuring the data management in the voice lamp control device 113 to be executed based on the so-called feedback control from the display control device 114, the display control device 114 can dispose of commands from the voice lamp control device 113. Even if this is done, the consistency between the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can be maintained. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can transmit the decision command and the change command without considering the frame rate of the display control device 114. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the creation of a program at the time of development of the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 47 to 56, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2022), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2022).

As shown in FIG. 47, in this command determination process (S2022), first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2101), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2101:). No), this command determination process (S2022) is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46 (b)). On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2101: Yes), it indicates that the new command has been processed, and the new command flag determined by the display setting process (S2023) is set to ON (S2102), and then For all unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S2103).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a hold ball number command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2104), and if there is a hold ball number command for display (S2104: Yes), the hold ball number command process is performed. Is executed (S2105), and the process returns to the process of S2101.

Here, the details of the reserved ball number command processing (S2105) will be described with reference to FIG. 48 (a). FIG. 48A is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number command process (S2105). This hold ball number command process (S2105) executes a process corresponding to the display hold ball number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the hold ball number command processing (S2105), first, it indicates that the display hold ball number command has been processed, and the new hold ball number command flag determined by the display setting process (S2023) is turned on (S2121), and then. , Acquire the hold ball number information included in the hold ball number command for display (S2122). If two or more display hold ball count commands are stored in the command buffer area in the process of S2122, the hold ball count information is acquired from the display hold ball count command stored last. As a result, the latest information on the number of reserved balls can be obtained.

Then, among the number determination flags provided for each number of reserved balls, the number determination flag corresponding to the number of reserved balls acquired in the process of S2122 is turned on, and the number determination flags corresponding to the other number of reserved balls are turned off. (S2123), the reserved ball number command process (S2105) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 47).

As a result, in the display setting process (S2023), when the new reserved ball count command flag is on, by referring to the number determination flag, the hold for the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number determination flag for which the on is set is set. The reserved image data is expanded so that the ball number symbol is displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 47, when it is determined that there is no display reserved ball count command in the processing of S2104 (S2104: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display demo command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display demo command (S2106: Yes), the demo command process is executed (S2107), and the process returns to the process of S2101.

Here, the details of the demo command processing (S2107) will be described with reference to FIG. 48 (b). FIG. 48B is a flowchart showing demo command processing. This demo command process executes the process corresponding to the display demo command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the demo command processing (S2107), first, the demo display data table 232a1 corresponding to the demo effect is selected from the data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233b (S2131). Next, the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the additional data table buffer 233c, and the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233d (S2132). This is because the demo display data table 232a1 defines the drawing of the image so that the image data required for drawing does not need to be newly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Therefore, the corresponding transfer data table is used. This is because 232a3 is not prepared in the data table storage area 232a.

Next, the time data corresponding to the demo display is set in the time counter 233 g (S2133), and the pointer 233e is initialized to "0" (S2134). Then, the demo display flag (not shown) indicating that the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the on state is set to on, and the final display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the on state. The confirmation command flag (not shown) indicating that it is displayed is set to off, and the confirmation display flag (not shown) indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the on state is set to off (S2135). ), The demo command processing (S2107) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing (see FIG. 47).

By executing this demo command process (S2107), in the display setting process (S2023), the pointer 233e initialized by the process of S2134 is updated, and the pointer 233e is set in the display data table buffer 233b by the process of S2131. From the demo display data table 232a1, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233e is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified.

Further, in the display setting process (S2023), the time of the demo effect specified in the demo display data table 232a1 is timed by using the time counter 233 g in which the time data corresponding to the demo display is set by the process of S2133. Further, when it is determined in the display setting process that the demo effect in the demo display data table 232a1 is completed by the time measurement of the time counter 233 g based on the states of the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag set by the process of S2135. , Control so that the demo effect is displayed again as the effect to be displayed next.

Returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. When it is determined that there is no display demo command in the processing of S2106 (S2106: No), then, among the unprocessed commands, a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, a display confirmation command, or a display It is determined whether or not there is a variable effect command of the pseudo time saving jackpot command (S2108), and if there is a variable effect command (S2108: Yes), the variable effect command process is executed (S2109), and S2101 Return to processing.

Here, the details of the variable staging command processing (S2109) will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the variable effect command processing. As described above, this variation effect command processing is the variation effect command of the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, the display confirmation command, or the display pseudo time saving jackpot command received from the voice lamp control device 113. It executes the process corresponding to.

In the variable effect command processing (S2109), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display confirmation command among the unprocessed commands (S2141), and if there is a display confirmation command (S2141: Yes), it is confirmed. The command process is executed (S2142), the variable staging command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 47).

Here, the details of the confirmation command processing (S2142) will be described with reference to FIG. 50 (a). FIG. 50A is a flowchart showing the confirmation command processing (S2142). This confirmation command process (S2142) executes a process corresponding to the display confirmation command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the confirmation command processing (S2142), the confirmation command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2023) that the display confirmation command is received in the ON state is set to ON (S2151), and then the confirmation for display received this time is confirmed. It is determined whether or not the "time reduction state" ends with the execution of the variation effect based on the command (S2152). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the "time reduction state" ends (S2152: Yes), the so-called "renso" state ends, so the selectable range of the music and the selected music in the "music selection" production are selected. In order to return to the initial state, the updatable range of the selected music memory 233j is initialized (that is, "0 to 2") (S2153), and the value currently selected in the selected music memory 233j is also initialized (that is, that is). , "0" is cleared), and this confirmation command processing (S2142) is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2152 that the "time reduction state" has not ended (S2152: No), the processing of S2153 and S2154 is skipped, and the confirmation command processing (S2142) is terminated. After the processing of the confirmation command processing (S2142) is completed, the process returns to the variable effect command processing (see FIG. 49).

As a result, in the display setting process (S2023), the state of the confirmed command flag is monitored, and when the confirmed command flag is turned on, the display of the confirmed display effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. , Execute the display setting process. Further, when the display setting of the variable effect is processed and the confirmation command flag is not turned on even after the effect time set for the variable effect has elapsed, the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display setting process is executed so as to be performed.

Returning to FIG. 49, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2141 that there is no display confirmation command (S2141: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2143). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2143: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S2144), the variation effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 47).

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2144) will be described with reference to FIG. 50 (b). FIG. 50B is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing (S2144), first, the variation display data table 232a1 corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table 232a1 is stored in the data table storage area 232a. Read from and set in the display data table buffer 233b (S2161).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 33.3 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process (see FIG. 47), it is unlikely that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands may be affected by noise or the like. It may change and another command may be mistakenly interpreted as a display variation pattern command. In the process of S2161, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. The table 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b.

If the variation display data table 232a1 corresponding to the variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233b, the variation having a shorter variation time than the set variation display data table 232a1 is actually made. When the effect is instructed by the main control device 110, the main control device 110 (voice lamp) is displaying the variation effect according to the set variation display data table 232a1 on the third symbol display device 81. The confirmation command (confirmation command for display) is received from the control device 113), and the changing third symbol is suddenly stopped and displayed, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table 232a1 corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233b, the set variation display data table is actually set. Even when the fluctuation effect having a variation time longer than 232a1 is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233b is completed, the main control device 110 The display of the third symbol display device 81 by the display setting process (S2023) so that the restart effect is displayed until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) from (voice lamp control device 113) is received. Is controlled. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the restart effect as a part of the variation effect, and can continue to see the variation of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 without discomfort until the stop display of the third symbol is confirmed.

Next, the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to the variable display data table 232a1 set in S2161 is determined, read from the data table storage area 232a, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233d (S2162). Then, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the additional data table buffer 233c (S2163).

After that, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table 232a1 corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table 232a1 set by the processing of S2161 is turned on. , Other data table discrimination flags corresponding to the variable display data table 232a1 are set to off (S2164). In the display control in the display control device 114, the variation display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S2164 corresponds to which variation pattern. It can be easily determined whether or not it is. Then, the display control device 114 determines whether or not there is a contradiction between the fluctuation pattern of the set fluctuation display data table 232a1 and the stop symbol set by the display stop type command received later, and the contradiction occurs. In some cases, the display data table 232a1 corresponding to the default variation is set in the display data table buffer 233b.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b by the processing of S2161, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233g (S2165). , Initializes the pointer 233e to "0" (S2166). Then, the confirmation command flag, the demo display flag, and the confirmation display flag are all set to off (S2167), and the restart timer counter used in the display setting process (S2023) is initialized to "0" (S2168). ), This variation pattern command process (S2144) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect command process (see FIG. 49).

By executing this variation pattern command process (S2144), the display setting process (S2023) is set in the display data table buffer 233b by the process of S2161 while updating the pointer 233e initialized by the process of S2166. From the variable display data table 232a1, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233e is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the pointer is specified. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by 233e is extracted, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table 232a1 is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. As such, the image controller 237 is controlled.

Further, in the display setting process (S2023), the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table 232a1 is used by using the timekeeping counter 233 g in which the time data is set based on the variation display data table 232a1 by the process of S2165. Time. Then, when it is determined that the variation effect in the variation display data table 232a1 is completed, if the confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 (voice lamp control device 113) is received, the confirmation display effect is performed. If the confirmation command (display confirmation command) cannot be received within a predetermined time after displaying on the 3 symbol display device 81, the restart effect is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81. Control settings.

Here, if both the display confirmation command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command is prioritized, the display is used. Since the variation effect associated with the variation pattern command will not be performed, it is necessary to give priority to the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display.

On the other hand, in the present variation effect command processing (S2109), since the presence / absence of the display confirmation command is determined first, the confirmation command processing, which is the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command, is always executed first. On the other hand, the process corresponding to the display variation pattern command is executed later, and the confirmation command flag set by the display confirmation command can be set to off by overwriting as in the process of S2167. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display confirmation command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Similarly, if both the display demo command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if the processing corresponding to the display demo command is prioritized, it is for display. Since the variation effect associated with the variation pattern command will not be performed, it is necessary to give priority to the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display.

On the other hand, in the command judgment process (see FIG. 47), the presence / absence of the display demo command is determined first, so that the demo command process corresponding to the display demo command is always executed first. On the other hand, the process corresponding to the display variation pattern command is executed later, and the variation display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b by the display demo command is overwritten as in the process of S2161. It can be rewritten to the data table 232a1. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display demo command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 49, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2143, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2143: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2145). If there is a stop type command for display (S2145: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2146), the variable staging command process (S2109) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 47).

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2146) will be described with reference to FIG. 50 (c). FIG. 50C is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing (S2146). This stop type command process (S2146) executes a process corresponding to the display stop type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (S2146), first, the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command (“15R probability variation jackpot”, “15R (substantially 13R) probability variation jackpot”, “2R probability variation jackpot”, “15R normal jackpot” , One of the stop type tables corresponding to the "normal reach (lossy reach other than front and rear)" production mode at the time of loss, the "super / special reach (front and rear loss reach)" production mode at the time of loss, and the "non-reach" production mode) The third symbol display device 81 is determined (S2171), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46 (b)) is executed. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed in is finally set (S2172).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2172 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. It is set to off (S2173), and then it is determined whether or not the set stop symbol corresponds to either "15R jackpot", that is, "15R probability variation jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot" (S2174). As a result of the determination, if it is determined to be a "15R jackpot" (S2174: Yes), the 15R flag (not shown) indicating that the "15R jackpot" appears is set to ON (S2175). The stop type command processing (S2146) is terminated, and the process returns to the variable staging command processing (see FIG. 49). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a "15R jackpot" (S2174: No), the processing of S2175 is skipped and the stop type command processing (S2146) is terminated.

In the present embodiment, the "music reproduction" effect is executed during the jackpot effect in the "15R probability variation jackpot" or the "15R normal jackpot". Therefore, in this stop type command process (S2146), it is determined whether or not the stop symbol corresponds to the "15R jackpot" in the variation effect to be executed, and the stop symbol corresponding to the "15R jackpot" is used. If so, set the 15R flag on. Then, in the open display process (see FIG. 54) to be executed later, the 15R flag is determined, and the setting process related to the "music selection" effect is executed only when the 15R flag is set to ON. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing in the case of a stop symbol other than "15R jackpot".

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table 232a1, the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation based on the variation display data table 232a1. As the type information for specifying the above, offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2172 is described. In the above-mentioned task processing (S2024), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2172 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2173, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process (S2023) described later to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of the fluctuation is always made in the main control device 110 at a distance of several seconds or more, the display control device 114 does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 33.3 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process (see FIG. 50), it is unlikely that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands may be affected by noise or the like. It may change and another command may be mistakenly interpreted as a display stop type command. In the process of S2171, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is "non-reach". Determine the stop type table. As a result, the stop symbol (for example, "456") corresponding to the "non-reach" which is the "loss display" is set by the processing of S2172.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is set, the stop symbol of the jackpot will be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is actually lost, and the player There is a risk that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 may be misunderstood as a big hit, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 10 may be lowered. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the "non-reach" effect mode of the "loss display", in fact, if it is a big hit, the third symbol display device 81 is used. Even if the stop symbol corresponding to the "loss display" is displayed, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the jackpot state, so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 49, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2145 that there is no display stop type command (S2145: No), the unprocessed command related to the variation effect is a display pseudo time saving jackpot command. Since the display pseudo time-saving jackpot command is a command transmitted when the "promotion during round" effect is executed in the case of "15R probability variation jackpot", the stop type command processing (see FIG. 50 (c)). The stop symbol set in S2172 (that is, the stop symbol corresponding to the "15R probability variation jackpot") is reset to the stop symbol corresponding to the "15R normal jackpot" (S2147), and becomes the stop symbol set by the processing of S2147. The corresponding stop symbol discrimination flag is turned on, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set to off (S2148), the variable effect command processing (S2109) is terminated, and the command judgment processing (FIG. See 47).

As described above, the variable effect command process (S2109) executes the display setting related to the variable effect, and in particular, when the "promotion during round" effect is executed, initially, "" is based on the display stop type command. The stop symbol corresponding to the "15R probability variation jackpot" is set, and then the stop symbol corresponding to the "15R normal jackpot" is set based on the display pseudo time saving jackpot command. With this configuration, in principle, while executing the process of setting the stop symbol based on the display stop type command, when the display pseudo time saving jackpot command is exceptionally received, the initially set stop symbol is executed. It is possible to execute the process of changing from, and it is possible to execute the "promotion during round" effect without significantly changing the program in the display control device 114.

Returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. When it is determined that there is no variable effect command in the processing of S2108 (S2108: No), then, among the unprocessed commands, a command associated with the operation of pressing the decision button 22a or the change button 22b by the player, that is, , It is determined whether or not there is a button operation system command of the enter command or the change command (S2110), and if there is a button operation system command (S2110: Yes), the button operation system command processing is executed (S2111), S2101. Return to the processing of.

Here, the details of the button operation system command processing (S2111) will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing button operation system command processing (S2111). As described above, this button operation system command process (S2111) executes the process corresponding to the decision command or the change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In this button operation system command processing (S2111), first, it is determined whether or not the determined flag 233m is turned on (S2201). If it is determined as a result of the determination that the determined flag 233m is turned on (S2201: Yes), the determination command has already been received, so the processing based on the subsequent determination command or change command is not executed. As described above, the process of S2202 to S2210 is not executed, the button operation system command process (S2111) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 47).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2201 that the determined flag 233m is not turned on (S2201: No), the determination command has not been received yet. It is determined whether or not there is (S2202). As a result of the determination, if there is a determination command (S2202: Yes), the data stored in the selected music memory 233j at that time is written to the display determination music memory 233k (S2203), and then the contents of the display determination music memory 233k. The additional data table 232a2 for determining music corresponding to is set (stored) in the additional data table buffer 233c (S2204), and the processing is transferred to S2205.

As a result, in the display setting process (S2023), the "music selection" effect corresponding to the music selection display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b is stored in the additional data table buffer 233c by the processing of S2204. Based on the additional data table 232a2 for determining the music, the music determination display indicating that the music being selected and displayed has been determined is additionally displayed, so that the next frame of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Specify the display content of the image.

After that, in the process of S2205, a sub display determination command including the value stored in the display determination music memory 233k and indicating that the display determination music memory 233k has been updated is set (S2205), and the process is sent to S2206. Transition.

The sub display determination command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 233, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of the next V blank interrupt process). Will be sent. By receiving this sub-display determination command, the voice lamp control device 113 appropriately receives the decision command transmitted by itself (voice lamp control device 113) to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 side. It is recognized that the determination of the music in the "music selection" effect is reflected, and the determined music memory 223h is set based on the value of the music selection counter 223g of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1404 in FIG. 39). reference).

Conventionally, when a command related to the effect content determined by the voice lamp control device 113 is transmitted to the display control device 114 and the display control device 114 controls the display of the effect based on the command, due to some abnormality (for example, noise or the like). If the content of the command is changed (rewritten), the effect content recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 and the effect content executed by the display control device 114 will be different, which will hinder the execution of the effect. May cause.

Therefore, as in the present embodiment, the data management in the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be executed based on the so-called feedback control from the display control device 114, so that the player presses the determination button 22a. When this is done, the determined music recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can be synchronized, and the "music reproduction" effect can be executed based on the recognition. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the recognition of the music executed by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 from being misaligned, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can produce an appropriate effect in which the recognition contents match. Can be provided.

In the processing of S2206, the determined flag 233m indicating that the determination command has been received from the voice lamp control device 113 is turned on (S2206), and the processing is transferred to S2207. As described above, the display control device 114 sets the determined flag 233m at the time of receiving the previous determination command even when the determination command is duplicated from the voice lamp control device 113 during the predetermined selection effect period. By setting and not executing the process based on the later decision command, it is possible to prevent the display control device 114 from executing the duplicated process and reduce the processing load of the display control device 114. .. Further, even when the display control device 114, which is the control device on the downstream side, receives the decision command more than once, the control based on one decision command is executed and the other decision command is discarded. By configuring so that control based on the other decision command is not executed and enabling appropriate processing to be executed, whether or not the decision command has been output in the voice lamp control device 113, which is the upstream control device, etc. Since it is not necessary to execute complicated processing of the above, it is possible to facilitate the creation of a program at the time of development of each of the control devices 113 and 114.

In the process of S2207, when the change command is stored in the command buffer area, the process of clearing the change command is executed (S2207), the button operation command process (S2111) is terminated, and the command determination process (S2111) is executed. (See FIG. 47).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the decision command and the change command are received between one frame, the process corresponding to the decision command, which is the main command, is preferentially executed. .. In addition, the auxiliary command is for assisting the main command in the production, and it is established as the production without executing the process based on the auxiliary command, and the problem is unlikely to occur. Therefore, the main command is used. When the process corresponding to the decision command, which is a command, is executed, the change command is executed in the process of S2207 in order to prevent the process corresponding to the change command, which is an auxiliary command of the main command, from being performed. Configure to discard (clear). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the content of the effect determined by the decision command, which is the main command, from being changed by the change command, which is an auxiliary command, and the content of the effect is inconsistent. It can be prevented from occurring. Further, when the main command is processed in one frame, the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced by not executing the processing of the auxiliary command in the frame.

In the processing of S2202, if it is determined that there is no decision command among the unprocessed commands (S2202: No), the received button operation command is a change command, so the data in the selected music memory 233j is updated. (For example, 1 addition) (S2208), and the process shifts to S2209. In the process of S2208, by updating the data of the selected music memory 233j based on the reception of the change command, the content of the selected music memory 233j corresponds to the value of the music selection counter 223g of the voice lamp control device 113. Can be set to.

In the process of S2209, the additional data table 232a2 for music selection corresponding to the contents of the selected music memory 233j is set (stored) in the additional data table buffer 233c (S2209), and the process is transferred to S2210.

As a result, in the display setting process (S2023), the "music selection" effect corresponding to the music selection display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b is stored in the additional data table buffer 233c by the processing of S2209. Based on the additional data table 232a2 for music selection, a display mode in which the music being selected and displayed is changed (for example, a display mode in which the music AAA icon 81a1 being selected and displayed is changed to the music BBB icon 81a2) is added. The display content of the next one frame of the image on the third symbol display device 81 is specified so as to be displayed.

After that, in the processing of S2210, a sub display change command indicating that the value of the selected music memory 233j has been updated including the value of the selected music memory 233j is set (S2210), and this button operation system command processing is performed. (S2111) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 47).

The sub display change command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 233, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of the next V blank interrupt process). Will be sent. By receiving this sub-display change command, the voice lamp control device 113 appropriately receives the change command transmitted by itself (voice lamp control device 113) to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 side. It is recognized that the change of the music being selected and displayed in the "music selection" effect is reflected, and the value of the music selection counter 223g of the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be incremented by 1 (see S1403 in FIG. 39). ).

With this configuration, when the change button 22b is pressed by the player, the music being selected and displayed in the "music selection" effect recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Can be synchronized, and the "music selection" effect can be executed based on the recognition. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the recognition of the music selected and displayed by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 from being misaligned. It is possible to provide an appropriate production.

On the other hand, when the change command is discarded by the display control device 114, it is possible to prevent the display control device 114 from transmitting the sub display change command based on the discard of the change command. Therefore, when the change command is discarded by the display control device 114, the music recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 is not changed. Therefore, when the change command is ignored (invalidated) by the display control device 114. Even so, it is possible to maintain the synchronization between the selected music recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 and the selected music recognized by the display control device 114, resulting in a discrepancy in the production contents. Can be avoided.

Returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no button operation command in the processing of S2110 (S2110: No), then the opening command for display, the open command for display, the grand prize command for display, the ending command for display, and the command for using the character 1 image are used. , Character 2 image use command, all cast image command (hereinafter, character 1 image use command, character 2 image use command and all cast image command may be collectively referred to as "promotion effect command"), or selectable. Music commands (hereinafter, display opening command, display open command, display big prize command, display ending command, promotion production command, or selectable music command may be collectively referred to as "big hit command". ) Is determined (S2112), if there is a jackpot command (S2112: Yes), the jackpot command process is executed (S2113), and the process returns to S2101.

Here, the details of the jackpot command processing (S2113) will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the jackpot command processing (S2113). This jackpot command processing (S2113) includes a display opening command, a display open command, a display grand prize command, a display ending command, a character 1 image use command, and a character 2 image use command received from the voice lamp control device 113. , The process corresponding to the all-cast image command or the selectable music command is executed.

In this jackpot command processing (S2113), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S2221), and if there is a display opening command (S2221: Yes), the opening is performed. The display process is executed (S2222), the jackpot command process (S2113) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 47).

Here, the details of the opening display process (S2222) will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the opening display process (S2222). This opening display process (S2222) executes a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening display processing (S2222), first, the opening display data table 232a1 corresponding to the jackpot opening effect indicated by the display opening command is determined, and the determined opening display data table 232a1 is transferred from the data table storage area 232a. It is read out and set in the display data table buffer 233b (S2241).

Here, since the determination of the start of the jackpot is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display opening commands are not received within 33.3 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process (see FIG. 47), it is impossible that two or more display opening commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like. However, another command may be mistakenly interpreted as a display opening command. In the process of S2241, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display opening commands are stored in the command buffer area, the opening effect having the shortest opening time (that is, 2 seconds) is supported. The opening display data table 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b.

If the opening display data table 232a1 corresponding to the opening effect with a long opening time (for example, 10 seconds) is set in the display data table buffer 233b, the opening is actually shorter than the set opening display data table 232a1. When the opening effect of the time (for example, 5 seconds) is instructed by the main control device 110 (voice lamp control device 113), the opening effect according to the set opening display data table 232a1 is performed by the third symbol display device. While displaying on 81, an open command (open command for display) is received from the main control device 110 (voice lamp control device 113), and the opening effect suddenly becomes another effect (for example, "music selection". There is a risk that the player will feel uncomfortable due to the switch to (directing).

On the other hand, when the display opening commands are duplicated as in the present embodiment, the opening display data table 232a1 corresponding to the opening effect having the shortest opening time is set in the display data table buffer 233b. Even when the opening effect that requires a longer opening time than the actually set opening display data table 232a1 is instructed by the main control device 110, the opening according to the display data table buffer 233b will be described later. Display setting process (S2023) so that the restart effect is displayed until the release command (display release command) from the main control device 110 (voice lamp control device 113) is received after the effect is completed. Controls the display of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player visually recognizes the restart effect as a part of the opening effect, and the third symbol display device 81 does not feel uncomfortable until the opening effect is completed and the first round effect (“music selection” effect) is started. You can keep watching the production.

Next, the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to the opening display data table 232a1 set in S2241 is determined, read from the data table storage area 232a, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233d (S2242). Then, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the additional data table buffer 233c (S2243).

After that, based on the opening time of the opening effect corresponding to the opening display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b by the processing of S2241, the time data representing the opening time is set in the timekeeping counter 233g (S2244). , Initializes the pointer 233e to "0" (S2245). Then, the restart timer counter used in the display setting process (S2023) is initialized to "0" (S2246), the opening display process (S2222) is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot command process (see FIG. 52).

By executing this opening display process (S2222), the display setting process (S2023) is set in the display data table buffer 233b by the process of S2241 while updating the pointer 233e initialized by the process of S2245. From the opening display data table 232a1, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233e is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the transfer data is transferred. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233e is extracted from the transfer data table 232a3 set in the table buffer 233d, and the sprite image data required in the set opening display data table 232a1 is preliminarily a character. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred from the ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the display setting process (S2023), the time of the opening effect specified in the opening display data table 232a1 is used by using the timekeeping counter 233 g in which the time data is set based on the opening display data table 232a1 by the process of S2244. Time. Then, when it is determined that the opening effect in the opening display data table 232a1 is completed, if the release command (display release command) from the main control device 110 (voice lamp control device 113) is received, one round of the jackpot effect is received. If the eye effect (for example, the "music selection" effect) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the open command (display open command) cannot be received after the opening effect is completed, the restart effect corresponding to the opening effect (for example, the restart effect (display open command)). For example, the display setting is controlled so that the third symbol display device 81 displays (an image in which the final scene of the opening effect is swung up and down).

Returning to FIG. 52, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2221, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S2221: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display release command among the unprocessed commands (S2223), and the display is used. If there is a release command (S2223: Yes), the release display process is executed (S2224), the jackpot command process (S2113) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 47).

Here, the details of the open display process (S2224) will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the open display process (S2224). This open display process (S2224) mainly executes the setting process of the "music reproduction" effect in response to the display open command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the open display process (S2224), first, whether or not the 15R flag is set to ON, that is, the current jackpot is "15R probability variation jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot", and the "music playback" effect should be executed. It is determined whether or not it is possible (S2251). As a result of the determination, if the 15R flag is off (S2251: No), the jackpot this time is "15R (substantially 13R) probability variation jackpot" or "2R probability variation jackpot", and the "music playback" effect is not executed. Other display setting processing for setting the display contents of "15R (substantially 13R) probability variation jackpot" or "2R probability variation jackpot" is performed (S2661), and this open display processing (S2224) is terminated to perform jackpot command processing (FIG. 52). See).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2251 that the 15R flag is turned on (S2251: Yes), the jackpot this time is "15R probability variation jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot", and the "music reproduction" effect is performed. Next, whether or not it is the start of the second round, that is, whether or not the display release command received this time is a command instructing the start of the second round of the jackpot and is the execution timing of the "music playback" effect. (S2252). If it is determined that it is not the start of the second round (S2252: No) as a result of the determination, since it is not the execution timing of the "music playback" effect, other display setting processing for setting the display contents of the rounds other than the second round is performed. (S2261), the open display process (S2224) is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot command process (see FIG. 52).

On the other hand, in the process of S2252, when it is determined that it is the start of the second round (S2252: Yes), it is the execution timing of the "music reproduction" effect, so then the 15R flag is set to off (S2253). ), The music display data table 232a1 corresponding to the contents of the music memory 233k is determined, and the determined music display data table 232a1 is read from the data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233b (). S2254).

Next, the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to the music display data table 232a1 set in S2254 is determined, read from the data table storage area 232a, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233d (S2255). Then, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the additional data table buffer 233c (S2256).

After that, based on the production time of the "music reproduction" effect corresponding to the music display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b by the processing of S2254, the time data representing the "music reproduction" effect is measured by the time counter 233g. (S2257) and initialize the pointer 233e to "0" (S2258). Then, the playing flag (not shown) indicating that the "music reproduction" effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the on state is set to on (S2259), and the processing associated with the subsequent reception of the determination command is performed. The determined flag 233m is set to off for activation (S2260), the open display process (S2224) is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot command process (see FIG. 52).

By executing this open display process (S2224), the display setting process (S2023) is set in the display data table buffer 233b by the process of S2254 while updating the pointer 233e initialized by the process of S2258. The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233e is extracted from the music display data table 232a1, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the transfer data is transferred. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233e is extracted from the transfer data table 232a3 set in the table buffer 233d, and the sprite image data required in the set music display data table 232a1 is the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred from the normal video RAM 236 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the display setting process (S2023), the "music reproduction" defined in the music display data table 232a1 is used by using the timekeeping counter 233 g in which the time data is set based on the music display data table 232a1 by the process of S2257. Time the production. Further, when it is determined in the display setting process (S2023) that the "musical piece reproduction" effect in the music display data table 232a1 is completed by the timekeeping of the timekeeping counter 233 g based on the playback flag set by the process of S2259. , Control so that the "music playback" effect is displayed again as the effect to be displayed next. With this configuration, the selected "music playback" effect can be continuously executed during the jackpot period, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, by continuously playing the "music reproduction" effect, it is not necessary to control the setting of another effect during the jackpot period, so that the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 52, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2223, if it is determined that there is no display release command (S2223: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display grand prize command among the unprocessed commands (S2225), and the display is performed. If there is a big prize command (S2225: Yes), the big prize display process is executed (S2226), the big hit command process (S2113) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 47).

Here, the large prize display process (S2226) will be described with reference to FIG. 55 (a). FIG. 55 (a) is a flowchart showing the large prize display process (S2226). This large prize display process (S2226) displays the number of prizes to the large prize opening 65a in the third symbol display device 81 in response to the display large prize command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the large prize display process (S2226), first, it indicates that the display large prize command has been processed, and the new prize flag determined by the display setting process (S2023) is turned on (S2261), and then the display large prize is displayed. Acquire the winning information included in the command and indicating the number of winning balls (S2262). In the process of S2262, if two or more display grand prize commands are stored in the command buffer area, each display grand prize command is sequentially processed based on the reception order. As a result, all the received prize information can be acquired.

Then, among the winning discrimination flags provided for each winning number, the winning discrimination flag corresponding to the latest winning number acquired in the process of S2262 is turned on, and the winning discrimination flag corresponding to the other winning numbers is turned off. (S2263), the big prize display process (S2226) is terminated, and the process returns to the big hit command process (see FIG. 52).

As a result, in the display setting process (S2023), when the new winning flag is on, by referring to the winning determination flag, the number of prize balls for the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning determination flag set to be turned on ( For example, the prize ball number image data is expanded so that the cumulative winning prize ball information) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 52, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2225, if it is determined that there is no display grand prize command (S2225: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2227), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S2227: Yes), the ending display process is executed (S2228), the jackpot command process (S2113) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 47).

Here, the details of the ending display process (S2228) will be described with reference to FIG. 55 (b). FIG. 55B is a flowchart showing the ending display process (S2228). This ending display process (S2228) mainly executes the setting process of the ending effect in response to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending display process (S2228), first, the ending display data table 232a1 corresponding to the jackpot ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table 232a1 is transferred from the data table storage area 232a. It is read out and set in the display data table buffer 233b (S2271).

Here, since the determination of the end of the jackpot is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display ending commands are not received within 33.3 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process (see FIG. 47), it is impossible that two or more display ending commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like. However, another command may be mistakenly interpreted as the ending command for display. In the process of S2271, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display ending commands are stored in the command buffer area, the ending effect having the shortest ending time (that is, 2 seconds) is supported. The ending display data table 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b.

If the ending display data table 232a1 corresponding to the ending effect with a long ending time (for example, 10 seconds) is set in the display data table buffer 233b, the ending is actually shorter than the set ending display data table 232a1. When the ending effect of the time (for example, 2 seconds) is instructed by the main control device 110 (voice lamp control device 113), the ending effect according to the set ending display data table 232a1 is performed by the third symbol display device. During the display on 81, the fluctuation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) and the demo command (demo command for display) are received from the main control device 110 (voice lamp control device 113), and the ending effect is sudden. There is a risk that the player will feel uncomfortable due to switching to another production.

On the other hand, when the display ending commands are duplicated as in the present embodiment, the ending display data table 232a1 corresponding to the ending effect having the shortest ending time is set in the display data table buffer 233b. Even when an ending effect that requires a longer ending time than the actually set ending display data table 232a1 is instructed by the main control device 110, the ending according to the display data table buffer 233b will be described later. After the effect is completed, the restart effect is displayed until the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) and demo command (display demo command) are received from the main control device 110 (voice lamp control device 113). The display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process (S2023). Therefore, the player can visually recognize the restart effect as a part of the ending effect, and can continue to watch the effect on the third symbol display device 81 without any discomfort until the ending effect is finished and the variable effect or the demo effect is started. ..

Next, the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to the ending display data table 232a1 set in S2271 is determined, read from the data table storage area 232a, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233d (S2272). Then, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the additional data table buffer 233c (S2273).

After that, based on the ending time of the ending effect corresponding to the ending display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b by the processing of S2271, the time data representing the ending time is set in the timekeeping counter 233g (S2274). , Initializes the pointer 233e to "0" (S2275). Then, the restart timer counter used in the display setting process (S2023) is initialized to "0" (S2276), and the playing flag is set to off in order to end the "music reproduction" effect (S2277). The ending display process (S2228) is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot command process (see FIG. 52).

By executing this ending display process (S2228), the display setting process (S2023) is set in the display data table buffer 233b by the process of S2271 while updating the pointer 233e initialized by the process of S2275. From the ending display data table 232a1, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233e is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the transfer data is transferred. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233e is extracted from the transfer data table 232a3 set in the table buffer 233d, and the sprite image data required in the set ending display data table 232a1 is a character in advance. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred from the ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the display setting process (S2023), the time of the ending effect specified in the ending display data table 232a1 is used by using the timekeeping counter 233 g in which the time data is set based on the ending display data table 232a1 by the process of S2274. Time. Then, when it is determined that the ending effect in the ending display data table 232a1 is completed, the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or demo command (display demo) from the main control device 110 (voice lamp control device 113) is used. If a command) is received, the variation effect or demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and if the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or demo command (display demo command) cannot be received after the ending effect is completed. , The display setting is set so that the image in which the restart effect corresponding to the ending effect (for example, the screen displaying the message "See you") is swung up and down is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Control.

Returning to FIG. 52, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2227, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S2227: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a promotion effect command among the unprocessed commands (S2229), and the promotion effect is produced. If there is a system command (S2229: Yes), the promotion effect display process is executed (S2230), the jackpot command process (S2113) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 47).

Here, the details of the promotion effect display process (S2230) will be described with reference to FIG. 56 (a). FIG. 56A is a flowchart showing the promotion effect display process (S2230). This promotion effect display process (S2230) corresponds to any of the character 1 image use command, the character 2 image use command, and the all-cast image command received from the voice lamp control device 113, and sets the "promotion during round" effect. It executes the process.

In the promotion effect display process (S2230), first, the additional data table 232a2 for promotion effect corresponding to any of the received character 1 image command, character 2 image command, or all-cast image command is determined, and the determined promotion is performed. The additional data table 232a2 for staging is read from the data table storage area 232a and set in the additional data table buffer 233c (S2281).

After that, in the transfer setting process (S2025) described later, in order to transfer the image used for character 1, the image used for character 2, or the all-cast image used in the above-mentioned "promotion during round" effect to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The promotion effect display flag is set to ON (S2282), the promotion effect display process (S2230) is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot command process (see FIG. 52).

By executing this promotion effect display process (S2230), in the display setting process (S2023), it is indicated by the pointer 233e from the promotion effect additional data table 232a2 set in the additional data table buffer 233c by the process of S2281. The drawing content specified in the address is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified.

Further, in the present embodiment, the "promotion during round" effect may be displayed so as to overlap the displayed "music reproduction" effect at the start of the seventh round of the jackpot during the execution of the "music reproduction" effect. It is configured in.

Conventionally, the "promotion during the round" effect is an effect that increases the game value, and is therefore an important effect for the game. The player is made aware in advance that the "promotion during the round" effect is executed. It is configured to enhance the interest of the game until the timing when the "promotion during the round" production is executed. However, the start timing and closing timing of the round in the jackpot change according to the winning condition of the ball to the jackpot 65a, and it is difficult to estimate the execution timing of the "promotion during the round" effect from the start of the jackpot. be.

Therefore, while executing the "music reproduction" effect, the "promotion during the round" effect is additionally displayed so as to overlap with the "music reproduction" effect. That is, while executing the "music reproduction" effect based on the music display data table 232a1, the "promotion during round" effect is added to the display content of the "music reproduction" effect being executed by the promotion effect additional data table 232a2. By configuring to display, the game situation (7th round of the jackpot) where you want to execute the "promotion during the round" effect is fixed, but the execution timing is a game specification that is difficult to grasp from the start of the jackpot. However, the "promotion during the round" effect can be executed at the specified execution timing, and the display of the "music playback" effect and the "promotion during the round" effect can be realized by simple control.

Returning to FIG. 52, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2229 that there is no promotion effect command (S2229: No), the command stored in the command buffer area is a selectable music command, so the music selection display processing is executed (S2231). ), The jackpot command process (S2113) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 47).

Here, the details of the music selection display processing (S2231) will be described with reference to FIG. 56 (b). FIG. 56B is a flowchart showing the music selection display process (S2231). This music selection display process (S2231) executes the setting process of the "music selection" effect in response to the selectable music command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the music selection display processing (S2231), first, the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is set based on the updatable range of the music selection counter 223g provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 indicated by the received selectable music command. The updatable range of the provided selected music memory 233j is set (S2291).

Specifically, when the selectable music command indicates "0 to 2" as the updatable range of the music selection counter 223g, the updatable range of the selected music memory 233j is also set to "0 to 2". Further, when the selectable music command indicates "0 to 3" as the updatable range of the music selection counter 223g, "0 to 3" is also set for the updatable range of the selected music memory 233j. Further, when the selectable music command indicates "0 to 4" as the updatable range of the music selection counter 223g, the updatable range of the selected music memory 233j is also set to "0 to 4".

As a result, the selectable range of the music in the "music selection" effect grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 and the selectable range of the "music selection" effect grasped by the display control device 114 can be synchronized, and the voice lamp can be synchronized. It is possible to prevent a discrepancy in the production contents from occurring between the control device 113 and the display control device 114.

Next, the music selection display data table 232a1 corresponding to the content (updatable range) of the selected music memory 233j set in S2291 is determined, and the determined music selection display data table 232a1 is transferred from the data table storage area 232a. It is read out and set in the display data table buffer 233b (S2292). As a result, in the "music selection" effect, the music icons 81a1 to 81a5 based on the selected music memory 233j are displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Specifically, when the updatable range of the selected music memory 233j is set to "0 to 2", the music AAA icon 81a1 and the music BBB icon 81a2 are displayed as the music icons 81a displayed in the "music selection" effect. And the music selection display data table 232a1 for displaying the music CCC icon 81a3 is set. When the updatable range of the selected music memory 233j is set to "0 to 3", the music icon 81a displayed in the "music selection" effect is the music AAA icon 81a1, the music BBB icon 81a2, and the music CCC. A music selection display data table 232a1 for displaying the icon 81a3 and the music DDD icon 81a4 is set. Further, when the updatable range of the selected music memory 233j is set to "0 to 4", the music AAA icon 81a1, the music BBB icon 81a2, and the music CCC are used as the music icons 81a displayed in the "music selection" effect. A music selection display data table 232a1 for displaying the icon 81a3, the music DDD icon 81a4, and the music EEE icon 81a5 is set.

Further, the music selection display data table 232a1 set in S2292 is configured to be set based on the value selected in the selected music memory 233j.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to start updating from the value of the selected music memory 233j that was selected (set) in the previous jackpot. That is, as the value of the selected music memory 233j, the value selected (set) in the previous jackpot is held at the start of the next jackpot in the "renso". Therefore, the music selection display data table 232a1 set in S2292 is set to the music selection display data table 232a1 based on the value of the selected music memory 233j held at the time of the previous big hit, thereby "music selection". In the production, the previously selected music icons 81a1 to 81a5 are selected and displayed.

The updatable range of the selected music memory 233j is such that the updatable range is initialized (that is, "0 to 2") when the "time reduction state" ends, and the selected value is also included. It is configured to be initialized (ie, "0") (see S2153 and S2154 in FIG. 50 (a)). Therefore, in the case of the "first time" jackpot, the music icons 81a that are selectively displayed in the process of S2292 are the music AAA icon 81a1, the music BBB icon 81a2, and the music CCC icon 81a3, and the music AAA icon 81a1. The music selection display data table 232a1 to be selected and displayed is set.

Next, the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to the music selection display data table 232a1 set in S2292 is determined, read from the data table storage area 232a, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233d (S2293). Then, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the additional data table buffer 233c (S2294).

After that, based on the effect time of the "music selection" effect corresponding to the music selection display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b by the processing of S2292, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233 g. (S2295), and the pointer 233e is initialized to "0" (S2296). Then, the restart timer counter used in the display setting process (S2023) is initialized to "0" (S2297), the music selection display process (S2231) is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot command process (see FIG. 52). ..

By executing this music selection display process (S2231), in the display setting process (S2023), the pointer 233e initialized by the process of S2296 is updated and set in the display data table buffer 233b by the process of S2292. The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233e is extracted from the music selection display data table 232a1, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified at the same time. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233e is extracted, and the sprite image data required in the set music selection display data table 232a1 is previously transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred.

Further, in the display setting process (S2023), the “music piece” defined in the music piece selection display data table 232a1 is used by using the timekeeping counter 233g in which the time data is set based on the music piece selection display data table 232a1 by the process of S2295. Time the "selection" effect. Then, when it is determined that the "music selection" effect in the music selection display data table 232a1 is completed, the release command (display release command) from the main control device 110 (voice lamp control device 113) is received. In the meantime, the display setting process (S2023) is performed to display the restart effect corresponding to the "music selection" effect (for example, the screen on which the music icon 81a or the like is continuously displayed). The display of 81 is controlled. Therefore, the player visually recognizes the restart effect corresponding to the "music selection" effect as a part of the "music selection" effect, and feels uncomfortable until the "music selection" effect ends and the "music playback" effect starts. You can continue to watch the effect on the third symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no jackpot command in the process of S2112 (S2112: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2114), and the process returns to the process of S2101.

In the processing of S2101, which is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2101: Yes). ), The processing of S2102 to S2114 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2101 to S2114 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2101 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. The process (S2022) is terminated.

The simple command determination process (S2028) executed when the simple image display flag 233a is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46B) is also the same as the command determination process (S2022). .. However, in the simple command judgment process, the commands required to display the power-on image from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display confirmation command, the display variation pattern command, and the display Confirmation command processing (see FIG. 50 (a)), variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 50 (b)), and stop type command processing (see FIG. 50 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command by extracting only the stop type command. 50 (c)) is executed, and other commands are discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 50B) executed in this case, the display data table 232a1 corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image (not shown) at power-on is displayed in the processing of S2161. The image data of the power-on main image (not shown) and the power-on fluctuation image that are set in the data table buffer 233b and are required in that case are the power-on main image area 235a and the power supply of the resident video RAM 235. Since it is stored in the variable image area 235b at the time of input, in the process of S2162, the Bull data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233d, and the process of clearing the contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2023), which is one of the V interrupt processes (see FIG. 46 (b)) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Will be explained. 57 and 58 are flowcharts showing this display setting process (S2023).

In this display setting process (S2023), as shown in FIG. 57, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S2301), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S2301:). No), it is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process (see FIG. 50) executed earlier, the processes of S2302 to S2306 are skipped, and the process is transferred to S2307. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S2301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S2302), S2303 to S2306 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S2303, it is determined whether or not the new reserved ball count command flag is on (S2303), and if the new reserved ball count command flag is on (S2303: Yes), the previous command determination process (FIG. 47). (See), it is determined that the display reserved ball count command has been processed, and the reserved image setting process is executed (S2304).

Here, the details of the reserved image setting process (S2304) will be described with reference to FIG. 59 (a). FIG. 59A is a flowchart showing the reserved image setting process (S2304). In this hold image setting process (S2304), the number of hold balls for the number of hold balls notified from the voice lamp control device 113 is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the processing of the hold ball number command for display. This is a process for expanding the image data to be displayed on the screen.

In the hold image setting process (S2304), first, the number determination flag is referred to, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number determination flag for which ON is set is displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81. The reserved image data to be displayed in (see FIG. 4A) is expanded (S2341). In the task process (see S2024 in FIG. 46 (b)), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the reserved image is specified based on the expanded reserved image data, and the display coordinates are specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Then, the new reserved ball count command flag is set to off (S2342), the reserved image setting process (S2304) is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process (see FIG. 57).

Returning to FIG. 57, the description will be continued. After the hold image setting process (S2304) or in the process of S2303, if the new hold ball number command flag is not on (S2303: No), then it is determined whether or not the new winning flag is on (S2303: No). S2305). As a result of the determination, if the new winning flag is on (S2305: Yes), the prize ball number image setting process is executed (S2306).

Here, the details of the prize ball number image setting process (S2306) will be described with reference to FIG. 59 (b). FIG. 59B is a flowchart showing the prize ball number image setting process (S2306). This prize ball number image setting process (S2306) displays a prize ball number image (for example, cumulative prize ball information) corresponding to the prize winning of the ball to the large prize opening 65a on the third symbol display device 81. The number of prize balls to be made This is a process for developing image data.

In the prize ball number image setting process (S2306), first, the prize ball number image data corresponding to the prize ball number image set to be turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by referring to the prize ball number determination flag. Is expanded (S2351). In the task process (see S2024 in FIG. 46 (b)), based on the expanded prize ball number image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the prize ball number image is specified, and each sprite is specified. In addition, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined.

Then, the new winning flag is set to off (S2352), the prize ball number image setting process (S2306) is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process (see FIG. 57).

Returning to FIG. 57, the description will be continued. After the prize ball number image setting process (S2306) or in the process of S2305, if it is determined that the new winning flag is not on, that is, it is off (S2305: No), then the pointer update process is executed. (S2307).

Here, the details of the pointer update process (S2307) will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process (S2307). This pointer update process (S2307) is performed from the display data table 232a1, the additional data table 232a2, and the transfer data table 232a3 stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233b, the additional data table buffer 233c, and the transfer data table buffer 233d, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233e that specifies the address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or the transfer target image data.

In this pointer update process (S2307), first, the pointer 233e is added by 1 (S2361). That is, in principle, the pointer 233e is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46B) is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables 232a1 to 232a3, "Start" information is described in the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H". If the value of the pointer 233e is initialized to "0" while the display data table 232a1 is stored in the display data table buffer 233b, the value is updated to "1" by this pointer update process (S2307). Therefore, the actual data can be read from the respective data tables 232a1 to 232a3 in order from the address "0001H".

After updating the value of the pointer 233e by the process of S2361, in the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b, the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233e is the "End" information. Whether or not it is determined (S2362). As a result, if it is "End" information (S2362: Yes), in the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b, the pointer 233e is updated past the address where the actual data is described. means.

Therefore, the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b is provided for the demo display data table 232a1 and the restart display data table 232a1 for variation, opening, ending, and music selection, respectively. Or, if it is determined whether or not it is the music display data table 232a1 (S2363), and if it is the demo display data table 232a1, the restart display data table 232a1, or the music display data table 232a1 (S2363: Yes), the pointer 233e is set to "1" (S2364), and the demo display data table 232a1, the restart display data table 232a1, or the music display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b. The time data corresponding to the effect time of is set in the time counting counter 233 g (S2365), and the process proceeds to the process of S2376. As a result, in the display setting process (see FIG. 57), the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table 232a1, the restart display data table 232a1, or the music display data table 232a1. 3 The symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display a demo effect, a restart effect, or a "music reproduction" effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S2363, it was determined that the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b is not the demo display data table 232a1, the restart display data table 232a1, or the music display data table 232a1. In the case (S2363: No), the value of the pointer 233e is subtracted by 1 (S2366), and the process proceeds to S2376. As a result, in the display setting process (see FIG. 57), the display data table buffer 233b contains a display data table 232a1 other than the demo display data table 232a1, the restart display data table 232a1, and the music display data table 232a1, for example, for variation. When the display data table 232a1 or the definite display data table 232a1 is set, the drawing content of the previous address in which the "End" information is described is always expanded. It can be displayed in a stopped state at the last image defined by the display data table 232a1.

In the processing of S2362, in the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b, when it is determined that the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233e after the update by the processing of S2361 is not "End" information. (S2362: No), the process of S2363 to S2366 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S2376.

In the processing of S2376, it is determined whether or not the confirmation command flag is on (S2376), and if the confirmation command flag is not on but off (S2567: No), the pointer update processing (S2307) is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the display setting process (S2023). On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is on (S2376: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113, and thus the display data table buffer. In the display data table 232a1 set in 233b, the value of the pointer 233e is set to the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the end position address in which the "End" information is stored (S2368). Then, the value of the timekeeping counter 233g is set to "1" (S2369), the pointer update process (S2307) is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process (S2023). As a result, when the confirmation command is received, the display setting process (S2023) can expand the drawing content specified at the end of the set display data table 232a1 and control the start of the confirmation display effect. ..

Returning to FIG. 57, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process (S2307), the pointer 233e updated by the pointer update process (S2307) is used from the display data table 232a1 and the additional data table 232a2 set in the display data table buffer 233b and the additional data table buffer 233c. The drawing content of the indicated address is expanded (S2308). In the task processing (see S2024 in FIG. 46B), sprites (display objects) that compose an image based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S2308 together with the previously developed pending image and the prize ball number image are used. ) Is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

In the present embodiment, the display data table 232a1 is stored in the display data table buffer 233b, and the additional data table 232a2 is stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. When drawing is set, the drawing list is generated with priority given to the drawing contents shown in the additional data table 232a2. As a result, the drawing content of the sprite defined in the display data table 232a1 is redefined in the additional data table 232a2, so that the drawing content of the display data table 232a1 is changed to the drawing content of the additional data table 232a2 and displayed. be able to.

Further, in the present embodiment, the additional data table buffer 233c is configured to be capable of storing a plurality of additional data tables 232a2, but the pointer is in a state where the plurality of additional data tables 232a2 are stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. When the drawing of the same sprite is set at the address indicated by 233e, the drawing list is generated with priority given to the drawing contents shown in the most recently stored additional data table 232a2. That is, the storage order of the additional data table 232a2 can be stored, and the drawing content of the newest additional data table 232a2 can be displayed with priority. Therefore, when the display content is changed and then further changed, the display is performed accurately. It becomes possible.

If Null data is described in the additional data table 232a2, the subsequent processing is executed assuming that there is no sprite to be added. Further, when the additional data table buffer 233c is cleared by the Null data, the Null data is always expanded from the additional data table buffer 233c.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233g is subtracted by 1 (S2309), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233g after the subtraction is "0" or less (S2310). Then, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233g is not "0" or less, that is, when it is "1" or more (S2310: No), the display setting process (S2023) is terminated as it is, and the V interrupt process (FIG. 46). Return to (b)).

On the other hand, in the processing of S2310, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233g is "0" or less (S2310: Yes), the effect time corresponding to the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b has elapsed. It means that you did. At this time, if the variable display data table 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b, a confirmation command (display confirmation) is given from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 in accordance with the end of the effect. Since the command) should be transmitted, in the subsequent processing of S2311, it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation command flag is on (S2311).

As a result of the determination of S2311, if the confirmation command flag is on (S2311: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. First, the confirmed display data table 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b, and the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the additional data table buffer 233c and the transfer data table buffer 233d, respectively (S2312).

Next, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the confirmation display is set in the time counter 233 g (S2313), and the value of the pointer 233e is initialized to "0" (S2314). Then, after setting the confirmation command flag to off (S2315) and then setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the "0" state (off state) to on (that is, "1") (that is, "1"). S2316), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S2317), this display setting process (S2023) is terminated, and the V interrupt process (FIG. 46 (b)). ) Return to).

As a result, in the situation where the variable display data table 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b, a confirmation command (display confirmation) is given from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 at the end of the effect. When the command) is received, the drawing content can be set so that the final symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, by simply changing the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table 232a1, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. .. Further, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. A wide variety of staging images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S2317 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table 232a1, the display data table 232a1 From the start of the fluctuation based on the above to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described.

Therefore, in the task process (see S2024 in FIG. 46 (b)), the variation effect performed immediately before the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S2317 from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by specifying the stop symbol of the above and adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2311, if the confirmation command flag is not on but off (S2311: No), the processing shifts to the processing of S2321 shown in FIG. 58, and it is determined whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S2321). If the confirmation display flag is on (S2321: Yes), the determination that the value of the timekeeping counter 233g is "0" or less (S2310: Yes) in the processing of S2310 indicates that the confirmation display effect has ended. means. Therefore, after setting the confirmation display flag to off (S2322), the demo display data table 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b (S2323), and then the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display is set to the time counter 233 g. (S2324). Then, the pointer 233e is initialized to "0" (S2325), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S2326), the process shifts to FIG. 57, and this display setting is performed. The process (S2023) is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46 (b)).

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display demo effect command indicating the start of the demo effect is not received by the end of the final display effect, the first is automatically performed. 3 The drawing content can be set so that the demo effect is displayed on the symbol display device 81.

In the process of S2321, when the definite display flag is determined to be on, that is, the branch condition of Yes in S2321 is satisfied when the definite display effect is performed. In this case, the process of S2312 causes the definite display effect. , The contents of the additional data table buffer 233c and the transfer data table buffer 233d are both cleared. Therefore, in the process of S2323, the process of clearing the data table buffers 233c and 233d is omitted. As a result, the processing load on the MPU 231 can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the process of S2321, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S2321: No), then it is determined whether or not the demo display flag or the playing flag is on (S2327). If the demo display flag or the playing flag is on (S2327: Yes), it is determined that the value of the timekeeping counter 233g is "0" or less (S2310: Yes) in the processing of S2310. It means that the "music playback" production has ended. Therefore, the display setting process (S2023) is terminated (see FIG. 57), and the process returns to the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46 (b)). Then, in this case, by the pointer update process (S2307) executed in the display setting process (S2023) of the next V interrupt process (see FIG. 46 (b)), the demo effect or " Since various settings are made so that the "music playback" effect is started, a demo effect or a "music playback" effect is produced until a new display variation pattern command or display ending command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. Can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, if the demo display flag and the playing flag are not on but off in the processing of S2327 (S2327: No), it is determined that the value of the time counting counter 233g is "0" or less in the processing of S2310 (S2310: Yes). ) Is a variable effect, an opening effect, a "music selection" effect or an ending effect (hereinafter, the opening effect, a "music selection" effect or an ending effect may be collectively referred to as a "restart response effect"). Means that one of the has ended. Therefore, if the next command to be received (for example, a confirmation command) is not received even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the restart response effect, in order to start the restart effect, each restart mode effect is used. When the corresponding restart display data table 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b, the restart timer counter initialized to "0" is incremented by 1 (S2328), and the restart timer counter after the addition is incremented by 1. It is determined whether or not the value has reached a predetermined value (for example, "100") (S2329).

Then, when the restart timer counter is not a predetermined value (S2329: No), the process is shifted to FIG. 57, the display setting process (S2023) is terminated, and the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46 (b)) is performed. return. On the other hand, when the restart timer counter is a predetermined value (S2329: Yes), the restart display data table 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b, and the additional data table buffer 233c and the transfer data table buffer 233d are set to Null, respectively. By writing the data, those contents are cleared (S2330). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the restart effect is set in the timekeeping counter 233 g (S2331), the value of the pointer 233e is initialized to "0" (S2332), and the process shifts to FIG. 57. The display setting process (S2023) is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46 (b)).

As a result, in the display control device 114, the main control device 110 (voice lamp control device 113) even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop display of the effect of the third symbol display device 81 with the end of the restart response effect. When the next command (for example, a confirmation command (confirmation command for display)) transmitted from is not received, the drawing content is set so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be done.

Then, as described above, the restart effect corresponding to the variation effect is an effect of displaying the image obtained by vibrating the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can display the third symbol display device 81. In, when it is visually recognized that the third symbol is vibrated and displayed after the fluctuation of the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it can be recognized that the stopped symbol is not fixed at that time.

In addition, the restart effect corresponding to the opening effect displays an image in which the final scene of the opening effect (for example, the screen displaying the message "Congratulations on the big hit") is shaken up and down, so that the player can display the image. When the image in which the final scene of the opening effect is swung up and down is visually recognized on the third symbol display device 81, it can be recognized that the opening effect has not been completed at that time.

Further, the restart effect corresponding to the "music selection" effect continuously displays the image of the last scene of the "music selection" effect (for example, the screen on which the music icon 81a or the like is displayed), so that the player can use it. Can recognize that the "musical piece selection" effect has not been completed at that time when the image in which the final scene of the "musical piece selection" effect is continuously displayed is visually recognized on the third symbol display device 81. ..

In addition, the restart effect corresponding to the ending effect is in the final scene of the ending effect (for example, in the case of the "first time" jackpot, the screen displaying the message "Please remove the card", "Renso". If it is a big hit, the screen on which the message "See you again" is displayed) is swung up and down to display the image, so that the player can move the final scene of the ending effect up and down on the third symbol display device 81. When the swung image is visually recognized, it can be recognized that the ending effect has not been completed at that time.

After the last drawing content defined by the restart display data table 232a1 is expanded, the drawing content is expanded again from the beginning of the restart display data table 232a1 by the pointer update process (S2307) described above. Therefore, until a new command (for example, a display confirmation command, a display variation pattern command, etc.) is received from the voice lamp control device 113, each of the above restart effects can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, the simple display setting process (S2029 in FIG. 46 (b)) executed when the simple image display flag 233a is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46 (b)) is also the display setting process (S2023). Similar processing is performed. However, in the simple display setting process (S2029), after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image (not shown) at power-on is completed, the confirmation command (display confirmation) is confirmed from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. When a command) is received, a display that specifies that one of the images (not shown) that fluctuates when the power is turned on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time. The process of setting the data table 232a1 in the display data table buffer 233b is performed.

Further, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image (not shown) at power-on is completed, the confirmation command (display confirmation command) that should be originally received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 is received. If is not recognized, a process of setting the display data table 232a1 in the display data table buffer 233b, which stipulates that the variation effect of the variation image (not shown) when the power is turned on is restarted, is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, the details of the transfer setting process (S2025) described above, which is one of the V interrupt processes (see FIG. 46 (b)) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. explain. First, FIG. 61A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process (S2025), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233a is on (S2401). If the simple image display flag 233a is on (S2401: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S2402), the transfer setting process (S2025) is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46 (b)). As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process (S2402) will be described later with reference to FIG. 61 (b).

On the other hand, in the process of S2401, if the simple image display flag 233a is not on, that is, if it is off (S2401: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Has been transferred to. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S2403), the transfer setting process (S2025) is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46 (b)). As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process (S2403) will be described later with reference to FIG. 62.

Here, the resident image transfer setting process (S2402), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2025) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 61 (b). FIG. 61B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S2402).

In this resident image transfer setting process (S2402), first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S2411), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S2411). S2411: Yes), and further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S2412). In the process of S2412, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. If it is determined in the process of S2412 that the transfer process has not been completed (S2412: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. (S2402) is terminated, and the process returns to the transfer setting process (see FIG. 61 (a)).

On the other hand, in the process of S2412, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S2412: Yes), the process is transferred to S2413. Further, in the process of S2411, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S2411: No), the process of S2412 is skipped and the process is transferred to S2413.

In the process of S2413, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S2413), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S2413: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S2414), the resident image transfer setting process (S2402) is terminated, and the transfer setting process (S2402) is completed. Return to FIG. 61 (a)).

As a result, the drawing list (see FIG. 25) transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 includes the drawing list. Based on the transfer data information described in, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data) is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers the image data to the designated address of the designated resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

On the other hand, if all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S2413 (S2413: Yes), the simple image display flag 233a is set to off (S2415), and this resident image transfer setting process (S2402). Is terminated, and the process returns to the feed setting process (see FIG. 61 (a)). As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2028 in FIG. 46 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2029 in FIG. 46 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 47 to 56) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 57 to 60) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 62) (see S2401: No in FIG. 61 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process (S2402), the MPU 231 has already transferred the main image at power-on (not shown) and the variable image at power-on (not shown) transferred in the main process (see FIG. 45). Except for (not shown), all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 in the image controller 237. Image drawing processing can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. .. As a result, the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, an error message, a cockpit image, and a sub-display image, a main control device 110, and an audio lamp control. Since the image data of the reserved symbol to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by the device 113, the display control device 114, or the like, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can arbitrarily configure the character ROM 234. It is possible to maintain high responsiveness from various operations performed at the timing to displaying some image on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, a normal image transfer setting process (S2403), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2025) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S2403).

In this normal image transfer setting process (S2403), first, the pointer update process (S2307) of the display setting process (see FIG. 57) executed earlier from the transfer data table 232a3 set in the transfer data table buffer 233d is performed. The information described in the address indicated by the updated pointer 233e is acquired (S2421).

Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S2422), and if it is transfer data information (S2422: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is stored from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S2423) Further, the transfer start flag indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S2424), and the process proceeds to S2425.

On the other hand, in the process of S2422, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S2422: No), the processes of S2423 and S2424 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S2425.

In the process of S2425, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S2425), and if the transfer instruction is set (S2425: Yes). ), Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S2426).

In the process of S2426, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S2426 that the transfer process has not been completed (S2426: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process (S2426: No) S2403) is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S2426: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S2427. Further, as a result of the processing of S2425, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S2425: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S2427.

In the process of S2427, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S2427), and if the transfer start flag is on (S2427: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S2428), the image data indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S2423 is set as the image to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S2432. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S2427: No), then it is determined whether or not the promotion effect display flag is on (S2429).

If the promotion effect display flag is off (S2429: No), the normal image transfer setting process (S2403) is terminated, and the process returns to the transfer setting process (see FIG. 61 (a)). On the other hand, if the promotion effect display flag is on (S2429: Yes), the promotion effect command related to the "promotion during round" effect is processed, and the additional data table 232a2 for the "promotion during round" effect becomes the additional data table buffer 233c. Since it means that it has been set, after the promotion effect display flag is set to off (S2430), the image data of the corresponding promotion effect image (image using character 1, image using character 2 or all cast image) is stored. The start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are specified (S2431), and are indicated by the specified various information. After setting the image data as the image to be transferred, the process proceeds to S2432.

In the process of S2432, it is determined whether or not the image to be transferred is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (S2432). The discrimination in the process of S2432 is performed by referring to the stored image discrimination flag 233h. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image is read from the stored image discrimination flag 233h, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is the normal video RAM 236. It is determined that the image data is stored in the image storage area 236a, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. ..

Then, if the image to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S2432 (S2432: Yes), the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 can be obtained from the character ROM 234. Since it is not necessary to transfer the image data, the normal image transfer setting process (S2403) is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the transfer setting process (see FIG. 61A). As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. It can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image is not stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S2432 (S2432: Yes), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image is set (S2433). As a result, the transfer data information of the image to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 is based on the transfer data information described in the drawing list. In addition, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers the image data to the specified address of the designated video RAM. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S2433, the stored image discrimination flag 233h is updated (S2434), the normal transfer setting process (S2403) is terminated, and the process returns to the transfer setting process (see FIG. 61 (a)). To update the stored image discrimination flag 233h, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image is set to "on", and the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is set. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites that are supposed to be stored to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process (S2403), the process for the promotion effect system command is executed in the previously executed command determination process (see FIG. 47), and the promotion effect system command is executed. If the additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the character 1 used image, the character 2 used image, or the all-cast image displayed in the "promotion during round" effect shown in is set in the additional data table buffer 233c, the additional data. The image data of the character 1 used image, the character 2 used image, or the all-cast image used in the table 232a2 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

If the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process (see FIG. 47) executed earlier, the image data used in the rear image is resident. Image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the voice lamp control device 113, and the display data table thereof is set. The transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to 232a1 is configured to be set in the transfer data table buffer 233d. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table 232a1 can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Here, in the transfer data table 232a3, the image to be transferred is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table 232a1. Data transfer Data information is specified for a given address. Therefore, when the predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table 232a1 by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table 232a3, the drawing of the sprite is drawn. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, which is necessary for the image data, can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Therefore, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the display data table 232a1. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table 232a3, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, the transfer data table 232a3 defines the transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, the transfer of the image data can be finely controlled while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2026), which is one of the V interrupt processes (see FIG. 46 (b)) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process (S2026), the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (see S2024 in FIG. 46 (b)) and the parameters (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio,) required for drawing each sprite. The drawing list shown in FIG. 32 is generated from the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, the filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2025 in FIG. 46 (b)). (S2501).

That is, in the processing of S2501, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing, and the address thereof is specified. The parameters required for the sprite determined by the task process are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information).

When the transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2025 in FIG. 46B), the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. (Storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233i are transmitted to the image controller (S2502). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233i is "0", the drawing target buffer flag 233i is "1" including information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. , The drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to obtain the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236). Then, the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

The drawing process (S2026) updates the drawing target buffer flag 233i after the process of S2502 (S2503). Then, this drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46 (b)). The drawing target buffer flag 233i is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when the value is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 33.3 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46 (b)) is executed.

As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of the above are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 33.3 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 33.3 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Is specified. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. ..

After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 33.3 milliseconds, respectively. By alternately specifying the above, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 33.3 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67, command generation processing and transmission processing in each of the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81, and the transmission processing thereof. The contents of the reception process and the control process based on the reception of the command transmitted by the above will be described. FIG. 64 schematically shows an example of command transmission / reception between the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81, and the processing contents of the devices 110, 113, 114, 81. It is a timing display diagram shown, and in particular, is a figure explaining the control content and execution timing of each apparatus 110, 113, 114, 81 when the press of the change button 22b is detected by the voice lamp control apparatus 113.

Note that, in FIGS. 64 to 67, as the processing content related to the main control device 110, one item of "opening command" indicating a transmission processing for generating an opening command and transmitting it to the voice lamp control device 113 is provided.

Further, in FIGS. 64 to 67, "main command reception" indicating a reception process for receiving a command (open command) from the main control device 110 and a display open command are generated as the processing contents related to the voice lamp control device 113. A "display release command (SDK)" indicating a transmission process to be transmitted to the display control device 114, a "button operation valid time" indicating a button operation valid time, and a "decision button detection" indicating the detection process of the decision button 22a. , "Decision command (SGK)" indicating the transmission process of generating a decision command and transmitting it to the display control device 114, "change button detection" indicating the detection process of the change button 22b, and "change button detection" to generate a change command. A "change command (SGH)" indicating a transmission process to be transmitted to the display control device 114, a "music selection counter" indicating an update process of the music selection counter 223g, and a command from the display control device 114 (sub display determination command or There are nine items, "display command reception", which indicates the reception process for receiving the sub display change command).

Further, in FIGS. 64 to 67, as the processing contents related to the display control device 114, "voice lamp command reception" indicating a reception process for receiving a command (decision command or change command) from the voice lamp control device 113 and "voice lamp command reception" are used for the sub. A "sub display change command (HGH)" indicating a transmission process for generating a display change command and transmitting it to the voice lamp control device 113, and a transmission process for generating a sub display determination command and transmitting it to the voice lamp control device 113. "Sub display determination command (HGK)" indicating the processing content to be executed by the V blank interrupt processing (see FIG. 46B), and the third symbol display device 81. The "music" indicating the music selected and displayed in the "music selection" effect being executed in, the "first frame buffer" indicating the processing content executed by the first frame buffer 236b, and the second frame buffer 236c are executed. Seven items are provided, that is, a "second frame buffer" indicating the processing content to be performed.

Further, in FIGS. 64 to 67, as the processing content regarding the third symbol display device 81, the "third symbol display" indicating the state related to the "music selection" effect and the "music reproduction" effect executed by the third symbol display device 81. One item of "device" is provided.

Further, in the description of FIGS. 64 to 67, when the opening command is explained, the symbol "DK" composed of the initials of "Dainyuusyoukou (large winning opening)" and "Kaihou (opening)" is added. May be done. In addition, when explaining the open command for display, the symbol "SDK" consisting of the initials of "Sub", "Dainyuusyoukou", and "Kaihou" is added. May be done. Furthermore, when explaining the change command, the symbol "SGH" composed of the initials of "Sub", "Gakkyoku (music)", and "Henkou (change)" may be added. .. In addition, when explaining the decision command, the symbol "SGK" composed of the initials of "Sub", "Gakkyoku (music)", and "Kettei (decision)" may be added. .. Further, when explaining the sub-display change command, the symbol "HGH" composed of the initials of "Hyouji (display)", "Gakkyoku (music)", and "Henkou (change)" is added. In some cases. In addition, when explaining the sub display determination command, the symbol "HGK" composed of the initials of "Hyouji (display)", "Gakkyoku (music)", and "Kettei (decision)" is added. In some cases.

Further, in FIGS. 64 to 67, it is expressed that time elapses from the right side to the left side of the drawing. Further, the time required for one unit of processing in the main control device 110 is expressed in 4 milliseconds (ms), and the time required for one unit of processing in the voice lamp control device 113 is expressed in 1 millisecond (ms). , The time required for processing one unit in the display control device 114 is expressed in 33.3 milliseconds (ms).

Further, in FIGS. 64 to 67, for convenience of explanation, "A", "B", and "C" are used in the order of processing for one unit of processing in the item of "V blank interrupt processing" in the display control device 114, respectively. And "D" will be added for explanation.

Further, FIGS. 64 to 67 show a state in which the execution of the "music selection" effect is started, and the pressing operation of the enter button 22a or the change button 22b is effective by the arrow of the "button operation valid period". Shows the period. That is, in the item of "button operation valid period", the period represented by the arrow indicates that the pressing operation for the decision button 22a or the change button 22b is valid, that is, the "music selection" effect is being performed.

From here, with reference to FIG. 64, generation processing, transmission processing, and reception of commands for each of the devices 110, 113, 114, and 81 when the change button 22b is pressed by the player during the “music selection” effect. A process or a control process (hereinafter, a command-related generation process, a transmission process, a reception process, or a control process may be simply referred to as a “process”) will be described.

In FIG. 64, the processing is not executed in the "open command (DK)" of the main control device 110 and the "main command reception" and "display open command (SDK)" of the voice lamp control device 113. It shows the state. That is, in FIG. 64, the opening command is not transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the opening instruction of the large winning opening 65a is not output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. Is shown.

Further, in FIG. 64, the “decision button detection” and the “decision command (SGK)” of the voice lamp control device 113 show a state in which the process is not executed. That is, FIG. 64 shows that the player does not press the decision button 22a, and the voice lamp control device 113 does not output an instruction based on the press operation of the decision button 22a to the display control device 114. ..

In FIG. 64, in the “change button detection” of the voice lamp control device 113, the detection processes of “off”, “on”, and “on” are executed, and the change button 22b is pressed by the player. Indicates the detected state. Similarly, in the "change command (SGH)" of the voice lamp control device 113, the "setting" indicating that the change command (SGH) generation process and transmission process are executed based on the detection of the change button 22b is executed. (See S1713 in FIG. 42 and S1102 in FIG. 36). That is, FIG. 64 shows a state in which the voice lamp control device 113 detects the pressing operation of the change button 22b, and generates and transmits the change command (SGH) based on the pressing operation.

The "voice lamp command reception" of the display control device 114 indicates that the change command (SGH) has been received from the voice lamp control device 113. As the process of the display control device 114 at the timing when this change command (SGH) is received, "A" of "V blank interrupt process" is being executed, but "A" of this "V blank interrupt process" is being executed. At the timing of, it is shown that the process based on the received change command (SGH) is not executed.

Further, at the timing of "A" in the "V blank interrupt processing", in the "first frame buffer" indicating the processing of the first frame buffer 236b, the image is drawn in the first frame buffer 236b before the timing of the "A". The display process for displaying the first round effect image (hereinafter referred to as "1R effect image") related to the "music selection" effect on the third symbol display device 81, and the first frame buffer also before the timing of "A". A display process is being executed in which an image (hereinafter, referred to as “music 1 selection image”) in which music 1 (for example, music AAA) drawn on 236b is selectively displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, in the "second frame buffer" indicating the processing of the second frame buffer 236c, the drawing process of the 1R effect image related to the "music selection" effect and the drawing process of the music 1 selection image are executed.

That is, at the timing of "A" of "V blank interrupt processing", which is the processing performed at the timing when the change command (SGH) is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the analysis processing of the change command (SGH) is still performed. However, the "musical piece" in the selection display recognized by the display control device 114 is the musical piece 1. Further, at the timing of "A" of the "V blank interrupt processing", the display processing and the drawing processing of the music 1 selection image and the 1R effect image are performed, respectively. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the first round effect (that is, the symbol indicating the first round, the "music selection" effect, etc., hereinafter may be referred to as "1R effect"). At the same time, the music 1 selection image is displayed.

Therefore, when there is a change command (SGH) received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is executed at the timing of receiving the change command (SGH) in the V blank interrupt process (see FIG. 46 (b)). It is configured to execute the process based on the change command (SGH) received in the previous frame in the V blank interrupt process of the next frame without executing the process (analysis, setting, etc.) based on the change command (SGH). ing. Therefore, depending on the timing at which the change command (SGH) is received, the process based on the received change command (SGH) is executed after a maximum of 33.3 milliseconds.

Subsequently, at the timing of "B" of "V blank interrupt processing", it is shown that the processing by the change command (SGH) received at the timing of "A" of "V blank interrupt processing" is executed. .. By this process, the change command (SGH) received from the voice lamp control device 113 is analyzed, the value of the selected music memory 233j is updated (that is, 1 addition) (see S2208 in FIG. 51), and the selected music is selected. A sub display change command (HGH) is generated based on the value indicated by the memory 233j (see S2210 in FIG. 51). Then, in the V blank interrupt process of the next frame (that is, the timing of "C" of the "V blank interrupt process"), the sub display change command (HGH) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. ..

Further, at the timing of "B" of the "V blank interruption process", the drawing process of the 1R effect image related to the "music selection" effect is executed in the "first frame buffer" indicating the process of the first frame buffer 236b. At the same time, a drawing process of an image in which the music 2 (for example, the music BBB) is selected and displayed based on the reception of the change command (SGH) (hereinafter referred to as “music 2 selection image”) is executed. Further, in the "second frame buffer" indicating the processing of the second frame buffer 236c, the display processing of the 1R effect image related to the "music selection" effect drawn at the timing of "A" of the "V blank interruption process" is performed. , The display process of the music 1 selected image is executed.

That is, at the timing of "B" of "V blank interrupt processing" in FIG. 64, the change command (SGH) received from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing of "A" of "V blank interrupt processing" is analyzed. To. Further, at the timing of "B" of the "V blank interrupt process", the value of the selected music memory 233j is added by 1 based on the reception of the change command (SGH) (see S2208 in FIG. 51), and the selection is being displayed. Recognizes that the "musical piece" of is changed from the musical piece 1 to the musical piece 2 at the next frame (that is, the timing of "C" of the "V blank interrupt process"). Further, at the timing of "B" in the "V blank interrupt process", a sub display change command (HGH) is generated based on the added value of the selected music memory 233j (see S2210 in FIG. 51), and the following A sub display change command (HGH) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 at the frame (that is, the timing of “C” of the “V blank interrupt process”). Further, at the timing of "B" of the "V blank interruption process", the music 1 selection image and the 1R effect image are displayed, while the music 2 selection image and the 1R effect based on the received change command (SGH) are performed. It is recognized that the image drawing process is performed and the music 2 selected image is displayed in the next frame. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the 1R effect is displayed and the music 1 selection image is displayed as in the timing of “A” of the “V blank interrupt process”.

Subsequently, at the timing of "C" of "V blank interrupt processing" in FIG. 64, the sub-display change command (HGH) generated at the timing of "B" of "V blank interrupt processing" is the voice lamp control device 113. Indicates the state of being sent to. Then, in the "display command reception" of the voice lamp control device 113, the reception processing of the sub display change command (HGH) is executed, and in the "music selection counter", the sub display change command (HGH) is received. Based on this, the value of the music selection counter 223g is added by "+1" (see S1403 in FIG. 39).

Further, at the timing of "C" of the "V blank interrupt process", the drawing process is performed at the timing of "B" of the "V blank interrupt process" in the "first frame buffer" indicating the process of the first frame buffer 236b. The display processing of the 1R effect image and the display process of the music 2 selection image related to the performed "music selection" effect are executed. Further, in the "second frame buffer" indicating the processing of the second frame buffer 236c, the drawing process of the 1R effect image and the drawing process of the music 2 selection image related to the "music selection" effect are executed.

That is, at the timing of "C" of "V blank interrupt processing", the sub display change command (HGH) generated at the timing of "B" of "V blank interrupt processing" is voiced from the display control device 114. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. Further, at the timing of "C" of the "V blank interrupt processing", the voice lamp control device 113 performs the reception processing of the sub display change command (HGH), and the value of the music selection counter 223g is set based on the reception. 1 is added (see S1403 in FIG. 39), and the value of the music selection counter 223g of the voice lamp control device 113 and the value of the selected music memory 233j of the display control device 114 are synchronized. Further, at the timing of "C" of the "V blank interrupt process", the music 2 selection image and the 1R effect image are drawn, while the music 2 selection image and the 1R effect image are displayed. .. As a result, on the third symbol display device, the 1R effect is displayed, while the music 1 selection image is changed to the music 2 selection image and displayed.

Subsequently, at the timing of "D" of the "V blank interruption process", in the "first frame buffer" indicating the process of the first frame buffer 236b, the drawing process of the 1R effect image related to the "music selection" effect and the music. 2 The drawing process of the selected image is being executed. Further, in the "second frame buffer" indicating the processing of the second frame buffer 236c, the display processing of the 1R effect image related to the "music selection" effect drawn at the timing of "C" of the "V blank interruption process" is performed. , The display process of the music 2 selected image is executed.

That is, at the timing of "D" in the "V blank interrupt processing", the drawing processing of the music 2 selection image and the 1R effect image is performed and the drawing processing is performed in the same manner as the timing of "C" in the "V blank interrupt processing". The music 2 selection image and the 1R effect image are displayed. As a result, in the third symbol display device, the 1R effect is displayed and the music 2 selection image is displayed as in the timing of “C” of the “V blank interrupt process”.

In this way, when the change button 22b is pressed by the player, each of the above processes is executed by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, and the selection display recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 is being performed. Music and the music being selected and displayed recognized by the display control device 114 are synchronized with each other. Further, the display control device 114 performs drawing processing and display processing based on the change command (SGH) based on the change command (SGH) received from the voice lamp control device 113, and corresponds to the change command (SGH). The display content can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, when an open command (DK) indicating the start of the next round (that is, the second round) is transmitted from the main control device 110 during the “music selection” effect, each device 110, Each process for each of 113, 114, and 81 will be described. FIG. 65 schematically shows an example of command transmission / reception between the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81, and the processing contents of the devices 110, 113, 114, 81. It is a timing display diagram shown, and in particular, the control of each device 110, 113, 114, 81 when the second round open command (DK) generated by the main control device 110 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. It is a figure explaining the content and execution timing.

In addition, in FIG. 65, the “decision button detection” of the voice lamp control device 113 shows a state in which the process is not executed. That is, FIG. 65 shows that the player does not press the decision button 22a, and the voice lamp control device 113 does not output an instruction based on the press operation of the decision button 22a to the display control device 114. ..

Further, in FIG. 65, the “change button detection” and the “change command (SGH)” of the voice lamp control device 113 show a state in which the process is not executed. That is, FIG. 65 shows that the change button 22b is not pressed by the player, and the instruction based on the pressing operation of the change button 22b is not output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. .. Therefore, even in the "music selection counter" of the voice lamp control device 113, the processing is not executed.

In FIG. 65, in the “open command (DK)” of the main controller 110, the jackpot process (see FIG. 30) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) executed every 4 milliseconds is large. A release command (DK) indicating the opening of the winning opening 65a is set (see S510 in FIG. 30), and then the command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the next timer interrupt process is executed. (See S101 in FIG. 26). That is, in FIG. 65, it is determined in the main control device 110 that it is the start timing of the second round, and based on the determination, an open command (DK) indicating the start of the second round is issued to the voice lamp control device 113. Indicates the transmission status.

The "main command reception" of the voice lamp control device 113 shows a state in which the release command (DK) is received from the main control device 110 and the received release command (DK) is analyzed. As the processing of the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the release command (DK) is received, the display release command (SDK) in the "display release command (SDK)" based on the reception of the release command (DK) is performed. It shows the state in which the "setting" indicating that the generation process and the transmission process of the SDK) are executed is executed (see S1307 in FIG. 38 and S1102 in FIG. 36).

Further, as the processing of the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the release command (DK) is received, the "button operation effective time" corresponding to the "music selection" effect is set based on the reception of the release command (DK). It shows the state in which the "setting" indicating that the determination command (SGK) generation processing and transmission processing are executed based on the end of the "music selection" effect is executed (S1508 and S1508 in FIG. 40). See S1102 in FIG. 36).

That is, in FIG. 65, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the release command (DK) from the main control device 110, and based on the reception of the release command (DK), the next round (that is, the second round) A display open command (SDK) indicating the start is generated and transmitted, and a determination command (SGK) indicating the end of the "music selection" effect is generated and transmitted.

Then, in the "voice lamp command reception" of the display control device 114, it is shown that the display release command (SDK) and the determination command (SGK) have been received from the voice lamp control device 113. As the processing of the display control device 114 at the timing when the display release command (SDK) and the determination command (SGK) are received, "B" of the "V blank interrupt processing" is being executed, but this "V blank" is being executed. At the timing of "B" of "interrupt processing", it is shown that the processing based on the received display release command (SDK) and decision command (SGK) is not executed.

Further, at the timing of "B" of the "V blank interruption process", in the "first frame buffer" indicating the process of the first frame buffer 236b, the drawing process of the 1R effect image related to the "music selection" effect and the music 1 The drawing process of the selected image is being executed. Further, in the "second frame buffer" indicating the processing of the second frame buffer 236c, the display processing of the 1R effect image related to the "music selection" effect drawn at the timing of "A" of the "V blank interruption process" is performed. , The display process of the music 1 selected image is executed.

That is, at the timing of "B" of the "V blank interrupt processing", which is the processing performed at the timing when the display release command (SDK) and the determination command (SGK) are received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display release command is still open. The analysis processing of the command (SDK) and the determination command (SGK) is not performed, and the “music” in the selection display recognized by the display control device 114 is music 1. Further, at the timing of "B" of the "V blank interrupt processing", the display processing and the drawing processing of the music 1 selection image and the 1R effect image are performed, respectively. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the 1R effect is displayed and the image in which the music 1 is selected and displayed (for example, the image in which the music AAA icon 81a1 is selected and displayed) is displayed.

Therefore, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 executes the V blank interrupt process (V blank interrupt process) executed at the received timing when there is a display release command (SDK) and a decision command (SGK) received from the voice lamp control device 113. (See FIG. 46 (b)), the process (analysis, setting, etc.) based on the display open command (SDK) and the decision command (SGK) is not executed, and is received in the previous frame in the V blank interrupt process of the next frame. It is configured to execute processing based on the display release command (SDK) and the decision command (SGK). Therefore, depending on the timing at which the display release command (SDK) and the decision command (SGK) are received, the processing based on the received display release command (SDK) and the decision command (SGK) may be performed after a maximum of 33.3 milliseconds. It will be executed.

Subsequently, at the timing of "C" of "V blank interrupt processing" in FIG. 65, the display release command (SDK) and the determination command (SGK) received at the timing of "B" of "V blank interrupt processing". Indicates that the processing by is executed. By this process, the display release command (SDK) and the determination command (SGK) received from the voice lamp control device 113 are analyzed, and the "music selection" effect being executed based on the reception of the display release command (SDK) is produced. The display control process is performed to switch to the "music playback" effect, and the value of the display determination music memory 233k is set according to the value of the selected music memory 233j based on the reception of the determination command (SGK) (FIG. 51). (See S2203), a sub display determination command (HGK) is generated based on the value indicated by the display determination music memory 233k (see S2205 in FIG. 51). Then, in the V blank interrupt process of the next frame (that is, the timing of "D" of the "V blank interrupt process"), the sub display determination command (HGK) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. ..

Further, at the timing of "C" of the "V blank interrupt process", the drawing process is performed at the timing of "B" of the "V blank interrupt process" in the "first frame buffer" indicating the process of the first frame buffer 236b. The display processing of the 1R effect image related to the "music selection" effect and the display process of the music 1 selection image are executed. On the other hand, in the "second frame buffer" indicating the processing of the second frame buffer 236c, the jackpot is related based on the reception of the display release command (SDK) received at the timing of "B" of the "V blank interrupt processing". The drawing process of the second round effect image (hereinafter referred to as "2R effect image") is executed, and the determination command (HGK) received at the timing of "B" of the "V blank interrupt process" is also executed. Based on the reception, the drawing process of the production image (hereinafter, referred to as "music 1 reproduction image") relating to the "music reproduction" production by the music 1 (for example, music AAA) is executed.

That is, at the timing of "C" of "V blank interrupt processing" in FIG. 65, the display release command (SDK) received from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing of "B" of "V blank interrupt processing". The decision command (SGK) is analyzed. Further, at the timing of "C" of the "V blank interruption process", the value of the display determined music memory 233k is set based on the value of the selected music memory 233j based on the reception of the determination command (SGK) (FIG. The effect corresponding to the value of the display determined music memory 233k (that is, the "music reproduction" effect corresponding to the music 1 which is the "music" being selected and displayed) is the next frame (that is, "V"). Recognize that it is displayed at the timing of "D" in "Blank interrupt processing"). Further, at the timing of "C" of the "V blank interrupt process", a sub display determination command (HGK) is generated based on the set value of the display determination music memory 233k (see S2205 in FIG. 51), and the next A sub display determination command (HGK) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 at the frame (that is, the timing of “D” of the “V blank interrupt process”). Further, at the timing of "C" of "V blank interruption processing", while the music 1 selection image and the 1R effect image are displayed, the received display release command (SDK) and decision command (SGK) are displayed. Drawing processing of the music 1 reproduction image and the 2R effect image based on the music is performed. As a result, in the third symbol display device, the 1R effect is displayed and the music 1 selection image is displayed as in the timing of “B” of the “V blank interrupt process”.

Subsequently, at the timing of "D" of "V blank interrupt processing" in FIG. 65, the sub display determination command (HGK) generated at the timing of "C" of "V blank interrupt processing" is the voice lamp control device. It shows the state of being transmitted toward 113. Then, in the "display command reception" of the voice lamp control device 113, the reception process of the sub display determination command (HGK) is executed, and the reception of the sub display determination command (HGK) causes the value of the music selection counter 223g. Based on this, the value of the determined music memory 223h is set (see S1404 in FIG. 39).

Further, at the timing of "D" of the "V blank interrupt process", the reception was received at the timing of "B" of the "V blank interrupt process" in the "first frame buffer" indicating the process of the first frame buffer 236b. Based on the display release command (SDK), the drawing process of the 2R effect image and the drawing process of the music 1 reproduced image are executed. Further, in the "second frame buffer" indicating the processing of the second frame buffer 236c, the display processing of the 2R effect image drawn at the timing of "C" of the "V blank interrupt processing" and the music 1 reproduction image are displayed. Display processing is being executed.

That is, at the timing of "D" of "V blank interrupt processing", the sub display determination command (HGK) generated at the timing of "C" of "V blank interrupt processing" is voiced from the display control device 114. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. Further, at the timing of "D" of the "V blank interrupt processing", the reception processing of the sub display determination command (HGK) is performed in the voice lamp control device 113, and the value of the music selection counter 223g is set based on the reception. The value of the determined music memory 223h is set correspondingly (see S1404 in FIG. 39), and the value of the determined music memory 223h of the voice lamp control device 113 and the value of the display determined music memory 233k of the display control device 114 are synchronized with each other. .. Further, at the timing of "D" of the "V blank interrupt process", the music 1 reproduction image and the 2R effect image are displayed, and the music 1 reproduction image and the 2R effect image are drawn. .. As a result, in the third symbol display device, the display of the second round effect (that is, the symbol indicating the second round, etc., hereinafter may be referred to as "2R effect") is started, and the music 1 is started. The display of the reproduced image is started.

As described above, when the opening command (DK) of the second round is transmitted from the main control device 110 with the end of the first round in the jackpot, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 each of the above. The processing is executed, and the music played by the "music playback" effect recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 and the music played by the "music playback" effect recognized by the display control device 114 are synchronized. To. Further, the display control device 114 is based on the display release command (SDK) and the decision command (SGK) based on the display release command (SDK) and the decision command (SGK) received from the voice lamp control device 113. The expansion process and the drawing process can be performed, and the display contents corresponding to the display release command (SDK) and the determination command (SGK) can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, each process of each device 110, 113, 114, 81 when the determination button 22a is pressed by the player during the “music selection” effect, and the “music selection”. Each process of each device 110, 113, 114, 81 when an open command (DK) indicating the start of the next round (that is, the second round) is transmitted from the main control device 110 during the effect will be described. FIG. 66 schematically shows an example of command transmission / reception between the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81, and the processing contents of the respective devices 110, 113, 114, 81. It is a timing display diagram shown, and in particular, the control content and execution timing of each of the devices 110, 113, 114, 81 when the press of the decision button 22a is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 is described, and the main control is performed. It is a figure explaining the control content and execution timing of each apparatus 110, 113, 114, 81 when the opening command (DK) of the 2nd round generated by the apparatus 110 is transmitted to the voice lamp control apparatus 113.

In addition, in FIG. 66, the “change button detection” and the “change command (SGH)” of the voice lamp control device 113 show a state in which the process is not executed. That is, FIG. 66 shows that the change button 22b is not pressed by the player, and the instruction based on the pressing operation of the change button 22b is not output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. .. Therefore, even in the "music selection counter" of the voice lamp control device 113, the processing is not executed.

Further, in FIG. 66, the “change button detection” and the “change command (SGH)” of the voice lamp control device 113 show a state in which the process is not executed. That is, FIG. 66 shows that the change button 22b is not pressed by the player, and the instruction based on the pressing operation of the change button 22b is not output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. .. Therefore, even in the "music selection counter" of the voice lamp control device 113, the processing is not executed.

In FIG. 66, in the “decision button detection” of the voice lamp control device 113, the detection processes of “off”, “on”, and “on” are executed, and the decision button 22a is pressed by the player. Indicates the detected state. Similarly, in the "decision command (SGK)" of the voice lamp control device 113, it is shown that the generation process and the transmission process of the previous decision command (SGK (i)) are executed based on the detection of the decision button 22a. It shows the state in which "setting" is executed (see S1705 in FIG. 42 and S1102 in FIG. 36). That is, in FIG. 66, the voice lamp control device 113 detects the pressing operation of the decision button 22a, and generates and transmits the previous decision command (SGK (i)) based on the pressing operation.

Further, in the "button operation valid time" of the voice lamp control device 113, the operation valid time of the decision button 22a and the like ends at the timing when the release command (DK) of the second round is originally received from the main control device 110. Based on the detection that the decision button 22a has been pressed by the player by the "decision button detection", the operation effective time of the decision button 22a and the like has expired before the end of the "music selection" effect. Is shown.

The "voice lamp command reception" of the display control device 114 indicates that the previous determination command (SGK (i)) has been received from the voice lamp control device 113. As the processing of the display control device 114 at the timing when the determination command (SGK (i)) is received, "A" of "V blank interrupt processing" is being executed. This "V blank interrupt processing" At the timing of "A", it is shown that the process based on the received decision command (SGK (i)) is not executed.

Further, at the timing of "A" of the "V blank interruption process", in the "first frame buffer" indicating the process of the first frame buffer 236b, the display process of the 1R effect image related to the "music selection" effect and the music 1 Display processing of the selected image is being executed. Further, in the "second frame buffer" indicating the processing of the second frame buffer 236c, the drawing process of the 1R effect image related to the "music selection" effect and the drawing process of the music 1 selection image are executed.

That is, at the timing of "A" of the "V blank interrupt process" which is the process performed at the timing when the previous decision command (SGK (i)) is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the previous decision command (SGK) is still performed. The analysis process of (i)) is not performed, and the “musical piece” in the selection display recognized by the display control device 114 is the musical piece 1. Further, at the timing of "A" of the "V blank interrupt processing", the display processing and the drawing processing of the music 1 selection image and the 1R effect image are performed, respectively. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, the 1R effect is displayed and the music 1 selection image is displayed.

Therefore, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 executes the V blank interrupt process at the timing of receiving the determination command (SGK (i)) received from the voice lamp control device 113 (FIG. 46 (FIG. 46). In b)), the process (analysis, setting, etc.) based on the previous decision command (SGK (i)) is not executed, and the previous decision command received in the previous frame in the V blank interrupt process of the next frame (see). It is configured to execute a process based on SGK (i)). Therefore, depending on the timing at which the decision command (SGK) is received, the process based on the received decision command (SGK) will be executed after a maximum of 33.3 milliseconds.

Subsequently, in the "open command (DK)" of the main controller 110 in FIG. 66, the jackpot process (see FIG. 30) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) executed every 4 milliseconds. In, an opening command (DK) indicating the opening of the large winning opening 65a in the second round is set (see S510 in FIG. 30), and then the voice lamp control device 113 is set at the timing when the next timer interrupt processing is executed. It shows the state of being transmitted toward (see S101 in FIG. 26). That is, in FIG. 66, it is determined in the main control device 110 that it is the start timing of the second round, and based on the determination, an open command (DK) indicating the start of the second round is issued to the voice lamp control device 113. It has been sent.

Then, in the "main command reception" of the voice lamp control device 113, a state in which the second round release command (DK) is received from the main control device 110 and the received release command (DK) is analyzed is shown. There is. As the processing of the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the release command (DK) is received, the display release command (SDK) in the "display release command (SDK)" based on the reception of the release command (DK) is performed. It shows the state in which the "setting" indicating that the generation process and the transmission process of the SDK) have been executed has been executed (see S1307 in FIG. 38 and S1102 in FIG. 36).

Further, as the processing of the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the release command (DK) is received, the "music selection" effect is completed based on the reception of the release command (DK), and the "music selection" effect is performed. Indicates a state in which the "setting" indicating that the subsequent determination command (SGK (ii)) generation processing and transmission processing is executed by the "decision command (SGK)" based on the end of is executed (. See S1508 in FIG. 40 and S1102 in FIG. 36).

That is, in FIG. 66, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the release command (DK) from the main control device 110, and based on the reception of the release command (DK), the next round (that is, the second round) A display release command (SDK) indicating the start is generated and transmitted, and a determination command (SGK (ii)) after indicating the end of the "music selection" effect is generated and transmitted.

Then, in the "voice lamp command reception" of the display control device 114, it is shown that the display release command (SDK) and the subsequent determination command (SGK (ii)) have been received from the voice lamp control device 113. As the processing of the display control device 114 at the timing when the display release command (SDK) and the later determination command (SGK (ii)) are received, "B" of "V blank interrupt processing" is being executed. At the timing of "B" of this "V blank interrupt processing", the processing by the destination determination command (SGK (i)) received at the timing of "A" of "V blank interrupt processing" is executed. On the other hand, the process based on the display release command (SDK) and the later decision command (SGK (ii)) received at the timing of "B" of the "V blank interrupt process" is not executed.

By the process executed at the timing of "B" of this "V blank interrupt process", the destination decision command (SGK (i)) received from the voice lamp control device 113 is analyzed, and the destination decision command (SGK) is analyzed. Based on (i)), the value of the display-determined music memory 233k is set according to the value of the selected music memory 233j (see S2233 in FIG. 51), and the display is displayed for the sub based on the value indicated by the display-determined music memory 233k. A decision command (HGK) is generated (see S2205 in FIG. 51). Then, in the V blank interrupt process of the next frame (that is, the timing of “C” of the “V blank interrupt process”), the sub display determination command (HGK) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. ..

Further, at the timing of "B" of the "V blank interrupt process", the image was received at the timing of "A" of the "V blank interrupt process" in the "first frame buffer" indicating the process of the first frame buffer 236b. Drawing processing of an image (hereinafter referred to as "music 1 decision image") in which the song 1 being selected and displayed is decided and displayed based on the reception of the previous decision command (SGK (i)), and "music selection" effect. The drawing process of the 1R effect image is being executed. Further, in the "second frame buffer" indicating the processing of the second frame buffer 236c, the display processing of the 1R effect image related to the "music selection" effect drawn at the timing of "A" of the "V blank interruption process" is performed. , The display process of the music 1 selected image is executed.

That is, at the timing of "B" of "V blank interrupt processing", which is the processing performed at the timing when the display release command (SDK) and the later determination command (SGK (ii)) are received from the voice lamp control device 113. , The analysis processing of the display release command (SDK) and the later decision command (SGK (ii)) is not performed yet, but the destination decision command received at the timing of "A" in the "V blank interrupt process". The value of the music memory 233k to be displayed is set based on the value of the music memory 233j being selected based on the reception of (SGK (i)) (see S2203 in FIG. 51), and the next frame (that is, "V blank interrupt processing") is set. The sub display determination command (HGK) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing of “C”). Further, at the timing of "B" of the "V blank interruption process", the music 1 selection image and the 1R effect image are displayed, while the music 1 determination image and the 1R effect image are opened. The "musical piece" in the selection display recognized by the display control device 114 is music 1, but the music 1 determination image is displayed in the next frame based on the reception of the previous determination command (SGK (i)). Recognize that. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the 1R effect is displayed and the image in which the music 1 is selected and displayed (for example, the image in which the music AAA icon 81a1 is selected and displayed) is displayed.

Subsequently, at the timing of "C" of "V blank interrupt processing" in FIG. 66, the sub display determination command (HGK) generated at the timing of "B" of "V blank interrupt processing" is the voice lamp control device. It shows the state of being transmitted toward 113. Then, in the "display command reception" of the voice lamp control device 113, the reception process of the sub display determination command (HGK) is executed, and the reception of the sub display determination command (HGK) causes the value of the music selection counter 223g. Based on this, the value of the determined music memory 223h is set (see S1404 in FIG. 39).

Further, at the timing of "C" of "V blank interrupt processing", the display release command (SDK) received at the timing of "B" of "V blank interrupt processing" and the subsequent decision command (SGK (ii)). ) Indicates that the process is executed. In this process, the display release command (SDK) and the later decision command (SGK (ii)) received from the voice lamp control device 113 are analyzed and executed based on the reception of the display release command (SDK). Display control processing is performed to switch the "music selection" effect to the "music playback" effect. On the other hand, since the display determination music memory 233k setting process and the sub display determination command (HGK) setting process have already been executed by the previous determination command (SGK (i)), the determination command (SGK) after reception has already been executed. Based on (ii)), the display determination music memory 233k setting process and the sub display determination command (HGK) generation process are not executed (see S2201: Yes in FIG. 51). That is, by receiving the earlier determination command (SGK (i)), the processing based on the later determination command (SGK (ii)) is invalidated.

Further, at the timing of "C" of the "V blank interrupt process", the drawing process is performed at the timing of "B" of the "V blank interrupt process" in the "first frame buffer" indicating the process of the first frame buffer 236b. The display processing of the music 1 determined image and the display processing of the 1R effect image related to the "music selection" effect are executed. Further, in the "second frame buffer" indicating the processing of the second frame buffer 236c, the drawing process of the 2R effect image is executed based on the reception of the display release command (SDK), and the previous determination command (SGK (SGK) Based on the reception of ii)), the drawing process of the music 1 reproduced image is executed.

That is, at the timing of "C" of "V blank interrupt processing" in FIG. 66, the sub display determination command (HGH) generated from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing of "B" of "V blank interrupt processing". ) Is transmitted from the display control device 114 toward the voice lamp control device 113. Further, at the timing of "C" of "V blank interrupt processing", the display release command (SDK) received from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing of "B" of "V blank interrupt processing" and the subsequent determination. The command (SGK (ii)) is parsed. Then, based on the display release command (SDK), it is recognized that the 2R effect image and the music 1 reproduction image are displayed in the next frame. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the 1R effect is displayed as in the timing of "B" of the "V blank interrupt process", while the music 1 selection image is changed to the music 1 determination image and displayed. Will be done.

Subsequently, at the timing of "D" of the "V blank interrupt process" in FIG. 66, in the "first frame buffer" indicating the process of the first frame buffer 236b, the "B" of the "V blank interrupt process" Based on the display release command (SDK) received at the timing, the drawing process of the 2R effect image and the drawing process of the music 1 reproduced image are executed. Further, in the "second frame buffer" indicating the processing of the second frame buffer 236c, the display processing of the 2R effect image drawn at the timing of "C" of the "V blank interrupt processing" and the music 1 reproduction image are displayed. Display processing is being executed.

That is, at the timing of "D" of the "V blank interrupt process", the music 1 reproduction image and the 2R effect image are displayed, and the music 1 reproduction image and the 2R effect image are drawn. .. As a result, in the third symbol display device, the display of the 2R effect is started, and the display of the music 1 reproduced image is started.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the determination command (the previous determination command (SGK (i))) is received even once in the "music selection" effect, the "music selection" effect is performed. Even if a decision command (later decision command (SGK (ii))) is received at the end, the process based on the second decision command (later decision command (SGK (ii))) is not executed. It is configured as follows.

With this configuration, the display control device 114 has already been determined when the previous determination command is received, even if the determination command is duplicated from the voice lamp control device 113 during the "music selection" effect. By setting the flag 233m so that the processing based on the later decision command is not executed (disabled), it is possible to prevent duplicate processing from being executed on the display control device 114 side, and the display control device 114 The processing load can be reduced.

Further, even when the display control device 114, which is the control device on the downstream side, receives the decision command more than once, the control based on one decision command is executed and the other decision command is discarded. By configuring so that control based on the other decision command is not executed and enabling appropriate processing to be executed, whether or not the decision command has been output in the voice lamp control device 113, which is the upstream control device, etc. Since it is not necessary to execute complicated processing of the above, it is possible to facilitate the creation of a program at the time of development of each of the control devices 113 and 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, each process of each device 110, 113, 114, 81 when the change button 22b is pressed by the player during the “music selection” effect, and the “music selection”. Each process of each device 110, 113, 114, 81 when an open command (DK) indicating the start of the next round (that is, the second round) is transmitted from the main control device 110 during the effect will be described. FIG. 67 schematically shows an example of command transmission / reception between the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81, and the processing contents of the devices 110, 113, 114, 81. It is a timing display diagram shown, and in particular, the press of the change button 22b is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, and the change command (SGH) generated based on the detection is transmitted to the display control device 114, and the display control device The control contents and execution timing of each of the devices 110, 113, 114, 81 when the display release command (SDK) and the decision command (SGK) from the voice lamp control device 113 are received in the same frame in 114. It is a figure explaining.

In FIG. 67, in the “change button detection” of the voice lamp control device 113, the detection processes of “off”, “on”, and “on” are executed, and the change button 22b is pressed by the player. Indicates the detected state. Similarly, in the "change command (SGH)" of the voice lamp control device 113, the "setting" indicating that the change command (SGH) generation process and transmission process are executed based on the detection of the change button 22b is executed. (See S1713 in FIG. 42 and S1102 in FIG. 36). That is, in FIG. 67, the voice lamp control device 113 detects the pressing operation of the change button 22b, and the change command (SGH) is generated and transmitted based on the pressing operation.

Further, in the "open command (DK)" of the main control device 110 in FIG. 67, in the jackpot process (see FIG. 30) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) executed every 4 milliseconds. , An open command (DK) indicating the opening of the large winning opening 65a indicating the second round is set (see S510 in FIG. 30), and then the voice lamp control device 113 is set at the timing when the next timer interrupt process is executed. It shows the state of being transmitted toward (see S101 in FIG. 26). That is, in FIG. 67, it is determined in the main control device 110 that it is the start timing of the second round, and based on the determination, an open command (DK) indicating the start of the second round is issued to the voice lamp control device 113. It has been sent.

The "main command reception" of the voice lamp control device 113 shows a state in which the release command (DK) is received from the main control device 110 and the received release command (DK) is analyzed. As the processing of the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when this release command (DK) is received, the "display release command (SDK)" is performed based on the reception of the release command (DK) indicating the start of the second round. Indicates a state in which the “setting” indicating that the display release command (SDK) generation process and transmission process have been executed is executed (see S1307 in FIG. 38 and S1102 in FIG. 36).

Further, as the processing of the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the release command (DK) is received, the "music selection" effect is completed based on the reception of the release command (DK), and the "music selection" effect is performed. It shows the state in which the "setting" indicating that the generation process and the transmission process of the decision command (SGK) have been executed by the "decision command (SGK)" based on the end of is executed (S1508 and S1508 in FIG. 40). See S1102 in FIG. 36).

That is, in FIG. 67, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the release command (DK) from the main control device 110, and based on the reception of the release command (DK), the next round (that is, the second round) A display release command (SDK) indicating the start is generated and transmitted, and a determination command (SGK) indicating the end of the "music selection" effect is generated and transmitted.

Then, in the "voice lamp command reception" of the display control device 114, it is shown that the change command (SGH), the display release command (SDK), and the determination command (SGK) are received from the voice lamp control device 113. ing. As the processing of the display control device 114 at the timing when the change command (SGH), the display release command (SDK), and the decision command (SGK) are received, "B" of the "V blank interrupt processing" is being executed. However, the process based on the change command (SGH), the display release command (SDK), and the decision command (SGK) received at the timing of "B" of this "V blank interrupt process" is not executed.

Further, at the timing of "B" of the "V blank interruption process", in the "first frame buffer" indicating the process of the first frame buffer 236b, the drawing process of the 1R effect image related to the "music selection" effect and the music 1 The drawing process of the selected image is being executed. Further, in the "second frame buffer" indicating the processing of the second frame buffer 236c, the display processing of the 1R effect image related to the "music selection" effect drawn at the timing of "A" of the "V blank interruption process" is performed. , The display process of the music 1 selected image is executed.

That is, the timing of "B" of the "V blank interrupt processing" which is the processing performed at the timing when the change command (SGH), the display release command (SDK), and the determination command (SGK) are received from the voice lamp control device 113. Then, the analysis processing of the change command (SGH), the open command for display (SDK), the decision command (SGK), etc. is not performed yet, and the "music" in the selection display recognized by the display control device 114 is music 1. be. Further, at the timing of "B" of the "V blank interrupt processing", the display processing and the drawing processing of the music 1 selection image and the 1R effect image are performed, respectively. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the 1R effect is displayed and the image in which the music 1 is selected and displayed (for example, the image in which the music AAA icon 81a1 is selected and displayed) is displayed.

Subsequently, at the timing of "C" of "V blank interrupt processing" in FIG. 67, the display release command (SDK) and the determination command (SGK) received at the timing of "B" of "V blank interrupt processing". Is being executed. In this process, the display release command (SDK) and the determination command (SGK) received from the voice lamp control device 113 are analyzed, and the "music selection" effect being executed based on the reception of the display release command (SDK) is produced. The display control process is performed to switch to the "music playback" effect, and the value of the display determination music memory 233k is set according to the value of the selected music memory 233j based on the reception of the determination command (SGK) (FIG. 51). (See S2203), a sub display determination command (HGK) is generated based on the value indicated by the display determination music memory 233k (see S2205 in FIG. 51). Then, in the V blank interrupt process of the next frame (that is, the timing of "D" of the "V blank interrupt process"), the sub display determination command (HGK) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. .. On the other hand, at the timing of "C" of "V blank interrupt processing", the processing by the change command (SGH) received at the timing of "B" of "V blank interrupt processing" is configured not to be executed ( See FIG. 51).

That is, when the decision command (SGK) and the change command (SGH) are received between one frame, the process corresponding to the main command, the decision command (SGK), is preferentially executed. Further, the change command (SGH), which is an auxiliary command, is for assisting the decision command (SGK), which is the main command in the staging, and is based on the change command (SGH), which is the auxiliary command. Even if the process is not executed, the effect is established and problems are unlikely to occur. Therefore, when the process corresponding to the decision command (SGK), which is the main command, is executed, the process corresponding to the change command (SGH), which is an auxiliary command, is not performed, and the change command (SGH) is discarded. Configure to do.

Therefore, at the timing of "C" of "V blank interrupt processing", the drawing process is performed at the timing of "B" of "V blank interrupt processing" in the "first frame buffer" indicating the processing of the first frame buffer 236b. The display processing of the selected music 1 selection image and the display processing of the 1R effect image related to the "selection of music" effect are executed. Further, in the "second frame buffer" indicating the processing of the second frame buffer 236c, the 2R effect image is based on the reception of the display release command (SDK) received at the timing of "B" of the "V blank interrupt processing". Is executed, and at the same time, the drawing process of the music 1 reproduction image is executed based on the reception of the determination command (SGK) received at the timing of "B" of the "V blank interrupt process".

That is, at the timing of "C" of "V blank interrupt processing" in FIG. 67, the change command (SGH) received from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing of "B" of "V blank interrupt processing" is for display. The open command (SDK) and the decision command (SGK) are analyzed. Further, at the timing of "C" of the "V blank interruption process", the value of the display determined music memory 233k is set based on the value of the selected music memory 233j based on the reception of the determination command (SGK) (FIG. The effect corresponding to the value of the display determined music memory 233k (that is, the "music reproduction" effect corresponding to the music 1 which is the "music" being selected and displayed) is the next frame (that is, "V"). Recognize that it is displayed at the timing of "D" in "Blank interrupt processing"). Further, at the timing of "C" of the "V blank interrupt process", a sub display determination command (HGK) is generated based on the set value of the display determination music memory 233k (see S2205 in FIG. 51), and the next A sub display determination command (HGK) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 at the frame (that is, the timing of “D” of the “V blank interrupt process”). Further, at the timing of "C" of "V blank interruption processing", while the music 1 selection image and the 1R effect image are displayed, the received display release command (SDK) and decision command (SGK) are displayed. Drawing processing of the music 1 reproduction image and the 2R effect image based on the music is performed. As a result, in the third symbol display device, the 1R effect is displayed and the music 1 selection image is displayed as in the timing of “B” of the “V blank interrupt process”.

Subsequently, at the timing of "D" of "V blank interrupt processing" in FIG. 67, the sub display determination command (HGK) generated at the timing of "C" of "V blank interrupt processing" is the voice lamp control device. It shows the state of being transmitted toward 113. Then, in the "display command reception" of the voice lamp control device 113, the reception process of the sub display determination command (HGK) is executed, and the reception of the sub display determination command (HGK) causes the value of the music selection counter 223g. Based on this, the value of the determined music memory 223h is set (see S1404 in FIG. 39).

Further, at the timing of "D" of the "V blank interrupt process", the reception was received at the timing of "B" of the "V blank interrupt process" in the "first frame buffer" indicating the process of the first frame buffer 236b. Based on the display release command (SDK), the drawing process of the 2R effect image and the drawing process of the music 1 reproduced image are executed. Further, in the "second frame buffer" indicating the processing of the second frame buffer 236c, the display processing of the 2R effect image drawn at the timing of "C" of the "V blank interrupt processing" and the music 1 reproduction image are displayed. Display processing is being executed.

That is, at the timing of "D" of "V blank interrupt processing", the sub display determination command (HGK) generated at the timing of "C" of "V blank interrupt processing" is voiced from the display control device 114. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. Further, at the timing of "D" of the "V blank interrupt processing", the reception processing of the sub display determination command (HGK) is performed in the voice lamp control device 113, and the value of the music selection counter 223g is set based on the reception. The value of the determined music memory 223h is set correspondingly (see S1404 in FIG. 39), and the value of the determined music memory 223h of the voice lamp control device 113 and the value of the display determined music memory 233k of the display control device 114 are synchronized with each other. .. Further, at the timing of "D" of the "V blank interrupt process", the music 1 reproduction image and the 2R effect image are displayed, and the music 1 reproduction image and the 2R effect image are drawn. .. As a result, in the third symbol display device, the display of the 2R effect is started, and the display of the music 1 reproduced image is started.

In this way, the change button 22b is pressed and operated by the player just before the end of the "music selection" effect, and with the end of the "music selection" effect (that is, the first round in the jackpot), the main control device 110 When the release command (DK) is transmitted, each of the above processes is executed in the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, and in the display control device 114, the change command (SGH) accompanying the pressing operation of the change button 22b is performed. Is disabled, and by processing based on the decision command (SGK), the music played by the "music playback" effect recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 and the "music playback" recognized by the display control device 114. It is synchronized with the music played in the production. Further, the display control device 114 is based on the display release command (SDK) and the decision command (SGK) based on the display release command (SDK) and the decision command (SGK) received from the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing process and the display process can be performed, and the display contents corresponding to the display release command (SDK) and the determination command (SGK) can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, the unit processing time (1 millisecond), which is the execution interval of the command output processing (see S1102 in FIG. 36) and the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see S1106 in FIG. 36) in the voice lamp control device 113, is Since it is shorter than the frame rate (33.3 milliseconds) of the display control device 114, it is possible to send a plurality of commands within the time required for the display control device 114 to draw one frame. .. As a result, the number of commands transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 may be enormous.

In particular, the detection of the decision button 22a or the change button 22b can be determined by the unit processing time (that is, 2 milliseconds) of 2 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the decision command and the change command can be determined in one frame, respectively. May be received. In such a situation, for example, if the process based on the change command received in the same frame is executed after the process based on the decision command is executed, the determined content will be changed again, and the effect will be produced. There is a risk of discrepancies in the content. In addition, the processing content indicated by the decision command, which is the main command, may be rewritten by the change command, which is an auxiliary command.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the decision command and the change command are received between one frame, the process corresponding to the decision command, which is the main command, is preferentially executed. In addition, the auxiliary command is for assisting the main command in the production, and it is established as the production without executing the process based on the auxiliary command, and the problem is unlikely to occur. Therefore, the main command is used. When the process corresponding to the decision command which is a command is executed, the process corresponding to the change command which is an auxiliary command of the main command is not performed, and the change command is discarded. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the content of the effect determined by the decision command, which is the main command, from being changed by the change command, which is an auxiliary command, and the content of the effect is inconsistent. It can be prevented from occurring. Further, when the main command is processed in one frame, the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced by not executing the processing of the auxiliary command in the frame.

In addition, by discarding the change command, the process based on the change command may not be executed, which may make the player feel uncomfortable, but it is recognized that the change command is an auxiliary command for the effect. The player is not able to press the change button 22b within the time of the "music selection" effect, while the control based on the change command is not executed. There is no distrust of the pachinko machine 10 based on the above-mentioned discomfort due to the recognition such as "was". Therefore, even if the change command is discarded and the control based on the change command is not performed, the player does not feel distrust of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, even if the change command is discarded when the decision command and the change command are received in duplicate in one frame as in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game is hindered. It is possible to maintain a comfortable playing environment.

Further, the change of the music recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be performed when the sub display change command is received from the display control device 114. Then, when the change command is discarded by the display control device 114, the sub display change command is not transmitted from the display control device 114 based on the discard of the change command. Therefore, when the change command is discarded by the display control device 114, the music recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 is not changed. Therefore, even if the change command is ignored by the display control device 114. , The selected music recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 and the selected music recognized by the display control device 114 can be synchronized so that there is no discrepancy in the production contents. can.

Further, even if the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the decision command and the change command to the display control device 114 in duplicate, the voice lamp control device 113 processes the commands on the display control device 114 side. Since the consistency between the 113 and the display control device 114 can be maintained, the voice lamp control device 113 can transmit the decision command and the change command without considering the frame rate of the display control device 114. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the creation of a program at the time of development of the voice lamp control device 113.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the decision button 22a is pressed by the player during the button operation valid period during the "music selection" effect, the voice lamp control device. It is configured to send a decision command from 113 to the display control device 114, and is also displayed from the voice lamp control device 113 at the end of the "music selection" effect, that is, at the start of the second round of the "15R jackpot". It is configured to send a decision command to the control device 114.

Conventionally, in the "music selection" effect in which the player can select a favorite music by his / her own will, when the player operates the change button 22b within the button operation valid period, the third symbol display device 81 The music selected in the executed "music selection" effect can be changed, and when the player operates the decision button 22a within the valid period of the button operation, the third symbol display device 81 executes the operation. It is configured so that the subsequent "music reproduction" effect is executed by the music selected and displayed in the "music selection" effect.

Specifically, the voice lamp control device 113 detects the pressing of the decision button 22a or the change button 22b, and when the pressing operation of the decision button 22a or the change button 22b is detected, the voice lamp control device 113 controls the display. It is configured to send a decision command or a change command to the device 114. Then, when the display control device 114 receives the decision command or the change command from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 determines that the decision button 22a or the change button 22b has been pressed, and executes the display control device 114 on the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to determine or change the production content of the "music selection" effect inside.

That is, the display control device 114 is configured to perform display control based on an instruction (command) from the voice lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114 is a change command from the voice lamp control device 113. Based on the reception, it is configured to recognize the change of the music being selected and displayed in the "music selection" effect. Further, the display control device 114 recognizes the determination of the music being selected and displayed in the "music selection" effect based on the reception of the determination command from the voice lamp control device 113, and "plays the music" based on the determination. It is configured to recognize the start of execution of the effect.

In the pachinko machine configured in this way, if the display control device 114 cannot receive the determination command due to some abnormality (for example, a command missing abnormality), the display control device 114 determines the music in the "music selection" effect. Even in a situation where the end of the "music selection" production cannot be recognized and the "music selection" production must be ended (for example, at the end of the button operation valid period during the "music selection" production). The "music selection" effect may be continuously displayed, and the execution of the "music reproduction" effect that should be originally executed may not be started. In particular, when the button operation valid period ends, the pressing operation of the enter button 22a or the change button 22b is not determined to be valid, and a situation occurs in which it is not possible to make a change or make a decision from the display screen during the selection display. There is a risk.

Therefore, at the end of the "music selection" effect, it is conceivable to forcibly determine the execution of the "music reproduction" effect by the music being selected and displayed in the "music selection" effect. That is, even if the player does not press the decision button 22a in the "music selection" effect, the music selected and displayed in the "music selection" effect at the timing when the "music selection" effect ends. Is configured to be determined as a song to be executed in the subsequent "music playback" production without exception. Specifically, in the "music selection" effect, when the player does not press the determination button 22a and the determination command is not transmitted to the display control device 114, the music is played at the end of the "music selection" effect. It is configured to transmit a command indicating that the decision has been made (for example, a decision command output when the decision button 22a is pressed). With this configuration, when the "music selection" effect is executed, the music decision instruction (decision command) can be transmitted to the display control device 114, so that the decision instruction is given in the "music selection" effect. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the "music selection" effect is continuously displayed without being output.

However, at the end of the "music selection" effect, whether or not the player presses the decision button 22a during the "music selection" effect, that is, is displayed from the voice lamp control device 113 during the "music selection" effect. It is determined whether or not the decision command has been sent to the control device 114, and as a result of the determination, if the decision command has already been sent, the decision command is not sent again, and only if the decision command has not been sent, the decision command is issued. If the voice lamp control device 113 mistakenly recognizes that the decision command has been transmitted due to some abnormality (for example, noise) when the control such as transmission is performed, the voice lamp control device 113 uses the display control device 114. Since the decision command cannot be transmitted to the display control device 114, the display control device 114 cannot recognize the end trigger of the "music selection" effect and cannot determine the execution trigger of the "music playback" effect because the decision command cannot be received. , There is a risk that the "tune selection" effect will be displayed continuously. Further, when the process of determining whether or not the decision command has been transmitted is executed at the end of the "music selection" effect, another control process is being executed at the end of the "music selection" effect. Therefore, the processing may be complicated.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the decision command is transmitted during the "music selection" production at the end of the "music selection" production, that is, at the start of the second round, the music Configure to send a decision command to indicate the decision. With this configuration, at the end of the "music selection" effect, it is possible to reliably instruct the display control device 114 to determine the music, and by not receiving the determination command, the "music selection" is performed. It is possible to reliably prevent the continuous display of the "music selection" effect from occurring despite the end of the effect.

In addition, since it is not necessary to perform the determination process of whether or not the decision command has been transmitted at the end of the "music selection" effect, the process at the end of the "music selection" effect is simplified and the control load is reduced. can do.

In this case, when the decision button 22a is pressed by the player during the "music selection" effect, the decision command based on the pressed operation and the decision command based on the end of the "music selection" effect are displayed in duplicate. It is transmitted to the control device 114. In such a configuration, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that when the display control device 114 performs processing based on the earlier determination command, the processing based on the later determination command is not executed.

Specifically, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 sets the determined flag 233m indicating that the determination command has been received to ON when the determination command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and the determination has been completed. When the decision command (or change command) is received again with the flag 233m turned on, the process of determining the content of the selected effect being displayed (see S2202 to S2210 in FIG. 51) is skipped and executed. It is configured not to. That is, if the decision command (the first decision command) has been received even once in the predetermined selection effect, the decision command (later decision command) or the change command is received again until the selection effect ends. Even if it is done, it is configured not to execute the process based on the re-decision command (later decision command) or the change command.

With this configuration, the display control device 114 has already been determined when the previous determination command is received, even if the determination command is duplicated from the voice lamp control device 113 during the predetermined selection effect period. By setting the flag 233m and preventing the processing based on the later decision command from being executed, it is possible to prevent duplicate processing from being executed on the display control device 114 side and reduce the processing load of the display control device 114. be able to.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even when the display control device 114, which is the control device on the downstream side, receives the decision command in duplicate, the control based on one of the decision commands is executed while executing the control. By discarding the other decision command and configuring it so as not to execute the control based on the other decision command so that appropriate processing can be executed, the voice lamp control device 113 which is the upstream control device can be used. Since it is not necessary to execute complicated processing such as whether or not the determination command has been output, it is possible to facilitate the creation of a program at the time of development of each of the control devices 113 and 114.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the display control device 114 receives the determination command during the predetermined selection effect period, the display control device 114 is configured not to execute the process based on the subsequent change command. The command received by the display control device 114 from the voice lamp control device 113 is performed by the third symbol display device 81, such as a display variation pattern command indicating the execution of the variation effect and a determination command indicating the player's decision. Auxiliary to the production performed by the third symbol display device 81, such as the main (highly important) command for the production, the confirmation command for display, and the change command indicating that the player's intention is temporarily changed. It can be divided into various (less important) commands. Therefore, when the process corresponding to the decision command which is the main command is executed, the process corresponding to the change command which is an auxiliary command of the main command is not performed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the content of the effect determined by the decision command, which is the main command, from being changed by the change command, which is an auxiliary command, and the content of the effect is inconsistent. It can be prevented from occurring.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display control device 114 is changed from the voice lamp control device 113 to a decision command while displaying (drawing) one frame (that is, 33.3 milliseconds). When each command is received, the control by the decision command is prioritized (see S2202 in FIG. 51), the received change command is cleared (discarded) (see S2207 in FIG. 51), and the change command is used. It is configured not to execute display control.

Conventionally, in the development of a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a display device mounted on the machine (in the present embodiment, a third symbol display device whose display is controlled by the display control device 114) in consideration of the development budget and application (drawing accuracy). The number of frames to be processed per unit time (for example, 1 second) of the moving image displayed in 81) is configured to be different. Specifically, in the case of a gaming machine with a small development budget, or a gaming machine that uses a video with little movement or a video that does not require smoothness of display, a display device that is displayed and controlled (drawn) at a low frame rate. Is used. On the other hand, in the case of a gaming machine that uses a moving image with a large development budget and a moving image or a moving image that requires smoothness of display, a display device that is displayed and controlled (drawn) at a high frame rate is used. Therefore, the frame rate related to the display control of the display device is different for each model, and the time (unit processing time) required for the control of the display device is also different.

On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 for determining the display content of the third symbol display device 81 whose display is controlled by the display control device 114 is common among different models in consideration of cost and development efficiency. Therefore, although the frame rate (unit processing time) of the display control device 114 differs depending on the model, the unit processing time of the voice lamp control device 113 is common, so that the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is used. When the display control device 114 processes the above, a problem may occur.

Specifically, for example, in the case of the display control device 114 in which the display is controlled (drawn) at a low frame rate (20 fps), one frame is drawn in units of 50 milliseconds, so that the sound is produced within the 50 milliseconds. It is configured to collectively process commands received from the lamp control device 113 and control display such as drawing in units of 50 milliseconds based on the commands. Therefore, the display control device 114 having a low frame rate receives more commands from the voice lamp control device 113 while drawing one frame than the display control device 114 having a high frame rate (for example, 50 fps). In some cases. Therefore, the lower the frame rate of the display control device 114, the greater the processing load may be when commands are concentrated between one frame.

Further, as described above, the unit processing time (1 millisecond) which is the execution interval of the command output processing (see S1102 in FIG. 36) and the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see S1106 in FIG. 36) in the voice lamp control device 113. ) Is shorter than the frame rate of the display control device 114 (for example, 33.3 milliseconds), so that it is possible to send a plurality of commands within the time required for the display control device 114 to draw one frame. It is configured. As a result, the number of commands transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 may be enormous.

In particular, the detection of the decision button 22a or the change button 22b can be determined by the unit processing time (that is, 2 milliseconds) of 2 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the decision command and the change command can be determined in one frame, respectively. May be received. In such a situation, for example, if the process based on the change command received in the same frame is executed after the process based on the decision command is executed, the determined content will be changed again, and the effect will be produced. There is a risk of discrepancies in the content. In addition, the processing content indicated by the decision command, which is the main command, may be rewritten by the change command, which is an auxiliary command.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the decision command and the change command are received between one frame, the process corresponding to the decision command, which is the main command, is preferentially executed. Further, the auxiliary command is for assisting the main command in the effect, and the effect is established without executing the process based on the auxiliary command, and the problem is unlikely to occur. Therefore, when the process corresponding to the decision command which is the main command is executed, the process corresponding to the change command which is an auxiliary command is not performed, and the change command is discarded. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the content of the effect determined by the decision command, which is the main command, from being changed by the change command, which is an auxiliary command, and the content of the effect is inconsistent. It can be prevented from occurring. Further, when the main command is processed in one frame, the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced by not executing the processing of the auxiliary command in the frame.

Further, the change of the music recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be performed when the sub display change command is received from the display control device 114. Then, when the change command is discarded by the display control device 114, the sub display change command is not transmitted from the display control device 114 based on the discard of the change command. Therefore, when the change command is discarded by the display control device 114, the music recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 is not changed. Therefore, even if the change command is ignored by the display control device 114. , The music in the selection display recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 and the music in the selection display recognized by the display control device 114 can be synchronized so that there is no discrepancy in the production contents. be able to.

Further, even if the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the decision command and the change command to the display control device 114 in duplicate, the voice lamp control device 113 processes the commands on the display control device 114 side. Since the consistency between the 113 and the display control device 114 can be maintained, the voice lamp control device 113 can transmit the decision command and the change command without considering the frame rate of the display control device 114. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the creation of a program at the time of development of the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the selection status of the music recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 and the selection status of the music recognized by the display control device 114 deviate from each other due to the influence of noise or the like. If this happens, the selection status of the music recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 is preferentially adopted. With this configuration, the processing content of the voice lamp control device 113, which is the upper control device, is prioritized, and the display control device 114, which is the lower control device, is the voice lamp control device 113 on the upper side. It is possible to clarify the position of the device as being controlled based on instructions and facilitate the creation of programs at the time of development.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the image selected in the lottery for the "promotion during the round" effect and the music stored in the determined music memory 223h are determined, and the "music reproduction" being executed is performed. When the content of the effect and the character image of the selected "promotion during the round" effect do not match, the character image of the selected "promotion during the round" effect is changed. That is, when the MPU221 executes the "promotion during the round" effect in the jackpot, the MPU221 extracts the reproduced music data corresponding to the "music reproduction" effect stored in the determined music memory 223h, and extracts the reproduced music data and the "reproduced music data". It is configured to determine whether or not the character image used in the "promotion during round" effect matches (see S1604 in FIG. 41).

Then, in the present embodiment, if the reproduced music data and the character image used in the "promotion during the round" effect match as a result of the above determination, the character image is displayed as it is, while the reproduced music data and the "reproduced music data" are displayed. If the character image used in the "promotion during round" effect does not match, the character image used in the "promotion during round" effect is configured to be changed to an all-cast image.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the "music selection" effect at the time of a big hit, one "music reproduction" effect can be selected from a plurality of "music reproduction" effects according to the player's intention. As a result, the player can have the player perform the production with his / her favorite music and favorite character image in the jackpot production, and give an added value different from the jackpot game value in the jackpot production to enhance the interest of the game. It is configured as follows. Further, as described above, also in the "promotion during the round" production, the character image appearing in any of the "music reproduction" productions is used to notify that the game value is increased, and the character is based on a lottery. By letting you select an image, you can give variation to the production and it is configured so that the game does not become monotonous.

However, in order to give variation to the production in the "promotion during the round" production, if a character image for the "promotion during the round" production is prepared so as to correspond to each of the multiple "music playback" productions, the "promotion during the round" production is performed. The number of character images related to the production increases, the development manpower related to image creation increases, and the development cost increases. At the same time, the character images for the types of the "music playback" production must be stored, and the ROM capacity is tight. There is a risk that it will end up. Therefore, regarding the "promotion during the round" production, which is executed less frequently than the "music playback" production, the character images used in the "promotion during the round" production are composed of fewer types than the types of the "music playback" production, and the development man-hours are reduced. It prevents the reduction and the increase of the ROM capacity.

On the other hand, since the lottery of the character image displayed in the "promotion during the round" effect is performed without considering the "music reproduction" effect selected by the player, the character image appearing in the "music reproduction" effect is used. , There may be a discrepancy with the character image that appears in the "promotion during round" production. In a situation where the player selects his / her favorite music and character image by his / her own will, the “promotion during round” effect is executed with a character image different from the favorite character image, and the effect content is You may feel a sense of discomfort. Then, there is a possibility that the player may feel a sense of loss that he / she wants the “promotion during the round” effect to be executed (blessed) by the favorite character image selected by himself / herself or the image related to the character image.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the character image selected in the "promotion during round" effect matches the character image appearing in the music currently being played and displayed in the "music playback" effect, and if they match, it is determined. Performs the "promotion during the round" effect by the selected character image as it is, while if they do not match, changes the selected character image to an all-cast image and executes the "promotion during the round" effect. It is configured as follows. The all-cast image is an image in which all the character images appearing in each "music reproduction" production appear, and at least the character images appearing in the "music reproduction" production currently being reproduced are partially displayed. Therefore, in the "promotion during round" production in the situation where the player selects his / her favorite music and character image by his / her own will, the favorite character image or the all-cast image including the favorite character as a part is displayed. By appearing, you will not feel any discomfort regarding the content of the production. As a result, the "promotion during the round" effect is executed by an image containing at least a part of the favorite character image selected by oneself, so that a further entertainment different from the one in which the game value increases can be obtained.

In addition, the all-cast image is a limited production with a low selection rate (20%, see Fig. 19) in the "promotion during round" production, and is a rare production, so it is rare for a player. It's not a production that you see. Therefore, it is positioned as a production in which the player can feel a certain premier feeling (profitable feeling) only by the appearance of the all-cast image.

Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the character image selected in the "promotion during the round" effect while the player has selected a favorite music and character image by his / her own will Currently, when the character image that appears in the music being played and displayed does not match in the "music playback" effect, the selected character image is changed to an all-cast image and the "promotion during round" effect is executed. ing. That is, when the player selects the music and the character image by his / her own intention in the "music selection" production, the player selects the character image in the lottery of the character image in the "promotion during round" production. When a character image different from the character image is extracted, the extracted character image is changed to an all-cast image.

Therefore, when the player selects the music and the character image by his / her own will, and the character image that does not match the character image is selected in the "promotion during round" effect, the all-cast image is displayed. Can be done. Therefore, in a situation where the player selects his / her favorite music and character image by his / her own will, the appearance ratio of the rare all-cast image is increased (that is, the selection ratio of other character images (40%)). + All-cast image selection ratio (20%) = All-cast image appearance ratio (60%), so it is more likely that the player selects the music and character images on his own initiative. Can be set high. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a premier feeling (profitable feeling) that the all-cast image is easier to appear if the player selects the music and the character image by his / her own will, and the player has the game value. You can get a further interest that is different from the rising interest. In addition, it is easier for the player to select the music and the character image by his / her own will to make it easier to display the rare all-cast image, thereby encouraging the player to select the music and the character image by his / her own will. This makes it possible to increase the execution rate (participation rate) of the player's pressing operation in the "music selection" effect.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, only when the player selects the music and the character image by his / her own will, the character image selected in the “promotion during round” production and the currently “music reproduction” are performed. In the production, it is configured to determine whether or not the character image appearing in the music being reproduced and displayed matches. In the present embodiment, even when the player does not perform the selection operation, when the selection valid time of the "music selection" effect has elapsed, the music and the character displayed as the selection target in the "music selection" effect. The image is configured to be selected as a "musical piece playback" effect. Since the music and character images selected in this way are selected without the player performing the selection operation, it is highly probable that the "music playback" effect is decided without reflecting the player's intention ( Except during "Renso").

Therefore, if the music and character images are determined without reflecting the player's intention, it is assumed that the "music playback" effect and the character image appearing in the "promotion during round" effect are different. However, the player does not feel uncomfortable, and does not feel the loss that he wanted the "promotion during the round" production to be performed (blessed) by the favorite character image selected by himself. Therefore, if the player does not voluntarily select the "music playback" effect, it is not necessary to determine the match between the character image of the "music reproduction" effect and the character image of the "promotion during the round" effect. In addition to reducing the control burden, the lottery results in the original "promotion during the round" production are executed as they are, and the randomness of the "promotion during the round" production is maintained, and there are abundant variations in the production ("music playback". The number of productions x the number of productions for "promotion during the round") can be used to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the pattern of the "promotion during the round" effect is set to be less than the number of songs (5 songs in the present embodiment) (3 patterns in the present embodiment). By performing the above control, it is possible to make the player play the game without making the player feel uncomfortable even when the "promotion during the round" effect is executed with a number of character images smaller than the number of the "music play" effect. Therefore, the number of images for the "promotion during the round" effect can be restricted, and the development manpower and the ROM capacity can be reduced.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a small number (types) of "promotion during round" production is prepared compared to the number of "music reproduction" production, and the "promotion during round" production is executed. Has been done. In addition, in the "promotion during the round" production, the character 1 image corresponding to the character 1 of the "music AAA", the character 2 image corresponding to the character 2 of the "music BBB", and the all cast in which all the characters 1 to 5 appear. Images are available. Therefore, when the "promotion during the round" effect is executed and the player has selected "music AAA" or "music BBB" by his / her own will, the lottery result for the "promotion during the round" effect. When the same character image as the running "music playback" effect is selected, if the character image of the selected "music playback" effect and the "promotion during round" effect match, it will be the player's preference. It is possible to perform a suitable production. Therefore, it is easy for the player to select "music AAA", which is a music corresponding to the character 1 image, or "music BBB", which is a music corresponding to the character 2 image, which is likely to appear in the "promotion during the round" production. In addition, by composing with characters that are popular with players, it is easy to match the contents of the "music playback" production and the "promotion during the round" production, and the production that suits the player's taste is executed to play the game. Can enhance the interest of.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the case of the "renso", the intention selection by the same player is clearly shown even when the decision button 22a is pressed at the time of a big hit. It is considered that the change button 22b is pressed, and the intention selection flag 223i is set to ON regardless of whether or not the change button 22b is pressed. Then, it is configured to confirm whether the intention selection flag 223i is on or off in the "promotion during round" effect during the jackpot, and to select a character image to appear in the "promotion during round" effect. Therefore, the character image that appears in the "music playback" production and the character image that appears in the "promotion during the round" production are related to maintain the uniformity of the production balance in the entire jackpot, and the player can use it. You can enjoy the jackpot production without any discomfort.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if the jackpot "renso" state continues and the number of songs that can be selected in the "music selection" effect is changed (increased), the previous jackpot The music selected at that time is configured to be displayed in the selected display state in the "music selection" effect at the time of the next big hit. That is, regarding the updatable range of the selected music memory 233j, even if the updatable range of the selected music memory 233j is changed (increased) due to the continuation of the "renso" state, it is selected (set) at the time of the previous jackpot. ) Is configured to retain the value that was. Specifically, when the updatable range of the selected music memory 233j is changed, the updatable range is changed in the direction of increasing, and the previous updatable range is configured to always exist in the updatable range this time. ing. That is, even when the value selected in the selected music memory 233j is changed from the previous updatable range to the current updatable range, it is configured to exist together.

With this configuration, if the player wants to continuously hear (see) the "music playback" effect selected at the time of the previous jackpot even at this jackpot, the enter button 22b is not operated. The "music reproduction" effect can be selected only by pressing 22a. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that suits the player's taste by a simple operation (one pressing operation of the decision button 22a) without causing the player to perform a complicated operation.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and it is easy that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred from. For example, the numerical values given in the above embodiment are examples, and it is naturally possible to adopt other numerical values.

In addition, it is naturally possible to combine and configure each configuration of the above embodiment with respect to any configuration of the modification shown below. Further, it is naturally possible to combine each configuration of the other one or a plurality of modifications with respect to the configuration of any of the modifications shown below. In these cases, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Modification 1>
In the above embodiment, when a plurality of determination commands are received in the display control device 114 during one selection effect (for example, "music selection" effect), the determined flag 233m is set based on the reception of the previous determination command. If it is set to ON and the determined flag 233m is turned on when the subsequent decision command is received, control such as setting of the additional data table 232a2 based on the subsequent decision command and generation of the sub display decision command. It was configured not to perform any processing. On the other hand, when the determined flag 233m is turned on based on the reception of the earlier determination command, the additional data table 232a2 is set based on the later determination command, but the additional data table 232a2 and the like are not referred to. It may be configured to perform control. With this configuration, control processing such as reception of decision commands is standardized, and whether or not to refer to the additional data table 232a2, which is the terminal processing of whether or not to display on the third symbol display device 81. The display mode on the third symbol display device 81 can be adjusted.

<Modification 2>
In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the player's pressing operation on the decision button 22a or the change button 22b, the decision command or the change command is transmitted to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 does not. While updating the contents of the data (selected music memory 233j or display determination music memory 233k) based on the received determination command or change command, the sub display determination command or sub display change command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Then, in the voice lamp control device 113, the contents of the music selection counter 223g or the determined music memory 223h are updated by receiving the sub display determination command or the sub display change command, and so-called feedback control is performed. , The contents of the "music selection" effect or the "music reproduction" effect recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured to be synchronized.

In such a case, due to the influence of noise or the like, the "music selection" effect or "music reproduction" effect recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 is the "music selection" effect or "music selection" effect recognized by the display control device 114. If it deviates from the "music reproduction" effect, complicated processing such as once initializing the stored contents of the "music selection" effect or the "music reproduction" effect becomes necessary.

On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 recognizes the content of the "music selection" effect or the "music reproduction" effect, and displays the content of the "music selection" effect or the "music reproduction" effect based on the content of the display control device 114. Configure to send commands to. Further, the display control device 114 executes only the display control based on the received command by receiving the above command from the voice lamp control device 113, and manages the data related to the "music selection" effect or the "music reproduction" effect. Configure not to. With this configuration, the display control device 114 only needs to execute display control based on an instruction (command) from the voice lamp control device 113, and manages a "music selection" effect or a "music reproduction" effect. No control is required to do this. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 also eliminates the need for receiving and processing commands related to the "music selection" effect or the "music reproduction" effect from the display control device 114. Further, due to the influence of noise and the like, the content of the "music selection" effect or "music reproduction" effect recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 and the "music selection" effect or "music" recognized by the display control device 114. Even if the content of the "playback" effect deviates, when the press operation of the decision button 22a or the change button 22b is detected, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a decision command or a change command, and the display control device 114 recognizes it. The content of the "music selection" effect or the "music reproduction" effect can be modified to match the content of the "music selection" effect or the "music reproduction" effect recognized by the voice lamp control device 113.

<Modification 3>
In the above embodiment, in the case of receiving a plurality of determination commands in the "music selection" effect, the determined flag 233m is set to on based on the previously received determination command, and the "music selection" is performed. Until the production is completed, the determined flag 233m is continuously turned on, and if a later decision command is received while the determined flag 233m is turned on, the control based on the subsequent decision command is not executed. It was composed of. On the other hand, when a plurality of decision commands are received, the control based on the previous decision command is temporarily waited, and after waiting for a predetermined period, the presence or absence of the received command is determined, and the later decision command is received. Is received, the control based on the earlier decision command may not be executed, but the control based on the later decision command may be executed. With this configuration, control based on the latest command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 can be executed, so that the display control device 114 controls in synchronization with the latest control content of the voice lamp control device 113. Can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the discrepancy in the production contents recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 from occurring, and to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not feel distrust.

<Modification example 4>
In the above embodiment, in the "music selection" effect executed when the "first time" jackpot is won, the intention selection flag 223i is set to be on only when the change button 22b is operated, and the change button 22b is operated. If the decision button 22a is operated without being performed, the intention selection flag 223i is not turned on, and the "music reproduction" effect is based on the player's intention as a judgment at the time of image selection of the "promotion during round" effect. It was judged that it was not selected. On the other hand, even in the "music selection" effect in the "first time" jackpot, when the decision button 22a is operated without operating the change button 22b, the intention selection flag 223i is set to on and "during the round". At the time of image selection of the "promotion" effect, the control may be performed on the premise that the "music reproduction" effect is selected based on the player's intention. In the "music selection" effect in the "first time" jackpot, if the music selected and displayed in the initial setting state matches the taste of the player, the player does not press the change button 22b and presses the enter button. It is assumed that 22a is pressed. Therefore, by configuring in this way, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect based on the player's intention in the "music reproduction" effect and the "promotion during the round" effect, which may make the player feel uncomfortable. It is possible to provide no comfortable game. Regarding the on setting of the intention selection flag 223i, when some game intention by the player is detected (for example, when the operation handle 51 is operated, when the ball pulling lever 52 is operated, etc.), the game intention It may be configured to set the intention selection flag 223i on by assuming that there is.

<Modification 5>
In the above embodiment, when the display control device 114 receives both the decision command, which is a main command related to the "music selection" effect, and the change command, which is an auxiliary command, in one frame. It was configured to discard the change command, which is an auxiliary command, and execute only the control based on the decision command, which is the main command. On the other hand, in other effects as well, when the main command and the auxiliary command related to the effect are received together in one frame, the auxiliary command is discarded and the control based on the main command is performed. May be configured to run only.

The "main commands related to the effect" are commands that are indispensable for executing each effect. Specifically, for example, an opening command indicating the start of the jackpot effect and an execution time of the variable effect are indicated. Examples include a variation pattern command, a stop type command indicating the result of the variation effect, a determination command indicating that the player's intention has been determined in the "music selection" effect, an error command indicating an abnormal state in each effect, and the like. ..

Further, the "auxiliary command related to the effect" is a command that is not always necessary to execute each effect, that is, a command that enables the execution of each effect even if the auxiliary command is not present. Specifically, for example, a confirmation command for instructing the end of the variation effect, a hold ball number command when the number of reserved balls for the variation effect is alternately notified by the first symbol display device 37, or ". An example is a change command or the like indicating that the player's intention is changed in the "music selection" effect.

<Modification 6>
In the above embodiment, the "music selection" effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, a device other than the third symbol display device 81, for example, a mechanical rotation display device (so-called drum display device), an LED display, a movable accessory, or the like is used to execute the "music selection" effect. It may be configured as.

<Modification 7>
Further, in the above embodiment, the enter button 22a or the change button 22b is pressed by the player while the "music selection" effect is being executed on the third symbol display device 81 while the "music selection" effect is being executed. It was configured to change the content of the "music selection" effect when operated. On the other hand, a so-called touch panel input type display device may be used so that the "music selection" effect and the player's input operation can be executed by one device.

<Modification 8>
In the above embodiment, the selection target of the "music selection" effect recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 or the reproduced music in the "music reproduction" effect and the selection of the "music selection" effect recognized by the display control device 114. If the target or the reproduced music in the "music reproduction" effect does not match, an error command or the like is sent to initialize the stored contents related to each other's selection target or the reproduced music (for example, "0" clear, etc.). It was configured to synchronize again. On the other hand, even if the selection target or the reproduced music recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 do not match, the selection target stored in one of the control devices 113, 114 Or, if the reproduced music has an obvious abnormal value, only the control devices 113 and 114 that store the abnormal value are initialized, and then the selection target stored in the control devices 114 and 113 that seems to be normal. Alternatively, it may be configured to update the stored contents related to the reproduced music. With this configuration, even if the selection target or the reproduced music recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are different, they can be synchronized with each other without being initialized. It becomes.

<Modification 9>
In the above embodiment, when the number of songs that can be selected in the "music selection" effect is increased by the jackpot "renso", a music selection display data table 232a1 that reflects each increase is prepared in advance in the "renso". Based on this, when increasing the number of songs in the "music selection" effect, the display data table 232a1 for music selection corresponding to the increase is set, and the "music selection" effect in which the number of songs is increased is configured to be executed. rice field. On the other hand, when the increase in the number of songs in the "music selection" effect is specified in the additional data table 232a2 and the number of songs is increased based on the "renso", the basic 1 music selection display data table 232a1 is used. On the other hand, an additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the increase may be set to execute the "music selection" effect in which the number of music is increased. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a "music selection" effect by preparing an additional data table 232a2 when the number of songs increases with respect to the display data table 232a1 which is the basis of 1. Various "music selection" effects can be executed with various controls.

<Modification 10>
In the above embodiment, when the display control device 114 receives both the decision command, which is a main command related to the "music selection" effect, and the change command, which is an auxiliary command, in one frame. It was configured to discard the change command, which is an auxiliary command, and execute only the control based on the decision command, which is the main command. On the other hand, when both the decision command, which is the main command related to the "music selection" effect, and the change command, which is the auxiliary command, are received in one frame, the change is an auxiliary command. After executing the control based on the command, the control based on the decision command which is the main command may be executed. With this configuration, all commands received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be appropriately processed by the display control device 114, and appropriate control based on the instruction from the voice lamp control device 113 can be executed. Can be done.

<Modification 11>
In the above embodiment, when the display control device 114 receives both the decision command and the change command related to the "music selection" effect in one frame, the change command is discarded and only the control based on the decision command is performed. It was configured to run. On the other hand, when a plurality of decision commands are received in one frame, only the control based on one of the decision commands is executed, the other decision commands are discarded, and the other decision commands are used. It may be configured so that control is not executed. Specifically, it is configured so that the process based on the previously received decision command is executed, but the process based on the subsequent received decision command is not executed. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to execute duplicate control based on the same command, so that the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

Further, when a plurality of change commands are received in one frame, only the control based on one of the change commands is executed, the other change commands are discarded, and the control based on the other change commands is performed. It may be configured not to be executed. Specifically, it is configured so that the process based on the change command received earlier is executed, but the process based on the change command received after that is not executed. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to execute duplicate control based on the same command, so that the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

<Modification 12>
In the above embodiment, when the display control device 114 receives both the decision command and the change command related to the "music selection" effect in one frame, the change command is discarded and only the control based on the decision command is performed. It was configured to run. On the other hand, when both the decision command and the change command related to the "music selection" effect are received in one frame, the control based on the change command is reserved and the control based on the decision command is performed. It may be configured to run. By reserving the control based on the change command, it is not necessary to execute the control based on the change command at that time, so that the processing load of the display control device 114 at the time of receiving the decision command can be reduced.

Note that "reserving the execution of control based on the change command" means that the execution of control based on the change command is suspended (deferred or suspended) for a predetermined period, the control based on the change command is not executed, or the change is performed. An example is the case where control based on a command is interrupted or stopped.

<Modification 13>
In the above embodiment, in the "music selection" effect, when the change button 22b is pressed by the player, the selection target in the selection display is changed to another selection target. On the other hand, when changing the selection target, the selection target in the selection display may be changed by using the cross key button or the joystick type operation lever. With such a configuration, the selection target can be selected while moving forward or backward, and the operability of the player in the "music selection" effect can be improved.

<Modification 14>
In the above embodiment, as control commands during the jackpot, an opening command indicating that the jackpot is started, an opening command indicating that the jackpot 65a is opened, and a jackpot command indicating that the jackpot 65a is opened are performed from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. It was configured to notify and control the game state in the jackpot by transmitting a jackpot command indicating the winning of the ball to the winning slot 65a and an ending command indicating the end of the jackpot. On the other hand, in addition to the above command, a closing command indicating the closure of the big winning opening 65a, a round number command indicating the number of rounds, or the like may be used to notify a more detailed game state at the time of a big hit. good.

<Modification 15>
In the above embodiment, when the player presses the decision button 22a in the "music selection" effect, the selected and displayed music is determined as the "music playback" effect, and subsequent changes are impossible. rice field. On the other hand, even when the decision button 22a is pressed in the "music selection" effect, the determined content can be canceled by providing a cancel command or the like, and the music can be returned to the selectable state again. It may be configured as follows. Similarly, even during the execution of the "music reproduction" effect, the music may be configured to be modifiable.

<Modification 16>
In the above embodiment, when the display control device 114 receives the decision command which is the main command in the "music selection" effect, the change command which is an auxiliary command in the "music selection" effect is invalidated thereafter. It was configured to be. On the other hand, in the "music selection" effect, when the display control device 114 receives the decision command which is the main command, the display control device 114 is different from the "music selection" effect (for example, "big hit display"). ) May be configured to invalidate ancillary commands (eg, grand prize commands). By configuring in this way, while giving priority to display control based on the main command being executed, it is not necessary to perform display control related to auxiliary commands in the production unrelated to the effect being executed. Has the effect that it is possible to prevent the content of the effect being executed from being changed by an irrelevant auxiliary command, and it is possible to prevent the content of the effect from being inconsistent. As a method of generating a cancel command, a continuous pressing operation of the decision button 22a or the change button 22b, a simultaneous pressing operation of the decision button 22a and the change button 22b, a long press operation of the decision button 22a or the change button 22b, etc. are performed. If it is, it is considered that the player has an intention to cancel, and a cancel command is generated.

<Modification 17>
In the above embodiment, when the display control device 114 determines whether or not the decision command, which is the main command in the "music selection" effect, has been received from the voice lamp control device 113, and the decision command has been received. When a change command, which is an auxiliary command, is received in the subsequent "music selection" effect, the control based on the change command is not executed (disabled). On the other hand, when the display data table 232a1 is set based on the main command in the effect of 1, it is determined whether or not the received command is a command corresponding to the effect based on the display data table 232a1. If the command does not correspond to the effect based on the display data table 232a1, the control based on the command may not be executed. Specifically, for example, in a situation where a command related to a variation effect, that is, a display variation pattern command or a display stop type command is received and the variation effect is executed, a big hit before receiving the display confirmation command. The case where a command related to the above, that is, a display opening command, a display ending command, and a display open command is received is exemplified. On the contrary, in a situation where a command related to a jackpot, that is, a display opening command or a display opening command is received and a jackpot-related effect is being executed, a command related to a variable effect is performed before the display ending command is received. That is, the case where a display variation pattern command or a display stop type command is received is exemplified. In such a case, by configuring the command received later to be discarded, it is possible to prevent the display of the effect unrelated to the effect specified based on the command 1 from being displayed, based on the command 1. It is possible to prevent the specified effect from being additionally changed by an effect not related to the effect, and it is possible to prevent a discrepancy in the content of the effect from occurring.

Further, when another command is received within a predetermined period (for example, while the effect of 1 is being executed), the effect based on the command having high importance to the game may be preferentially executed. Specifically, for example, a command related to fluctuation production, an opening command or an opening command indicating the execution of "big hit display", or a command related to error display are highly important for the game, while a demo command related to demo display and a big hit time. The big winning command indicating the number of winning balls is less important for the game than the above important command. Therefore, when a plurality of commands are received within a predetermined period, the command important to the game is preferentially executed, and the control based on the command less important to the game than the important command is restricted (for example, invalidation). By doing so, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect in executing the game.

<Modification 18>
In the above embodiment, in the "music selection" production that determines the content of the "music playback" effect at the time of a big hit, a determination command is transmitted at a plurality of timings, and a determination button 22a or a change button is used according to the intention of the player. It was configured to determine the content of the "promotion during the round" effect based on the selection of 22b. On the other hand, a selection effect other than the "music selection" effect, for example, a selection effect of a reach effect pattern at the time of "reach display", a mode selection effect executed in the background of a variable effect, or a resident character, etc. The selection effect may be configured to perform the same control as that of the present embodiment.

<Modification 19>
In the above embodiment, the display control device 114 indicates that the music has been selected when the determination command from the voice lamp control device 113 is received at the start of the second round in the “music selection” effect. It was configured to immediately start the "music playback" production without executing. On the other hand, when the decision command is output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 at the timing when the "music selection" effect ends, the display control device 114 waits for the execution of the "music playback" effect. At the same time, the "music selection" effect is extended, the music determination display is executed for a predetermined time in the extended "music selection" effect, and then the "music playback" effect based on the music determination display is executed. Has been done. Specifically, the display control device 114 sets the display data table 232a1 indicating the "music reproduction" effect when the second round display release command and the determination command are received from the voice lamp control device 113. At the same time, an additional data table 232a2 showing the music determination display is set. Then, by performing display control based on the display data table 232a1 indicating the "music reproduction" effect and the additional data table 232a2 indicating the music determination display, the determined music display can be displayed while waiting for the execution of the "music reproduction" effect. It is possible to display and display the content of the music determined in the "music selection" production. By configuring in this way, even if the music determination display cannot be executed within the period of the initial "music selection" production, the "music selection" production is extended while waiting for the execution of the "music playback" production. It is possible to execute the music as if it were done, display the music determination display to clearly indicate the determined music to the player, and then execute the "music playback" effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player understand the content of the production step by step and provide a game without a sense of discomfort.

<Modification 20>
In the above embodiment, when the decision command and the change command are received between one frame, the process corresponding to the decision command which is the main command is preferentially executed, and the change command which is an auxiliary command is executed. It was configured to discard the change command without performing the processing corresponding to. On the other hand, it may be configured to execute processing based on an auxiliary command in some form. Specifically, for example, even when the control related to the effect is executed based on the main command, in this effect, the auxiliary command is stored without performing the control based on the auxiliary command. In the next scene where the effect based on the main command is executed, the control based on the auxiliary command may be preferentially executed, and then the control based on the main command may be executed. With this configuration, the content instructed by the voice lamp control device 113, which is the upstream control device, can be surely executed by the display control device 114, which is the downstream control device, and the upstream control device can be executed. The instruction given by the above can be surely reflected by the control device on the downstream side.

<Modification 21>
In the above embodiment, even when the display control device 114 discards the change command and does not execute the process based on the change command, the voice lamp control device 113 has the intention selection flag 223i based on the pressing operation for the change button 22b. Was set to on, and it was configured to determine that the "music selection" effect was performed based on the player's intention. On the other hand, when the change command is discarded by the display control device 114, it may be configured so that the player's intention is not reflected in the "music selection" effect. Specifically, the intention selection flag 223i is set to be turned on based on the reception of the sub display change command from the display control device 114. With this configuration, the control content recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 and the control content recognized by the display control device 114 can be synchronized, so that there is no discrepancy in the production content. can do.

Further, the look-ahead process may be executed by the display control device 114. For example, information for performing look-ahead processing, that is, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation acquired from the counter buffer 203b in the main control device 110 with the start winning. A hold information storage area and an execution information storage area similar to those shown in FIG. 24 for storing each value of the type counter CS1 are provided in the display control device 114, and hold information is stored when a display hold ball count command is received. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the area and the execution information storage area, the display control device 114 executes the look-ahead process, and is a big hit in the running variation effect and the pending variation effect. If it is determined that there is a variable effect, the "pending change notice" may be executed. In this case, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command from the main control device 110, the hold ball number command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 as a display hold ball number command as it is. As a result, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the main control device 110 in connection with the start winning are used in the hold information 1st to 4th areas provided in the hold information storage area of the display control device 114. Of these, it can be stored in the area corresponding to the number of reserved balls in the display reserved ball number command. Then, each time the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 may execute the same shift processing as the processing of S1403 and S1404 of FIG. 44 on the reserved information storage area. As a result, the execution information storage area of the display control device 114 can store the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold ball execution area 203d of the main control device 110, and the hold information first. The fourth area can store the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area 203c of the main control device 110, respectively.

In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to give a display instruction to the display control device 114. The command may be directly transmitted from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 may be connected to the display control device 114, and a command for instructing the output of each voice and the lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced and the cost increase of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

When the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured as one control device, the hold information storage area and the execution information storage area similar to those shown in FIG. 24 are stored in the RAM of the one control device. When the hold ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the area corresponding to the number of hold ball count commands in the look-ahead information 1st to 4th areas provided in the hold information storage area , Each counter value C1 to C3, CS1 included in the reserved ball number command may be stored. Further, each time the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, one control device performs the same shift processing as the processing of S1403 and S1404 of FIG. 44 between the hold information first to fourth areas and the execution information storage area. May be executed.

Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured as one control device, they are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the control of various effects related to changes and decisions in the "music selection" effect. By detecting the content and performing feedback control to the control device 1, the determined content of various effects changed or decided by the "music selection" effect and the various effect contents displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are one. It may be configured to recognize whether or not it is done. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent deviation of various staging contents recognized by the control device and the third symbol display device 81.

In the above embodiment, in the command determination process (S911) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, the case where the fluctuation start flag 223a is always set to ON when the stop type command is received has been described. When the stop type command is received after receiving the signal, the fluctuation start flag 223a may be set to ON. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of a strange variation effect when the variation pattern command is not received and the stop type command is received.

Further, the fluctuation start flag 223a may be set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation pattern command is received. In this case, in the variation effect process (S910) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, the variation pattern extracted by the variation pattern command is notified to the display control device 114 based on the fact that the variation start flag 223a is turned on. A display variation pattern command may be generated and transmitted to the display control device 114. As a result, the display control device 114 is made to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command without waiting for the voice lamp control device 113 to receive the stop type command. Can be done. In this case, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command at the timing when the stop type command is received. It may be transmitted to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 may determine the stop symbol of the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the display stop type command.

In the above embodiment, whether or not there is a variation effect that becomes a big hit during the variation effect of the third symbol that is suspended and executed when the ball enters the first entry port 64 (starting prize) is determined by the execution symbol and the execution symbol. The case of performing "holding change notice" in the holding symbol was explained. On the other hand, it hits in the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) that is suspended and executed when the ball passes through the second entrance 67 (starting prize) (stops at the symbol "○"). Whether or not there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit during the variable effect of the third symbol by using the second symbol hold lamp 84, the third symbol display device 81, or the like, or , Instead, the player may be notified. As a result, is there a winning variable display in the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) that is pending or in the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) that is being executed and is pending? The player can grasp whether or not. Therefore, it can be inferred whether or not the second symbol is a hit before the variable display of the second symbol is executed. Some gaming machines improve their playability by the presence or absence of hits of ordinary symbols, and are particularly effective in such gaming machines.

In the above embodiment, the case where the demo effect is to stop and display the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. , The third symbol consisting of the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variation effect may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, the case where the "holding change notice", which is one form of the continuous notice effect, is executed on the third symbol display device 81 on which the variation effect is performed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko A fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81 is provided in the machine 10, and the fourth symbol is displayed on the fourth symbol display device together with the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81. (Hereinafter, "continuous notice effect" including "hold change notice") is executed, which is different from "hold change notice" or "hold change notice" and is executed over a plurality of variable effects. You may. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an accessory different from each movable accessory that operates according to various effects, and the accessory is operated in a predetermined manner together with the variable effect to execute a continuous advance notice effect. May be good. Further, the continuous notice effect may be executed by outputting the sound for the continuous notice effect from the voice output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 under the control of the voice lamp control device 113, or the lighting unit of the pachinko machine 10 may be executed. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

As a result, every time the variation effect (dynamic display) is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (and the first symbol display device 37), the symbol is continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device or the accessory is displayed. By operating in a predetermined mode, outputting sound from the sound output device 226, or lighting or blinking the illumination units 29 to 33, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of a big hit. .. Further, the player usually keeps an eye on the third symbol display device 81 on which the variation effect is performed, and continues the game, but displays the symbol by the fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81. , The operation of the accessory, the voice output from the voice output device 226, or the lighting / blinking of the lighting units 29 to 33, the continuous advance notice effect is performed, so that the player is given an unusual effect. It can be easily recognized. In addition, the continuous notice effect can be easily continuously performed by simple control such as symbol display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the accessory, voice output from the voice output device 226, or lighting / blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33. It is possible to make a notice production.

Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by the sound output from the voice output device 226 or the lighting or blinking of the lighting units 29 to 33, the continuous notice effect is controlled by the voice lamp control device 113, so that the start winning is performed. The pachinko machine 10 continuously performs the hit / fail determination and the lottery process at the start of the fluctuation in the main control device 110, causes the voice lamp control device 113 to perform the continuous warning effect, and causes the display control device 114 to perform the variation effect. When performing a notice effect, each control device can be assigned to each process. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be suppressed to a low level.

It should be noted that the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect on the third symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect on the fourth symbol display device, the operation in a predetermined mode of the accessory, the voice from the voice output device 226. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by combining at least two or more of the output and the lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 and controlling each of them in conjunction with each other. This makes it possible to execute a wider variety of continuous notice effects. Further, a method of executing the continuous notice effect (display by the third symbol display device 81, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the accessory, voice output from the voice output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33). , Or a combination of these) to prepare multiple continuous notice effect modes that are selected according to the game state (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, off) after the end of the continuous advance notice effect. May be good.

In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the number of reserved balls added by "1" when there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64. A case has been described in which each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203b due to the start winning is included as they are and transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 for the number command. The type of the counter to be included may be a part of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include the values of other counters. Further, when the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired in connection with the start winning, the information indicating the value of each of these counters is included in the hold ball number command and notified. Instead, a command other than the reserved ball count command may include information indicating the values of each counter and notify the voice lamp control device 113 of these values. As another command, it may be a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, or another information such as a fluctuation pattern command or a stop symbol command may be voiced. The value of each counter acquired with the start winning may be added to the command for notifying the lamp control device 113. As another command, when the value of each counter acquired in connection with the start winning is notified to the voice lamp control device 113, the value of each counter to be notified is changed to the variable effect corresponding to any number of holdings. Information indicating whether this is the case may be included. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 is included in the command in any of the areas 1 to 4 of the hold information corresponding to the hold count, based on the information regarding the hold count included in the command. The value of the counter can be stored.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 indicated by the hold ball number command are stored in the hold information storage area 223p. The case has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when a hold ball number command (or a command indicating the value of each counter) is received, the value of each counter indicated by the command is used as a basis. , Whether it is a big hit or not, a big hit type in the case of a big hit, a part or all of the missed type in the case of a miss, etc., and these judgment results are replaced with the value of each counter indicated by the command, or , A part or all of the value of the counter may be stored in the hold information storage area 223p. As a result, when the look-ahead process is executed, the judgment result such as whether or not the variable effect being executed or held is a big hit is already stored in the hold information storage area 223p. Therefore, in the look-ahead process, this judgment result is stored. It only needs to be read, and the execution of the process can be completed quickly. If the variation time of the variation effect is determined according to the number of reserved balls at the time when the execution of the variation effect is started (strictly speaking, the time when the jackpot lottery is performed), the hold ball number command (or the time when the jackpot lottery is performed) is determined. When the command) indicating the value of each counter is received, the number of reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation effect cannot be determined, so that the fluctuation time cannot be accurately determined. Therefore, in this case, it is preferable that at least the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for determining the fluctuation time is stored in the hold information storage area 223p. As a result, if the launch of the ball to the game area is stopped when the look-ahead process is executed, the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation effect can be determined, so that the ball is stored in the reserved information storage area 223p. The fluctuation time can be calculated based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 together with the determination result of whether or not the jackpot is a big hit, the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and the determination result of the missed type in the case of a miss.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which one first entry slot 64, in which a big hit lottery is started when a ball is entered, is arranged in the game board 13, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances may be arranged on the game board 13 in which the ball entry is independently detected and the big hit lottery is started. In this case, the hold ball number command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when there is a hold at each first ball entry port indicates which first ball entry port is the hold. Information may be included. Further, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started includes information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by the first ball entry port. good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a hold ball number counter is prepared for each first ball entry port, and when a hold ball number command is received, the first ball entry indicated in the hold ball number command is received. When the number of reserved balls is set in the reserved ball number counter for the mouth and the fluctuation pattern command is received, if the reserved ball number counter for the first entry port indicated in the fluctuation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entry port The number of reserved balls can be counted for each.

Further, when a plurality of first entrances are arranged on the game board 13, the counter value acquired in association with the winning (starting winning) to each first entrance is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. You may. In this case, the command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the counter value acquired by the main control device 110 in connection with the start winning is acquired in association with the start winning in any of the first entrances. It may include information indicating whether or not it is. Further, the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started includes information indicating which of the first entrances is the fluctuation effect accompanying the start winning. You may. Further, in the voice lamp control device 113, a hold information storage area may be prepared for each first ball entry port. As a result, each time a fluctuation pattern command is received, shift processing is performed for the hold information storage area corresponding to the first entry slot that detects the start winning prize that triggered the execution of the fluctuation effect indicated by the fluctuation pattern command. It can be carried out. Therefore, the value of each counter corresponding to the pending fluctuation effect for each first ball entry port can be held in the voice lamp control device 113 as well. Therefore, if the probability of winning a jackpot, the probability of sorting a jackpot type, the probability of sorting a missed type, etc. differ depending on the first ball entrance that has won a start prize, will each variation effect be a jackpot in the look-ahead processing? Whether or not, the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, the missed type in the case of a miss, and the like can be correctly determined based on which first entrance winning the starting prize. Further, when the variable effect based on the start winning to the first ball entrance of 1 is performed in preference to the variable effect based on the start winning to the other first ball opening, the first entry of 1 is performed. Pre-reading processing can be performed in order from the value of the counter corresponding to the fluctuation effect based on the start winning to the ball mouth.

Further, when a plurality of first ball entrances are provided, the voice lamp control device 113 inputs the value of each counter acquired based on the start winning to the first ball entry port from the main control device 110 by a command. When it is decided to start the continuous advance notice effect when it is received, the continuous advance notice effect is executed over all the variable effects (reserved balls) held at that time regardless of the first entrance where the start prize was given. You may. In addition, a plurality of first ball entrances are provided, and the variable effect for winning a prize in one first ball opening is preferentially executed over the variable effect for winning a prize in another first ball opening. In the pachinko machine, the start of the continuous advance notice effect may be determined only from the pre-reading result of the counter value acquired for the winning of the first ball entrance where the variable effect is preferentially executed. .. As a result, it is not determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is set for the variable effect corresponding to the winning of the first ball entrance having a low priority, and the continuous advance notice effect is not started for this variable effect. .. If a continuous advance notice effect is started for the variable effect corresponding to the winning of the first ball entrance with a low priority, and the variable effect is continuously suspended at the first ball entry port with a high priority. There is a risk that the continuous notice production will not end easily. On the other hand, in this modification, it is not determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is set for the variable effect corresponding to the winning of the first ball entrance having a low priority, and the variable effect is not determined. Since the continuous advance notice effect is not started, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b is decremented by 1 (see S1411 in FIG. 44). , Not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the variation processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 35), the number of reserved balls of the main control device 110 subtracted according to the variation pattern command set by the variation start processing (S307). A hold ball number command is set so that the value (N) of the counter 203a is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 (see S305 in FIG. 35), and the hold ball number command is a variation pattern. The command may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 together with the transmission of the command. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the number of reserved balls held by the main control device 110. Further, the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a after subtraction may be included in the fluctuation pattern command. In this case, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command, the reserved ball number (N) included in the fluctuation pattern command may be extracted and set in the sub-holding ball number counter 223b.

In the above embodiment, the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the passage of the second ball opening 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of reserved balls for the variable effect based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided into four areas by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variation effect which is the variation display of the third symbol is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a horizontal direction or an L-shape. Further, the variable display of the symbol is not limited to the variable effect of the symbol, and for example, an effect performed by displaying one or a plurality of characters together with the symbol or by displaying various movements or changes separately from the symbol. Display etc. are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above embodiments, a case where all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player cannot see them is displayed when the variation effect is executed, but instead of displaying the high-speed variation. Therefore, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above-described embodiment. For example, once a big hit is made, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the big hit until multiple (for example, two or three times) big hits occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.
<Group A: The decision command is output at the end of the selection effect regardless of the output of the decision command>
An acquisition means (for example, the first ball entry port 64) for acquiring start information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A determination means (for example, main control device 110) that makes a determination based on the start information acquired by the acquisition means, and
An effect executing means (for example, a display control device 114) that causes an effect means (for example, a third symbol display device 81) to execute a predetermined effect (for example, a variation effect of the third symbol) based on a determination result by the determination means. In a gaming machine equipped with
In the effect means, a selection effect execution means (for example, a selection effect execution means) for presenting a plurality of selection candidates to a player and causing the player to select one of the selection candidates (for example, a “music selection” effect). Selected music memory 233j) and
An operating means that can be operated by the player (for example, the enter button 22a or the change button 22b) and
An operation reception setting means (for example, a button valid timer 223d) for setting an acceptable period during which the operation of the operation means can be accepted during the execution of the selection effect, and
A selection decision means (for example, generation of a decision command based on a pressing operation of the decision button 22a) for determining the selection candidate based on the operation of the operation means during the acceptable period set by the operation reception setting means.
When the acceptable period set by the operation reception setting means ends, the period end determination means (for example, for example) that determines the selection candidate regardless of whether or not the selection candidate is determined by the selection determination means. Generation of a decision command based on the end of the "music selection" production) and
A decision effect executing means (for example, display determination music memory 233k) that executes a determination effect (for example, "music reproduction" effect) corresponding to the selection candidate determined by the selection determination means or the period end determination means. A game machine A0 characterized by being equipped.

According to the gaming machine A0, start information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a determination is made by the determination means based on the start information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the effect execution means executes a predetermined effect by the effect means. Here, in the staging means, a selection staging in which a plurality of selection candidates are presented to the player and the player is made to select one of the selection candidates is executed by the selection staging execution means. Further, the operation means is configured to be operable by the player, and the acceptable period during which the operation of the operation means can be accepted during the execution of the selection effect is set by the operation reception setting means. Then, in the acceptable period set by the operation reception setting means, the selection candidate is determined by the selection determination means based on the operation of the operation means. Further, when the acceptable period set by the operation reception setting means ends, the selection candidate is determined by the period end determination means regardless of whether or not the selection candidate is determined by the selection determination means. Then, the decision effect corresponding to the selection candidate determined by the selection determination means or the period end determination means is executed by the decision effect execution means. That is, the determination effect is determined at least when the acceptable period of the operation means has expired in the selection effect regardless of the operation of the operation means.

Conventionally, in a selection effect in which a player can select a favorite effect by his / her own will, when the player operates the operation means within the acceptable period during which the operation of the operation means can be accepted, the selection determination means is used. The selection candidate is determined, and the determination effect corresponding to the determined selection candidate is executed in the effect means.

When the gaming machine configured in this way cannot recognize the decision made by the selection decision means due to some abnormality (for example, noise), it cannot recognize the decision of the selection candidate in the selection effect, and the decision effect corresponding to the selection effect. Even in a situation where it is necessary to execute, the selection effect is continuously displayed, and there is a possibility that the decision effect that should be executed cannot be started. In particular, when the acceptable period of the operating means ends, the operation of the operating means is not judged to be valid at a timing after that, and there is a possibility that a situation may occur in which it cannot be changed or decided from the selection effect. ..

Therefore, at the end of the selection effect, it is conceivable to forcibly determine the execution of the determination effect by the selection candidate being selected in the selection effect. That is, even when the operation means is not operated by the player in the selection effect, the selection candidates selected in the selection effect are executed in the subsequent decision effect at the timing when the selection effect ends. Configure to. With this configuration, at least the selection candidates can be determined when the selection effect is executed, so that the selection effect is not determined in the selection effect and the selection effect continues to be executed. It is possible to prevent the situation.

However, at the end of the selection effect, it is determined whether or not the operation means has been operated by the player during the selection effect, and as a result of the determination, if the operation means has been operated, the selection candidate is determined again. If the control is performed so that the selection candidate is determined only when the operation means is not operated, it is erroneously recognized that the operation means is operated due to some abnormality (for example, noise). If this is the case, the selection candidate cannot be determined at the end of the selection effect, and the selection effect may be continuously displayed. Further, when the process of determining whether or not the operation of the operating means is performed is executed at the end of the selection effect, another control process is being executed with the end of the selection effect, so that the process is performed. It may be complicated.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine A0, at the end of the selection effect, the selection candidate is determined regardless of whether or not the operation means is operated during the selection effect. With such a configuration, at the end of the selection effect, the selection candidate can be reliably determined, and the continuous display of the selection effect due to the failure to determine the selection effect occurs. There is an effect that it is possible to surely prevent the occurrence of.

Further, since it is not necessary to process whether or not the operation by the operating means has been performed at the end of the selection effect, the process at the end of the selection effect can be simplified and the control load can be reduced. , Has the effect.

In the gaming machine A0
A first control means having the selection determination means and the period end determination means (for example, MPU221 of the voice lamp control device 113) and
A second control means (for example, MPU231 of the display control device 114) having the selection effect execution means and the determination effect execution means is provided.
The selection determination means is
Based on the operation of pressing the first decision instruction means (for example, the decision button 22a) that instructs the second control means to determine the selection candidate when the player's operation on the operation means is detected. Send decision command),
The means for determining the end of the period is
When the acceptable period set by the operation reception setting means ends, the second decision instruction means (for example, "music selection") instructing the second control means to determine the selection candidate. ”Send a decision command based on the end of the production),
The determination effect execution means is
A gaming machine A1 characterized by executing the determination effect corresponding to the selection candidate determined based on any instruction by the first determination instruction means or the second determination instruction means.

According to the gaming machine A1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first control means has the selection determination means and the period end determination means, and the second control means has the selection effect execution means and the determination effect execution means. Then, when the player's operation on the operation means is detected by the first decision instruction means provided in the selection determination means, the first control means instructs the second control means to determine the selection candidate. Further, when the acceptable period set by the operation reception setting means ends by the second decision instruction means provided in the period end determination means, the first control means instructs the second control means to determine the selection candidate. Will be done. Then, the decision effect corresponding to the selection candidate determined based on the instruction by either the first decision instruction means or the second decision instruction means is executed by the decision effect execution means.

Conventionally, at the end of the selection effect, it is determined whether or not the first control means has instructed the second control means to determine the selection candidate during the selection effect, and as a result of the determination, the determination of the selection candidate has already been instructed. In that case, if the control is performed so as not to instruct the determination of the selection candidate again and to instruct the determination of the selection candidate only when the determination of the selection candidate is not instructed, some abnormality (for example, noise) causes the first. 1 When it is erroneously recognized that the control means has instructed the determination of the selection candidate, the first control means cannot instruct the second control means to determine the selection candidate, so that the second control means is the selection candidate. Since the decision is not instructed, the end trigger of the selection effect cannot be recognized, and the execution trigger of the decision effect cannot be determined, so that the selection effect may be continuously displayed. Further, when the process of determining whether or not the determination of the selection candidate has been instructed is executed at the end of the selection effect, another control process is being executed with the end of the selection effect. Processing may be complicated.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine A1, at the end of the selection effect, the first control means can surely instruct the second control means to determine the selection candidate, and the determination of the selection candidate is not instructed. There is an effect that it is possible to surely prevent the continuous display of the selection effect by.

Further, at the end of the selection effect, it is no longer necessary for the first control means to process whether or not the selection candidate has been instructed. Therefore, the process at the end of the selection effect is simplified and the control load is reduced. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machine A1
The second control means is
When the determination of the selection candidate is instructed by the first determination instruction means, the non-execution means (for example, the determined flag) that does not execute the control of a part or all based on the instruction by the second determination instruction means (for example, the determined flag). 233m), a gaming machine A2.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are played. That is, when the determination of the selection candidate is instructed by the first decision instruction means, the non-execution means provided in the second control means does not execute some or all of the control based on the instruction by the second decision instruction means. It is said that. As a result, the second control means is a selection candidate by the first decision instruction means even when the determination of the selection candidate is instructed by the first decision instruction means and the second decision instruction means in duplicate during the selection effect. By not executing part or all of the control based on the instruction by the second decision instruction means when the decision of is instructed, it is possible to prevent duplicate processing from being executed on the second control means side. However, there is an effect that the processing load of the second control means can be reduced.

Further, the second control means, which is the control device on the downstream side, is a control device on the upstream side by configuring the second control means so that appropriate processing can be executed even when the determination of the selection candidate is instructed in duplicate. Since it is not necessary to execute complicated processing in the first control means, there is an effect that it is possible to facilitate the creation of a program at the time of development of each control means.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2
The operating means
A change operation means (for example, a change button 22b) for changing the selected selection candidate to another selection candidate by being operated by the player during the execution of the selection effect.
A determination operation means (for example, a determination button 22a) for determining the selected selection candidate by being operated by the player during the execution of the selection effect is provided.
The first control means is
Based on the change instruction means (for example, the operation of pressing the change button 22b) instructing the second control means to change the selection candidate when the change operation means is operated during the acceptable period. Send change command),
The second control means is
When the determination of the selection candidate is instructed by the first determination instruction means based on the operation of the determination operation means, a part or all of the control based on the instruction to change the selection candidate by the change instruction means is executed. The gaming machine A3, characterized in that it is provided with a change non-execution means (for example, a determined flag 233 m).

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 or A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the selected selection candidate is changed to another selection candidate by being operated by the player during the execution of the selection effect by the change operation means provided in the operation means. Further, the determination operation means also provided in the operation means determines the selected selection candidate by being operated by the player during the execution of the selection effect. Further, when the change operation means is operated during the acceptable period by the change instruction means provided in the first control means, the change of the selection candidate is instructed from the first control means to the second control means. Then, when the change non-execution means provided in the second control means instructs the first decision instruction means to determine the selection candidate based on the operation of the decision operation means, the change instruction means changes the selection candidate. It is configured so that some or all of the control based on the instruction of is not executed. That is, the second control means is configured not to execute a part or all of the processing related to the instruction to change the selection candidate after the determination of the selection candidate is instructed during the selection effect.

Here, as the content instructed by the first control means by the second control means, the main (highly important) instruction for the effect in the effect means, such as the instruction indicating the player's decision making, and the player's intention. It can be divided into auxiliary (less important) instructions for the production in the production means, such as instructions indicating that the above is provisionally changed.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine A3, when the process corresponding to the instruction for determining the selection candidate, which is the main instruction, is executed, a part or all of the instruction corresponding to the instruction for changing the selection candidate, which is an auxiliary instruction, is executed. By configuring not to perform the processing of, it is possible to prevent the processing indicated by the determination of the selection candidate, which is the main instruction, from being rewritten by the processing indicating the change of the selection candidate, which is the auxiliary instruction. This has the effect of preventing inconsistencies in the content of the production.

In the gaming machine A3
The second control means is
The decision instruction priority for executing the control based on the instruction for the determination of the selection candidate by the first decision instruction means or the second decision instruction means is prioritized over the control based on the instruction for changing the selection candidate by the change instruction means. The gaming machine A4 comprising means (for example, S2202 of button operation system command processing (S2111)).

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by the decision instruction priority means provided in the second control means, the control based on the instruction for changing the selection candidate by the change instruction means is used to instruct the decision of the selection candidate by the first decision instruction means or the second decision instruction means. Based control is given priority. Thereby, for example, when the instruction for determining the selection candidate and the instruction for changing the selection candidate exist at the same time, the processing corresponding to the instruction for determining the selection candidate, which is the main instruction, is an auxiliary instruction. It is possible to execute the process in preference to the process corresponding to the instruction to change the selection candidate, and then not to execute a part or all the process indicating the change of the selection candidate which is an auxiliary instruction. Therefore, if the process corresponding to the instruction for determining the selection candidate, which is the main instruction, is executed first, and the process corresponding to the instruction for determining the selection candidate is executed, the change of the selection candidate, which is an auxiliary instruction, is executed. By configuring so that some or all of the processing corresponding to the instruction of is not performed, it is possible to prevent the process from being rewritten by the processing indicating the change of the selection candidate, which is an auxiliary instruction. It has the effect of preventing discrepancies.

In either the gaming machine A3 or A4
The first control means is
A decision detecting means (for example, a decision button detection counter 223e) for detecting a player's operation with respect to the decision operation means, and
When the player's operation on the decision operation means is detected by the decision detection means during the acceptable period, the decision not to execute the detection by the decision detection means by the decision detection means until the acceptable period ends. The gaming machine A5 is characterized by comprising detection non-execution means (for example, S1707 of frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1106)).

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3 or A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the player's operation on the determination operation means is detected by the determination detection means provided in the first control means. Further, when the player's operation on the decision operation means is detected by the decision detection means during the acceptable period, the decision detection non-execution means provided in the first control means detects the decision until the acceptable period ends. Determination by means No detection is performed by the operating means. As a result, when the determination operation means is operated by the player in the selection effect, the first control means does not have to detect the operation of the determination operation means in the subsequent selection effect. Therefore, the first control means of the first control means. It has the effect of reducing the processing load.

In the gaming machine A5
The first control means is
A change detection means (for example, a change button detection counter 223f) that detects a player's operation with respect to the change operation means, and a change detection means.
When the player's operation on the decision operation means is detected by the decision detection means during the acceptable period, the change detection means does not execute the detection by the change detection means until the acceptable period ends. The gaming machine A6 is characterized by comprising detection non-execution means (for example, S1707 of frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1106)).

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the change detecting means provided in the first control means detects the player's operation on the change operating means. If the player's operation on the decision operation means is detected by the decision detection means during the acceptable period, the change detection non-execution means provided in the first control means will detect the change until the acceptable period ends. Change by means Detection by means of operation is not executed. As a result, when the determination operation means is operated by the player in the selection effect, the first control means does not have to detect the operation of the change operation means in the subsequent selection effect, so that the first control means can be used. It has the effect of reducing the processing load.

In the gaming machine A6
The first control means is
The decision detection priority means (for example, S1702 of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1106)) that prioritizes the detection of the decision operation means by the decision detection means over the detection of the change operation means by the change detection means. The gaming machine A7, which is characterized by being equipped with.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the decision detection priority means provided in the first control means preferentially executes the detection of the decision operation means by the decision detection means over the detection of the change operation means by the change detection means. As a result, for example, when the determination operation means and the change operation means are operated by the player at the same time, the detection process of the determination operation means that reflects the player's main intention in the selection effect is performed in the selection effect. It is possible to execute the detection process of the change operation means for changing the intention of the player with priority over the detection process of the change operation means for changing the intention of the player, and then not to execute the detection process of the change operation means for changing the intention of the player in the selection effect. Therefore, while preferentially executing the detection process of the determination operation means that reflects the player's main intention, the change operation means that changes the player's intention when the player's main intention is determined. By configuring so that the detection process is not performed, it is not necessary to execute the process of changing the player's intention after the player's intention is determined, so that the processing load of the first control means can be reduced. , Has the effect. Further, in the first control means and the second control means, the control for the determination of the selection effect reflecting the player's intention is prioritized over the control in which the player's intention is changed, and the player's intention is given. Since it is not necessary to execute the determination operation means and the change operation means, as well as the control based on the determination of the selection candidate and the control based on the change of the selection candidate after the determination, the processing load in each control means is effectively reduced. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In any of the gaming machines A3 to A7
The first control means is
A first selection candidate storage means (music selection counter 223 g) for storing first selection candidate information regarding the selection candidate in the selection effect is provided.
The second control means is
The second selection candidate storage means (for example, the selected music memory 233j) for storing the second selection candidate information regarding the selection candidate in the selection effect is provided.
The second control means is
When the change instruction means instructs the change of the selection candidate from the first control means, the second update means for updating the second selection candidate information of the second selection candidate storage means based on the instruction (the second update means). For example, S2208) of button operation command processing (S2111) and
A second update instruction means (for example, a sub-display change command) for instructing the first control means of the update information of the second selection candidate storage means updated by the second update means is provided.
The first control means is
When the update information of the second selection candidate storage means is instructed by the second control means by the second update instruction means, the first selection candidate information of the first selection candidate storage means is instructed based on the instruction. The gaming machine A8 is provided with a first updating means (for example, S1403 of display-side command processing (S1218)).

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines A3 to A7, the following effects are played. That is, the first selection candidate storage means provided in the first control means stores the first selection candidate information regarding the selection candidate in the selection effect. Further, the second selection candidate storage means provided in the second control means stores the second selection candidate information regarding the selection candidate in the selection effect. Then, when the change instruction means instructs the change of the selection candidate by the second update means provided in the second control means, the second selection candidate storage means second based on the instruction. The selection candidate information is updated. Further, the update information of the second selective storage means updated by the second update means is instructed to the first control means by the second update instruction means provided in the second control means. Then, when the first update means provided in the first control means instructs the update information of the second selection candidate storage means from the second control means by the second update instruction means, the first is based on the instruction. The first selection candidate information of the selection candidate storage means is updated.

That is, the first selection candidate information stored in the first control means is configured to be performed when the update information is instructed by the second control means. Therefore, in the second control means, even if a part or all of the processing based on the instruction is not executed when the change of the selection candidate is instructed by the first control means, the second control means updates. It can be configured so that the information is not instructed to the first control means. Therefore, when the second control means does not update the second selection candidate information based on the instruction from the first control means to change the selection candidate, the first selection candidate information stored in the first control means is updated. Therefore, even if the second control means ignores (does not execute) the instruction to change the selection candidate from the first control means, the first selection candidate information stored in the first control means and the first selection candidate information. There is an effect that the second selection candidate information stored in the two control means can be synchronized with each other, and the inconsistency in the production contents can be prevented from occurring.

In the gaming machine A8
The second update instruction means is
A second change instruction means (for example, a sub display change command) for instructing the first control means of the second selection candidate information of the second selection candidate storage means updated by the second update means is provided. ,
The first control means is
When the second selection candidate information of the second selection candidate storage means is instructed by the second control means by the second change instruction means, the first selection candidate storage means of the first selection candidate storage means is instructed based on the instruction. The gaming machine A9 comprising a first updating means for updating selection candidate information (for example, S1403 of display-side command processing (S1218)).

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second change instruction means provided in the second update instruction means instructs the first control means of the second selection candidate information updated by the second update means. Then, when the first update means provided in the first control means instructs the second selection candidate information of the second selection candidate storage means from the second control means by the second change instruction means, based on the instruction. The first selection candidate information of the first selection candidate storage means is updated. That is, the first selection candidate information stored in the first control means is configured to be performed when the second selection candidate information is instructed by the second control means. Therefore, even if the second control means does not execute a part or all of the processing based on the instruction when the first control means instructs to change the selection candidate, the second control means gives the second control means. 2 It can be configured so that the selection candidate information is not instructed to the first control means. Therefore, when the second control means does not update the second selection candidate information based on the instruction from the first control means to change the selection candidate, the first selection candidate information stored in the first control means is updated. Therefore, even if the second control means ignores (does not execute) the instruction to change the selection candidate from the first control means, the first selection candidate information stored in the first control means and the first selection candidate information. There is an effect that it is possible to synchronize with the second selection candidate information stored by the two control means, and it is possible to prevent the inconsistency of the production contents from occurring.

In the gaming machine A9
The first updating means is
When the second selection candidate information of the second selection candidate storage means is instructed by the second control means by the second change instruction means, the second selection candidate information and the first selection candidate storage means A match determination means for determining whether or not the first selection candidate information matches, and a match determination means.
It is characterized by comprising an abnormality execution means for executing a predetermined abnormality process when it is determined by the matching determination means that the second selection candidate information and the first selection candidate information do not match. Game machine A10 to play.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second selection candidate information of the second selection candidate storage means is instructed by the second control means by the second change instruction means, the second selection candidate information is provided by the matching determination means provided in the first update means. It is determined whether or not the information matches the first selection candidate information of the first selection candidate storage means. Then, when the match determination means determines that the second selection candidate information and the first selection candidate information do not match, the abnormality execution means executes a predetermined abnormality process. As a result, when the first selection candidate information and the second selection candidate information are not synchronized, predetermined abnormal processing (for example, initialization of the first selection candidate information and the second selection candidate information) is performed. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent a discrepancy in the production contents grasped by the first control means and the second control means.

In any of the gaming machines A10
The operating means
A determination operation means (for example, a determination button 22a) for determining the selected selection candidate as the determination effect by being operated by the player during the execution of the selection effect is provided.
The first control means is
A first decision effect storage means (for example, a decision music memory 223h) for storing the first decision effect information related to the decision effect in the selection effect.
Based on a decision instruction means (for example, a press operation of the decision button 22a) instructing the second control means from the first control means to determine the decision effect when the decision operation means is operated during the acceptable period. Sending a decision command),
The second control means is
A second decision effect storage means (for example, a display determination music memory 233k) for storing the second decision effect information related to the decision effect, and
When the determination instruction means instructs the determination of the determination effect from the first control means, the second selection candidate information stored in the second selection candidate storage means is stored in the second selection candidate storage means based on the instruction. 2 The second decision means (for example, S2203 of the button operation system command process (S2111)) stored in the second decision effect storage means as the decision effect information, and
A second determination instruction means (for example, a sub-display determination command) for instructing the first control means of the second determination effect information of the second determination effect storage means stored by the second determination means. Prepare,
The first control means is
When the second decision effect information of the second decision effect storage means is instructed by the second control means by the second decision instruction means, it is stored in the first selection candidate storage means based on the instruction. The first selection candidate information is stored in the first decision effect storage means as the first decision effect information (for example, S1404 of the display side command process (S1218)). Characteristic gaming machine A11.

According to the gaming machine A11, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A10. That is, the selection candidate selected is determined as the determination effect by being operated by the player during the execution of the selection effect by the determination operation means provided in the operation means. Further, the first decision-making effect storage means provided in the first control means stores the first decision-making effect information regarding the decision-making effect in the selection effect. Further, when the decision operation means is operated during the acceptable period by the decision instruction means also provided in the first control means, the first control means instructs the second control means to decide the decision effect. Further, the second decision-making effect storage means provided in the second control means stores the second decision-making effect information regarding the decision-making effect. Further, when the determination instruction means instructs the determination of the decision effect by the second determination means provided in the second control means, the determination effect is stored in the second selection candidate storage means based on the instruction. The second selection candidate information is stored in the second determination effect storage means as the second determination effect information. Further, the second determination effect information of the second determination effect storage means determined by the second determination means is instructed to the first control means by the second determination instruction means provided in the second control means. Then, when the first determination means provided in the first control means instructs the second determination effect information of the second determination effect storage means from the second control means by the second determination instruction means, based on the instruction. The first selection candidate information stored in the first selection candidate storage means is stored in the first decision effect storage means as the first decision effect information.

That is, the determination of the first decision effect information stored in the first control means is configured to be performed when the decision information is instructed by the second control means. Therefore, in the second control means, even if the decision of the decision effect is instructed by the first control means and the instruction is invalidated, the second decision effect information is determined by the second control means. It can be configured so that it is not instructed to the first control means. Therefore, when the second control means does not determine the second decision effect information based on the instruction from the first control means to determine the decision effect, the first decision effect information stored in the first control means is determined. Therefore, even when the instruction of the decision effect from the first control means is invalidated (not executed) by the second control means, the first decision effect information stored in the first control means and the first decision effect information. There is an effect that it is possible to synchronize with the second determination effect information stored in the second control means, and it is possible to prevent a discrepancy in the effect contents from occurring.

In the gaming machine A11
The first determination means is
When the second decision-making effect information of the second decision-making effect storage means is instructed by the second decision-making instruction means, the second decision-making effect information and the first decision-making effect storage means. A determination match determination means for determining whether or not the first determination effect information matches.
The abnormal execution means is
The gaming machine A12 is characterized in that when it is determined by the determination match determination means that the second determination effect information and the first determination effect information do not match, a predetermined abnormality process is executed.

According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second decision-making instruction means instructs the second decision-making effect information of the second decision-making effect storage means, the decision-matching determination means provided in the first decision-making means provides the second decision-making effect. It is determined whether or not the information and the first determination effect information of the first determination effect storage means match. Then, when it is determined by the decision matching determination means that the second decision effect information and the first decision effect information do not match, the abnormality execution means executes a predetermined abnormality process. As a result, when the first decision effect information and the second decision effect information are not synchronized, predetermined abnormality processing (for example, initialization of the first decision effect information and the second decision effect information) is performed. , There is an effect that it is possible to prevent a discrepancy in the production contents grasped by the first control means and the second control means.

<Group B: If the same command is received multiple times within a specified period, one of the commands is invalidated>
A first control means (for example, a voice lamp control device 113 (or a main control device 110)) that controls a game, and
A second control means (for example, a display control device 114 (or a voice lamp control device 113)) that operates based on an instruction from the first control means, and
An effect executing means (for example, MPU 231 of the display control device 114) for causing the effect means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) to execute a predetermined effect (for example, a variation effect of the third symbol) based on the control by the second control means. ) And, in a gaming machine equipped with
The second control means is
When a plurality of the same type of instructions are received from the first control means in a predetermined period, the instruction invalidation means (for example, the determined flag 233 m) for invalidating any of the instructions is provided. The gaming machine B0 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine B0, the game is controlled by the first control means, and the second control means is operated based on the instruction from the first control means. Further, a predetermined effect is executed in the effect means by the effect execution means based on the control by the second control means. Here, when a plurality of instructions of the same type are received from the first control means in a predetermined period by the instruction invalidation means provided in the second control means, one of the instructions is invalidated. That is, the second control means is configured not to execute control based on any of the instructions when a plurality of instructions of the same type are received from the first control means in a predetermined period. This prevents duplicate control from being executed in the second control means even when a plurality of instructions of the same type are transmitted from the first control means to the second control means during a predetermined period. There is an effect that the control load of the second control means can be reduced. In addition, the first control means, which is the control means on the upstream side, is configured so that appropriate control can be executed even when the second control means, which is the control means on the downstream side, receives duplicate instructions. Since it is not necessary to execute complicated control (for example, a process of determining whether or not duplicate instructions are output), it is possible to facilitate the creation of a program at the time of development of each control means. There is.

The "instruction of the same type" means, for example, an instruction having exactly the same content (for example, a decision command), each instruction related to one effect (for example, a variation pattern command and a confirmation command), and one state (for example,). , Jackpot) related instructions (eg, opening command and ending command) and the like are exemplified.

In the gaming machine B0
In the effect means, a selection effect execution means (for example, a selection effect execution means) for presenting a plurality of selection candidates to a player and causing the player to select one of the selection candidates (for example, a “music selection” effect). Selected music memory 233j) and
An operating means that can be operated by the player (for example, the enter button 22a or the change button 22b) and
An operation reception setting means (for example, a button valid timer 223d) for setting an acceptable period during which the operation of the operation means can be accepted during the execution of the selection effect, and
A selection decision means (for example, generation of a decision command based on a pressing operation of the decision button 22a) for determining the selection candidate based on the operation of the operation means during the acceptable period set by the operation reception setting means.
A determination effect execution means (for example, a display determination music memory 233k) for executing a determination effect (for example, a “music reproduction” effect) corresponding to the selection candidate determined by the selection determination means is provided.
The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that the predetermined period is a period from the start of the selection effect by the selection effect execution means to the start of the determination effect by the determination effect execution means.

According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the staging means, a selection staging in which a plurality of selection candidates are presented to the player and the player is made to select one of the selection candidates is executed by the selection staging execution means. Further, the operation means is configured to be operable by the player, and the acceptable period during which the operation of the operation means can be accepted during the execution of the selection effect is set by the operation reception setting means. Then, in the acceptable period set by the operation reception setting means, the selection candidate is determined by the selection determination means based on the operation of the operation means. Then, the decision effect corresponding to the selection candidate determined by the selection decision means is executed by the decision effect execution means. Here, the period from the execution of the selection effect by the selection effect execution means to the start of the decision effect by the decision effect execution means is defined as a predetermined period. That is, if the second control means receives a plurality of instructions of the same type from the first control means between the start of the selection effect and the start of the decision effect, one of the instructions is invalidated. Will be done.

Conventionally, at the end of the selection effect, it is determined whether or not the first control means has instructed the second control means to determine the selection candidate during the selection effect, and as a result of the determination, the determination of the selection candidate has already been instructed. In this case, the control is performed so that the determination of the selection candidate is not instructed again and the determination of the selection candidate is instructed only when the determination of the selection candidate is not instructed. In the case of such a configuration, if it is erroneously recognized that the first control means has instructed the determination of the selection candidate due to some abnormality (for example, noise), the first control means selects the second control means. Since the decision of the candidate cannot be instructed, the second control means cannot recognize the end trigger of the selection effect because the decision of the selection candidate is not instructed, and cannot determine the execution trigger of the decision effect, so that the selection effect is continued. It may be displayed on. Further, when the process of determining whether or not the determination of the selection candidate has been instructed is executed at the end of the selection effect, another control process is being executed with the end of the selection effect. Processing may be complicated.

In such a case, the first control means is configured to be able to instruct the second control means to determine the selection candidate during the execution of the selection effect, and the second control means also determines the selection candidate at the end of the selection effect. By configuring it so that it can be instructed to, the first control means can surely instruct the second control means to determine the selection candidate, and the selection effect is continued because the determination of the selection candidate is not instructed. It is possible to surely prevent the occurrence of various displays.

However, if the second control means executes the control based on the instruction every time the instruction from the first control means is received, the duplicated control is executed, and the control load of the second control means increases. There is a risk of doing so.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine B1, the second control means receives a plurality of instructions of the same type regarding the selection effect from the first control means between the start of the selection effect and the start of the decision effect. If so, one of the instructions will be invalidated. Therefore, even when a plurality of instructions of the same type regarding the selection effect are transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, it is possible to prevent duplicate control from being executed in the second control means, and the second control means. There is an effect that the control load of the control means can be reduced. Further, even when the second control means, which is the control means on the downstream side, receives duplicate instructions, the other instructions are invalidated while the control based on the instruction of 1 is executed, and the other instructions are given. Configure not to execute control based on, and configure appropriate control to be executable. Therefore, it is not necessary to execute complicated control (for example, a process of determining whether or not a duplicate instruction is output) in the first control means which is the control means on the upstream side, and therefore, at the time of development of each control means. It has the effect of facilitating the creation of programs.

In the gaming machine B1
When the acceptable period set by the operation reception setting means ends, the period end determination means (for example, for example) that determines the selection candidate regardless of whether or not the selection candidate is determined by the selection determination means. Generation of a decision command based on the end of the "music selection" production),
The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the determination effect executing means executes a determination effect corresponding to the selection candidate determined by the period end determination means or the selection determination means.

According to the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1. That is, when the acceptable period set by the operation reception setting means ends, the selection candidate is determined by the period end determination means regardless of whether or not the selection candidate is determined by the selection determination means. Then, the decision effect corresponding to the selection candidate determined by the selection determination means or the period end determination means is executed by the decision effect execution means. That is, between the start of the selection effect and the start of the decision effect, the determination of the selection candidate based on the selection determination means and the determination of the selection candidate based on the period end determination means are the same regarding the determination of the selection candidate. Multiple types of instructions may be received, in which case one of the instructions will be invalidated. Therefore, even when a plurality of instructions of the same type regarding the selection effect are transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, it is possible to prevent duplicate control from being executed in the second control means, and the second control means. There is an effect that the control load of the control means can be reduced. In addition, the first control means, which is the control means on the upstream side, is configured so that appropriate control can be executed even when the second control means, which is the control means on the downstream side, receives duplicate instructions. Since it is not necessary to execute complicated control (for example, a process of determining whether or not duplicate instructions are output), it is possible to facilitate the creation of a program at the time of development of each control means. There is.

In the gaming machine B0
The effect means is an image display means for displaying a predetermined image.
The second control means is
An image generation means (for example, an image controller 237) for generating an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means is provided.
The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the predetermined period is a period for generating an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means by the image generation means.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B0, the following effects are played. That is, a predetermined image is displayed by the image display means as the effect means, and the image generation means provided in the second control means generates an image for one screen to be displayed by the image display means. Here, the period during which the image generation means generates an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means is defined as a predetermined period. That is, when the second control means receives a plurality of instructions of the same type from the first control means between the start and the end of the generation of the image for one screen displayed on the image display means. , Either instruction is invalidated.

Conventionally, in the development of a gaming machine, the generation time for one screen of a moving image displayed by the installed staging means is configured to be different in consideration of applications such as development budget and drawing accuracy. Specifically, in the case of a gaming machine with a small development budget, or a gaming machine using a video with little movement or a video that does not require smoothness of display, a production means for generating one screen with a slow generation time. Is used. On the other hand, in the case of a gaming machine that uses a video with a large development budget and a video with a lot of movement or a video that requires smoothness of display, a staging means that generates the display content for one screen in a fast generation time is used. ing. Therefore, the generation time for one screen of the staging means is different for each model, and the time (unit processing time) required for controlling the second control means for controlling the staging means is also different.

On the other hand, the first control means for instructing the effect content to the second control means for controlling the effect means is common among different models in consideration of cost and development efficiency. Therefore, although the generation time for one screen of the staging means differs depending on the model, the unit processing time of the first control means is common, so that the instruction transmitted from the first control means is sent to the second control means. May cause problems when processed by.

Specifically, for example, in the case of the second control means in which the display content for one screen is generated with a slow generation time, the time required for the generation of one screen of the staging means is set to be long (for example,). The unit processing time of the second control means for controlling the staging means is also long (in units of 50 milliseconds), and the instructions received from the first control means are collectively processed in the unit processing time of the one, based on the instructions. It is configured to perform display control such as image generation in the unit processing time. Therefore, the second control means that generates the display contents for one screen with a slow generation time generates one screen as compared with the second control means that generates the display contents for one screen with a fast generation time. The number of instructions received from the first control means may increase during execution. Therefore, the slower the generation speed of the second control means, the greater the processing load may be when the instructions from the first control means are concentrated while the generation for one screen is being performed.

Further, as described above, since the unit processing time of 1 in the first control means is shorter than the unit processing time of the second control means, a plurality of units are within the time required to generate one screen by the second control means. It is configured to be able to send instructions. As a result, the number of instructions transmitted from the first control means to the second control means may be enormous.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine B3, when the second control means receives a plurality of instructions of the same type from the first control means between the start and the end of the generation of the display contents for one screen. , Either instruction is invalidated. Therefore, even when a plurality of instructions of the same type are transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, it is possible to prevent duplicate control from being executed in one unit processing time of the second control means. , There is an effect that the control load of the second control means can be reduced. In addition, the first control means, which is the control means on the upstream side, is configured so that appropriate control can be executed even when the second control means, which is the control means on the downstream side, receives duplicate instructions. Since it is not necessary to execute complicated control (for example, a process of determining whether or not duplicate instructions are output), it is possible to facilitate the creation of a program at the time of development of each control means. There is.

In the gaming machine B0
The effect means is an image display means for displaying a predetermined image.
The second control means is
An image generation means (for example, an image controller 237) that generates an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means,
A one-screen display means (for example, a first frame buffer 236b) for displaying an image for one screen generated by the image generation means on the image display means is provided.
The predetermined period is a period from the start of displaying the image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means by the one-screen display means to the end of the display of the image for the one screen. The gaming machine B4.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a predetermined image is displayed by the image display means as the effect means, and the image generation means provided in the second control means generates an image for one screen to be displayed by the image display means. Then, the one-screen display means provided in the second control means displays the image for one screen generated by the image generation means as the image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means. Here, the period from the start of displaying the image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means by the one-screen display means to the end of the display of the image for the one screen is set as a predetermined period. That is, when the second control means receives a plurality of instructions of the same type from the first control means between the start and the end of the display of the image for one screen displayed on the image display means. , Either instruction is invalidated.

Conventionally, in the development of a gaming machine, the display time for one screen of a moving image displayed by the installed staging means is configured to be different in consideration of applications such as development budget and display degree. Specifically, in the case of a gaming machine with a small development budget, or a gaming machine using a video with little movement or a video that does not require smoothness of display, a directing means for displaying one screen with a slow display time. Is used. On the other hand, in the case of a gaming machine that uses a video with a large development budget and a video with a lot of movement or a video that requires smoothness of display, a staging means that displays the display content for one screen in a fast display time is used. ing. Therefore, the display time for one screen of the staging means is different for each model, and the time (unit processing time) required for controlling the second control means for controlling the staging means is also different.

On the other hand, the first control means for instructing the effect content to the second control means for controlling the effect means is common among different models in consideration of cost and development efficiency. Therefore, although the display time for one screen of the staging means differs depending on the model, the unit processing time of the first control means is common, so that the instruction transmitted from the first control means is sent to the second control means. May cause problems when processed by.

Specifically, for example, in the case of the second control means displayed with a slow display time, the time required for displaying one screen of the staging means is set to be long (for example, in units of 50 milliseconds). The unit processing time of the second control means for controlling the staging means is also long, and while the instructions received from the first control means are collectively processed in the unit processing time of the one, the unit processing time is displayed based on the instructions. It is configured to control the display of. Therefore, the second control means displayed at the slower display time is an instruction received from the first control means while executing the display for one screen as compared with the second control means displayed at the faster display time. The number may be large. Therefore, the slower the display speed of the second control means, the greater the processing load may be when the instructions from the first control means are concentrated while displaying one screen.

Further, as described above, since the unit processing time of 1 in the first control means is shorter than the unit processing time of the second control means, a plurality of units are within the time required for displaying one screen by the second control means. It is configured to be able to send instructions. As a result, the number of instructions transmitted from the first control means to the second control means may be enormous.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine B4, when the second control means receives a plurality of instructions of the same type from the first control means between the start and the end of the display for one screen, any one of them. Instruction is invalidated. Therefore, even when a plurality of instructions of the same type are transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, it is possible to prevent duplicate control from being executed in one unit processing time of the second control means. , There is an effect that the control load of the second control means can be reduced. In addition, the first control means, which is the control means on the upstream side, is configured so that appropriate control can be executed even when the second control means, which is the control means on the downstream side, receives duplicate instructions. Since it is not necessary to execute complicated control (for example, a process of determining whether or not duplicate instructions are output), it is possible to facilitate the creation of a program at the time of development of each control means. There is.

In the gaming machine B0
The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the predetermined period is a period from the start of the predetermined effect by the effect executing means to the end of the predetermined effect.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B0, the following effects are played. That is, the period from the start of the predetermined effect by the effect executing means to the end of the predetermined effect is defined as the predetermined period. That is, when the second control means receives a plurality of instructions of the same type from the first control means between the start and the end of the predetermined effect indicating whether or not the special result appears. Either instruction is invalidated. As a result, even when a plurality of instructions of the same type regarding the predetermined effect are transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, it is possible to prevent duplicate control from being executed in the second control means. 2 There is an effect that the control load of the control means can be reduced. In addition, the first control means, which is the control means on the upstream side, is configured so that appropriate control can be executed even when the second control means, which is the control means on the downstream side, receives duplicate instructions. Since it is not necessary to execute complicated control (for example, a process of determining whether or not duplicate instructions are output), it is possible to facilitate the creation of a program at the time of development of each control means. There is.

In the gaming machine B0
A special effect executing means (for example, a jackpot) for executing a special effect that imparts a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined special result is executed in the predetermined effect executed by the effect executing means. ,
The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the predetermined period is a period from the execution of the special effect by the special effect executing means to the end of the special effect.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B0, the following effects are played. That is, the period from the start of the special effect by the special effect executing means to the end of the special effect is set as a predetermined period. That is, when the second control means receives a plurality of instructions of the same type regarding the special effect from the first control means between the start and the end of the special effect in which the game value is added. Either instruction is invalidated. As a result, even when a plurality of instructions of the same type regarding the special effect are transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, it is possible to prevent duplicate control from being executed in the second control means. 2 There is an effect that the control load of the control means can be reduced. In addition, the first control means, which is the control means on the upstream side, is configured so that appropriate control can be executed even when the second control means, which is the control means on the downstream side, receives duplicate instructions. Since it is not necessary to execute complicated control (for example, a process of determining whether or not duplicate instructions are output), it is possible to facilitate the creation of a program at the time of development of each control means. There is.

In any of the gaming machines B0 to B6
The instruction invalidation means is
When a plurality of the same type of instructions are received from the first control means in the predetermined period, the destination instruction invalidation means for invalidating the destination instruction received from the first control means is provided. A gaming machine B7 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B0 to B6, the following effects are played. That is, when a plurality of instructions of the same type are received from the first control means in a predetermined period, the destination instruction received from the first control means is invalidated by the prior instruction invalidation means provided in the instruction invalidation means. Be made. That is, the second control means is configured to perform control based on new (later) instructions received from the first control means. As a result, the second control means can invalidate the old instruction in the same type of instruction from the first control means and execute the control based on the newer instruction in the same type of instruction. 1 It is possible to execute control synchronized with the latest control content of the control means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a discrepancy in the production contents recognized by the first control means and the second control means, and to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not feel distrust. be

In any of the gaming machines B0 to B6
The instruction invalidation means is
When a plurality of the same type of instructions are received from the first control means in the predetermined period, the post-instruction invalidation means for invalidating the instructions after being received from the first control means is provided. A gaming machine B8 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B0 to B6, the following effects are played. That is, when a plurality of instructions of the same type are received from the first control means in a predetermined period, the instructions after being received from the first control means are invalidated by the post-instruction invalidation means provided in the instruction invalidation means. Be made. That is, the second control means is configured to execute control based on the destination instruction received from the first control means. As a result, the second control means can invalidate the later instruction in the same type of instruction from the first control means and execute the control based on the earlier instruction in the same type of instruction, so that the first control can be executed. It can be executed immediately without waiting for control based on the instruction transmitted from the means. Therefore, the player feels distrust by immediately executing the control in the second control means based on the instruction from the first control means and preventing the problem that the effect is not executed due to the standby process or the like. It has the effect of being able to provide a comfortable game that has never happened.

In the gaming machine B8
The post-instruction invalidation means is
When a predetermined first instruction is received from the first control means in the predetermined period, the first instruction reception setting means (for example, the determined flag 233m) for setting the reception setting information indicating that the first instruction has been received is set. )When,
When the reception setting information is set by the first instruction reception setting means, the second instruction reception determination means for determining whether or not the second instruction of the same type as the first instruction has been received, and the second instruction reception determination means.
When it is determined by the second instruction reception discriminating means that the second instruction has been received, the second instruction non-execution means for non-execution of the control based on the second instruction, and the second instruction non-execution means.
The first instruction reception canceling means for canceling the reception setting information by the first instruction reception setting means when the predetermined period ends while the reception setting information is set by the first instruction reception setting means. And, a gaming machine B9 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a predetermined first instruction is received from the first control means in a predetermined period, the reception setting information indicating that the first instruction is received by the first instruction reception setting means provided in the post-instruction invalidation means. Is set. Further, when the reception setting information is set by the first instruction reception setting means, the second instruction reception determination means determines whether or not the second instruction of the same type as the first instruction has been received. Then, when it is determined by the second instruction reception discriminating means that the second instruction has been received, the control based on the second instruction is non-executed by the second instruction non-execution means. Further, when the predetermined period ends while the reception setting information is set by the first instruction reception setting means, the reception setting information by the first instruction reception setting means is canceled by the first instruction reception canceling means. As a result, the second control means can invalidate the second instruction received after receiving the first instruction from the first control means, and execute only the control based on the first instruction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second control means from executing duplicated control based on a plurality of related instructions, and to reduce the control load of the second control means.

In any of the gaming machines B0 to B6
The first control means is
As an instruction regarding the effect means, a time information content instruction including time information indicating the execution time of the effect can be transmitted to the second control means.
The instruction invalidation means is
When a plurality of the same type of time information content instruction is received from the first control means in the predetermined period, the time information content instruction indicating the execution time is invalidated for a long time. The gaming machine B10, characterized in that it is provided with means.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B0 to B6, the following effects are played. That is, the first control means is configured to be able to transmit the time information inclusion instruction including the time information indicating the execution time of the effect to the second control means as an instruction regarding the effect means. Then, when a plurality of time information containing instructions of the same type are received from the first control means in a predetermined period, the time information indicating the execution time is longer by the long-time invalidation means provided in the instruction invalidation means. The information content instruction is invalidated.

Here, if an effect corresponding to the time information content instruction having a long execution time is executed, the effect having an execution time shorter than the execution time is actually instructed by the first control means. In that case, there is a possibility that another instruction may be received from the first control means while the effect of a long execution time is being executed by the effect means, and the effect being executed is suddenly changed (for example, stop display). This may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, it is actually executed by invalidating the time information content information of the longer execution time and executing the effect based on the time information content information of the shorter execution time as in the game machine B10. Even if an effect with an execution time longer than that of the first control means is instructed by the first control means, after the effect with a shorter execution time is completed (finished), until another instruction is received from the first control means. During that time, the second control means is controlled so that the final scene of the short execution time effect is continuously displayed. Therefore, even if the final scene of the short execution time production is continuously displayed, the player visually recognizes the scene as a part of the short execution time production, and sees the production in the production means without discomfort. It has the effect of being able to continue.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B10
The operating means
A change operation means (for example, a change button 22b) for changing the selected selection candidate to another selection candidate by being operated by the player during the execution of the selection effect is provided.
The first control means is
A first selection candidate storage means (for example, a music selection counter 223 g) for storing first selection candidate information regarding the selection candidate in the selection effect, and
Based on the change instruction means (for example, the operation of pressing the change button 22b) instructing the second control means to change the selection candidate when the change operation means is operated during the acceptable period. (Send change command), and
The second control means is
A second selection candidate storage means (for example, the selected music memory 233j) for storing the second selection candidate information regarding the selection candidate in the selection effect, and
When the change instruction means instructs the change of the selection candidate from the first control means, the second update means for updating the second selection candidate information of the second selection candidate storage means based on the instruction (the second update means). For example, S2208) of button operation command processing (S2111) and
A second update instruction means (for example, a sub-display change command) for instructing the first control means of the update information of the second selection candidate storage means updated by the second update means is provided.
The first control means is
When the update information of the second selection candidate storage means is instructed by the second control means by the second update instruction means, the first selection candidate information of the first selection candidate storage means is instructed based on the instruction. The gaming machine B11 is provided with a first updating means (for example, S1403 of display-side command processing (S1218)).

According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B1 to B10, the following effects are played. That is, the selected selection candidate is changed to another selection candidate by being operated by the player during the execution of the selection effect by the change operation means provided in the operation means. Further, the first selection candidate storage means provided in the first control means stores the first selection candidate information regarding the selection candidate in the selection effect, and the change instruction means also provided in the first control means allows the acceptance period. When the change operation means is operated, the change of the selection candidate is instructed from the first control means to the second control means. Further, the second selection candidate storage means provided in the second control means stores the second selection candidate information regarding the selection candidate in the selection effect. Then, when the change instruction means instructs the change of the selection candidate by the second update means provided in the second control means, the second selection candidate storage means second based on the instruction. The selection candidate information is updated. Further, the update information of the second selective storage means updated by the second update means is instructed to the first control means by the second update instruction means provided in the second control means. Then, when the first update means provided in the first control means instructs the update information of the second selection candidate storage means from the second control means by the second update instruction means, the first is based on the instruction. The first selection candidate information of the selection candidate storage means is updated.

That is, the first selection candidate information stored in the first control means is configured to be performed when the update information is instructed by the second control means. Therefore, in the second control means, even if the instruction is invalidated when the change of the selection candidate is instructed by the first control means, the second selection candidate information is updated from the second control means. It can be configured so that it is not instructed to the first control means. Therefore, when the second control means does not update the second selection candidate information based on the instruction from the first control means to change the selection candidate, the first selection candidate information stored in the first control means is updated. Therefore, even when the instruction for changing the selection candidate from the first control means is invalidated (not executed) by the second control means, the first selection candidate information stored in the first control means and the first selection candidate information There is an effect that the second selection candidate information stored in the second control means can be synchronized with each other, and the inconsistency in the production contents can be prevented from occurring.

In the gaming machine B11
The second update instruction means is
A second change instruction means (for example, a sub display change command) for instructing the first control means of the second selection candidate information of the second selection candidate storage means updated by the second update means is provided. ,
The first control means is
When the second selection candidate information of the second selection candidate storage means is instructed by the second control means by the second change instruction means, the first selection candidate storage means of the first selection candidate storage means is instructed based on the instruction. The gaming machine B12 comprises a first updating means for updating selection candidate information (for example, S1403 of display-side command processing (S1218)).

According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B11, the following effects are played. That is, the second change instruction means provided in the second update instruction means instructs the first control means of the second selection candidate information updated by the second update means. Then, when the first update means provided in the first control means instructs the second selection candidate information of the second selection candidate storage means from the second control means by the second change instruction means, based on the instruction. The first selection candidate information of the first selection candidate storage means is updated. That is, the first selection candidate information stored in the first control means is configured to be performed when the second selection candidate information is instructed by the second control means. Therefore, even if the second control means does not execute a part or all of the processing based on the instruction when the first control means instructs to change the selection candidate, the second control means gives the second control means. 2 It can be configured so that the selection candidate information is not instructed to the first control means. Therefore, when the second control means does not update the second selection candidate information based on the instruction from the first control means to change the selection candidate, the first selection candidate information stored in the first control means is updated. Therefore, even if the second control means ignores (does not execute) the instruction to change the selection candidate from the first control means, the first selection candidate information stored in the first control means and the first selection candidate information. There is an effect that it is possible to synchronize with the second selection candidate information stored by the two control means, and it is possible to prevent the inconsistency of the production contents from occurring.

In the game machine B12
The first updating means is
When the second selection candidate information of the second selection candidate storage means is instructed by the second control means by the second change instruction means, the second selection candidate information and the first selection candidate storage means A match determination means for determining whether or not the first selection candidate information matches, and a match determination means.
It is characterized by comprising an abnormality execution means for executing a predetermined abnormality process when it is determined by the matching determination means that the second selection candidate information and the first selection candidate information do not match. Game machine B13 to play.

According to the gaming machine B13, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B12, the following effects are played. That is, when the second selection candidate information of the second selection candidate storage means is instructed by the second control means by the second change instruction means, the second selection candidate information is provided by the matching determination means provided in the first update means. It is determined whether or not the information matches the first selection candidate information of the first selection candidate storage means. Then, when the match determination means determines that the second selection candidate information and the first selection candidate information do not match, the abnormality execution means executes a predetermined abnormality process. As a result, when the first selection candidate information and the second selection candidate information are not synchronized, predetermined abnormal processing (for example, initialization of the first selection candidate information and the second selection candidate information) is performed. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent a discrepancy in the production contents grasped by the first control means and the second control means.

In any of the gaming machines B13
The operating means
A determination operation means (for example, a determination button 22a) for determining the selected selection candidate as the determination effect by being operated by the player during the execution of the selection effect is provided.
The first control means is
A first decision effect storage means (for example, a decision music memory 223h) for storing the first decision effect information related to the decision effect in the selection effect.
Based on a decision instruction means (for example, a press operation of the decision button 22a) instructing the second control means from the first control means to determine the decision effect when the decision operation means is operated during the acceptable period. Sending a decision command),
The second control means is
A second decision effect storage means (for example, a display determination music memory 233k) for storing the second decision effect information related to the decision effect, and
When the determination instruction means instructs the determination of the determination effect from the first control means, the second selection candidate information stored in the second selection candidate storage means is stored in the second selection candidate storage means based on the instruction. 2 The second decision means (for example, S2203 of the button operation system command process (S2111)) stored in the second decision effect storage means as the decision effect information, and
A second determination instruction means (for example, a sub-display determination command) for instructing the first control means of the second determination effect information of the second determination effect storage means stored by the second determination means. Prepare,
The first control means is
When the second decision effect information of the second decision effect storage means is instructed by the second control means by the second decision instruction means, it is stored in the first selection candidate storage means based on the instruction. The first selection candidate information is stored in the first decision effect storage means as the first decision effect information (for example, S1404 of the display side command process (S1218)). Characteristic gaming machine B14.

According to the gaming machine B14, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B13. That is, the selection candidate selected is determined as the determination effect by being operated by the player during the execution of the selection effect by the determination operation means provided in the operation means. In addition, the first decision-making effect storage means provided in the first control means stores the first decision-making effect information regarding the decision-making effect in the selection effect. Further, when the decision operation means is operated during the acceptable period by the decision instruction means also provided in the first control means, the first control means instructs the second control means to decide the decision effect. Further, the second decision-making effect storage means provided in the second control means stores the second decision-making effect information regarding the decision-making effect. Further, when the determination instruction means instructs the determination of the decision effect by the second determination means provided in the second control means, the determination effect is stored in the second selection candidate storage means based on the instruction. The second selection candidate information is stored in the second determination effect storage means as the second determination effect information. Further, the second determination effect information of the second determination effect storage means determined by the second determination means is instructed to the first control means by the second determination instruction means provided in the second control means. Then, when the first determination means provided in the first control means instructs the second determination effect information of the second determination effect storage means from the second control means by the second determination instruction means, based on the instruction. The first selection candidate information stored in the first selection candidate storage means is stored in the first decision effect storage means as the first decision effect information.

That is, the determination of the first decision effect information stored in the first control means is configured to be performed when the decision information is instructed by the second control means. Therefore, in the second control means, even if the decision of the decision effect is instructed by the first control means and the instruction is invalidated, the second decision effect information is determined by the second control means. It can be configured so that it is not instructed to the first control means. Therefore, when the second control means does not determine the second decision effect information based on the instruction from the first control means to determine the decision effect, the first decision effect information stored in the first control means is determined. Therefore, even when the instruction of the decision effect from the first control means is invalidated (not executed) by the second control means, the first decision effect information stored in the first control means and the first decision effect information. There is an effect that it is possible to synchronize with the second determination effect information stored in the second control means, and it is possible to prevent a discrepancy in the effect contents from occurring.

In the gaming machine B14
The first determination means is
When the second decision-making effect information of the second decision-making effect storage means is instructed by the second decision-making instruction means, the second decision-making effect information and the first decision-making effect storage means. A determination match determination means for determining whether or not the first determination effect information matches.
The abnormal execution means is
The gaming machine B15 is characterized in that when it is determined by the determination match determination means that the second determination effect information and the first determination effect information do not match, a predetermined abnormality process is executed.

According to the gaming machine B15, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B14, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second decision-making instruction means instructs the second decision-making effect information of the second decision-making effect storage means, the decision-matching determination means provided in the first decision-making means provides the second decision-making effect. It is determined whether or not the information and the first determination effect information of the first determination effect storage means match. Then, when it is determined by the decision matching determination means that the second decision effect information and the first decision effect information do not match, the abnormality execution means executes a predetermined abnormality process. As a result, when the first decision effect information and the second decision effect information are not synchronized, predetermined abnormality processing (for example, initialization of the first decision effect information and the second decision effect information) is performed. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent a discrepancy in the production contents grasped by the first control means and the second control means.

<Main command and auxiliary command in the production of group C: 1, priority is given to control of the main command when the condition to generate both commands at the same time is satisfied, and execution of the auxiliary command is reserved>
A first control means (for example, a voice lamp control device 113 (or a main control device 110)) that controls a game, and
A second control means (for example, a display control device 114 (or a voice lamp control device 113)) that performs control based on an instruction from the first control means, and a second control means.
An effect executing means (for example, a third symbol display device 81) that causes various effects (for example, a variation effect of the third symbol or a “music selection” effect) to be executed based on the control by the second control means. In a gaming machine equipped with MPU231) of the display control device 114,
The first control means is
When a predetermined first condition (for example, a pressing operation of the decision button 22a) is satisfied, a main instruction generation means (for example, "for example," a main instruction generating means for generating a main instruction which is a main instruction regarding the various effects executed by the effect means. Generation of decision command in "Music selection" production) and
Auxiliary instruction generation means (for example, "musical piece") that generates an auxiliary instruction which is an auxiliary instruction regarding the various effects when a second condition different from the first condition (for example, a pressing operation of the change button 22b) is satisfied. (Generation of change command in "selection" effect), and
The second control means is
When the main instruction and the auxiliary instruction are received in a predetermined period, the main priority means for preferentially executing the control based on the main instruction (for example, S2202 of the button operation system command processing (S2111)).
Auxiliary reservation means (for example, S2207 of button operation system command processing (S2111)) that reserves execution of control based on the auxiliary instruction when the control based on the main instruction is preferentially executed by the main priority means. A game machine C0 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the gaming machine C0, the game is controlled by the first control means, and the control is performed by the second control means based on the instruction from the first control means. Further, various effects are executed in the effect means by the effect execution means based on the control by the second control means. Here, when a predetermined first condition is satisfied, the main instruction generation means provided in the first control means generates a main instruction which is a main instruction regarding various effects executed by the effect means. Further, when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the auxiliary instruction generation means also provided in the first control means generates an auxiliary instruction which is an auxiliary instruction regarding various effects. Then, when the main instruction and the auxiliary instruction are received in the predetermined period by the main priority means provided in the second control means, the control based on the main instruction is preferentially executed. Further, when the control based on the main instruction is preferentially executed by the main priority means, the execution of the control based on the auxiliary instruction is reserved by the auxiliary reservation means.

Conventionally, a main instruction regarding various effects generated under the first condition and an auxiliary instruction regarding various effects generated under a second condition different from the first condition may be generated in duplicate within a predetermined period. In such a case, for example, if the control based on the auxiliary instruction is executed after the control based on the main instruction is executed, the content of various effects determined based on the main instruction is changed again based on the auxiliary instruction. There is a risk that the content of the production will be inconsistent. In addition, the control content indicated by the main instruction may be rewritten by the auxiliary instruction which is an auxiliary existence of the main instruction.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine C0, when the main instruction and the auxiliary instruction generated under different conditions are received in a predetermined period, the control based on the main instruction is preferentially executed and the control based on the main instruction is executed. Is preferentially executed, the execution of control based on the auxiliary instruction, which is an auxiliary existence of the main instruction, is reserved.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the control content based on the main instruction from being rewritten by the auxiliary instruction, and it is possible to prevent a discrepancy in the production content from occurring. Further, when the control based on the main instruction is preferentially executed, the execution of the control based on the auxiliary instruction is reserved, so that there is an effect that the processing load in the second control means can be reduced.

Further, even if the first control means duplicately transmits the main instruction and the auxiliary instruction to the second control means in a predetermined period, the second control means side processes each of the instructions while processing the second instruction. Since the consistency between the 1 control means and the 2nd control means can be maintained, the 1st control means can transmit the main instruction and the auxiliary instruction without considering the unit processing time of the 2nd control means. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the creation of a program at the time of development of the first control means.

The "main instruction which is the main instruction regarding various effects" is an instruction which is indispensable for executing various effects, and specifically, for example, a start instruction for instructing the start of various effects (for example,). (Opening command), time instruction to indicate the execution time of various effects (for example, fluctuation pattern command), result instruction to indicate the result of various effects (for example, stop type command), and the player's intention in various effects are determined. Examples thereof include a decision instruction (for example, a decision command) indicating that the fact is true, and an abnormality instruction (for example, an error command) indicating an abnormal state in various effects.

Further, the "auxiliary instruction which is an auxiliary instruction regarding various effects" is an instruction which is not always necessary for executing various effects, that is, execution of various effects is established even when there is no such auxiliary instruction. It is an instruction, and specifically, for example, an end instruction (for example, a confirmation command) for instructing the end of various effects, or a substitute for the contents of various effects with another device (for example, the first symbol display device 37). An alternative instruction when notifying (for example, a hold ball number command), a status instruction indicating the execution status of various effects (for example, a grand prize command), or a change indicating that the player's intention in various effects is changed. Instructions (eg, change commands) and the like are exemplified.

In addition, "reserving the execution of control based on the auxiliary instruction" means that the execution of the control based on the auxiliary instruction is waited for a predetermined period (deferred or suspended), the control based on the auxiliary instruction is not executed, or the auxiliary instruction is executed. An example is the case where the control based on the instruction is interrupted or stopped.

In the gaming machine C0
In the effect means, a selection effect execution means (for example, a selection effect execution means) for presenting a plurality of selection candidates of a player and executing a selection effect (for example, a “music selection” effect) for the player to select one of the selection candidates. Selected music memory 233j) and
An operating means that can be operated by the player (for example, the enter button 22a or the change button 22b) and
An operation reception setting means (for example, a button valid timer 223d) for setting an acceptable period during which the operation of the operation means can be accepted during the execution of the selection effect, and
A selection decision means (for example, reception of a decision command based on a pressing operation of the decision button 22a) for determining the selection candidate based on the operation of the operation means during the acceptable period set by the operation reception setting means.
A determination effect execution means (for example, a display determination music memory 233k) for executing a determination effect (for example, a “music reproduction” effect) corresponding to the selection candidate determined by the selection determination means is provided.
The operating means
A change operation means (for example, a change button 22b) that changes the selected selection candidate to another selection candidate by being operated by the player during the execution of the selection effect by the selection effect execution means.
A determination operation means (for example, a determination button 22a) for determining the selected selection candidate by being operated by the player during the execution of the selection effect is provided.
The main instruction generation means is
A selection decision instruction generation means (for example, a decision button) that generates a decision instruction for determining the selected selection candidate based on the operation of the decision operation means during the acceptable period set by the operation reception setting means. Generation of a decision command based on the pressing operation of 22a),
The auxiliary instruction generation means is
Change instruction generation means for generating a selection change instruction for changing the selected selection candidate to another selection candidate based on the operation of the change operation means during the acceptable period set by the operation reception setting means. (For example, generation of a change command based on the operation of pressing the change button 22b).
The primary priority is
When the decision instruction and the selection change instruction are received in the predetermined period, the control based on the decision instruction is preferentially executed to determine the selected selection candidate.
The auxiliary reservation means is
A game characterized in that when the control regarding the determination of the selection candidate selected based on the determination instruction is preferentially executed by the main priority means, the execution of the control based on the selection change instruction is reserved. Machine C1.

According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the staging means, a selection staging that presents a plurality of selection candidates of the player and causes the player to select one of the selection candidates is executed by the selection staging execution means. Further, the operation means is configured to be operable by the player, and the acceptable period during which the operation of the operation means can be accepted during the execution of the selection effect is set by the operation reception setting means. Then, in the acceptable period set by the operation reception setting means, the selection candidate is determined by the selection determination means based on the operation of the operation means. Then, the decision effect corresponding to the selection candidate determined by the selection decision means is executed by the decision effect execution means. Here, the change operation means provided in the operation means is operated by the player during the execution of the selection effect, so that the selected selection candidate is changed to another selection candidate. Further, the determination operation means also provided in the operation means determines the selected selection candidate by being operated by the player during the execution of the selection effect. Then, the selection decision instruction generation means provided in the main instruction generation means determines the selected selection candidate based on the operation of the decision operation means during the acceptable period set by the operation reception setting means. Is generated. Then, by the change instruction generation means provided in the auxiliary instruction generation means, the selected selection candidates are selected as other selection candidates based on the operation of the change operation means during the acceptable period set by the operation reception setting means. A selection change instruction to change to is generated. Here, when the decision instruction and the selection change instruction are received by the main priority means, the control based on the decision instruction is preferentially executed, and the selected selection candidate is determined. Then, when the auxiliary reservation means preferentially executes the control regarding the determination of the selection candidate selected based on the decision instruction by the main priority means, the execution of the control based on the selection change instruction is reserved.

Conventionally, the decision-making operation means is operated during the execution of the selection effect, so that the decision-making instruction indicating the player's decision and the generation condition of the decision-making instruction are different conditions, and the conditions are different during the execution of the selection effect. By operating the change operation means, a selection change instruction indicating a change in the player's intention may be generated in duplicate within a predetermined period. In such a case, for example, if the control based on the selection change instruction is executed after the control based on the decision instruction is executed, the content of the selection effect determined based on the decision instruction is changed again based on the selection change instruction. There is a risk that there will be a discrepancy in the production content of the selection effect. In addition, the control content indicated by the decision instruction may be rewritten by the selection change instruction which is an auxiliary existence of the decision instruction.

In particular, the detection of the determination operation means and the change operation means in the first control means detects the operation by the player in a plurality of unit processing times (for example, 2 milliseconds) based on noise countermeasures, but the detection determination time is It is shorter than the unit processing time in the second control means, and there is a possibility that a determination instruction and a selection change instruction are received during the unit processing time of 1 in the second control means.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine C1, when the second control means receives the decision instruction and the selection change instruction generated under different conditions in a predetermined period, the control based on the decision instruction is preferentially executed. However, when the control based on the decision instruction is preferentially executed, the execution of the control based on the selection change instruction which is an auxiliary existence of the decision instruction is reserved.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the control content based on the decision instruction from being rewritten by the selection change instruction, and it is possible to prevent a discrepancy in the production content of the selection effect. effective. Further, when the control based on the decision instruction is preferentially executed, the execution of the control based on the selection change instruction is reserved, so that there is an effect that the processing load in the second control means can be reduced.

Further, even if the first control means duplicately transmits the determination instruction and the selection change instruction to the second control means in a predetermined period, the second control means side processes each of these instructions. Since the consistency between the first control means and the second control means can be maintained, the first control means can transmit the decision instruction and the selection change instruction without considering the unit processing time of the second control means. .. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the creation of a program at the time of development of the first control means.

In the gaming machine C1
When the acceptable period set by the operation reception setting means ends, the period end determination means for determining the selection candidate (for example, reception of a determination command based on the end of the "music selection" effect) is provided.
The determination effect execution means is
A decision effect (for example, a "music reproduction" effect) corresponding to the selection candidate determined by the selection determination means or the period end determination means is executed.
The main instruction generation means is
A decision command based on the end of the period end decision instruction generation means (for example, "music selection" effect) for generating a decision instruction for determining the selection candidate when the acceptable period set by the operation reception setting means ends. The gaming machine C2, characterized in that it is equipped with (generation).

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are played. That is, when the acceptable period set by the operation reception setting means ends, the selection candidate is determined by the period end determination means. Then, the decision effect corresponding to the selection candidate determined by the selection determination means or the period end determination means is executed by the decision effect execution means. The period end decision instruction generation means provided in the main instruction generation means generates a decision instruction for determining a selection candidate when the acceptable period set by the operation reception setting means ends. With such a configuration, at the end of the selection effect, the selection candidate can be reliably determined, and the continuous display of the selection effect due to the failure to determine the selection effect occurs. There is an effect that it is possible to surely prevent the occurrence of.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C2
The main instruction generation means is
An execution time instruction generation means (for example, generation of a variation pattern command) that generates an execution time instruction indicating the execution time of the predetermined effect executed by the effect execution means.
A result instruction generation means (for example, a stop type command) for generating a result instruction indicating the result of the predetermined effect executed by the effect execution means is provided.
The auxiliary instruction generation means is
An end instruction generation means (for example, generation of a confirmation command) for generating an end instruction indicating the end of the predetermined effect executed by the effect execution means is provided.
The primary priority is
When the execution time instruction, the result instruction, and the end instruction are received in the predetermined period, the control related to the predetermined effect is executed based on the execution time instruction or the result instruction.
The auxiliary reservation means is
The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that when the control related to the predetermined effect is preferentially executed based on the execution time instruction or the result instruction by the main priority means, the execution of the control based on the end instruction is reserved.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines C0 to C2, the following effects are played. That is, the execution time instruction generation means provided in the main instruction generation means generates an execution time instruction indicating the execution time of the predetermined effect executed by the effect execution means. Further, the result instruction generation means also provided in the main instruction generation means generates a result instruction indicating the result of the predetermined effect executed by the effect execution means. Further, the end instruction generation means provided in the auxiliary instruction generation means generates an end instruction indicating the end of the predetermined effect executed by the effect execution means. Here, when the execution time instruction or the result instruction and the end instruction are received by the main priority means, the control regarding the predetermined effect is executed based on the execution time instruction or the result instruction. Then, when the auxiliary reservation means preferentially executes the control related to the predetermined effect based on the execution time instruction or the result instruction by the main priority means, the execution of the control based on the end instruction is reserved.

Conventionally, due to the influence of noise or the like, in the second control means, an execution time instruction indicating the execution time of the predetermined effect, or a result instruction indicating the result of the predetermined effect, and an end instruction indicating the end of the predetermined effect are provided for a predetermined period (. For example, if duplicate reception is performed during (1 unit processing time), and if the control based on the execution time instruction or the result instruction is executed and then the control based on the end instruction is executed, an attempt is made to execute the control from now on. It is determined that the predetermined effect has been completed immediately, and there is a possibility that the predetermined effect is not substantially executed.

Therefore, according to the game machine C3, when the second control means receives the execution time instruction or the result instruction of the predetermined effect and the end instruction of the predetermined effect in the predetermined period, the execution time instruction or the result instruction is given. When the control based on the execution time instruction or the control based on the result instruction is preferentially executed, the control based on the end instruction which is an auxiliary existence of the execution time instruction or the result instruction is executed. Is configured to be reserved.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the control content based on the execution time instruction or the result instruction from ending immediately based on the end instruction, and it is possible to reliably execute the predetermined effect. effective. Further, when the control based on the execution time instruction or the result instruction is preferentially executed, the execution of the control based on the end instruction is reserved, so that the processing load on the second control means can be reduced. be.

Further, even if the first control means duplicately transmits the execution time instruction or the result instruction and the end instruction to the second control means in a predetermined period, each of them is performed on the second control means side. Since the consistency between the first control means and the second control means can be maintained while processing the instructions, the first control means can specify the execution time or the result without considering the unit processing time of the second control means. And, the end instruction can be sent. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the creation of a program at the time of development of the first control means.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C3
A special effect executing means (for example, a jackpot) for executing a special effect that imparts the game value when the special result is executed in the predetermined effect executed by the effect executing means is provided.
The main instruction generation means is
An execution instruction generating means (for example, an opening command or an opening command) that generates an execution instruction indicating an execution trigger of the special effect (for example, the start of a big hit or the opening of the big winning opening 65a) executed by the special effect executing means. Equipped with
The auxiliary instruction generation means is
A situation instruction generation means (for example, a big prize command or an ending command) for generating a situation instruction indicating an execution status (for example, a winning number or an end timing) of the special effect executed by the special effect executing means is provided.
The primary priority is
When the execution instruction and the situation instruction are received in the predetermined period, the control related to the special effect is executed based on the execution instruction, and the control is executed.
The auxiliary reservation means is
The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that when the control related to the special effect is preferentially executed based on the execution instruction by the main priority means, the execution of the control based on the situation instruction is reserved.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines C0 to C3, the following effects are played. That is, when a special result is executed in a predetermined effect executed by the effect executing means, the special effect executing means executes a special effect that imparts a game value. Then, the execution instruction generation means provided in the main instruction generation means generates an execution instruction indicating an execution trigger of the special effect executed by the special effect execution means. Further, the situation instruction generation means provided in the auxiliary instruction generation means generates a situation instruction indicating the execution status of the special effect executed by the special effect execution means. Here, when the execution instruction and the situation instruction are received by the main priority means, the control regarding the special effect is executed based on the execution instruction. Then, when the auxiliary reservation means preferentially executes the control related to the special effect based on the execution instruction by the main priority means, the execution of the control based on the situation instruction is reserved.

Conventionally, due to the influence of noise or the like, in the second control means, the execution instruction indicating the execution trigger of the special effect and the status instruction indicating the execution status of the special effect overlap during a predetermined period (for example, 1 unit processing time). If the control based on the status instruction is executed before the control based on the execution instruction is executed, the execution status of the special effect is notified even though the special effect is not executed. Therefore, there is a risk that the content of the production will be inconsistent.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine C4, when the second control means receives the execution instruction of the special effect and the status instruction of the special effect in a predetermined period, the control based on the execution instruction is preferentially executed. However, when the control based on the execution instruction is preferentially executed, the execution of the control based on the situation instruction which is an auxiliary existence of the execution instruction is reserved.

By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to prevent the status instruction of the special effect from being notified even though the control content based on the execution instruction of the special effect is not executed, and the effect content is inconsistent. Has the effect of preventing the occurrence of.

Further, as for the situation instruction, since the special effect itself is established without executing the control based on the situation instruction which is an auxiliary instruction of the special effect, it is not always necessary to execute the control based on the situation instruction. Therefore, when the control based on the execution instruction is preferentially executed, the execution of the control based on the status instruction is reserved, so that there is an effect that the processing load on the second control means can be reduced.

Further, even if the first control means duplicately transmits the execution time instruction or the result instruction and the end instruction to the second control means in a predetermined period, each of them is performed on the second control means side. Since the consistency between the first control means and the second control means can be maintained while processing the instructions, the first control means can specify the execution time or the result without considering the unit processing time of the second control means. And, the end instruction can be sent. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the creation of a program at the time of development of the first control means.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C4
The effect means is an image display means for displaying a predetermined image.
The second control means is
An image generation means (for example, an image controller 237) for generating an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means is provided, and an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means by the image generation means is provided for the predetermined period. The gaming machine C5, which is characterized in that it is a period during which the game is generated.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines C0 to C4, the following effects are played. That is, a predetermined image is displayed by the image display means as the effect means, and the image generation means provided in the second control means generates an image for one screen to be displayed by the image display means. Here, the period during which the image generation means generates an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means is defined as a predetermined period. That is, the second control means receives the main instruction and the auxiliary instruction regarding various effects from the first control means from the start to the end of the generation of the image for one screen displayed on the image display means. If so, the control based on the main instruction is preferentially executed, while the execution of the control based on the auxiliary instruction is reserved.

Conventionally, in the development of a game machine, the generation time for one screen of a moving image displayed by the mounted image display means is configured to be different in consideration of applications such as development budget and drawing accuracy. Specifically, in the case of a gaming machine with a small development budget, or a gaming machine using a video with little movement or a video that does not require smoothness of display, an image display in which one screen is generated with a slow generation time. Means are used. On the other hand, in the case of a gaming machine that uses a video with a large development budget and a video with a lot of movement or a video that requires smoothness of display, an image display means that generates display contents for one screen in a fast generation time is used. Has been done. Therefore, the generation time for one screen of the image display means is different for each model, and the time (unit processing time) required for controlling the second control means for controlling the image display means is also different.

On the other hand, the first control means for instructing the effect content to the second control means for controlling the image display means has roughly common specifications among different models in consideration of cost and development efficiency. Therefore, although the generation time for one screen of the staging means differs depending on the model, the unit processing time of the first control means is common, so that the instruction transmitted from the first control means is sent to the second control means. May cause problems when processed by.

Specifically, for example, in the case of the second control means in which the display content is generated with a slow generation time, the time required to generate one screen of the image display means is set long (for example, 50 milliseconds). Unit), the unit processing time of the second control means for controlling the image display means is also long, and the unit is processed based on the instruction while collectively processing the instructions received from the first control means in the unit processing time of the one. It is configured to control display such as image generation by the processing time. Therefore, the second control means that generates the display contents for one screen with a slow generation time generates one screen as compared with the second control means that generates the display contents for one screen with a fast generation time. The number of instructions received from the first control means may increase during execution. Therefore, the slower the generation speed of the second control means, the greater the processing load may be when the instructions from the first control means are concentrated while the generation for one screen is being performed.

Further, as described above, since the unit processing time of 1 in the first control means is shorter than the unit processing time of the second control means, a plurality of units are within the time required for drawing one screen by the second control means. It is configured to be able to send instructions. As a result, the number of instructions transmitted from the first control means to the second control means may be enormous.

In such a situation, for example, if the control based on the main instruction regarding various effects is performed and then the control based on the auxiliary instruction regarding the same various effects is executed, the content determined based on the main instruction is based on the auxiliary instruction. Since the control for changing the change is performed again, there is a possibility that the production contents of various productions may be inconsistent. In addition, the control content indicated by the main instruction may be rewritten by the auxiliary instruction.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine C5, the second control means receives the main instruction and the auxiliary instruction regarding various effects from the first control means from the start to the end of the generation for one screen. In some cases, the control based on the main instruction is preferentially executed, while the execution of the control based on the auxiliary instruction is reserved. Therefore, even when the main instruction and the auxiliary instruction of various effects are transmitted from the first control means to the second control means within the generation time for one screen, the control content based on the main instruction is assisted. There is an effect that it can be prevented from being rewritten by an instruction, and it is possible to prevent a discrepancy in the contents of the production. Further, when the control based on the main instruction is preferentially executed, the execution of the control based on the auxiliary instruction is reserved, so that there is an effect that the processing load in the second control means can be reduced. Further, by configuring the second control means, which is the control means on the downstream side, appropriate control can be executed even when the main instruction and the auxiliary instruction of various effects are received in one unit processing time. Since it is not necessary to execute complicated control (for example, a process of determining whether or not a main instruction is output) in the first control means which is the control means on the upstream side, the program at the time of development of each control means It has the effect of facilitating creation.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C4
The effect means is an image display means for displaying a predetermined image.
The second control means is
An image generation means (for example, an image controller 237) that generates an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means,
A one-screen display means (for example, a first frame buffer 236b) for displaying an image for one screen generated by the image generation means on the image display means is provided.
The predetermined period is a period from the start of displaying the image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means by the one-screen display means to the end of the display of the image for the one screen. The gaming machine C6.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines C0 to C4, the following effects are played. That is, a predetermined image is displayed by the image display means as the effect means, and the image generation means provided in the second control means generates an image for one screen to be displayed by the image display means. Then, the one-screen display means provided in the second control means displays the image for one screen generated by the image generation means as the image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means. Here, the period from the start of displaying the image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means by the one-screen display means to the end of the display of the image for the one screen is set as a predetermined period. That is, between the start and the end of the display of the image for one screen displayed on the image display means, the second control means receives the main instruction and the auxiliary instruction regarding various effects from the first control means, respectively. If so, the control based on the main instruction is preferentially executed, while the execution of the control based on the auxiliary instruction is reserved.

Conventionally, in the development of a game machine, the display time for one screen of a moving image displayed by the mounted image display means is configured to be different in consideration of applications such as development budget and drawing accuracy. Specifically, in the case of a gaming machine with a small development budget, or a gaming machine that uses a video with little movement or a video that does not require smoothness of display, an image display that displays one screen with a slow display time. Means are used. On the other hand, in the case of a gaming machine that uses a video with a large development budget and a video with a lot of movement or a video that requires smoothness of display, an image display means that displays the display content for one screen in a fast display time is used. Has been done. Therefore, the display time for one screen of the image display means is different for each model, and the time (unit processing time) required for controlling the second control means for controlling the image display means is also different.

On the other hand, the first control means for instructing the effect content to the second control means for controlling the image display means has roughly common specifications among different models in consideration of cost and development efficiency. Therefore, although the display time for one screen of the staging means differs depending on the model, the unit processing time of the first control means is common, so that the instruction transmitted from the first control means is sent to the second control means. May cause problems when processed by.

Specifically, for example, in the case of the second control means that is displayed with a slow display time, the time required for displaying one screen of the image display means is set to be long (for example, in units of 50 milliseconds). The unit processing time of the second control means for controlling the image display means is also long, and the instruction received from the first control means is collectively processed in the unit processing time of the first control means, and the unit processing time is based on the instruction. It is configured to control display such as image generation. Therefore, the second control means displayed at the slower display time is an instruction received from the first control means while executing the display for one screen as compared with the second control means displayed at the faster display time. The number may be large. Therefore, the slower the display speed of the second control means, the greater the processing load may be when the instructions from the first control means are concentrated while displaying one screen.

Further, as described above, since the unit processing time of 1 in the first control means is shorter than the unit processing time of the second control means, a plurality of units are within the time required for displaying one screen by the second control means. It is configured to be able to send instructions. As a result, the number of instructions transmitted from the first control means to the second control means may be enormous.

In such a situation, for example, if the control based on the main instruction regarding various effects is performed and then the control based on the auxiliary instruction regarding the same various effects is executed, the content determined based on the main instruction is based on the auxiliary instruction. Since the control for changing the change is performed again, there is a possibility that the production contents of various productions may be inconsistent. In addition, the control content indicated by the main instruction may be rewritten by the auxiliary instruction.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine C6, the second control means receives the main instruction and the auxiliary instruction regarding various effects from the first control means from the start to the end of the display for one screen. In some cases, the control based on the main instruction is preferentially executed, while the execution of the control based on the auxiliary instruction is reserved. Therefore, even when the main instruction and the auxiliary instruction of various effects are transmitted from the first control means to the second control means within the display time for one screen, the control content based on the main instruction is assisted. There is an effect that it can be prevented from being rewritten by an instruction, and it is possible to prevent a discrepancy in the contents of the production. Further, when the control based on the main instruction is preferentially executed, the execution of the control based on the auxiliary instruction is reserved, so that there is an effect that the processing load in the second control means can be reduced. Further, by configuring the second control means, which is the control means on the downstream side, appropriate control can be executed even when the main instruction and the auxiliary instruction of various effects are received in one unit processing time. Since it is not necessary to execute complicated control (for example, a process of determining whether or not a main instruction is output) in the first control means which is the control means on the upstream side, the program at the time of development of each control means It has the effect of facilitating creation.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C4
The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the predetermined period is a period from the start of the selection effect by the selection effect execution means to the start of the determination effect by the determination effect execution means.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines C1 to C4, the following effects are played. That is, the period from the execution of the selection effect by the selection effect execution means to the start of the decision effect by the decision effect execution means is set as a predetermined period. That is, when the second control means receives the main instruction and the auxiliary instruction from the first control means in duplicate between the start of the selection effect and the start of the decision effect, the main instruction is used. Priority is given to the execution of the control based on the auxiliary instruction, while the execution of the control based on the auxiliary instruction is reserved.

Conventionally, a main instruction (for example, a decision instruction) regarding a selection effect and an auxiliary instruction (for example, a selection change instruction) regarding a selection effect may be generated during execution of the selection effect. In such a case, for example, if the control based on the auxiliary instruction is executed after the control based on the main instruction is executed, the content of the selection candidate determined based on the main instruction is changed again based on the auxiliary instruction. There is a risk that the content of the production will be inconsistent. In addition, the control content indicated by the main instruction may be rewritten by the auxiliary instruction which is an auxiliary existence of the main instruction.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine C7, a main instruction (for example, a decision instruction) and an auxiliary instruction (for example, a selection change instruction) are received between the start of the selection effect and the start of the decision effect. If the control based on the main instruction is preferentially executed, and the control based on the main instruction is preferentially executed, the control based on the auxiliary instruction which is an auxiliary existence of the main instruction is executed. Configure to reserve.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the control content based on the main instruction (for example, the decision instruction) from being rewritten by the auxiliary instruction (for example, the selection change instruction), and a discrepancy in the production content occurs. It has the effect of being able to prevent it. Further, when the control based on the main instruction is preferentially executed, the execution of the control based on the auxiliary instruction is reserved, so that there is an effect that the processing load in the second control means can be reduced.

Further, the first control means gives a main instruction (for example, a decision instruction) and an auxiliary instruction (for example, a selection change instruction) to the second control means between the start of the selection effect and the start of the decision effect. ) Are duplicated, but the second control means can process each of these instructions while maintaining the consistency between the first control means and the second control means, so that the first control can be performed. The means can transmit the main instruction and the auxiliary instruction without considering the unit processing time of the second control means. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the creation of a program at the time of development of the first control means.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C4
The gaming machine C8 is characterized in that the predetermined period is a period from the start of the predetermined effect by the effect executing means to the end of the predetermined effect.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines C0 to C4, the following effects are played. That is, the period from the start of the predetermined effect by the effect executing means to the end of the predetermined effect is defined as the predetermined period. That is, when the main instruction (for example, the execution time instruction or the result instruction) and the auxiliary instruction (for example, the end instruction) are received between the start of the predetermined effect and the end of the predetermined effect, respectively. When the control based on the main instruction is preferentially executed and the control based on the main instruction is preferentially executed, the execution of the control based on the auxiliary instruction which is an auxiliary existence of the main instruction is reserved. do.

With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to prevent the control content based on the execution time instruction or the result instruction from being immediately terminated based on the end instruction, and it is possible to reliably execute the predetermined effect. , Has the effect. Further, when the control based on the main instruction (execution time instruction or result instruction) is preferentially executed, the processing load on the second control means can be reduced by reserving the execution of the control based on the auxiliary instruction. , Has the effect.

Further, even when the first control means duplicately transmits a main instruction (for example, an execution time instruction or a result instruction) and an auxiliary instruction (for example, an end instruction) to the second control means, the first control means may transmit the main instruction (for example, an execution time instruction or a result instruction) in duplicate. Since the second control means can maintain the consistency between the first control means and the second control means while processing each of these instructions, the first control means considers the unit processing time of the second control means. Main instructions and auxiliary instructions can be sent without any need. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the creation of a program at the time of development of the first control means.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C4
The gaming machine C9 is characterized in that the predetermined period is a period from the execution of the special effect by the special effect executing means to the end of the special effect.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines C0 to C4, the following effects are played. That is, the period from the start of the special effect by the special effect executing means to the end of the special effect is set as a predetermined period. That is, between the start and the end of the special effect in which the game value is added, the second control means receives a main instruction (for example, an opening command or an opening command) and an auxiliary instruction (for example) from the first control means. , Grand prize command and ending command), respectively, while the control based on the main instruction is preferentially executed, the execution of the control based on the auxiliary instruction is reserved.

With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to prevent the control content based on the execution instruction from ending immediately based on the situation instruction, and it is possible to reliably execute the special effect. be. Further, when the control based on the main instruction is preferentially executed, the execution of the control based on the auxiliary instruction is reserved, so that there is an effect that the processing load in the second control means can be reduced.

Further, even when the first control means duplicately transmits a main instruction (for example, an execution instruction) and an auxiliary instruction (for example, a situation instruction) to the second control means, the second control means Since the consistency between the first control means and the second control means can be maintained while processing each of these instructions on the side, the first control means is the main instruction without considering the unit processing time of the second control means. And can send auxiliary instructions. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the creation of a program at the time of development of the first control means.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C9
The operating means
A change operation means (for example, a change button 22b) for changing the selected selection candidate to another selection candidate by being operated by the player during the execution of the selection effect is provided.
The first control means is
A first selection candidate storage means (for example, a music selection counter 223 g) for storing first selection candidate information regarding the selection candidate in the selection effect, and
Based on the change instruction means (for example, the operation of pressing the change button 22b) instructing the second control means to change the selection candidate when the change operation means is operated during the acceptable period. (Send change command), and
The second control means is
A second selection candidate storage means (for example, the selected music memory 233j) for storing the second selection candidate information regarding the selection candidate in the selection effect, and
When the change instruction means instructs the change of the selection candidate from the first control means, the second update means for updating the second selection candidate information of the second selection candidate storage means based on the instruction (the second update means). For example, S2208) of button operation command processing (S2111) and
A second update instruction means (for example, a sub-display change command) for instructing the first control means of the update information of the second selection candidate storage means updated by the second update means is provided.
The first control means is
When the update information of the second selection candidate storage means is instructed by the second control means by the second update instruction means, the first selection candidate information of the first selection candidate storage means is instructed based on the instruction. The gaming machine C10 is provided with a first updating means (for example, S1403 of display-side command processing (S1218)).

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines C1 to C9, the following effects are played. That is, the selected selection candidate is changed to another selection candidate by being operated by the player during the execution of the selection effect by the change operation means provided in the operation means. Further, the first selection candidate storage means provided in the first control means stores the first selection candidate information regarding the selection candidate in the selection effect, and the change instruction means also provided in the first control means allows the acceptance period. When the change operation means is operated, the change of the selection candidate is instructed from the first control means to the second control means. Further, the second selection candidate storage means provided in the second control means stores the second selection candidate information regarding the selection candidate in the selection effect. Then, when the change instruction means instructs the change of the selection candidate by the second update means provided in the second control means, the second selection candidate storage means second based on the instruction. The selection candidate information is updated. Further, the update information of the second selective storage means updated by the second update means is instructed to the first control means by the second update instruction means provided in the second control means. Then, when the first update means provided in the first control means instructs the update information of the second selection candidate storage means from the second control means by the second update instruction means, the first is based on the instruction. The first selection candidate information of the selection candidate storage means is updated.

That is, the first selection candidate information stored in the first control means is configured to be performed when the update information is instructed by the second control means. Therefore, in the second control means, even if the instruction is invalidated when the change of the selection candidate is instructed by the first control means, the second selection candidate information is updated from the second control means. It can be configured so that it is not instructed to the first control means. Therefore, when the second control means does not update the second selection candidate information based on the instruction from the first control means to change the selection candidate, the first selection candidate information stored in the first control means is updated. Therefore, even when the instruction for changing the selection candidate from the first control means is invalidated (not executed) by the second control means, the first selection candidate information stored in the first control means and the first selection candidate information There is an effect that the second selection candidate information stored in the second control means can be synchronized with each other, and the inconsistency in the production contents can be prevented from occurring.

In the gaming machine C10
The second update instruction means is
A second change instruction means (for example, a sub display change command) for instructing the first control means of the second selection candidate information of the second selection candidate storage means updated by the second update means is provided. ,
The first control means is
When the second selection candidate information of the second selection candidate storage means is instructed by the second control means by the second change instruction means, the first selection candidate storage means of the first selection candidate storage means is instructed based on the instruction. The gaming machine C11 is provided with a first updating means for updating selection candidate information (for example, S1403 of display-side command processing (S1218)).

According to the gaming machine C11, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C10. That is, the second change instruction means provided in the second update instruction means instructs the first control means of the second selection candidate information updated by the second update means. Then, when the first update means provided in the first control means instructs the second selection candidate information of the second selection candidate storage means from the second control means by the second change instruction means, based on the instruction. The first selection candidate information of the first selection candidate storage means is updated. That is, the first selection candidate information stored in the first control means is configured to be performed when the second selection candidate information is instructed by the second control means. Therefore, even if the second control means does not execute a part or all of the processing based on the instruction when the first control means instructs to change the selection candidate, the second control means gives the second control means. 2 It can be configured so that the selection candidate information is not instructed to the first control means. Therefore, when the second control means does not update the second selection candidate information based on the instruction from the first control means to change the selection candidate, the first selection candidate information stored in the first control means is updated. Therefore, even if the second control means ignores (does not execute) the instruction to change the selection candidate from the first control means, the first selection candidate information stored in the first control means and the first selection candidate information. There is an effect that it is possible to synchronize with the second selection candidate information stored by the two control means, and it is possible to prevent the inconsistency of the production contents from occurring.

In the game machine C11
The first updating means is
When the second selection candidate information of the second selection candidate storage means is instructed by the second control means by the second change instruction means, the second selection candidate information and the first selection candidate storage means A match determination means for determining whether or not the first selection candidate information matches, and a match determination means.
It is characterized by comprising an abnormality execution means for executing a predetermined abnormality process when it is determined by the matching determination means that the second selection candidate information and the first selection candidate information do not match. Game machine C12 to play.

According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C11, the following effects are played. That is, when the second selection candidate information of the second selection candidate storage means is instructed by the second control means by the second change instruction means, the second selection candidate information is provided by the matching determination means provided in the first update means. It is determined whether or not the information matches the first selection candidate information of the first selection candidate storage means. Then, when the match determination means determines that the second selection candidate information and the first selection candidate information do not match, the abnormality execution means executes a predetermined abnormality process. As a result, when the first selection candidate information and the second selection candidate information are not synchronized, predetermined abnormal processing (for example, initialization of the first selection candidate information and the second selection candidate information) is performed. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent a discrepancy in the production contents grasped by the first control means and the second control means.

In any of the gaming machines C12
The operating means
A determination operation means (for example, a determination button 22a) for determining the selected selection candidate as the determination effect by being operated by the player during the execution of the selection effect is provided.
The first control means is
A first decision effect storage means (for example, a decision music memory 223h) for storing the first decision effect information related to the decision effect in the selection effect.
Based on a decision instruction means (for example, a press operation of the decision button 22a) instructing the second control means from the first control means to determine the decision effect when the decision operation means is operated during the acceptable period. Sending a decision command),
The second control means is
A second decision effect storage means (for example, a display determination music memory 233k) for storing the second decision effect information related to the decision effect, and
When the determination instruction means instructs the determination of the determination effect from the first control means, the second selection candidate information stored in the second selection candidate storage means is stored in the second selection candidate storage means based on the instruction. 2 The second decision means (for example, S2203 of the button operation system command process (S2111)) stored in the second decision effect storage means as the decision effect information, and
A second determination instruction means (for example, a sub-display determination command) for instructing the first control means of the second determination effect information of the second determination effect storage means stored by the second determination means. Prepare,
The first control means is
When the second decision effect information of the second decision effect storage means is instructed by the second control means by the second decision instruction means, it is stored in the first selection candidate storage means based on the instruction. The first selection candidate information is stored in the first decision effect storage means as the first decision effect information (for example, S1404 of the display side command process (S1218)). Characteristic gaming machine C13.

According to the gaming machine C13, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C12. That is, the selection candidate selected is determined as the determination effect by being operated by the player during the execution of the selection effect by the determination operation means provided in the operation means. Further, the first decision-making effect storage means provided in the first control means stores the first decision-making effect information regarding the decision-making effect in the selection effect. Further, when the decision operation means is operated during the acceptable period by the decision instruction means also provided in the first control means, the first control means instructs the second control means to decide the decision effect. Further, the second decision-making effect storage means provided in the second control means stores the second decision-making effect information regarding the decision-making effect. Further, when the determination instruction means instructs the determination of the decision effect by the second determination means provided in the second control means, the determination effect is stored in the second selection candidate storage means based on the instruction. The second selection candidate information is stored in the second determination effect storage means as the second determination effect information. Further, the second determination effect information of the second determination effect storage means determined by the second determination means is instructed to the first control means by the second determination instruction means provided in the second control means. Then, when the first determination means provided in the first control means instructs the second determination effect information of the second determination effect storage means from the second control means by the second determination instruction means, based on the instruction. The first selection candidate information stored in the first selection candidate storage means is stored in the first decision effect storage means as the first decision effect information.

That is, the determination of the first decision effect information stored in the first control means is configured to be performed when the decision information is instructed by the second control means. Therefore, in the second control means, even if the decision of the decision effect is instructed by the first control means and the instruction is invalidated, the second decision effect information is determined by the second control means. It can be configured so that it is not instructed to the first control means. Therefore, when the second control means does not determine the second decision effect information based on the instruction from the first control means to determine the decision effect, the first decision effect information stored in the first control means is determined. Therefore, even when the instruction of the decision effect from the first control means is invalidated (not executed) by the second control means, the first decision effect information stored in the first control means and the first decision effect information. There is an effect that it is possible to synchronize with the second determination effect information stored in the second control means, and it is possible to prevent a discrepancy in the effect contents from occurring.

In the gaming machine C13
The first determination means is
When the second decision-making effect information of the second decision-making effect storage means is instructed by the second decision-making instruction means, the second decision-making effect information and the first decision-making effect storage means. A determination match determination means for determining whether or not the first determination effect information matches.
The abnormal execution means is
The gaming machine C14 is characterized in that when it is determined by the determination match determination means that the second determination effect information and the first determination effect information do not match, a predetermined abnormality process is executed.

According to the gaming machine C14, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C13. That is, when the second decision-making instruction means instructs the second decision-making effect information of the second decision-making effect storage means, the decision-matching determination means provided in the first decision-making means provides the second decision-making effect. It is determined whether or not the information and the first determination effect information of the first determination effect storage means match. Then, when it is determined by the decision matching determination means that the second decision effect information and the first decision effect information do not match, the abnormality execution means executes a predetermined abnormality process. As a result, when the first decision effect information and the second decision effect information are not synchronized, predetermined abnormality processing (for example, initialization of the first decision effect information and the second decision effect information) is performed. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent a discrepancy in the production contents grasped by the first control means and the second control means.

<Group D: Control based on the relative relationship of each command when multiple commands are received in one frame>
A first control means (for example, a voice lamp control device 113 (or a main control device 110)) that controls a game based on various processes executed at predetermined first unit processing times.
A second control means (for example, a display control device 114 (or a voice lamp control device 113) that controls each second unit processing time different from the first unit processing time based on a control command from the first control means. ))When,
An image display means (for example, a third symbol display device 81) that displays an image based on control by the second control means, and
In a gaming machine provided with a display execution means (for example, MPU231 of the display control device 114) for displaying various effects (for example, a variation effect of a third symbol or a “music selection” effect) on the image display means.
The second control means is
A command receiving means (for example, an input / output port 238) configured to be able to receive a plurality of the control commands from the first control means within the second unit processing time of 1.
When the control command from the first control means is received at the first control timing (for example, the timing of "A" of the V blank interrupt process) which is the predetermined second unit processing time, the first control command is received. At the second control timing next to the control timing (for example, the timing of "B" of the V blank interrupt process), the next timing control means (for example, the next timing control means) that executes the control based on the control command received at the first control timing. V blank interrupt processing) and
When the control based on the control command received by the next timing control means is performed and the plurality of control commands are received from the first control means, the relationship between each of the received plurality of the control commands. The gaming machine D0 is characterized by comprising a relationship determination executing means (for example, a command determination process (S2022)) for executing control based on the above.

According to the gaming machine D0, the game is controlled by the first control means based on various processes executed every predetermined first unit processing time, and based on the control command from the first control means, the game is controlled. The second control means controls each second unit processing time, which is different from the first unit processing time. Further, the image is displayed in the image display means based on the control by the second control means. Here, the command receiving means provided in the second control means is configured to be able to receive a plurality of control commands from the first control means within the second unit processing time of 1. Further, when a control command from the first control means is received in the first control timing which is a predetermined second unit processing time, the next timing control means causes the second control timing following the first control timing. Control based on the control command received at the first control timing is executed. Then, in the case of performing control based on the control command received by the next timing control means, when a plurality of control commands are received from the first control means, the relationship determination execution means transfers the received plurality of control commands. Control is performed based on each relationship.

Conventionally, in the development of a game machine, the drawing time for one screen of a moving image displayed by the mounted image display means is configured to be different in consideration of applications such as development budget and drawing accuracy. Specifically, in the case of a gaming machine with a small development budget, or a gaming machine using a video with little movement or a video that does not require smoothness of display, an image display in which one screen is drawn with a slow drawing time. Means are used. On the other hand, in the case of a gaming machine that uses a video with a large development budget and a video with a lot of movement or a video that requires smoothness of display, an image display means that draws the display content for one screen in a fast drawing time is used. Has been done. Therefore, the drawing time for one screen of the image display means is different for each model, and the unit processing time required for controlling the second control means for controlling the image display means is also different.

On the other hand, the first control means for instructing the effect content to the second control means for controlling the image display means has roughly common specifications among different models in consideration of cost and development efficiency. Therefore, although the drawing time for one screen of the staging means differs depending on the model, the unit processing time of the first control means is common, so that the control command transmitted from the first control means is controlled by the second control. Problems can occur when the means handle it.

Specifically, for example, in the case of the second control means that draws (generates or displays; the same applies hereinafter) with a slow drawing time (generation time or display time; the same applies hereinafter), one screen of the image display means. Since the time required for drawing the minute is set to be long, the unit processing time of the second control means for controlling the image display means is also long, and the control commands received from the first control means are summarized in the unit processing time of the one. It is configured to perform display control such as drawing in the unit processing time based on the control command while processing. Therefore, the second control means drawn with a slow drawing time is controlled to receive from the first control means while drawing for one screen as compared with the second control means drawn with a fast drawing time. The number of commands may increase. Therefore, the slower the drawing speed of the second control means, the greater the processing load may be when the control commands from the first control means are concentrated while drawing for one screen.

Further, as described above, since the unit processing time of 1 in the first control means is shorter than the unit processing time of the second control means, a plurality of units are within the time required for drawing one screen by the second control means. It is configured to be able to send control commands. As a result, the number of control commands transmitted from the first control means to the second control means may be enormous.

In such a situation, for example, if control is performed in the order of received control commands, there is a possibility that control commands that should not be received originally may be executed due to the influence of noise or the like. There is a risk that the effects to be executed will be changed and the contents of the various effects will be inconsistent.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine D0, when a plurality of control commands are received in the second unit processing time of 1 in the second control means, the control is executed based on the relationship of each of the plurality of control commands. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, for example, when various effects are executed based on predetermined control commands, when control commands unrelated to the various effects are received, control based on the unrelated control commands can be performed. By limiting the effect, it is possible to prevent an effect that should not be executed from being executed, and it is possible to prevent a discrepancy in the contents of the effect. Further, in the second control means which is the control means on the downstream side, the first control means which is the control means on the upstream side is configured so that appropriate control can be executed even when a plurality of control commands are received. Since it is not necessary to execute complicated control (for example, a process of determining whether or not a duplicate control command is output) in the above, it is possible to facilitate the creation of a program at the time of development of each control means. effective.

The "relationship of each of the received plurality of control commands" is whether or not the plurality of control commands are related to the same effect and whether or not the plurality of control commands have a master-slave relationship with one effect. Whether or not, the degree of importance of the plurality of control commands to each game, or whether or not the plurality of control commands match, and the like are exemplified.

In the gaming machine D0
The relationship discrimination execution means is
When a plurality of the control commands related to the predetermined various effects are received at the first control timing, the control based on the control commands related to the various effects received earlier is executed at the second control timing. First-run means and
When the control related to the various effects is executed by the prior execution means, the post-restricting means for limiting the execution of the control based on the control command related to the various effects received later at the second control timing is provided. The gaming machine D1 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D0, the following effects are played. That is, when a plurality of control commands related to predetermined various effects are received in the first control timing, various types received earlier in the second control timing by the prior execution means provided in the relationship determination execution means. Control based on the control command related to the effect is executed. Then, when the control related to various effects is executed by the first execution means, the execution of the control based on the control command related to various effects received later is restricted by the post-restricting means at the second control timing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the control contents based on the control commands related to the various effects received earlier from being rewritten by the control commands related to the various effects received later, and to prevent the production contents from being inconsistent. It has the effect of being able to. Further, when the control based on the control commands related to the various effects received earlier is executed, the processing load on the second control means is reduced by limiting the execution of the control based on the control commands related to the various effects received later. It has the effect of being able to.

Further, even if the first control means duplicately transmits control commands related to various effects, the first control means and the second control means while appropriately processing those control commands on the second control means side. Since the consistency with the above can be maintained, the first control means can transmit the control command without considering the unit processing time of the second control means. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the creation of a program at the time of development of the first control means.

Note that "restricting the execution of control based on control commands" means that the execution of control based on control commands is waited for a predetermined period (deferred, reserved or held), or control based on control commands is not executed, or , The case where the control based on the control command is interrupted or stopped is exemplified.

In the gaming machine D0
The first control means is
When a predetermined first condition (for example, pressing operation of the decision button 22a) is satisfied, a main instruction generation means (for example, a decision command in the "music selection" effect) that generates a main instruction which is a main instruction regarding the various effects is satisfied. Generation) and
Auxiliary instruction generation means (for example, "musical piece") that generates an auxiliary instruction which is an auxiliary instruction regarding the various effects when a second condition different from the first condition (for example, a pressing operation of the change button 22b) is satisfied. (Generation of change command in "selection" effect), and
The relationship discrimination execution means is
When the main instruction and the auxiliary instruction are received at the first control timing, the main execution means for executing the control based on the main instruction at the second control timing (for example, button operation command processing (S2111)). ) S2202) and
When the control based on the main instruction is executed by the main execution means, the auxiliary limiting means (for example, button operation system command processing (S2111)) that restricts the execution of the control based on the auxiliary instruction at the second control timing. S2207), and a gaming machine D2 characterized by being provided with.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D0, the following effects are played. That is, when the predetermined first condition is satisfied, the main instruction generation means provided in the first control means generates the main instruction which is the main instruction regarding various effects. Further, when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied by the auxiliary instruction generating means also provided in the first control means, the auxiliary instruction which is an auxiliary instruction regarding various effects is generated. Then, when the main instruction and the auxiliary instruction are received at the first control timing by the main execution means provided in the relationship determination execution means, the control based on the main instruction is executed at the second control timing. Further, when the control based on the main instruction is executed by the main execution means, the auxiliary limiting means limits the execution of the control based on the auxiliary instruction at the second control timing.

Conventionally, a main instruction regarding various effects generated under the first condition and an auxiliary instruction regarding various effects generated under a second condition different from the first condition may be generated in duplicate at the first control timing. .. In such a case, for example, in the second control means, if the control based on the main instruction is executed and then the control based on the auxiliary instruction is executed, the contents of various effects determined based on the main instruction are used as the auxiliary instruction. Based on this, control is performed to change the result again, and there is a risk that the content of the production will be inconsistent. In addition, the control content indicated by the main instruction may be rewritten by the auxiliary instruction which is an auxiliary existence of the main instruction.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine D2, when the second control means receives the main instruction and the auxiliary instruction generated under different conditions at the first control timing, the second control means becomes the main instruction at the second control timing. When the control based on the main instruction is executed and the control based on the main instruction is executed, the execution of the control based on the auxiliary instruction which is an auxiliary existence of the main instruction is restricted.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the control content based on the main instruction from being rewritten by the auxiliary instruction, and it is possible to prevent a discrepancy in the production content from occurring. Further, when the control based on the main instruction is executed, the processing load on the second control means can be reduced by limiting the execution of the control based on the auxiliary instruction.

Further, even if the first control means duplicately transmits the main instruction and the auxiliary instruction to the second control means at the first control timing, the first control means processes each of these instructions on the second control means side. At the same time, since the consistency between the first control means and the second control means can be maintained, the first control means can transmit the main instruction and the auxiliary instruction without considering the unit processing time of the second control means. .. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the creation of a program at the time of development of the first control means.

The "main instruction which is the main instruction regarding various effects" is an instruction which is indispensable for executing various effects, and specifically, for example, a start instruction for instructing the start of various effects (for example,). (Opening command), time instruction to indicate the execution time of various effects (for example, fluctuation pattern command), result instruction to indicate the result of various effects (for example, stop type command), and the player's intention in various effects are determined. Examples thereof include a decision instruction (for example, a decision command) indicating that the fact is true, and an abnormality instruction (for example, an error command) indicating an abnormal state in various effects.

Further, the "auxiliary instruction which is an auxiliary instruction regarding various effects" is an instruction which is not always necessary for executing various effects, that is, execution of various effects is established even when there is no such auxiliary instruction. It is an instruction, and specifically, for example, an end instruction (for example, a confirmation command) for instructing the end of various effects, or a substitute for the contents of various effects with another device (for example, the first symbol display device 37). An alternative instruction when notifying (for example, a hold ball number command), a status instruction indicating the execution status of various effects (for example, a grand prize command), or a change indicating that the player's intention in various effects is changed. Instructions (eg, change commands) and the like are exemplified.

In the gaming machine D0
The relationship discrimination execution means is
When the control command related to the first effect, which is various effects, and the control command related to the second effect, which is less important for the game than the first effect, are received at the first control timing, the first control command is received. 2 At the control timing, the first effect execution means for executing the control based on the control command regarding the first effect, and the first effect execution means.
When the control related to the first effect is executed by the first effect executing means, the second effect limiting means for limiting the execution of the control based on the control command related to the second effect at the second control timing. A gaming machine D3 characterized by being equipped.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D0, the following effects are played. That is, when the control command related to the first effect, which is various effects, and the control command related to the second effect, which is less important for the game than the first effect, are received at the first control timing, the relationship determination execution is executed. The first effect executing means provided in the means executes control based on the control command related to the first effect at the second control timing. Further, when the control related to the first effect is executed by the first effect executing means, the execution of the control based on the control command related to the second effect is restricted by the second effect limiting means at the second control timing. As a result, although the execution of the first effect, which is relatively important for the game, is instructed, the second effect, which is less important for the game than the first effect, is executed apart from the first effect. It has the effect of being able to limit what is being done. Further, when the control based on the control command related to the first effect is executed, the processing load on the second control means can be reduced by limiting the execution of the control based on the control command related to the second effect. effective.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3
The second control means is
A first display specifying means (for example, a display data table) that specifies a first display type (for example, display data table 232a1) to be displayed in the image display means based on a first control command received from the first control means. Buffer 233b) and
A second display to be added to the image of the first display type specified by the first display specifying means based on a second control command different from the first control command received from the first control means. A second display specifying means (for example, additional data table buffer 233c) for specifying a display type (for example, additional data table 232a2) and
Based on the first display type specified by the first display specifying means and the second display type specified by the second display specifying means, the image display means is used for each second unit processing time. An image information generation means (for example, a drawing list) that generates image information for one screen to be displayed in
An image drawing means (for example, a first frame buffer) that draws an image for one screen displayed on the image display means every second unit processing time based on the image information generated by the image information generation means. 236b) and
The relationship discrimination execution means is
When the control based on the second control command is restricted, the second specific non-execution means for non-execution of the specification of the second display type by the second display specifying means is provided. Game machine D4.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are played. That is, the first display specifying means provided in the second control means specifies the first display type to be displayed in the image display means based on the first control command received from the first control means. Further, the second display specifying means also provided in the second control means is specified by the first display specifying means based on a second control command different from the first control command received from the first control means. The second display type to be displayed in addition to the image of the first display type is specified. Further, based on the first display type specified by the first display specifying means and the second display type specified by the second display specifying means, the image information generation means uses the image information generation means to generate an image for each second unit processing time. Image information for one screen to be displayed on the display means is generated. Then, based on the image information generated by the image information generation means, the image drawing means draws an image for one screen displayed on the image display means every second unit processing time. Here, when the control based on the second control command is restricted by the second specific non-execution means provided in the relationship determination execution means, the specification of the second display type by the second display identification means is not executed. Is configured to. As a result, when the control based on the second control command is restricted by the relationship discrimination execution means, it is assumed that there is no second specific type to be displayed in addition to the first display type, and the image information generation means is used for one screen. Image information is generated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the content of the first display type specified based on the first control command from being additionally changed by the second display type specified based on the second control command. It has the effect of preventing content discrepancies.

In the gaming machine D4
The relationship discrimination execution means is
Whether or not the second display type specified based on the second control command is related to the first display type specified based on the first control command when the second control command is received. Relevance determination means to determine whether
When the second display type specified based on the second control command is determined by the relevance determination means to be unrelated to the first display type, the second specific non-execution means determines that the second display type is not related to the first display type. A gaming machine D5 comprising: a non-related specific non-execution means for which a second display type is non-specific.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D4, the following effects are played. That is, when the second control command is received by the relevance determination means provided in the relationship determination execution means, the second display type specified based on the second control command is based on the first control command. Whether or not it is related to the specified first display type is determined. Then, when it is determined by the relevance determination means that the second display type specified based on the second control command is not related to the first display type, the non-relationship determination execution means is provided. The second specific non-execution means makes the second display type non-specific by the second specific non-execution means. That is, when the first control command and the second control command are received within the second unit processing time, the first display type specified based on the first control command is based on the second control command. When the second display type specified in the above is related, the image is displayed based on the first display type and the second display type. On the other hand, if the second display type specified based on the second control command is not related to the first display type specified based on the first control command, the second display based on the second control command is not related. The type is not specified, and the image is displayed based on the first display type specified based on the first control command. As a result, the second display type that is not related to the first display type specified based on the first control command can be prevented from being displayed, and the first display type specified based on the first control command can be set. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent additional changes due to the second display type that is not related to the first display type, and it is possible to prevent inconsistencies in the production contents.

In the gaming machine D4 or D5
The relationship discrimination execution means is
When the first display type is specified by the first display specifying means, the first specified non-execution means that makes the first display type non-specific based on another control command for a predetermined period. A gaming machine D6 characterized by being equipped.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D4 or D5, the following effects are played. That is, when the first display type is specified by the first display specifying means by the first specified non-execution means provided in the relationship determination executing means, the first is based on another control command for a predetermined period. The display type is configured to be unspecified. As a result, once the first display type is specified, the first display type is not specified based on other control commands for a predetermined period, so that the first display type is once specified and displayed. The image can continue to be displayed without being switched to another first display type for at least a predetermined period of time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display content specified by the control command of 1 from being immediately changed by another control command, and it is possible to reliably execute the effect based on the control command of 1. There is.

The term "during a predetermined period" means, for example, until at least one or more second unit processing times have elapsed, at least until the results of various effects being executed appear, or in advance. For example, until the specified time (for example, 1 second) elapses.

<Group E: A mode related to the content of the first effect being executed when the second effect executed based on the second condition is executed during the execution of the first effect executed based on the first condition. Perform the second production with>
An acquisition means (for example, the first ball entry port 64) for acquiring start information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A determination means (for example, main control device 110) that makes a determination based on the start information acquired by the acquisition means, and
An effect executing means (for example, a display control device 114) that causes an effect means (for example, a third symbol display device 81) to execute a predetermined effect (for example, a variation effect of the third symbol) based on a determination result by the determination means. In a gaming machine equipped with
A first effect executing means for executing a first effect (for example, a "music reproduction" effect) based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition (for example, a player's selection in the "music selection" effect).
Based on the fact that the second condition different from the first condition (for example, winning the lottery for the "promotion during the round" effect) is satisfied, the second effect is being executed during the execution of the first effect by the first effect execution means. A second effect execution means for executing an effect (for example, a "promotion during a round" effect),
A first effect determining means for determining the content of the first effect executed by the first effect executing means, and a first effect determining means.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a second effect determining means for determining the content of the second effect executed by the second effect executing means based on the determination result by the first effect determining means. E0.

According to the gaming machine E0, start information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a determination is made by the determination means based on the start information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the effect execution means executes a predetermined effect by the effect means. Here, based on the fact that the predetermined first condition is satisfied, the first effect is executed by the first effect executing means. Further, based on the fact that the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the second effect is executed by the second effect executing means during the execution of the first effect by the first effect executing means. Then, the content of the first effect executed by the first effect executing means is determined by the first effect determining means. Then, based on the determination result by the first effect determining means, the content of the second effect executed by the second effect executing means is determined by the second effect determining means. With this configuration, the content of the second effect is determined according to the content of the first effect in the first effect and the second effect, which are executed based on the establishment of different conditions. There is an effect that the 1st production and the 2nd production are related to each other to give a sense of unity to the production, and the player can enjoy the production without any discomfort.

In the gaming machine E0
The second staging determining means is
A related effect executing means for executing the content of the second effect executed by the second effect executing means in a mode related to the first effect based on the determination result by the first effect determining means. The gaming machine E1 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the content of the second effect executed by the second effect execution means by the related effect execution means provided in the second effect determination means based on the determination result by the first effect determination means becomes the first effect. Performed in a related manner. By configuring in this way, the unity of the staging is maintained by making the execution modes of the first staging and the second staging, which are executed based on the establishment of different conditions, related to each other, and the player. It has the effect that you can enjoy the production without any discomfort.

The "contents related to the first effect" are, for example, contents that make the same character as the character appearing in the first effect appear, contents that are associated with the first effect, and the same as the first effect. The contents of the mode (size, time, display color, etc.) of the above are exemplified.

In the gaming machine E0 or E1
The first production is
In a selection effect (for example, a "music selection" effect) in which a player is presented with a plurality of selection candidates and the player selects one of the selection candidates, a decision effect based on the selection candidate selected by the player is used. The gaming machine E2 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E0 or E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the selection effect of presenting a plurality of selection candidates to the player and causing the player to select one of the selection candidates, the decision effect based on the selection candidate selected by the player is regarded as the first effect. That is, when the second effect is executed when the decision effect in which the effect is selected by the player is executed, the second effect is executed in a manner related to the content of the determined effect being executed.

Conventionally, the first effect (that is, the decision effect) executed when the first condition is satisfied and the second effect executed when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied can be executed. Since the conditions are different, they may be displayed in a manner that is not related to each other. In such a case, in particular, if the player executes the second effect unrelated to the decision effect during the execution of the decision effect selected in the selection effect in which the player selects the effect content by his / her own will, the effect is produced. Due to the discrepancy in the contents, there is a risk that the contents of the production may be uncomfortable and the game may be overwhelmed.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine E2, when the player executes the second effect during the execution of the decision effect that can be selected by his / her own will, the content of the second effect is executed in a mode related to the decision effect. Can be done. As a result, for example, in the second effect in the situation where the player selects his / her favorite decision effect in the selection effect, the mode related to the decision effect is executed, so that the second effect is performed. I don't feel any discomfort regarding the content of the production. Therefore, by executing the second rendition that is related to the decision rendition selected by the player, the unity of the rendition can be maintained and the player can enjoy the rendition without discomfort. There is.

In the gaming machine E2
The second production is
The gaming machine E3, which is a game value increasing effect (for example, a “promotion during a round” effect) indicating that the game value given to the player is increased.

According to the gaming machine E3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2. That is, the game value increase effect indicating that the game value given to the player increases is referred to as the second effect. That is, when the player selects the first effect based on his / her own intention, the game value increase effect indicating that the game value given to the player increases is referred to as the first effect. It is configured to perform in a related manner.

Conventionally, the production mode of the game value increase effect is performed without considering the content of the decision effect selected by the player by his / her own will, so that there is a discrepancy between the content of the decision effect and the content of the game value increase effect. May occur. As a result, in the situation where the player selects his / her favorite decision effect by his / her own will, the game value increase effect that is not related to the favorite decision effect is executed, and the player feels a sense of discomfort in the effect content. It may end up. Then, the player feels a sense of loss that he wants the player to execute (bless) the game value increase effect that creates an important interest for the game by the content related to the decision effect selected by himself, and awakens the game. There is a risk that it will end up.

Therefore, the content of the game value increase effect is configured to be executed in a mode related to the decision effect currently being executed. Therefore, the player does not feel any discomfort with respect to the content of the effect by executing the game value increase effect in a mode related to the decision effect in the decision effect of his / her own will. As a result, by executing the game value increase effect in a manner related to the decision effect selected by oneself, it is possible to obtain a further interest different from the interest in which the game value increases while maintaining the unity of the effect. , Has the effect.

In any of the gaming machines E0 to E3
The first production is
A predetermined first predetermined effect (for example, "music AAA") and
A first specific effect (for example, "musical piece BBB") different from the first predetermined effect is provided.
The second production is
A second predetermined effect related to the first predetermined effect (for example, an image using character 1) and
Unlike the second predetermined effect, the second specific effect related to the first specific effect (for example, an image using character 2) and
Unlike the second predetermined effect and the second specific effect, the first predetermined effect and a second special effect (for example, an all-cast image) related to the first specific effect are provided.
The second staging execution means is
A second effect selection means (for example, promotion effect lottery counter 223n) for selecting one effect from the second predetermined effect, the second specific effect, or the second special effect is provided.
The related effect execution means is
When it is determined that the first effect executed by the first effect determination means and the second effect selected by the second effect selection means are not related, the second effect is the second effect. The gaming machine E4 characterized by being provided with a special effect executing means for executing a special effect.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines E0 to E3, the following effects are played. That is, as the first effect, a predetermined first predetermined effect and a first specific effect different from the first predetermined effect are provided. Further, as the second effect, a second predetermined effect related to the first predetermined effect, a second specific effect related to the first specific effect, and a second predetermined effect and a second specific effect different from the second predetermined effect. Unlike the staging, a first predetermined staging and a second special staging related to the first specific staging are provided. Then, one effect is selected from the second predetermined effect, the second specific effect, or the second special effect by the second effect selection means provided in the second effect execution means. Here, when the first effect executed by the first effect determination means and the second effect selected by the second effect selection means are not related to each other by the special effect execution means provided in the related effect execution means. As the second effect, the second special effect is executed. That is, when the selected second effect is not related to the first effect being executed, specifically, when the second specific effect is selected when the first predetermined effect is executed, or when the first effect is executed. When the second predetermined effect is selected when the specific effect is executed, the second special effect associated with any of the first effects is executed as the second effect. As a result, since the second special effect is an effect related to any of the first predetermined effects, the player prefers the second effect in the situation where the player selects the favorite first effect by his / her own will. By executing the second special effect related to the first effect, there is no sense of discomfort regarding the content of the effect. As a result, by executing the second production related to the first production selected by oneself, there is an effect that the unity of the production can be maintained and the player can enjoy the production without discomfort.

In the gaming machine E4
The second staging selection means is
The gaming machine E5, characterized in that it is difficult to select the second special effect from the second predetermined effect or the second specific effect.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second special effect is more difficult to select than the second predetermined effect or the second specific effect by the second effect selection means. That is, originally, the second special effect has a lower selection rate than the second predetermined effect or the second specific effect, and is positioned as a rare effect. Therefore, the player is configured to feel a certain premier feeling (profitable feeling) only by the appearance of the second special effect. Then, according to the gaming machine E4, when the player selects the first effect by his / her own will, and the second effect once selected is not related to the first effect being executed, there is a rarity. At the same time, the second special effect related to the first effect can be executed. Therefore, in a situation where the player selects his / her favorite first production, by increasing the appearance ratio of the rare second special production, the player voluntarily performs the first production. There is an effect that the selection can set a higher probability of appearance of the second special effect. In addition, if the player selects the first effect on his / her own will, it is possible to give the player a premier feeling (profitable feeling) that the second special effect is easier to appear, and the player has a game value. It has the effect of being able to obtain further interests that are different from the rising interests. Furthermore, by making it easier for the player to select the second special effect, which is rare, if the player selects the first effect on his / her own will, the player is encouraged to select the first effect on his / her own will. This has the effect of increasing the participation rate of players in the first production.

In the gaming machine E4 or E5
The gaming machine E6 is characterized in that the type of the second effect is less than the type of the first effect.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4 or E5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of types of the second effect is smaller than that of the type of the first effect. In order to give variation to the second production, for example, if the second production is prepared so as to correspond to the first production, the number of the second production increases, and the development man-hours related to the production creation at the time of development increase. The development cost increases, and the second effect for each type of the first effect must be stored, which may cause the ROM capacity to become tight. Therefore, by configuring the type of the second effect with a smaller number than the type of the first effect, there is an effect that the development man-hours can be reduced and the increase in the ROM capacity can be prevented.

Further, even if the type of the second effect is configured with a smaller number than the type of the first effect, if the selected second effect is not related to the first effect being executed, any first effect is used as the second effect. It is configured so that the second special effect related to the above can be executed. As a result, even if the type of the second effect is configured to be smaller than the type of the first effect, the second effect related to the first effect selected by oneself can be executed, the unity of the effect is maintained, and the player It has the effect that you can enjoy the production without any discomfort.

In the gaming machine E6
The gaming machine E7 is characterized in that the second effect is configured with an execution time shorter than the execution time of the first effect.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second effect is configured with an execution time shorter than the execution time of the first effect. That is, if the selected second effect is not related to the first effect being executed while suppressing the variation of the second effect that is executed less frequently than the first effect, it is related to any first effect as the second effect. It is configured so that the second special effect that is being performed can be executed. As a result, even if the type of the second effect is configured to be smaller than the type of the first effect, the second effect related to the first effect selected by oneself can be executed, the unity of the effect is maintained, and the player There is an effect that the development man-hours can be reduced and the ROM capacity can be prevented from increasing while being able to enjoy the production without discomfort.

<Group F: Change the content of the later production depending on whether or not the player's intention is reflected in the selection production>
An acquisition means (for example, the first ball entry port 64) for acquiring start information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A determination means (for example, main control device 110) that makes a determination based on the start information acquired by the acquisition means, and
An effect executing means (for example, a display control device 114) that causes an effect means (for example, a third symbol display device 81) to execute a predetermined effect (for example, a variation effect of the third symbol) based on a determination result by the determination means. In a gaming machine equipped with
In the effect means, a selection effect execution means (for example, a selection effect execution means) for presenting a plurality of selection candidates to a player and causing the player to select one of the selection candidates (for example, a “music selection” effect). Selected music memory 233j) and
An operating means that can be operated by the player (for example, the enter button 22a or the change button 22b) and
An operation reception setting means (for example, a button valid timer 223d) for setting an acceptable period during which the operation of the operation means can be accepted during the execution of the selection effect, and
A selection determination means (for example, generation of a determination command based on a pressing operation of the determination button 22a) for determining one of the selection candidates presented to the player in the selection effect.
A decision effect executing means (for example, a display determination music memory 233k) that executes a determination effect (for example, a “music reproduction” effect) corresponding to the selection candidate determined by the selection determination means.
During the acceptable period set by the operation reception setting means, the operation determination means (for example, the intention selection flag 223i) for determining the operation state of the operation means and the operation reception flag 223i.
A second effect selection means (for example, promotion effect setting process (S1511)) for selecting a second effect to be executed during execution of the determination effect based on the determination result of the operation determination means during the period is provided. A game machine F0 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine F0, start information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a determination is made by the determination means based on the start information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the effect execution means executes a predetermined effect by the effect means. Here, in the staging means, a selection staging in which a plurality of selection candidates are presented to the player and the player is made to select one of the selection candidates is executed by the selection staging execution means. Further, the operation means is configured to be operable by the player, and the acceptable period during which the operation of the operation means can be accepted during the execution of the selection effect is set by the operation reception setting means. Then, the selection determination means determines one selection candidate from the plurality of selection candidates presented to the player in the selection effect. Then, the decision effect corresponding to the selection candidate determined by the selection determination means or the period end determination means is executed by the determination effect execution means. Here, the operation determination means during the period determines the operation state of the operation means during the acceptable period set by the operation reception setting means. Then, based on the determination result of the operation determination means during the period, the second effect selection means selects the second effect to be executed during the execution of the determination effect. As a result, it corresponds to the selection candidate depending on whether or not the operation means is operated in the selection effect, that is, whether or not the operation means is operated by the player and the selection candidate is selected based on the player's intention. There is an effect that the second effect, which is an effect to be executed during the execution of the decision effect to be performed, can be selected, and the effect based on the player's intention can be executed on the gaming machine.

In the gaming machine F0
The second staging selection means is
When the operation determination means determines that the operation means has been operated during the acceptable period, the related effect of selecting the second effect of the aspect related to the determination effect corresponding to the selection candidate. The gaming machine F1 is provided with a selection means (for example, S1603: Yes of promotion effect setting process).

According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when it is determined by the operation determination means during the period that the operation means has been operated during the acceptable period, the related effect selection means provided in the second effect selection means is associated with the decision effect corresponding to the selection candidate. The second effect of the aspect to be performed is selected.

Conventionally, in the selection effect, one selection candidate can be selected from a plurality of selection candidates according to the player's intention, so that the player can make a favorite decision selected by the player in the subsequent effect. The game can be played by directing, and it is configured to enhance the interest of the game. Further, also in the second effect executed during the execution of the decision effect, a plurality of effect patterns are provided to give variation to the effect so that the game is not monotonous.

However, if the selection of the second effect is performed without considering the decision effect selected by the player, there may be a discrepancy between the content of the decision effect and the content of the second effect. In a situation where the player selects his / her favorite decision effect by his / her own will, the second effect that is not related to the content of the favorite decision effect is executed, and the player feels a sense of discomfort in the effect content. In some cases. Then, there is a possibility that the player may feel a sense of loss that he / she wants the second effect to be executed by the effect related to the decision effect selected by himself / herself.

Therefore, it corresponds to the selection candidate depending on whether or not the operation means is operated in the selection effect, that is, whether or not the operation means is operated by the player and the selection candidate is selected based on the player's intention. By configuring the second effect to be executed in a manner related to the decision effect to be performed, the decision effect being executed and the second effect are related, the unity of the effect is maintained, and the player feels uncomfortable. There is an effect that you can enjoy the production without any problems.

In the gaming machine F0 or F1
The second staging selection means is
A second staging lottery means (for example, a promotion staging lottery counter 223n) for drawing the mode of the second staging, and
When the operation determination means determines that the operation means is not operated during the acceptable period, the lottery result selection for selecting the second effect based on the lottery result by the second effect lottery means. A gaming machine F2 comprising means (for example, S1603: No of promotion effect setting process).

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F0 or F1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the mode of the second effect is drawn by the second effect lottery means provided in the second effect selection means. Then, when it is determined by the operation determination means during the period that the operation means is not operated during the acceptable period, the second effect is selected by the lottery result selection means based on the lottery result by the second effect lottery means. To. As a result, when the player does not select the effect based on his / her own intention in the selection effect, even if the content of the decision effect being executed and the content of the second effect do not match, the player can make a special case. , I don't feel any discomfort. Therefore, if the player's intention is not reflected in the selection effect, the second effect selected by lottery is executed as it is, the randomness of the second effect is maintained, and the variation of the effect is enriched. It has the effect of enhancing the interest.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F2
The operating means
A change operation means (for example, a change button 22b) for changing the selected selection candidate to another selection candidate by being operated by the player during the execution of the selection effect is provided.
The operation determining means during the period
The gaming machine F3 is provided with a change operation determination means (for example, S1712: Yes of frame button input monitoring / effect processing) for determining whether or not the change operation means has been operated during the acceptable period. ..

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines F0 to F2, the following effects are played. That is, the selected selection candidate is changed to another selection candidate by being operated by the player during the execution of the selection effect by the change operation means provided in the operation means. Then, whether or not the change operation means has been operated during the acceptable period is determined by the change operation determination means provided in the operation determination means during the period. As a result, the act of changing the selection candidate selected in the selection effect is regarded as an act that reflects the player's intention, and is executed in the second effect in a manner related to the decision effect corresponding to the selected selection candidate. By configuring it so as to do so, there is an effect that the decision effect and the second effect are related, the unity of the effect is maintained, and the player can enjoy the effect without discomfort.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F3
The operating means
A determination operation means (for example, a determination button 22a) for determining the selected selection candidate by being operated by the player during the execution of the selection effect is provided.
The operation determining means during the period
The gaming machine F4 is provided with a determination operation determination means (for example, S1708: Yes of frame button input monitoring / effect processing) for determining whether or not the determination operation means has been operated during the acceptable period. ..

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines F0 to F3, the following effects are played. That is, the decision operation means provided in the operation means is operated by the player during the execution of the selection effect, so that the selected selection candidate is determined. Then, it is determined whether or not the determination operation means has been operated during the acceptable period by the determination operation determination means provided in the operation determination means during the period. As a result, the act of determining the selection candidate selected in the selection effect itself is regarded as an act that reflects the player's intention, and is executed in the second effect in a manner related to the decision effect corresponding to the selected selection candidate. By configuring it so as to do so, there is an effect that the decision effect and the second effect are related, the unity of the effect is maintained, and the player can enjoy the effect without discomfort.

In the gaming machine F4
When the special result appears in the predetermined effect, the special result selection execution means for executing the selection effect (for example, the "music selection" effect in the first round of the "15R probability variation jackpot").
A selection determination storage means (for example, a music selection counter 223 g) for storing the selection candidate determined in the selection effect executed by the special result selection execution means, and a music selection counter 223 g.
When the special result of 1 appears, a continuous special result determination means (for example, a consecutive villa counter 223o) for determining whether or not a new special result appears within a predetermined period, and
When it is determined by the continuous special result determining means that a new special result has appeared within the predetermined period, it is stored in the selection determination storage means in the selection effect based on the appearance of the new special result. The previous candidate selection display means for displaying the selected candidate in a preselected state is provided.
The determination operation determination means
The continuous special result determining means causes the new special result to appear within the predetermined period, and in the selection effect based on the special result, the selection stored in the selection determination storage means by the previous candidate selection display means. The gaming machine F5, characterized in that it is determined whether or not the determination operating means has been operated while the candidates are displayed.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a special result appears in a predetermined effect, the selection effect is executed by the special result selection execution means. Then, in the selection effect executed by the special result selection execution means, the selection candidates determined by the selection determination storage means are stored. Further, when one special result appears by the continuous special result determination means, it is determined whether or not a new special result appears within a predetermined period. Then, when it is determined by the continuous special result determining means that a new special result has appeared within a predetermined period, the selection decision is made in the selection effect based on the appearance of the new special result by the previous candidate selection display means. The selection candidates stored in the storage means are displayed in a preselected state. Here, a new special result appears within a predetermined period by the continuous special result discriminating means, and in the selection effect based on the special result, it is stored in the selection decision storage means by the decision operation discriminating means and the previous candidate selection display means. With the selected candidate displayed, it is determined whether or not the determination operation means has been operated. That is, when the selection candidate selected in the selection effect in the previous special result is selected in the initial state in the selection effect in the new special result in the selection effect within a predetermined period after the special result of 1 appears. In addition, when the determination operation means is operated by the player, it is considered that the selection candidate has been selected based on the player's intention, and the content of the second effect is executed in a mode related to the selected selection candidate.

Conventionally, when a selection candidate selected in the selection effect in the special result of 1 is stored and then a new special result appears, in the selection effect in the new special result, the selection effect in the previous special result is used. The selection candidates selected in are configured to be displayed in the selected state in the initial state. With this configuration, when the player wants to reselect the selection candidate selected in the selection effect in the previous special result in the selection effect in the new special result, the player decides the operation without operating the change operation means. It is possible to select the means only by operating it once. Therefore, in the selection effect, the player is configured to be able to select a selection candidate according to his / her preference without performing complicated operations.

However, after one player wins the special result, the game is stopped, and then another player starts the game on the game machine, so that the player can obtain the special result of 1 and the new special result. May be different. In such a case, even if the decision operation means is operated without operating the change operation means in the selection effect in the special result of 1, since the players are different, there is a possibility of the player's operation error. Cannot be excluded, and it cannot always be said that the player has selected the selection candidate by his / her own will. On the other hand, in the appearance of a new special result within a predetermined period from the appearance of the special result of 1, the player of 1 may continue to play the game.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine F5, in the selection effect in the appearance of a new special result within a predetermined period from the appearance of the special result of 1, even if only the operation to the determination operation means is performed, the same player is used. Relevance between the selection effect and the second effect by assuming that the intention selection is clearly shown and configuring the second effect to be executed in a manner related to the decision effect corresponding to the selected selection candidate. It has the effect of maintaining the uniformity of the production and allowing the player to enjoy the production without any discomfort.

In the gaming machine F4 or F5
A predetermined normal gaming state (for example, "normal gaming state") and
It has an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "probability fluctuation state") that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.
When the special result appears in the predetermined effect, the special result selection execution means for executing the selection effect (for example, the first round "music selection" effect in the "15R probability variation jackpot") and
In the selection effect executed by the special result selection execution means, the selection candidate initial display means (for example, "music selection" at the time of a big hit of "first time" is displayed as an initial state in which a predetermined selection candidate is selected. "Displayed with the music AAA icon 81a1 selected and displayed in the production).
The determination operation determination means
Whether the determination operation means was operated while the special result appeared in the normal gaming state and the predetermined selection candidate by the selection candidate initial display means was displayed in the selection effect based on the special result. A gaming machine F6 characterized by determining whether or not it is.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F4 or F5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a predetermined normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state are provided in the gaming machine, and a special result appears in the predetermined effect by the special result selection execution means. , The selection effect is executed. Then, in the selection effect executed by the special result selection execution means, the state in which a predetermined selection candidate is selected by the selection candidate initial display means is displayed as the initial setting. Then, a special result appears in the normal game state, and in the selection effect based on the special result, the decision operation means operates while the predetermined selection candidate by the selection candidate initial display means is displayed by the decision operation determination means. It is determined whether or not it has been done. That is, when the selection candidate in the initial state is selected in the selection effect in the special result that appears in the normal game state, and the determination operation means is operated by the player, the selection candidate is based on the player's intention. Is considered to have been selected, and the second effect is executed in a manner related to the selected selection candidate. That is, when a special result appears in the normal gaming state and the selection candidate selected in the initial state matches the player's preference in the selection effect in the special result, the player operates the change operation means. It is assumed that the determination operation means is operated without doing so. Therefore, by configuring it like the gaming machine F6, a special result appears in the normal gaming state, and in the selection effect in the special result, the player's intention selection is clear even if only the operation to the determination operation means is performed. By configuring the second effect to be executed with the effect related to the selected selection candidate, it is possible to combine the selection effect and the second effect without causing the player to perform complicated operations. It has the effect of making the production relevant, maintaining the unity of the production, and allowing the player to enjoy the production without any discomfort.

In the game machine F6
The selection candidate is
The first choice candidate with the predetermined support (popularity) from the player,
The second selection candidate having the support (popularity) from the player from the first selection candidate is provided.
The selection candidate initial display means is
The gaming machine F7, wherein the state in which the second selection candidate is selected is set as the initial state.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a first selection candidate having a predetermined support (popularity) from the player and a second selection candidate having support (popularity) from the player from the first selection candidate are provided as selection candidates. Then, the state in which the second selection candidate is selected by the selection candidate initial display means is set as the initial state. As a result, the second selection candidate, which is highly supported (popular) by the player in the selection effect, is displayed in the selected state in the initial state, so that the player selects the second selection candidate when he / she wants to select the second selection candidate. There is an effect that selection candidates can be selected based on one's own intention only by operating the determination operation means in the production. Further, by configuring the second effect to be executed in a mode related to the selected second selection candidate, the decision effect corresponding to the second selection candidate and the second effect can be performed without causing the player to perform complicated operations. It has the effect of making the production relevant, maintaining the unity of the production, and allowing the player to enjoy the production without any discomfort.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F7
The selection effect execution means is
The gaming machine F8 is provided with a selection candidate increasing means for increasing the number of selection candidates presented to the player in the selection effect when the special result in the predetermined effect is continuously generated. ..

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines F0 to F7, the following effects are played. That is, when the special result in the predetermined effect is continuously generated, the number of selection candidates presented to the player in the selection effect is increased by the selection candidate increasing means provided in the selection effect execution means. As a result, when special results occur continuously, it is possible to increase the selection candidates that the player can select, create playability by continuing the continuity of the special results, and enhance the interest of the game. There is an effect.

In addition, "when special results occur continuously" means, for example, when a transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player is made based on the special result of 1, until the advantageous gaming state ends. When a special result appears, when one special result appears within a predetermined time, or when the next special result appears, or when one special result is followed by the next special result. The case of doing so is exemplified.

It should be noted that the configuration limited to any one of the above-mentioned gaming machines A0 to A12 is applied to any one of the above-mentioned gaming machines B0 to B15, C0 to C14, D0 to D6, E0 to E7, and F0 to F8. You may. Further, to any one of the above-mentioned gaming machines B0 to B15, the configuration limited to any one of the above-mentioned gaming machines A0 to A12, C0 to C14, D0 to D6, E0 to E7, and F0 to F8 is applied. You may. Further, to any one of the above-mentioned gaming machines C0 to C14, the configuration limited to any one of the above-mentioned gaming machines A0 to A12, B0 to B15, D0 to D6, E0 to E7, and F0 to F8 is applied. You may. Further, to any one of the above-mentioned gaming machines D0 to D6, a configuration limited to any one of the above-mentioned gaming machines A0 to A12, B0 to B15, C0 to C14, E0 to E7, and F0 to F8 is applied. You may. Further, to any one of the above-mentioned gaming machines E0 to E7, a configuration limited to any one of the above-mentioned gaming machines A0 to A12, B0 to B15, C0 to C14, D0 to D6, and F0 to F8 is applied. You may. Further, to any one of the above-mentioned gaming machines F0 to F8, a configuration limited to any one of the above-mentioned gaming machines A0 to A12, B0 to B15, C0 to C14, D0 to D6, and E0 to E7 is applied. You may. In these cases, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

Among the gaming machines A0 to A12, B0 to B15, C0 to C14, D0 to D6, E0 to E7, and F0 to F8, the gaming machine G1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine G2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines A0 to A12, B0 to B15, C0 to C14, D0 to D6, E0 to E7, and F0 to F8. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. The identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time, provided that the prize is won (or passed through the operating port). Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (large winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A12, B0 to B15, C0 to C14, D0 to D6, E0 to E7, and F0 to F8, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. The featured gaming machine G3. Among them, as the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

It should be noted that the "ball entry" into the "first ball entry port 64" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "predetermined starting condition" in the claims, and the "counters C1 to C3" described in the above embodiment. The "value of CS1" corresponds to the "information" acquired by the "acquisition means" in the claims, and the "third symbol" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "identification information" described in the claims. However, the "variation effect" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "dynamic display of identification information" described in the claims, and the "big hit symbol" described in the above embodiment is described in the claims. Corresponding to the "predetermined identification information", the "big hit" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "predetermined gaming value" described in the claims.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
22a Enter button (part of operation means)
22b Change button (part of operation means)
64 First entrance (part of acquisition means)
81 Third symbol display device (part of the directing means)
110 Main controller (part of the first control means)
113 Voice lamp control device (part of the first control means, part of the second control means)
114 Display control device (part of the second control means)
231 MPU (part of the production execution means)
S2202 (part of the main priority)
S2207 (part of auxiliary reservation means)

Claims (1)

The first control means for controlling the game,
A second control means that performs control based on an instruction from the first control means,
In a gaming machine provided with an effect executing means for causing the effect means to execute a predetermined display based on the control by the second control means.
The first control means is
A first instruction generating means for generating a first instruction information which is a kind of instruction information regarding the predetermined display executed by the effect means by the first process regarding the predetermined display of the effect means.
A second instruction generating means for generating a second instruction information which is a kind of instruction information regarding the predetermined display of the staging means by a second process different from the first process.
A transmission means for transmitting the instruction information to the second control means is provided.
The second control means is
When the second instruction information is received in a specific period which is a part of the predetermined display, a state in which the display content displayed by the second instruction information is not reflected in the predetermined display is generated. State generation means and
A first executing means that executes display control based on the first instruction information even in the specific state when the first instruction information is received in the specific state by the state generating means.
A second execution means capable of executing display control corresponding to the second instruction information when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied after the start of control based on the first instruction information by the first execution means.
When a plurality of the first instruction information is received in a predetermined period, display control based on the first instruction information of 1 is executed according to a predetermined execution rule among the plurality of the first instruction information received in the predetermined period. A gaming machine characterized by having a third execution means.

Images